PDF Panasonic DBS 40 72 96 Installation
DBS 40-72-96 installation DBS 40-72-96 installation
User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 790
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
,-:
lssuel,Janua~y
1990
Digital Business System
=- 5YSlEt-l DIAL
oEXTEN!ilON
O- GUIDRNCE
a- l-lFUNCTIUN
-0
-0
-0
-0
I’
/
/-
PANASOh
Panasonic @
IBS
Installation
4ogramming
Guidance
ndum to the
gramming
Instructions
Forms
tions for CPC-B Issue 1
ndums to the Operating
ens for CPC-B Issue 2
hi&n’s
Notes
q mmmm
q mmmm
q mmmm
q mmmm
q mmmm
qmmmm
qmmmm
!
Section 300
Contents
About This Manual
Purpose.. ....................................................................................................................................
Related Documents ...................................................................................................................
ix
ix
Chapter 1. Requirements
Model Numbers and FCC Information ...................................................................................
Environmental Requirements .................................................................................................
Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................
l-3
1-3
1-5
Chapter 2. System Overview
Cabinet Description ................................................................................................................
Configurations ........................................................................................................................
Printed Circuit Cards ..............................................................................................................
Processor Description .............................................................................................................
2-3
2-5
2-5
2-X
Chapter 3. Cabinet Installation
Wall-Mounting the Cabinet.. ..................................................................................................
Grounding. ..............................................................................................................................
Card installation.. ....................................................................................................................
Battery Backup .......................................................................................................................
Guidelines .........................................................................................................................
installation for the DBS 40.. ...........................................................................................
Installation for the DBS 72 and 96 .................................................................................
Key Phone Wall Mounting ...................................................................................................
DSLT Wall Mounting.. .........................................................................................................
System Initialization .............................................................................................................
Test Phone.. ...........................................................................................................................
III
3-3
3-5
3-6
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-13
3-16
3-19
3-20
Chapter 4. Trunks and Lines
Trunks .....................................................................................................................................
4-3
Trunk Connectors .............................................................................................................
4-3
Trunk Connector Pinouts ......... ..-..........--.........................................~~...........~..~~........___.._ . 4-4
Loop-Start Trunks -.....---.........-..-..-......-.................-..-.........~....~............................_..__..._ .... 4-6
Ground Start and DID Trunks ..........................................................................................
4-6
Tl Interface .......................................................................................................................
4-9
Guidelines ...................................................................................................................
4-9
Hardware Requirements .........................................................................................
4-9
4-10
Maximums ............................................................................................................
Trunk Assignments for Single-Cabinet Systems.. ................................................
4- 1 1
Trunk Assignments for Double-Cabinet Systems ................................................
4- 13
Installation ................................................................................................................
4-18
Installing a Tl in a Single Cabinet ........................................................................
4-18
Installing Tl in a Double Cabinet with the Tl in the Slave ................................. 4-25
Installing Tl in a Double Cabinet with Tls in the Master and Slave.. ............. __.. 4-27
Lines.. ....................................................................................................................................
4-29
Extension Connectors .....................................................................................................
4-29
. 4-30
Extension Connector Pinouts .. ..-.............-................................................................~~...~
Analog Extensions.. ........................................................................................................
4-34
Digital Extensions.. .........................................................................................................
4-37
4-37
DSSl72 ............................................................................................................................
4-39
EM/24 .............................................................................................................................
Trunk and Line Expansion ..............................................................................................
4-41
Chapter 5. Peripheral Equipment
Local PCAS Terminal or SMDR Device ................................................................................
Remote Administration Interface (RAI) .................................................................................
.......................................................................................
Background Music/Music-On-Hold
...............................................................................................
Off-Premises Adaptor (OPX)
Guidelines .......................................................................................................................
Installation ......................................................................................................................
Installing an OPX Station Without Going Through a Central Office.. .....................
Installing an OPX Station Through a Central Office.. ..............................................
Paging ...................................................................................................................................
External Ringer (UNA Device) ............................................................................................
Power Failure Transfer .........................................................................................................
Voice Announce Unit (VAU). ..............................................................................................
Door Box Adaptor ................................................................................................................
iv
5-3
5-6
5-8
5-10
5-10
5-l 1
5-l 1
5-12
5-14
5-16
5-18
5-21
5-25
i
‘j
List of Figures
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
2-3
2- 1. The DBS cabinet (DBS 96 shown). ..................................................................
2-4
2-2. Trunk, line, and peripheral connections.. ..........................................................
2-8
2-3. Slot labels for printed circuit packages.. ...........................................................
3-3
3- 1. Cover removal.. .................................................................................................
3-4
3-2. Cabinet mounting bracket.. ...............................................................................
3-4
3-3. Cabinet wall-mounting .....................................................................................
3-5
3-4. Cabinet ground screw .......................................................................................
3-6
3-5. SCC-B Switch 4.. ..............................................................................................
3-7
3-6. CPC Strap S 1 ....................................................................................................
3-8
3-7. Printed circuit card installation.. .......................................................................
3-10
3-8. Battery location, DBS 40.. ..............................................................................
3-l 1
3-9. Battery tray, DBS 72 and 96.. .........................................................................
3- 12
3- 10. Battery pack connection, DBS 72 and 96.. .....................................................
3- 13
3- 1 1. Wall-mount adaptor removal ..........................................................................
3-14
3-12. Wall-mount adaptor removal ..........................................................................
3-15
3- 13. Handset guide insertion for wall-mounting, key phone ..................................
3-l 6
3- 14. Desk stand removal for DSLT wall mounting.. ..............................................
3-17
3-15. Desk stand attachment for DSLT wall mounting ...........................................
3- 18
3- 16. Handset guide insertion for wall-mounting, DSLT ........................................
3-19
3-17. CPC memory clear switch ..............................................................................
3-2 1
3- 18. Test telephone connection ..............................................................................
4-3
4- 1. DBS trunk connections .....................................................................................
4-8
4-2. -48Vpower supply installation.. ........................................................................
4- 19
4-3. Connector 4 (CN4) strapping, Sync Unit.. ......................................................
4-20
4-4. Tl Sync Unit installation.. ..............................................................................
4-2 1
4-5. Tl MDF card installation.. ..............................................................................
4-22
4-6. Sync Unit and Tl connection, single-cabinet installation ..............................
4-23
4-7. RI48 pinouts, CNl connector .........................................................................
4-24
4-8. Tl cabinet connections, single-cabinet installation ........................................
4-26
4-9. Sync cable connections, double-cabinet with a Tl in the slave.. ....................
..
4-28
4- 10. Clock sync cable and sync cable connections, double-cabinet installation..
4-29
4-l 1. DBS extension connections.. ..........................................................................
4-35
.............................................................................
4- 12. SLT ringer box installation
4-36
4-13. EM1 filter installation (DBS 40 only) .............................................................
4-38
4-14. DSS/72 connection .........................................................................................
....................... 4-40
4- 15. EM/24 connection .....................................................................
4-42
4- 16. Trunk or extension expansion. ........................................................................
vii
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
5- 1. RS-232C connection, 25-pin to 25-pin . . . .. ... . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. ... .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . 5-4
5-2. RS-232C connection, 25-pin to 9-pin ...............................................................
5-5
5-3. RAI connection .................................................................................................
5-7
5-4. Installation of music-on-hold and background music.. .....................................
5-9
5-5. Cable punch-out plate, OPX Adaptor .............................................................
5-11
5-6. OPX installation ..............................................................................................
5-13
5-7. External paging installation ............................................................................
5-15
5-8. External ringer (UNA device) installation ......................................................
5-17
5-9. Cable punch-out plate, Power Failure Unit ....................................................
5- 19
5- 10 Power Failure Unit (PFU) installation ............................................................
5-20
5- 11. Cable punch-out plate, Voice Announce Unit.. ..............................................
5-23
5- 12. Extension cord connection to the VAU ..........................................................
5-24
5- 13. Voice Announce Unit (VAU) installation ......................................................
5-24
5- 14. Cable punch-out plate, Door Box Adaptor .....................................................
5-26
5- 15. Installation of the door box, door opener, and door sensor ............................
5-27
6- 1. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, DBS 40 + DBS 40 ...................................
6-4
6-5
6-2. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, DBS 72 + DBS 40.. .................................
6-3. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, DBS 72 + DBS 72 ...................................
6-6
6-7
6-4. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, DBS 96 + DBS 40.. .................................
6-8
6-5. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, .DBS 96 + DBS 72 ...................................
6-9
6-6. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, DBS 96 to DBS 96.. ................................
6-10
6-7. Strap 3, MFR card ...........................................................................................
6-11
6-8. Double-cabinet installation .............................................................................
6- 11
6-9. CBL-S to Connector Panel connection, slave cabinet.. ..................................
...
VIII
(’
List of Tables
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
l-l.
1-2.
2- 1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
3-l.
4- 1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4- 10.
4- 11.
4- 12.
4- 13.
4-14.
4- 15.
4- 16.
4- 17.
4-1X.
4- 19.
4-20.
4-2 1.
4-22.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
6- 1.
6-2.
7- 1.
7-2.
DBS model numbers.. .......................................................................................
l-3
FCC information ...............................................................................................
l-3
Trunk and extension capacities according to system size .................................
2-5
Printed circuit card descriptions and maximums ..............................................
2-6
Printed circuit package slot usage .....................................................................
2-7
CPC/SCC features .............................................................................................
2-8
Battery backup packages for the DBS 40, 72, and 96 ......................................
3-9
Main trunks and expansion trunks provided with each system type.. .............. 4-4
4-5
Pinouts and trunk numbers for the main trunk connector.. ...............................
Pinouts and trunk numbers for trunk expansion connector CN 1...................... 4-5
-48V current consumption for ground-start and DID trunks ............................ 4-7
-48V power supplies tested with the DBS ........................................................
4-7
Tl Hardware requirements for single-cabinet systems ..................................... 4-9
4-9
T 1 Hardware requirements for double-cabinet systems ...................................
Tl slot usage for two-cabinet systems.. ..........................................................
4- 10
Tl and analog trunk assignments, DBS 40 .....................................................
4-l 1
Tl and analog trunk assignments, DBS 72 .....................................................
4-12
4- 12
Tl and analog trunk assignments, DBS 96 .....................................................
Maximum Tl assignments for two-cabinet systems.. .....................................
4-13
Tl and analog trunk assignments, DBS 40 + 40 .......................... I.. ............... 4- 13
Tl and analog trunk assignments, DBS 72 + DBS 72 ..................................
4-14
Tl and analog trunk assignments, DBS 96 + DBS 40 ..................................
4- 15
Tl and analog trunk assignments, DBS 96 + DBS 72 ..................................
4- 16
Tl and analog trunk assignments, DBS 96 + DBS 96 ..................................
4-17
Switch settings for SW1 on the Tl card.. .......................................................
4-22
4-30
Extension ports provided with .each system ...................................................
Pinouts and color codes for extension connector 12.. .....................................
4-31
Pinouts and color codes for extension connector 13 ....................................... 4-32
Pinouts and color codes for extension connector 14 ....................................... 4-33
RS-232C pin designations used for CN6 ..........................................................
5-3
RAI compatibility .............................................................................................
5-6
SCC variable resistors .......................................................................................
5-9
Maximum distances for direct connection to OPX stations ........................... 5- 10
Maximum distances for OPX Adaptor installation .........................................
5- 11
5-21
Switch settings for SW 1, VAU .......................................................................
Switch settings for DTMF detection timing, VAU .........................................
5-22
Switch settings for wait timing between dialed digits, VAU .........................
5-22
Switch settings for abbreviated dialing digit length, VAU. ............................. 5-22
Trunk and extension port maximums for two-cabinet systems ........................ 6-3
CBL-M switch settings ....................................................................................
6-12
7-3
Lnput power .......................................................................................................
7-3
Power consumption and heat generation ..........................................................
ix
.
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
7-3.
7-4.
7-5.
7-6.
7-7.
7-8.
7-9.
7-10.
7- 11.
7- 12.
7-13.
7- 14.
7-15.
7-16.
7-17.
7- 18.
7-3
Battery backup capacity.. ..................................................................................
7-4
Temperature and humidity requirements ..........................................................
7-4
Dimensions and weight, single-cabinet systems and phones ............................
7-4
Dimensions for two-cabinet systems ................................................................
7-5
Trunk and line capacities ..................................................................................
7-5
Feature capacities ...............................................................................................
7-7
Hardware maximums for single-cabinet systems ..............................................
Hardware maximurns for double-cabinet systems ......................................... .7- 10
7-13
Maximum cabling distances ...........................................................................
7-14
Voice path from KTJZLs to DBS .....................................................................
7-14
Data communications ports ............................................................................
7- 15
Signaling to CO ..............................................................................................
7-15
...............................................................................................
Signaling levels
7-15
Transmission specifications .............................................................................
T-16
Tone Plan .........................................................................................................
7-17
DTMF frequencies ..........................................................................................
X
About This Manual
Purpose
This manual provides installation instructions for the Digital Business System (DBS).
The following table summarizes the purpose of each chapter.
Purpose
Title
Chapter
NO.
1
Requirements
Includes DBS model numbers and FCC information that may
be required during installation. In addition, environmental
requirements are included to ensure proper operation.
2
System Overview
Provides an overview of the DBS. The overview includes
descriptions of the cabinet, system configurations, printed
circuit cards, and the call processor_
3
Cabinet Installation
Explains how to install and power up the cabinet. Before you
begin installation, be sure to read the “Requirements” chapter.
Trunks and Lines
Describes trunk and line installation. See the “Peripheral
Equipment” chapter for instructions on connecting peripheral
equipment through mnks or lines.
I
4
Describes peripheral equipment installation. Some peripheral
equipment also requires trunk and/or line interfaces (door
phones or power failure units, for example). For information
on trunk and line connections, see Chapter Chapter 4..
Explains installation
Contains frequently
procedures for two-cabinet
systems.
referenced DBS specifications.
Related Documents
For instructions
on DBS programming,
For detailed descriptions
see Programming Guidance (Section 400).
of DBS features, see Feature Operation (Section 700).
xi
Installation,
Issue 2
Requirements
August 30; 1993
Section 300
Chapter 1. Requirements
This chapter includes DBS model numbers and FCC information that may be
required during installation. In addition, environmental requirements are
included to ensure proper operation.
l-l
Installation, Section 300
Issue 2
Requirements
August 30, 1993
Model Numbers and FCC Information
Table I-I. DBS model numbers
DBS System
Model Number
DBS 40
VB -43030
DBS 72
1
VB -43050
1 VB-43060
DBS 96
Tzzble I-2. FCC information
Item
Specijication
Type of Service
The DBS is designed for use with standard telephone lines.
Direct connection to party lines or coin-operated phones is
prohibited.
FCC Registration
Number
When used as a key system: ACK4A4-60490-KF-E
When used as a PBX: ACK4A4-60489-MF-E
Ringer Equivalence
0.5B
Network Address Signaling
Code
E
Service Order Code
Analog Trunks: 9.OF
Tl: 6.OP
Facility Interface Code
Analog Trunks: 02LS2
Tl
Required Network Interface
Code
Environmental
: 04DU9-DN,
04DU9- 1 SN
Analog Trunks: RJ2 1X
Tl: RJ48C
Requirements
Temperature: The environment should be free from excessive temperatures in
order to avoid component damage. Room temperatures should be 32 to 104” F
(0 to 40” C).
Humidity: The environment should be free from excessive humidity, which
may rust metallic parts and degrade performance. Do not install the system
where humidity could condense on its surfaces. Relative humidity ranges should
be between 30 and 90 percent_
Ventilation: Adequate ventilation must be provided to allow upward air
circulation through the cabinet grille.
1-3
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Requirements
August 30., 1993
Gas and airborne particles: To avoid corrosion or oxidation of electrical
contacts, the environment should be free from airborne particles and corrosive
gas.
Electrical noise: The environment should be free from excessive electrical
noise, which could disturb the operation of digital circuits. The system should
be located at least 10 ft. (3 m) away from welders, dimmers, or other highcurrent machines. Phones connected to the system should not be located near
fluorescent lamps, air conditioners, washing machines, TVs, or radios.
Vibration: The environment
could loosen components.
should be free from excessive vibration, which
Water Exposure: Because the DBS is an electric device, exposure to water is
dangerous. Do not place anything containing water on the system. Do not install
under overhead plumbing, sprinkler system valves, or in areas that are
susceptible to flooding.
Lighting: Sufficient lighting is required for testing and maintenance.
Lightning Protection/Grounding:
The system must be properly grounded to
protect from lightning damage. The following UL conditions must be met to
ensure proper grounding. (For grounding instructions, see page 3-5.)
f
Supplemental and independent equipment grounding conductors
installed between the system and the wiring system ground.
are to be
One of the equipment grounding conductors must be a conductor that is as
large or larger than the ungrounded branch-circuit supply conductors. The
equipment grounding conductor is to be installed as part of the circuit that
supplies the system and is to be connected to ground at the service
equipment. Bare, covered, or insulated grounding conductors are acceptable.
Individually covered or insulated grounding conductors should have a
continuous outer finish that is either green or green with one or more yellow
stripes. The equipment grounding conductor should be connected to ground
at the service equipment.
The other equipment grounding conductor shall comply with the general
rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electric Code,
NFPA 70. but its connection to ground shall not depend on the cord and plug
of the system.
1-4
Installation,
issue 2
Requirements
August 30,1993
Section 300
l
l
The attachment-plug receptacles of the same type as that used by the systems
that are in the vicinity of the DBS are all to be of a grounding type, and the
equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be
connected to earth ground at the service equipment.
A marking adjacent to the telecommunications jacks must instruct the user to
connect a supplementary equipment grounding conductor before any
telecommunication
lines are connected to the product or system.
Cleaning
l
Use a sfightfy damp cloth to clean the phones. The phones should never be
cleaned with benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents.
l-5
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
System Overview
August 30,1993
Chapter 2. System Overview
This chapter gives an overview of the Digital Business System (DBS). This
overview includes descriptions of the DBS cabinet, system configurations,
printed circuit cards, and the call processor.
2-l
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
System Overview
August 30, -1993
Cabinet Description
Panasonic’s Digital Business System (DBS) is a hybrid telephone system that
can be used as a key service unit (KSU) or a private branch exchange (PBX).
The DBS cabinet includes an AC power supply, backup batteries (optional),
dedicated card slots, and a central connector panel for line and trunk
connections.
‘igure 2-1. The DBS cabinet (DBS 96 shown)
Connector
,-
Panel
-,
STATUS
LED
--_-_--__-----P--v
__-_-_----_----__---__---_----_----_--------
fer Switch J
Ln addition to trunk and line connection, the connector panel is also used to
connect peripheral equipment, such as paging speakers, external ringers, and
music-on-hold/background
music sources. Figure 2-2 on page 2-4 shows trunk
and line connections, as well as some peripheral connections. Peripheral
connections are covered in detail in Chapter 5.
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
System Overview
August 30, 1993
All-Page
Speaker
MDF
II
2-4
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
System Overview
August 30, 1993
Configurations
The DBS comes in three models, which provide from 40 to 96 ports. Up to two
systems can be combined to increase port capacity up to 192 ports (DBS 96 +
DBS 96).
In addition to dedicated trunk and extension slots, each system includes one
expansion slot (labeled EC/TRK) that can be used for either trunks or
extensions. The following table shows port capacities for individual systems, as
well as different combinations of systems.
Table 2-1. Trunk and extension capacities according to system size
1. The slave cabinet must be used for expansion
2. When a DBS 72 and DBS 40 are connected,
ports_
expansion
ports can-
Printed Circuit Cards
The following table describes the printed circuit cards that can be used with the
DBS. Also included are brief descriptions of each card and the maximum
number that can be installed in each cabinet.
2-5
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
System Overview
August 30,1993
Table 2-2. Printed circuit card descriptions and maximums
Card Type
Card Designation
Card Description
Maximums per Cabinet
DBS40
DBS 72
DBS 96
2 total
3 total
4 total
L-TRK/4 (VB-435 10)
4-port loop trunk
L-TRK/8 (VB-435 11)
g-port loop trunk
G-TRW8 (VB-4353 1)
S-port ground-start
DID (VB-43541)
Direct-inward-dialing
trunk
Tl Trunk Card
(VB-4356 1)
(See Note 1.)
Tl interface
1
1
1
DEC (VB-436 11)
g-port digital line card
4
7
9
(9 total)
Analog
Lines
AEC (VB-4362 1)
(See Note 2.)
(4 total)
3
(7 total)
g-port analog line-card
4
4
Service
Circuits
SCC-A (VB-43420)
Service circuit card
1
1
1
SCC-B (VB-43421)
Service-circuit
Processor
Cards
CPC-A (VB-43410)
Call processor card
1
1
1
CPC-B (VB-434 11)
Call processor card
DTMF
Circuits
MFR (VB-4343 1)
&circuit DTMF receiver
1
1
1
Interface
Cards
API (VB-43940)
Applications
interface
processor
1
1
1
CBL-M (VB-43 110)
Interface card for connetting two systems
(master end)
1
1
1
CBL-S (VB-43 110)
Interface card for connetting two systems
(slave end)
1
1
1
Analog
Trunks
Digital
Trunks
Digital
Lines
trunk
card
Notes:
1. The Tl MDF card and the Tl Sync Unit are also required when the Tl Trunk Card is used.
(See “Hardware Requirements” on page 4-9 for more information.)
2. The AEC maximums shown apply when simultaneous CO ringing is desired for all phones. Up
to six AEC cards can be used in the DBS 72 and up to eight can be used in the DBS 96, as long as
simultaneous CO ringing is not required. If simultaneous CO ringing is assigned for more than
32 SLTs, ringing may be delayed.
2-6
MCC/Panasonic
Business Telephone, Engineering
TO:
All DBS Dealers
FROM:
MCC/Panasonic
Business Telephone, Engineering
DATE:
August 30, 1993
RE:
Documentation
Department
Department
Update
This documentation update contains a new version of Installation (Section 300). This manual
replaces the existing version of Section XXI.
Please inform us if you find changes that should be made to this or any other DBS manual. You
can send your changes to the following address, or you can fax them to 404-740-2899.
MCC/Panasonic
Business Telephone, Engineering Department
Technical Publications
2001 Westside Parkway
Bldg. 200, Suite 260
Alpharetta, GA 3020 1
Installation,
Issue 2
System Overview
August 30, 1993
Section 300
Printed circuit cards are installed in dedicated slots within the DBS cabinet:
Table 2-3 shows the cards that can be installed in each slot. Figure 2-3 on page
2-8 illustrates slot labels.
Table 2-3. Printed circuit package slot usage
Card
Card Type
Acceptable Slots
Analog
TRK or EC/TRK
Trunks
1 DID
Digital Trunks
l-1-1
EC/IRK
Digital Lines
1 DEC
EC l-8 or EC/IRK
Analog Lines
f AEC
EC 2-8 or ECmK
Service
SCC-A
Circuits
SCC-B
Processor Cards
see
1 CPC-A
~ CPC
1 CPC-B
I
DTMF Circuits
AUX 1 or AUX2
MFR
CPC (See Note 1.)
Interface Cards
API
AUXl or AUX2 (See Note 2.)
CBL-M
CPC or AUX2 (See Note 3.)
1CBL-s
Notes:
1. With one-cabinet systems, the MFR card can be installed in the AUXl OTAUX2
slot, depending on whether an API card is used. With two-cabinet systems, placement of the MFR cards differs according to the cable kit used. With Cable Kit Version 1.1, one MFR is installed in the Master AUX 1, and one MFR is installed in the
Slave AUXl. With Cable Kit Version 1.2, both MFR cards are installed in the slave
cabinet--one in the CPC slot and one in AUX 1. (See page 6- 10 for instructions on
installing MFR cards in double-cabinet systems.)
2. The API card is installed in AUXl only when a CBL card is used.
3. Part VB-43 110 includes both the CBL-M and CBL-S cards, as well as the required
connecting cables. CBL-M is installed in the master cabinet, CBL-S in the slave cabinet.
2-7
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
System Overview
August 30,1993
i
Figure 2,
/
Slot Labels
(DBS 96)
Processor Description
DBS call-processing is controlled by the Call Processor Card (CPC). Two CPC
models are available: CPC-A and CPC-B.
In most cases, the features provided with the DBS depend on the model and
software version of the CPC. However, the availability of some features also
depends on the model and version of the Service Circuit Card (SCC).
The following table shows some of the major differences between CPC/SCC
features. Other differences are noted throughout this manual when they apply to
specific installation instructions. For more details on the features provided with
each processor, see the Feature Operation, Section 700.
Table 24. CPCISCC features
Feature
CFWSCC Requirements
Double cabinet system
CPC-B, Version 1.0 or greater
plus SCC-B
DID
CPC-B, Version 2.0 or greater
plus SCC-B, Version 1.2 or
greater
Tl Interface
CPC-B, Version 4.0 or greater
plus SCC-B. (SCC-B ROM 1.3
is required if the CO does not
provide dial tone.)
2-8
i’
Installation,
Issue 2
Section
300
Cabinet Installation
August 16, 1993
Chapter 3. Cabinet Installation
This chapter explains how to install and power up the cabinet. Before you begin
installation, be sure to read the “Requirements” chapter, which begins on page
l-l.
3-l
Installation,
Issue 2
Cabinet installation
August 16; 1993
Section 300
..1^
Wall-Mountina
the Cabinet
Guidelines
CAUTION:
Always turn the power switch OFF before beginning installation.
l
l
The DBS is shipped with the cover installed to protect components.
wall-mounting the cabinet, remove the cover.
Before
Handle the cabinet carefully to avoid damage.
Installation
1. Remove the eight screws from the front and sides of the cabinet.
2. Take the front cover off by pulling it from the bottom and lifting it up.
3. Take the side covers off by sliding them up then away.
Figure 3-1. Cover removal
L
\
3-3
Front Cover
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Ins!allation
August 16, 1993
4. Attach the mounting brackets to the four comers of the back side of the
cabinet.
Figure 3-2. Cabinet mounting
bracket
I
Metal Mounting
Bracket
5. Lnstall four screws in the wall studs according to the dimensions given in
Figure 3-3. (Note that the width dimension is different for the DBS 40.)
The screws are used to attach the mounting brackets to the wall. The screws
should protrude from the wall 5/16 in.
Figure 3-3. Cabinet wah
.-.
*
.
*
A-_k
I
Main Cabinet
22 WI6
I
13 7116
(DEE 40)
.....
6. Hang the cabinet on the wall by placing the mounting
screws.
7. Tighten the screws to secure the cabinet.
3-4
brackets over the
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August 16,1993
Groundinq
Guidelines
l
Before grounding the DBS, read the “Lightning Protection/Grounding”
requirements beginning on page l-4.
l
The ground cable must be at least 18 AWG.
l
Resistance to ground must be 10 Ohms or less.
Installation
1. Attach the ground cable to the ground screw on the front of the power supply.
2. Connect the ground cable to the building ground.
Figure 3-4. I
binet mound screw
--------
--
~-_zzEzE-_~
8.
m-_-------------------
0
0
I
Ground Screw
3-5
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August 16, 1993
Card Installation
Guidelines
CAUTION:
Before handling printed circuit cards, discharge static electricity
grounding yourself. Static electricity can damage components.
by
Turn off the power before installing cards. Installing cards with the
power on can damage components.
l
Install the cards in the following order:
- TRK
- DEC
- AEC or API
- see
- CPC
- MFRorCBL
l
If you’re installing a CPC-A card with a SCC-B card, set SW4 to “Mode A.”
The default setting is “Mode B,” which specifies that CPC-B is used.
Figure 3-5. SCC-
3-6
Installation,
Issue 2
Cabinet installation
August 16,1993
Section 300
l
l
Before installing the CPC card, determine if the DBS will be used as a‘KSU
or PBX. To use as a PBX, cut Strap S 1 on the CPC. Cutting this strap allows
use of pooled trunks as opposed to line appearances.
Install cards only in their dedicated slots. The slot type is marked on the
cabinet directly above each slot.
3-7
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August 16, 1993
lnstalla tion
1. With the lettering on the card pointed up, position the card within the slot
guides. (See Figure 3-7.)
2. Hold the card on the top and bottom edges with both hands and carefully
push the card into the slot.
3. When the connector at the far end of the card touches the corresponding
connector on the backplane, press the card in until it is firmly seated.
rre3-7. Printed circuit card installation
Slot Label
Connector
Guide
c
Zard
abe
* The extension card installed in this slot must be digital.
# The MFR card can be installed in the CPC slot of slave cabinets.
3-8
Installation,
Issue 2
Cabinet Installation
August 16,1993
Section 300
Batterv Backup
Guidelines
.
The DBS 40 uses two 12-volt batteries; the DBS 72 and 96 use four &volt
batteries. The following table includes the part numbers for the battery
packages.
Table 3.1. Battery backup packages for the DBS 40, 72, and 96
The backup batteries are connected in a series circuit, using cables provided
with the DBS.
With maximum traffic, the backup batteries last up to 40 minutes for the DBS
40 and 72, up to 30 minutes for the DBS 96.
The backup batteries should be replaced about every 3 years.
3-9
_.
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Installation
for the DBS 40
1.
Rnff~ru
Cabinet Installation
August 16,1993
Inmhn.
Place one battery in the top tray of the battery compartment,
in the bottom tray.
nRS
the other battery
4n
I
2. Connect the positive cable (red) to the + terminal of the top battery.
3. Connect the connecting cable (white) to the - terminal of the top battery.
4. Connect the negative cable (blue) to the - terminal of the bottom battery.
5. Connect the connecting cable (white) from the top battery to the + terminal
on the bottom battery.
3-10
Installation,
Issue 2
Cabinet installation
August 16; 1993
Section 300
Installation
for the DBS 72 and 96
1.
Figure 3-9. Baaety
Slide the battery compartment
out and place the four batteries inside the tray.
tray, OBS 72 and 96
Remove Screws
and
Slide Battery
Tray Out
2. Connect the positiye cable (red) to the + terminal on the frost battery.
3. Connect the negative cable (blue) to the - terminal on the last battery.
-4. Connect the remaining positive and negative terminals with the white
connection cables, as shown in Figure 3-10.
3-11
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August 16,1993
Figure 3-I&Battery pack connection, DBS 72 and 96
I
White
Connection
Cables
3-l 2
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August 16, 1993
Kev Phone Wall Mountinq
DBS key phones can be modified for wall mounting by reversing the wallmount adaptor on the bottom of the phone. The wall-mount adaptor includes a
small hole for attaching the phone to a screw inserted in the wall.
1. Place the bottom edge of the telephone on a desk or other hard surface.
2. Press the wall-mount
3-l 1).
Figure 3-11. Wall-r
adaptor down until it detaches from the phone (Figure
unt adaptor removal
Wall-Mount
Adaptor
3-l 3
Installation,
Issue 2
Cabinet Installation
August 16,1993
Section 300
3. Turn the wall-mount adaptor around and re-attach it to the phone.
Figure 3-12. Wall-mo
Wall-Mount
Adaptor
f
3-l 4
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August 16,1993
4. Remove the handset guide with a small screwdriver,
it into the phone.
_
Fimre
3-13.Handset
puide insertion for wall-nwuntinn.
turn
it over. and &insert
kev ohone
Handset
Guide
I
I
I
7
I
I
t
I
I
1
L
I
1
I
1
I
1
L
I
I
I
L
I
I
1
r
r
1
J
1
I
[
I
r
L
r
Handset
3-15
I
I
J
I
1
I
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet installation
August 16,1993
DSLT Wall Mountinq
Digital Single-Line Telephones (DSLTs) can be modified for wall mounting by
removing the desk stand and mounting it on the bottom of the phone. The back
of the DSLT and the desk stand include slots for attaching the phone to a screw
inserted in the wall.
1. Press the stand releases in toward the middle of the phone to release the desk
stand (Figure 3-14).
Figur
,ILDesk stand removal for DSLT wail munBn~
3-16
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August-16, 1993
2. Attach the desk stand to the bottom of the phone by aligning the tabs‘and tab
guides and sliding it into place (Figure 3-15).
_Figure
45.Desk
s&and attachment for DSLT wall mounting
3-l 7
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet installation
August l&l993
3. Remove the handset guide with a small screwdriver,
it into the phone.
3-16. Handset guide insertion for wall-mounting,
turn it over, and reinsert
DSLT
Handset
Guide
I
I
I
I
I
c
1
1
I
I
I
1
1
1
I
I
1
1
1
1
~~
1
1
I
I
Handset
3-l 8
I
I
1
1
Installation,
Issue 2
Svst&
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August 16,1993
Initialization
1. Confirm that the DBS power switch is OFF.
2. Plug the power cord into a dedicated
120V 15 amp AC wall outlet.
Note: A surge protector should be installed on the power cord.
3. Set SW1 on the CPC card to CLEAR.
momnrw
rlonr
cwitrh
4. Turn the power switch on.
As the system loads, the bottom LED lamp on the CPC card will flash.
5. Once the bottom LED lamp on the CPC card stops flashing, set SW 1 on the
CPC to HOLD.
3-l 9
installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August 16, 1993
Test Phone
Guidelines
.
The test terminal (CN3) on the DBS Connector Panel can be used to connect
a display phone for programming.
The test terminal can be used for initial programming
cabling is completed.
.
before extension
The test terminal is turned on by flipping SW 1 on the Connector Panel to the
“Test” position. When SW 1 is in the test position, extension ports 7 and 8 are
connected through the test terminal. When SW 1 is not in the test position,
extension ports 7 and 8 are connected through the MDF.
Note: Before using the test terminal on a DBS that is operational, be sure it’s
okay for the phones connected to ports 7 and 8 to be out of service.
.
A DSS/72 can be connected to the display phone for text entry.
installation
1. Connect the telephone and DSS (optional) to CN3 on the Connector
(See Figure 3- 18 on page 3-2 1.)
2. Set SW 1 to “Test.”
3. When programming
is completed,
3-20
set SW 1 back to “ST.”
Panel.
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Cabinet Installation
August l6, 1993
rigwe 3-18.Test telephone connection
Test Phone
for Prcgramrm
vwo-Conduclar Cable (Port 7
CN3
To the DSS
Q
To the telephone
/
SW1
ST-TEST
ST-Pans
7 and 8
are mnneclod through
the MDF
installation,
Issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Section 300
Chapter 4. Trunks and Lines
This chapter describes trunk and line installation. Some peripheral equipment
also requires trunk and/or line interfaces (door phones or power failure units, for
example). See Chapter 5 for instructions on connecting peripheral equipment
through trunks or lines.
4-l
Installation,
Issue 2
Section
300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Trunks
Trunk Connectors
Each DBS cabinet is provided with one main trunk connector, which is labeled
CN 1. In addition, a trunk expansion connector (VB-43 120) can be added to the
DBS to provide eight additional trunk connections. (The trunk expansion
connector is also labeled CN 1.)
Figure 4- 1 shows the maximum number of trunks that can be connected
both trunk connectors are used with a DBS 96.
Figure 4-1. DBS trunk connections
,
Expansion Trunk Connector
(W-43 120)
Main Trunk Connector
4-3
when
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
The number of trunks that can be connected through the main trunk connector
depends on the type of system you have and the number of trunk cards installed.
Table 4-l shows the main trunks and expansion trunks available with each
system type. Chapter 6 includes trunk maximums for two-cabinet systems.
Table 4-1. Main trunks and expansion trunks provided
System Type
with each system type
Main Trunk Numbers
Expansion Trunk Numbers
DBS 40
l-8
9-16
DBS 72
I
1-16
I
17-24
I
DBS 96
I
1-24
I
25-32
I1
1
I
I
Trunk Connector Pinouts
Table 4-2 includes pinouts and color codes for the main trunk connector.
4-3 shows pinouts and color codes for the trunk expansion connector.
Instructions
on installing the expansion
4-4
connector begin on 4-41.
Table
Installation,
Issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16, J993
Section 300
Table 43. Pinouts and trunk numbers for trunk
expansion connector CNI _
Table 4-2. Pinouts and trunk numbers for the main
trunk connector.
Fun&on
Trunk
Trunk
Color
Pin
SM
(‘ode
No.
lRK2
[I)HS 72.
l)HS Oh)
31
6T
HL-RI)
6
6R
RD-OR
32
7T
()R-RI)
7
7R
RIM iN
(;N-RI)
33
8T
x
8R
RI)-BR
34
9T
think
‘fi-RK
According
(n
DBS 40
DBS 72
DBS 96
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
26
IT
Trunk 2
WH-BL
BL-WH
1
IR
27
2T
Trunk 3
WH-OR
OR-WH
2
2R
28
3
3T
3R
Trunk
Trunk 4
WH-(;N
CiN-WH
WH-BR
BR-WH
29
4
4T
Ttunk .s
4R
t
Assignments
Syslem
Type
I
EC
RI,-HL
Des&
Y
17
25
TN&
Trunk
IO
Trunk
IX
‘6
TNII~
Trunk
1’)
27
Trunk
TNII~
Trunk
I2
20
2X
11
Tnmk 6
Trunk 7
‘Trunl:
1 OR-RD
RI)-GN
(;N-RD
4-5
1
7
33
8
1
7R
8T
8R
1
I5
Trunk
16
I
23
TN&
24
I
31 I
Trunk
32
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
LooMtart
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Trunks
Guidelines
.
Two versions of the loop-start trunk are available: the four-port version (VB435 IO) and the eight-port version (VB-435 11).
The following procedure covers loop-start trunk installation using the main
trunk connector. For instructions on using the expansion trunk connector, see
“Trunk and Line Expansion” on page 4-41
.
For pinouts and color codes for the main trunk connector, see Table 4-2 on
page 4-5.
Installation
1. Install the loop-start trunk in a trunk slot.
2. Use a standard 50-pin cable to connect the trunks from the MDF to the main
trunk connector CN 1.
Ground Start and DID Trunks
Guidelines
l
l
l
l
l
The following procedure covers ground-start (VB-4353 1) and DID (VB43541) installation using the main trunk connector_ For instructions on using
the expansion trunk connector, see “Trunk and Line Expansion” on page 441.
For pinouts and color codes for the main trunk connector, see Table 4-2 on
page 4-5.
Each circuit on the ground-start trunk card can be used as either a loop-start
or ground-start trunk. By default, all circuits on the ground-start trunk are
assigned as loop start.
The ground-start
trunk card requires CPC-B Version 1.0 or higher.
The DID card requires CPC-B (Version 2.0 or higher) and SCC-B (Version
2.0 or higher).
”
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
l
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
Both ground start and DID trunks requirF!!n external -4XV power supply. The
following table shows -4XV power consumption for one- and two-cabinet
systems.
Table 4-4. -48V current consumption
for ground-start
Current Consumption
(Output voltage = 48 k 4 V
Ripple voltage = k500 m VP-p)
System Size
l
and DID trunks
One-cabinet
system
1
Amp
Two-cabinet
system
2 Amps
The following -4XV power supplies have been tested with DBS ground-start
and DID trunks.
Table 4-5. -48V power supplies tested with the DBS
Manufacturer
Model Number
Rating
Valcom
VP-204XB
2 Amps
Tel labs
l
1
X1-8002
The following “lnstailation”
power supply.
12
Amps
section includes details on installing the -48V
lnstalla tion
1. Install the G-TRK/X or DID card in a trunk slot.
2. Connect the power supply by cabling the positive side to the SG connector on
CN2 (Figure 4-2).
Note: Use cables that are 1X AWG or larger to connect the power supply to
the DBS.
4-7
Installation,
issue 2
4-2.
Section 300
-48Vpower
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
supply installation
CN2
-48V
RG
SG SYN RG +24V GND
C
B
M
ZO
Zl
22
23
24
RE2 REl
3. Ground the positive side of the -48V power supply to the building ground.
Note: Resistance to ground must be 10 Ohms or less, and the ground cable
must be 18 AWG or larger.
4. Install power-surge protectors between the wall outlet and the -48V power
supply.
5. Use a standard 50-pin cable to connect the trunks from the MDF to the main
trunk connector CN 1.
6. Use a test set to verify the polarity of the trunk.
Connect the test set across the tip and ring of the trunk to be tested. With the
test set in the “monitor” position, apply ground to the ring side of the trunk.
If you hear dial tone, the polarity of the trunk is okay, and you can switch the
test set to the “talk” mode to test the voice path.
If you do not hear dial tone, ground the tip side of the trunk. If you receive
dial tone when grounding the tip side, polarity is reversed.
4-8
_
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
Tl Interface
Guidelines
Read the following guidelines before beginning Tl installation.
instructions begin on page 4-1X.
Installation
Hardware Requirements
The Tl requires the following
l
forsingle-cabinet
Tab!e 4-6. TI Hardware requi:emenb
SCC-B
(VB-43421)
CPC-B 4.0
(VB-43411)
DBS hardware.
systems
Tl Trunk Card
(VB-43561)
Tl MDF Card
(VB-43562)
1
1
I
(See Note 1.)
Sync Unit
(VB-43563)
1
(See Noted; 2 and 3.)
Notes:
1. Version 1.3 of the Bus Processor Unit (BPU) chip is required for Tl.
2. An MFR card is required for DID/DNIS if DTMF signaling is used. If DID/DNIS is
provided through DP signaling, an MFR card is not required.
3. SCC-B with ROM 1.3 or later is required if the central office does not provide Tl
dial tone.
Table 4-7. Tl Hardware
TI
Location
requirement3
CPC-R v4
(VB-4341 I)
(See Note 1.)
for double-cabinet
XC-8
(VB-4342 1)
(SeeNotes
2 and 3.)
systems
TI Trunk
TI MDF
Sync
Tl Cable
Cable Kit
Card
Card
Card
(VB-43564)
(VB-43110)
(VB-43561)
(VB-43562)
(VB-43563)
(See Note 4.)
Tl in the
Mnster
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
Tl in the
Slave
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Tl in both
Master and
Slave
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
Notes:
1. Version 1.3 of the Bus Processor
Unit (BPU) chip is required for Tl.
2. An MFR card is required for DID/DNIS
signaling.
an MFR card is not required.
3. SCC-B
4. Version
if DTMF signaling is used. If DID/DNIS is provided through DP
with ROM 1.3 or later is required if the central office does not provide T 1 dial tone.
I .2 of the Cahle Kit is required for T 1.
4-9
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
l
l
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
The Tl trunk card must be installed in the “EC/-IRK” slot.
The installer must provide a Channel Service Unit (CSU) that complies with
FCC Part 15 and Part 6X. The CSU is installed between the DBS and the
public network. The CSU provides alarm diagnostic, and monitoring
functions, as well as network protection.
The CSU must be compatible with the framing format (SF or ESF) that is
provided by the public network.
Maximums
l
l
One Tl card can be installed per cabinet.
The number of Tl cards that can be installed in double-cabinet systems
depends on the sizes of the connected systems. Table 4- 12 on page 4- 13
shows Tl maximums for double-cabinet systems.
Note: The DBS 72 + DBS 40 combination
does not support Tl.
Table 4-8. Tl slot usage for two-cabinet systems
,/
l
l
Fractional TI can be used when fewer than 24 Tl trunks are needed.
Fractional Tl allows you to use only a portion of the 24 channels provided on
the Tl card.
Though each Tl Interface provides 24 trunk channels, Tl trunks do not
increase the overall trunk capacity of the DBS. Each Tl channel subtracts
from the total number of analog trunks that can be installed. Furthermore, the
number of analog trunks that can be used are always decremented in
quantities of 8.
For instance, if you’re installing a Tl in a DBS 96 and you only want to use
12 Tl channels, the logical number of analog trunks that would be available
is20(3212=20).
4-10
Installation.
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 1.6, 1993
However. because the number of analog trunks must be decremented in
quantities of X. the actual number of analog trunks that can be used is 16:
(32 total trunks - 16 (two 8-trunk increments)
= 16.1
Tables 4-Y through 4-l 1 show the possible combinations
trunks assignments based on system size.
of analog and digital
The trunk numbering shown in these tables is determined by backplane trunk
port assignments. Therefore, the numbering cannot be changed.
Note: Analog trunks are numbered beginning with “l.“Tl trunk channels are
numbered beginning with the highest trunk channel used.
Trunk Assignments for Single-Cabinet Systems
l
Programming is not required to associate trunk ports with slot locations.
However, you must use programming to specify that a combination of Tl and
analog trunks are installed, and you must also specify how many Tl channels
are used.
Table 4-9. TI and analog trunk assignments, DBS 40
Trunk
Fractional T 1
Fractional T 1
Number
using 16 Channels
using 8 Channels
1
Tl channel 16
Analog trunk 1
L
-L
L
t(
Tl channel 9
Analog trunk 8
9
Tl channel 8
Tl channel X
.l.
L
L
16
Tl channel
1
Tl channel 1
Note: Since the DBS 40 supports a maximum
all 24 channels of the Tl cannot be used.
4-11
of 16 trunks,
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Table 4-10. TI and an&g
Trunks and Lines
August l-6, 1993
trunk assignments,
1 24-Channel
Trunk
DBS 72
Tl
Number
9
Fractional T 1
Fractional T 1
using 16 Channels
using 8 Channels
Tl channel 24
Analog trunk 1
Analog trunk 1
1
1
.L
Tl channel
17
Analog trunk 8
Analog trunk 8
Tl channel
16
Tl channel 16
Analog trunk 9
.l.
-L
d
1
16
Tl channel 9
Tl channel 9
Analog trunk 16
17
Tl channel 8
Tl channel 8
Tl channel 8
.L
-L
1
1
Tl channel 1
Tl channel 1
24
Tl channel
1
T&le 4-11. TI and analog trunk assignments,
24Xhannel
Trunk
DBS 96
Tl
Fractional T 1
using 16 Channels
Number
1
Fractional Tl
Analog trunk 1
I
I
using 8 Channels
Analog trunk 1
Analog trunk 1
5
8
Analog trunk 8
Analog trunk 8
Analog trunk 8
9
Tl channel 24
Analog trunk 9
Analog trunk 9
.L
1
J
Analog trunk 16
Analog trunk 16
I
16
Tl channel
7
17
Tl channel
16
I
Tl channel
16
1
Analog trunk 17
1
L
.L
-J
24
Tl channel 9
Tl channel 9
Analog trunk 24
25
Tl channel 8
Tl channel 8
Tl channel 8
L
.L
-f-
.L
Tl channel 1
Tl channel 1
32
Tl channel
1
4-12
1
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunk Assignments
l
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
for Double-Cabinet
Systems
When Tl is used in a double-cabinet system, the number of Tl channels that
can be assigned in each cabinet depends on the master/slave designation.
The following table shows the maximum
assigned in two-cabinet systems.
Tl assignments for two-cabinet
Table 4-12. Maximum
number of Tl channels that can be
systems
1System Size
Master
1 DBS4O+DBS40
8 analog trunks
16 Tl trunks
1 DBS 72 + DBS 72
16 analog; trunks
24 Tl trunks
24 Tl trunks
24 Tl trunks
8 analog trunks
8 analog trunks
1 Slave
DBS 96 + DBS 72
DBS 96 + DBS 96
l
Two-cabinet systems use the same trunk numbering scheme as single-cabinet
systems: analog trunks are numbered from “1” upward; Tl trunk channels are
numbered downward from the highest channel used.
Tables 4- 13 through 4-17 show trunk numbering for two-cabinet
using the maximum number of Tl channels.
Table 4-13. TI and analog trunk assignments,
DBS 40 + 40 (I&channel
Master Cabinet
Trunk
frach’ond
Tl in the slave)
Slave Cabinet
Number
1
Analog trunk 1
.L
1
8
Analog trunk 8
9
N/A
Tl channel 16
N/A
1
16
Tl channel 9
17
Tl channel 8
L
N/A
1
Tl channel 1
24
4-13
systems
installation,
Issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Section 300
/-
Table 4-14. Tl and an&g
trunk assignments,
DBS 72 + DBS 72 (24~chunnel Tl in the slave)
Master Cabinet
Trunk
Slave Cabinet
Number
1
Analog trunk 1
1
-1
8
Analog trunk 8
9
Analog trunk 9
L
.L
16
Analog trunk 16
N/A
Tl channel 24
17
1
N/A
N/A
1
24
Tl channel
17
25
Tl channel
16
1
N/A
1
32
Tl channel 9
33
Tl channel 8
I
N/A
5
Tl channel
40
4-l 4
1
Installation,
issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Section 300
Table 4-15. Tl and analog trunk assignments,
the slave)
DBS 96 + llB.X 40 (24~channel Tl in the master; 16channel
Master Cabinet
Trunk
Slave Cabinet
Number
1
Analog trunk 1
L
.l.
t(
Analog trunk X
9
Tl channel 24
.L
L
16
Tl channel 17
17
Tl channel 16
L
.L
24
Tl channel 9
25
Tl channel 8
.L
1
32
Tl channel 1
N/A
N/A
.,...,
N/A
Tl channel
33
.L
N/A
N/A
16
.L
40
Tl channel 9
41
Tl channel X
L
N/A
1
Tl channel 1
48
4-15
TI in
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16; 1993
/’
Table 4-16. Tl and analog trunk assignments,
the slave)
DBS 96 + DBS 72 (24-channel
Master Cabinet
Trunk
Tl in the mastir; 24-channel
Slave Cabinet
Number
1
Analog trunk 1
.L
.L
8
Analog bunk 8
9
Tl channel 24
1
.L
N/A
N/A
16
Tl channel
17
17
Tl channel
16
1
.L
24
Tl channel 9
25
Tl channel 8
.L
.L
32
N/A
N/A
Tl channel
1
33
.L
Tl channel 24
N/A
1
40
Tl channel
17
41
Tl channel
16
-1
N/A
.L
48
Tl channel 9
49
Tl channel 8
L
N/A
56
L
Tl channel
4-l 6
1
TI in
Installation,
issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Table 4-17. TI and analog trunk assignments,
the slave)
7
Trunk
DBS 96 + DBS 96 (24~channel Tl in the master; 24-channel
Master Cabinet
Slave Cabinet
Number
Analog trunk 1
r
L
8
Analog trunk 8
9
Tl channel 24
1
-L
NIA
N/A
16
T1 channel
17
17
Tl channel
16
N/A
J.
.L
24
Tl channel 9
25
Tl channel 8
.L
&
32
N/A
TI channel
1
Analog trunk 1
33
J-
N/A
L
40
Analog trunk 8
41
Tl channel 24
.L
,N/A
-&
48
Tl channel
17
49
Tl channel
16
L
N/A
-J
56
Tl channel 9
57
Tl channel 8
.L
N/A
L
Tl channel
64
4-l 7
1
TI in
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
,
!
installation
The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions for installing the T I
Interface. The procedure that you should use depends on the type of system you
have and the number of Tls you are installing.
If you’re installing . ..
Use this procedure...
A Tl in a single cabinet
“Installing a Tl in a Single Cabinet” (page 4- 18)
One T 1 in a double cabinet, with the T 1 located in the
“Installing a Tl in a Single Cabinet” (page 4-1X)
master
I
One Tl in a double cabinets, with the Ti located in
the slave
I in the Slave” (page 4-25)
I
“Installing a Tl in a Double Cabinet with the TI
“Installing a Tl in a Double Cabinet with Tls in
I the Master and Slave” (page 4-25)
Tls in both the master and slave
Installing a Tl in a Single Cabinet
The following instructions explain how to install a Tl in a single-cabinet
system. These instructions also apply when a Tl is installed in only the master
cabinet of a two cabinet system.
Lf only one Tl is installed in a two-cabinet system, it must be installed in the
cabinet specified in Table 4-8 on page 4- 10.
Note: For systems consisting
Interface cannot be used.
of a DBS 72 connected to a DBS 40, the Tl
1. Before beginning Tl installation. perform the “New Function Reset”
command (FFI 8# I# (0- l)#). This command must be issued before the Tl
can be installed properly.
4-13
(
Installation,
Issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
Section 300
2. Check connector 4 (CN4) on the Sync Unit (VB-43563). CN4 should be
strapped differently depending on whether the DBS is used with the public
network or a private network.
To connect to the public network
Strap Pins 2 and 3
.. .
To connect to a private network (Free-run mode) . ..
Strap Pins 1 and 2
When Pins 2 and 3 are strapped, the Sync Unit synchronizes
with the signaling provided by the public network.
Figure 4-3.
Connector 1I (CN4) strapping, Sync Unit
0
0
CN2
0
El
-
CN3
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
CN4
CNl
4-l 9
the DBS Tl card
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
3. Attach the Sync Unit to the CPC-B card.
Note: Before attaching the Sync Unit, insert the three spacers provided with
the unit and remove the jumpers from CN2 of the CPC-B card.
Figure 4-4.
TI Sync Unit instuilan’on
f
BPU Chip
(Version 1.3
or higher)
4-20
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
4. Install the Tl MDF (main distribution
shown in Figure 4-5.
F
re 4-5.
frame) card in the top of the cabinet as
TI MI)F card installation
To
4-21
Ground
Screw
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August- 16, 1993
5. Set SW 1 on the Tl card according to the following table.
These switch settings correspond to the distance between the DBS and the
CSU. To turn a switch on, flip it to the “up” position_
Table 4-18. Switch seaings for S WI on the Tl card
SW
Distancefiom
0 to 150 ft.
1
SW1
I+
1
SW6
the DBS to the CSV
I 150-450 ft.
1 450-655 ft.
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Not used
Not used
Not used
6. Install the Tl card in the “ECmRK”
slot
f
7. Connect the Sync Cable from CNl on the Sync Unit to CN5 on the Tl card.
Fi
re 4-6.
Sync Unit and Tl connection,
single-cabinet
instalbtion
8. Connect the cable attached to CN3 on the Tl MDF card to CN3 on the Tl
card (Figure 4-8).
4-22
Installation,
Issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Section 300
9. Using an RJ48 cable, connect CNI on the Tl MDF card to the CSU (Figure
4-8).?‘he following illustration shows CN 1 pinouts.
Figure
4-7
RJ48
pin
uts, CNI
connector
0
0
Rlna
l-b1
0
Ring 1
0
0
0
NC
FG
0
NC
nP
.
CN
1 (RJ48)
4-23
0
FG
Installation,
issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
10. Connect the ground cable from the TI MDF card to the cabinet as shdwn in
Figure 4-8.
[gum 4-8.
TI cabinet connecdons,
single-cabinet
instihtion
Q
T-l Line
csu
I
RKtTlwRut9E!ztEc2Et3Ec4EcsEc6Ec7EcaEmrsx/mNlx
-
Sync Unit
____ -0
’ CN3
f
. CNl
y T-l Card
- CNS
-Sync
4-24
Cable
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Installing Tl in a Double Cabinet with the Tl in the Slave
1. Before beginning Tl installation, perform the “New Function Reset”
command (FFl 8# l# (0- I)#). This command must be issued before the Tl
can be installed properly.
2. Install the Sync Unit in the master cabinet as described in Steps 2 and 3 under
“Installation for a Single Tl.”
3. install a Tl MDF card in the slave cabinet. (See Step 4 on page 4-21.)
4. Set Switch 1 on the Tl card. (See Step 5 on page 4-22.)
5. install a Tl card in the “EC/TRK” slot of the slave cabinet.
6. Connect the Sync Cable from CNl on the Sync Unit to CN5 on the Tl card
(Figure 4-9).
Note: Part Number VB-43564 is used for the Sync Cable when a Tl is
installed only in the slave cabinet of a two-cabinet system.
7. At the slave cabinet, connect the cable attached to CN3 on the Tl MDF card
to CN3 on the Tl card (Figure 4-8).
8. Using an RJ48 cable, connect CNl of the Tl MDF card to the CSU. (See
Figure 4-7 on page 4-23 for RJ48 pinouts.)
9. At the slave cabinet, connect the ground cable on the Tl MDF card as shown
in Figure 4-8 on page 4-24.
4-25
Installation,
Issue 2
gure
4-9.
Section 300
Sync
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
cable connections,
I
double-cabinet
Slave
with a Tl in the slave
Cabinet
/T-l
MDF
Guide
<
Card
43
Labe’\
CN5
Master
Cabinet
nterconnection
Cables
Card
Labe\
lots: The number of analog trunks thst can ba
installed dependson how msny 11 chsnneIr us
used.
4-26
Installation,
issue 2
,
Section 300
Installing Tl in a Double Cabinet with Tls in the Master and Slave
Tl installation, perform the “New Function Reset”
command (FFI 8# l# (0-I)#). This command must be issued before the Tl
can be installed properly.
1. Before beginning
2. Install the Sync Unit in the master cabinet as described in Steps 2 and 3 under
“Installation for a Single Tl.”
3. install a Tl MDF card in each cabinet. (See Step 4 on page 4-2 1.)
4. Set Switch 1 on the Tl cards. (See Step 5 on page 4-22.)
5. Install a Tl card in each “ECYTRK” slot.
6. Connect the Clock Sync Cable from .CN4 on the master-cabinet
on the slave-cabinet Tl , as shown in Figure 4-10.
Tl to CN5
Note: Part Number VB-43564 is used for the Clock Sync Cable when Tls are
installed in the master and slave cabinets.
7. At the master cabinet, connect the Sync Cable from CN 1 on the Sync Unit to
CN5 on the Tl card (Figure 4-10).
8. At each cabinet, connect the cable attached to CN3 on the Tl MDF card to
CN3 on the Tl card (Figure 4-8).
9. Using an RJ48 cable, connect CN 1 of each Tl MDF card to a CSU. (See
Figure 4-7 on page 4-23 for RJ48 pinouts.)
10. For both cabinets, connect the ground cable from the Tl MDF card as shown
in Figure 4-8 on page 4-24.
4-27
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
f
Fieure 4-10. Clock svnc cable and svnc cable connections.
double-cabinet
installation
Card
\
Label
Master Cabinet
Card
Label
\
note:menumber 01analog trunks that ran be
s.led
dependson how many Tl channelsare
4-28
f
:.
Installation,
Issue 2
i
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
\:
Lines
Extension
Connectors
The number of extension ports that can be connected to your system depends on
the type of system you have. Figure 4- 11 shows the maximum number of
extensions that can be connected to each system when the extension expansion
connector is used.
Table 4-l summarizes the number of ports that can be used without the
extension expansion connector. Chapter 6 includes extension maximums
two-cabinet systems.
igure
d-11. DBS extension
connections
Extension Expansion Connedof
j=-
I
MDF
ToCNl on tba
Extension
Expansion Connedor
Extension 32
To
CN12
Extension 1
Extension 24
To
CN13
Extension 25
3.
3
D&i 72
and 96
Extension 48
To
Extension 49
DES 96
only
Extension 72
4-29
for
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Table 4-19. Extension ports provided with each system
c
System Type
Extension Ports
(Not including the Expansion Connector*)
l-24
DBS 40
1 DBS 72
1
1-48
1 DBS 96
1
l-72
*Note: Extensions 65 to 72 on the DBS 96 use the EC/TRK
slot, but they do not require the extension expansion connector. If extensions 65 to 72 are used, the trunk expansion connector cannot be used.
Extension Connector Pinouts
Tables 4-20 through 4-22 provide pinouts and color codes for extension slots.
Installation,
Issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Section 300
Table 4-20. Pinouts and color codes for extension connector 12
&
z
s
.
6
2
EC1
(See
Note)
WH-BL
BL-WH
26
1
Ti
WH-OR
OR-WH
27
2
T1
RI
Rl
I
I
EC2
‘r
RD-BR
34
Tl
BR-RD
9
Rl
RD-SL
35
Tl
10
Rl
SL-RD
EC3
YL-OR
42
Tl
GN-YL 1 18 1 RI
I
t
BK-BL
1 36 1 Tl
BL-BK
( 11 / Rl
WH-GN
GN-WH
2X
3
T1
Rl
WH-BR
BR-WH
29
4
T1
Rl
YL-SL
45
Tl
SL-YL
20
Rl
WH-SL
SL-WI-I
30
5
T1
Rl
VI-BL
46
Tl
21
RI
T1
Rl
VI-OR
RD-OR
OR-RD
32
7
BL-VI
OR-VI
T1
Rl
T1
Rl
Note: Only digital extensions
i
can be used in slot ECl.
4-31
VI-BR
1 49 1 Tl
BR-VI
! 24 ! Rl
VI-SL
50
SL-VI
25
N/A
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16; 1993
c
Table 4-21. Pinouts and color codes for extension connector 13
.
.
e
Q
s .g
.s
3
EC4
42
Tl
17
Rl
26
1
WH-OR
OR-WH
27
2
RD-SL
35
Tl
YL-GN
43
SL-RD
10
Rl
GN-YL
18
WH-GN
6N-WH
28
3
BK-B<
36
Tl
BL-BK
11
Rl
BK-OR
37 T1
OR-BK
12
VI-BL
46
Tl
BL-VI
21
Rl
VI-Od
47
Tl
OR-VI
22
RI
VI-GN
48
Tl
GN-VI
23
Rl
VI-BR
49
T1
BR-VI
24
Rl
RD-BL
BL-RD
RD-OR
OR-RD
I
I
31
6
32
7
Tl
I Rl
EC5
WH-BL
BL-WH I
I
I
EC6
t
Tl
Rl
Tl
Rl
4-32
Rl
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
1hble 4-22. Pinouts and color codes for extension
EC8
26
EC7
connector 14
RD-BR
1
34
BR-RD I 9
27
2
RD-SL
Tl
I
Rl
1 35 1 Tl
28
3
29
4
WH-SL
SL-WH
30
5
RD-BL
BL;RD
31
6
RD-OR
OR-RD
32
7
RD-GN
GN-RD
33
8
ITl
RI
OR-BK 1 12 1 Rl
BK-GN
38
Tl
GN-BK I 13 I Rl
BK-BR
I
BL-YL
1 39 1 Tl
16
Rl
1 BR-VI
1
24 1 Rl
VI-SL
50
SL-VI
25
Note: The EQTRK slot is wired to CN14 only in the DBS 96. In the DBS 40 and 72, a card
placed in the EC/IRK slot must be wired to the expansion connector.
4-33
N/A
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Analoa Extensions
Guidelines
.
An MFR card (VB-43431) is required when analog extensions are used. The
MFR card, which provides DTMF signals, includes eight circuits that are
shared among the analog extensions.
.
Analog extensions also require the SLT ringer box (VB-2089P).
Ins talla tion
1. Install the AEC cards in extension
slots.
2. Install the MFR card in AUXl or AUX2, depending on whether an API card
is installed. If an API card is installed, install the MFR card in AUXl.
3. install the SLT Ringer Box as shown in Figure 4- 12.
h
installation,
issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Section 300
Figure 4-12. SLT ringer box installation
CN2
4BV
SG
FIG
SYN
FIG +24V GND
C
B
M
ZO
Zl
22
23
24
RE2
SLT Ringer Box
(VB-2089P)
I
L
L
4-35
RG
SYN
RG
.
.
GND +24V
.
.
REl
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
4. Use a standard 50-pin cable to connect the extensions from the MDF to the
appropriate extension connector. (Refer to Tables 4-20 through 4-22 for
extension pinouts.)
5. If you’re installing a DBS 40 system, attach the EM1 filter to the amphenol
cable as shown in-Figure 4-13.Figure 4-13. EMifiiier
installdion (DBS 40 only)
I
4-36
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
Diaital Extensions
The following instructions explain how to connect digital extensions. These
instructions apply for key phones and Digital Single-Line Telephones (DSLTs).
Special instructions are provided for installing the DSS/72 and EM24 terminals,
which connect to digital phones.
1. Install the DEC cards in extension slots.
2. Use a standard 50-pin cable to connect the extensions from the MDF to the
appropriate extension connector, as shown in Figure 4-l 1 on page 4-29.
(Refer to Tables 4-20 through 4-22 for extension pinouts.)
3. If you’re installing a DBS 40, attach the EMI filter to the amphenol cable, as
shown in Figure 4- 13.
DSS/72
Guidelines
l
l
l
l
l
The DSS/72 (VB-43320) is a 72-key console that can be attached to the
attendant phone. It provides direct station selection and busy lamp fields for
internal lines. The DSS/72 can also be used for text assignment.
When the attendant feature package (VB-43330) is installed, the DSS/72 can
be used as an Attendant Console. The Attendant Console provides station
monitoring and call transfer by name for large systems, even if a large display
phone is not used. For a detailed description of the differences between the
standard DSS/72 and a DSS/72 configured as an Attendant Console, see
Feature Operation, Section 700. For instructions on using the Attendant
Console, see the Attendant Console User Guide, Section 760.
Up to two DSS/72s and one Attendant Console can be assigned to attendant
phones 1 and 2. Attendant phones 3 and 4 can each have one Attendant
Console assigned, but neither can have a DSS/72.
If more than one DSS/72 is assigned to an attendant phone, only one of the
DSS/72s can be cabled from the same wall jack as the attendant phone.
Additional DSS/72s must be cabled from separate wail jacks.
The DSS/72 comes with a mounting bracket, screws, and a two-conductor
cable for attaching the DSS to the key phone.
4-37
Installation,
Issue 2
Section
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
300
/
Installation
1. Attach the DSSf72 to the key phone using the mounting plate and the four
screws.
2. Connect the DSS to the key phone using the two-conductor
3. Connect the DSS to the wall jack using a four-conductor
cable.
cable.
4. Connect the four wires from the key phone and DSS to the MDF.
WX172
cnnnection
Four-Conductor
Cable
Red
Two
Flat-Head Screw
To digital extension pork
(Pork 1 and 2 are attendant
phones by default).
Be careful not to reverse
DSS and key phone wiring.
4-38
Installation,
Issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
Section 300
\
EM/24
Guidelines
l
l
The EM/24 (VB-43310) provides 24 flexible function (FF) keys. It can be
attached to any key phone.
The EM/24 comes with a mounting bracket, screws, and a two-conductor
cable for attaching it to a key phone.
lnstallatioti
1. Attach the EM/24 to the key phone using the mounting plate and the four
screws, as shown in Figure 4- 15.
2. Connect the EM/24 to the key phone using the two-conductor
3. Connect the EM/24 to the wall jack using a four-conductor
cable.
cable.
4. Connect the four wires from the key phone and EM/24 to the MDF connector.
4-39
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Figure 4-15. EM24
Trunks and Lines
August 16; 1993
connection
Four-Conductor
Cable
Green
%
Wall Mount
Modular Jack
Two-Conductor
\Digital
TelThone
Two-Cm
uctor
Cable
Mounting Plate
.-b
(for attaching the
telephone and EM/24)
Flat-Head
Screw
/’
i
Be careful not to
key phone wiring.
4-40
Installation,
Issue 2
Trunks and Lines
August 16,1993
Section 300
Trunk and Line Expansion
Guidelines
.
The EC/TTXK slot can be used for a trunk or extension card.
l
Different expansion connectors
are used for trunks and extensions:
Extension expansion connector
Note: With the DBS 96, the expansion connector is not required to use the
EC/TRK slot for an extension card. The DBS 96 uses connector CN 14 to
accommodate an extension card in the EC/IRK slot. Table 4-22 on page 433 shows the pinouts from the EC/IRK slot to CN14.
Installation
1. Install a trunk or extension card in the slot marked ECIT’RK.
3
I. Connect the appropriate expansion connector to the main cabinet with two
screws, as shown in Figure 4- 16.
3. Connect the ground cable from the FG terminal of the expansion connector
a screw already in use on the right side of the main cabinet.
4. Connect CN2 of the expansion
to
connector to CN 15 on the mother board.
5.
_
Prepare a cable with a %)-pin connector on one end and wiring for the MDF
on the other end.
6.
Cross-connect
7.
Connect the 50-pin connector
the cable to the trunks or extensions
through the MDE
to CN 1 on the expansion
4-41
connector.
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Trunks and Lines
August 16, 1993
‘igure 4-16. Trunk or extension expansion
1
02
03
04
05
06
or
09
09
(R)
010011012tJ13014015016017019019020021022029024025
26~7~29~~~31~2~~4~036~7~9~9~40~41~42~043~~~45~46~47~48~49~50
v)
I
CO Lines or
Extensions
Fasten
witt7 Screw
\
Front View
4-42
I
expansion
connector)
/’
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Chapter 5. Peripheral Equipment
This chapter describes peripheral equipment installation. Some peripheral
equipment also requires trunk and/or line interfaces (door phones or power
failure units, for example). For infonnation on trunk and line connections, see
Chapter 4.
5-l
Installation,
Issue 2
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Section 300
Local PCAS Terminal or SMDR Device
Guidelines
l
l
Connector 6 (CN6) on the Connector Panel provides an RS-232C interface
for connection of a local PCAS terminal or an SMDR device, such as a
printer or call accounting machine.
The following table contains RS-232C designations.
Table 5-I. RS-232C pin designations used for CN6
Signal Name
Description
FG
Frame Ground
TD
1 Transmitted
.
Data
RD
Received Data
RTS
Request to Send
CTS
Clear to Send
DSR
Data Set Ready
SG _
Signal Ground
DTR
-
Data Carrier Detect
DCD
l
Data Terminal Ready
For instructions
on connecting
5-3
a remote PCAS, see the PCAS User’s Guide.
Installation,
issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
lnstalla tion
1. Connect one end of the RS-232C cable to CN6 on the Connector Panel.
Figures 5-l and 5-2 show cable pinouts for 25pin and 9-pin RS-232C
devices. These connections have been used successfully with many PCs and
SMDR devices. However, consult the documentation of the PC or SMDR
device before fabricating a cable.
2. Connect the other end of the RS-232C cable to the PCAS or SMDR device.
Figure 5-l. RS-232C connection, 25pin to 25pin
PCAS
SMDR”L3
“3dcA-J
Master Cabinet
Mail
cabinet
ufcun
(exe)
Slgnd
Nun
\
\
Rs23x
PcAsorsMoRRirlerRsz32c
Circuit lypa
Pin No.
5-4
m-d
conruclii
EIA
Installation,
Issue 2
Peripheral Equipment
August 3Q, 1993
Section 300
Figure S-2. RS-;
!C connection, 25pin to 9-pin
2
2
3
3 TD
RD
7
4 DTR
5
6
‘::
8
5 !3G
1 DCD
6
L
8
5-5
DSR
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
f
Remote Administration
Interface (RAI)
Guidelines
l
l
The RAI is a modem card that installs on the SCC card. The card is used to
remotely administer the system through a trunk line.
Two versions of the RAI card are available. The following table shows the
transmission rate of each card, along with the SCC version it can be used
with.
Table 5-2. RAI compatibility
’ RAI Version/Part No.
Transmission
Rate
SCC Compatibility
RAI-A (VB-43706)
300 bps
SCC-A or SCC-B
RAI-B (VB-43707)
300 bps/1200 bps
SCC-B only
Installation
* Remove the upper cover of the SCC card.
Jumper 1 (J 1) on the RAI-B controls the transmission rate. When closed, the
transmission rate is switchable from 300 bps to 1200 bps via programming.
When open, the rate is fixed at 300 bps.
l
Connect the RAI card to the connector on the SCC card.
The RAI-A connects to CN3. RAI-B connects to CN2 and CN3.
l
Replace the upper cover of the SCC.
Note: To adjust the output level of the RAI, set switch 4 as shown in Figure
5-3.
5-6
Installation,
Issue 2
Figure 53.
Peripheral Equipment
August 30; 1993
Section 300
RAI connection
5-7
installation,
Issue 2
Peripheral Equipment
August 30, 1993
Section 300
Backaround
Music/Music-On-Hold
Guidelines
. A single music source can be used for both background music (BGM) and
music-on-hold
feature.
(MOH), or separate music sources can be used for each
.
If a single music source is used for both MOH and BGM, the music source
connects to CNS on the Connector Panel. If separate sources are used, the
MOH source connects to CN5, and the BGM source connects to the BGM
connector on the XC card.
.
Jf an FM radio is connected to the BGM connector on the SCC, install it at
least 16.5 ft. (5m) away from the main cabinet. If it is too close, the receiver
may not function properly.
.
The maximum input impedance of both terminals is 10k ohms. The
maximum signal level is - 10 dB.
f
Ins talla tion
1. If you’re using a single source for both BGM and MOH, connect the source
to CN5 on the Connector Panel. If you’re using sf ! ate sources. connect the
J on the SCC
MOH source to CN5 and the BGM source tc the e- VI tonne
card.
2. Strap the CN5 block (SCC-A) or the CN4 bloc, * KC-B)
number of music sources used.
a : .:lding to the
i
5-8
Installation,
Issue 2
Section
300
Peripheral
Equipment
August 30, 1993
Note: To change the volume levels of the music sources, adjust the variable
resistors on the SCC card.
Table 5-3. SCC variable resistors
1 Variable Resistor
1
Purpose
I
SCC-A
I VRl
I WG
1
Adjusts CO ringing tone volume.
I Adjust MOH volume.
SCC-B
VRl
1 VR2
VR6
Fi,
nf music-on-hold
1
Adjusts MOH volume.
I Adjust BGM volume.
Adjusts CO ringing tone volume.
and backwound
5-9
music
I
Installation,
issue 2
Peripheral Equi.pment
August 30,1993
Section 300
Off-Premises
Adaptor COPX)
Guidelines
l
Analog phones can be connected as off-premise stations through a direct line
to the DBS or through the central office, depending on how far the stations
are from the OPX Adaptor.
Table 5-4 shows how far the OPX stations can be from the adaptor without
going through a CO.
Table 54. Maximum distances for direct connection to OPX shtions
Max. disfance (in feet) between
the OPX Adaptor and the OPX
station
Wiring
gauge
AWG 22
27877
AWG 24
17532
AWG26
11025
1
f
.
One OPX Adaptor (VB-43702) is required for each OPX station.
.
The ringing output of the OPX Adaptor is 225 Vp-p (peak-to-peak)
.
When OPX stations are connected through the central office, an external
ringer supply may be required. If required, the ringing supply is connected
the OPX Adaptor.
0,
The following tools are required to install the OPX Adaptor:
- Phillips screwdriver
- Needle-nose
pliers
- Diagona! cutters
5-l 0
at 20 Hz.
to
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Installation
The following procedures describe direct OPX connection and.OPX connection
through a CO. Refer to Figure 5-6 on page 5- 13 when installing the OPX.
Installing an OPX Station Without Going Through a Central Office
1. Remove the cover from the OPX Adaptor.
2. Remove the cable punch-out plate (Figure 5- 11) to make an opening for the
cables coming into the OPX Adaptor.
To remove the plate, cut the grooves on either side with diagonal cutters.
Then bend the plate back and forth with needle-nose pliers to remove it.
Figure 5-S. Cable punch-out pl bte. OPX Aaktor
i
,
3. Mount the OPX Adaptor to the wall.
Note: Table 5-5 shows how far the Adaptor can be located from the DBS.
Table 5-5. Maximum distances for OPX Adaptor install&ion
Max. distance (in feet) between
the DBS and OPX Adaptor
Wiring
mwe
AWG 22
309
I
AWG 24
194
AWG 26
122
5-l 1
I
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
4. Connect the “R” and “T” leads to a digital extension port on the DBS. .
5. Connect the “GNU’ lead on the OPX Adaptor to the DBS Frame Ground
screw.
6. Connect the “TR” and “?T’ leads to the OPX station.
7. Install the cover on the OPX Adaptor.
8. Power the system down then back up, or unplug the cable connected to the
digital extension, then plug it back in;
Installing an OPX Station Through a Central Office
1. Perform Steps 1 through 5, which begin on page 5- 11.
2. Connect the “TR” and “TT’ leads to the central office.
Note: if the central office requests a ground on the tip side of the OPX, strap
Pins 1 to 2 on CN3.
3. Connect the OPX station to the central office.
4. If the ringing level at the OPX station is not sufficient, connect a tinging
supply to the “E-RG+” and “E-RG-” terminals on the OPX Adaptor.
Note: Signals to the external ringer should not exceed 300 Vp-p.
5. If a ringing supply is used, cut Straps Jl and J2 on the OPX Adaptor.
6. Install the cover on the OPX Adaptor.
7. Power the system down then back up, or unplug the cable connected
digital extension, then plug it back in.
to the
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Figure 5-6. OPX instalhtion
I-
To a DBS
digital line
Port
3
R
T
-
-
,‘,::;:::I
ringing
source)
E-RG+
E-RG-
I
TR
To the DBS
Frame Ground
screw
TT
To off-premise
SLT
II
t--i
,
1-s
CN3
Off -Premise
Extension Adaptor
(VB-43702)
5-13
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30; 1993
Paginq
Guidelines
l
l
l
The paging amplifier, relays, and speakers are not provided with the DBS.
They must be purchased separately.
The maximum current for each zone paging terminal on the Connector Panel
(ZOZ4) is 50 mA; the resistance of the relay used for each zone paging
terminal must be 2600 to 2800 Ohms.
Connector 4 (CN4) on the Connector Panel is used to connect the paging
amplifier. The output impedance of CN4 is 600 Ohms; the loss/gain setting is
OdB.
Installation
1. Connect the paging amplifier to CN4 on the DBS Connector Panel. (See
Figure 5-7 on page 5- 15.)
2. Connect the paging speakers to the amplifier.
3. Connect the relays to the amplifier.
4. Connect the relays to the +24V and zone paging terminals (20-24) on the
Connector Panel.
5-l 4
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30, 1993
Figure 5-7. External paging installah’on
CN4
(RCA Cqnnector)
+
-48V
SG &%
RG +24V GND
C
CN2
B
M
ZO
Zl
22
23
24
RE2 REl
\
/
,o/o/~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~lolo/ol~l~
Relays
E
5-l 5
All-Page
Speaker
Installation,
issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30, 1993
External Rinser WNA Device)
Guidelines
.
An external ringer can be used to alert users when Universal Night Answer
(UNA) calls come in.
.
The external ringer is not provided with the DBS. It must be purchased
separately.
.
UNA calls can also be set to ring over an external paging system.
l
The contact rating for the “C” and “M” terminals is 30V DC, 1 amp
(maximum).
Installation
1
Connect the external ringer to the “C” and “M” terminals on the Connector
Panel. (See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17.)
Note: Connecting the ringer to the “c” and “M” terminals provides a “ 1
second on/3 seconds off’ ringing pattern. Connecting to “C” and “B”
terminals provides a “1 second off/3 seconds on” ringing pattern.
2. Connect the external ringer to its DC power source.
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30, 1993
Oigure S-8. External ringer (UNA device) installation
CN2
-48V
SG
&?J
RG +24V GND
/
010/0/0/0/0101010/0/o1o/o1o1o10
r
5-17
C
B
M
ZO
Zl
22
23
24
RE2 REl
,
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Power Failure Transfer
Guidelines
l
l
l
Up to four SLTs can be connected to the Power Failure Unit (VA-43703). If a
power failure occurs, the SLTs will automatically receive dial tone from the
central office. DBS features and restrictions do not apply when the SLTs are
receiving dial tone from the CO.
If a call is in progress through the Power Failure Unit (PFU) when the power
is restored, the call will be disconnected.
The following tools are required to install the PFU:
- Phillips screwdriver
- Needle-nose
pliers
- Diagonal cutters
installation
1. Remove the cover from the Power Failure Unit (PFU).
2. Remove the cable punch-out plate (Figure 5-9) to make a opening for the
cables coming into the PF’U.
To remove the plate, cut the grooves on either side with diagonal cutters.
Then bend the plate back and forth with needle-nose pliers to remove it.
5-18
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Figure 5-9. Cable punch-out plate, Power Failure Unit
3. Mount the PFU on the wall using the three screws provided with the unit.
(See Figure 5-10.)
4. Connect the trunks from the central office to the PFU.
5. Connect the SLTs to the AEC extension ports on the PFU.
6. Connect the trunks from the DBS to the PFU.
7. Connect the AEC ports from the DBS to the PFU.
When a power failure occurs, AEC “A” is switched to Trunk “A,” AEC “B”
is switched to Trunk “B,” and so on.
8. Connect the +24V and GND terminals from CN2 on the DBS Connector
Panel to the PFU.
9. Install the cover on the PFU.
Installation,
Issue 2
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Section 300
P
\
‘igure S-IO.Power Failure Unit (PFU) installation
in.
From
the Maln
Cabtnel
i
AEC
AEC
AEC
t&C
Extension Porl No. A
Extension Port No. 8
Extension Porl No. C
Extension Porl NO. D
To
rhe Main
Cabinet
TRK Porl No. 0
TRK Pan No. C
AEC Extension Pan No.
AEC ExWnston Pofl No. C
- Trunk Line A
- _
Trunk Line
. el-
To SLT
Tn thy central CXlice
f
To +24V and GND
on CN2 d me
t&in Cabinet
(no polarization)
5-20
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
:
Voice Announce
Unit (VAU)
Guidelines
l
l
l
Operating temperatures for the Voice Announce
between 35 and 105” F.
Unit (VB-43708)
should be
Maximum loop resistance for the VAU is 10 Ohms.
The VAU contains a rechargeable lead-acid battery. Recharging
the battery is included on the VAU.
circuity for
0 The ports used for the VAU must have all FF key assignments cleared before
voice messages and abbreviated dial numbers are programmed.
l
The following tools are required to install the VAU:
- Phillips screwdriver
- Needle-nose pliers
.
- Diagonal cutters
lnstalla tion
1. Remove the cover from the Voice Announce
Unit.
2. Set SW 1 and SW2 according to the following tables. (Default settings are
italicized.)
See Figure 5-13 for the location of the switch blocks.
Table 5-6. Switch settings for SWI,
VAU
Function
Switch
1
ON=Enable blind transfer
OFF=Disable
blind transfer
(VAU chip 1.1 or later is required for blind transfer.)
ON=Small DBS
OFF=DBS
ON=Two messages up to 16 seconds each
OFF = One message up to 32 seconds
5-21
,
J
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30; 1993
Table 5-7. Switch settings for delay answer timing, VAU
Table 5-8. Switch settings for DTMF detection timing, VAU
Switch Block I (SWI)
DTMF Detection Timer
Switch
Function
4
ON=80 rns
OFF=40 ms
Table 5-9. Swi&h settings for wait timing between dialed digits, VAU
Switch Block 2 (SW2)
Wait Time Between Dialed Digits (Switches 5-6)
Switch
5
I
Time (in seconds)
2
6
OFF
OFF
1 OFF
1 ON
5-22
IO
ON
1 OFF
14
ON
1 ON
1
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 3.0, 1993
Table S-10. Switch seatings for abbreviated
dialing digit length, VAU
Switch Block 2 (S W2)
Abbreviated Dialing Digit Length (Switches 7-8)
1
Switch
Number of Digits
1 Digit
2 Digits
3 Digits
7
OFF
OFF
ON
8
OFF
ON
OFF
3. Remove the cable punch-out plate (Figure 5- 11) to make an opening for the
cable coming into the VAU.
To remove the plate, cut the grooves on either side with diagonal cutters.
Then bend the plate back and forth with needle-nose pliers to remove it.
Figure 5-ll.Cable
punch-oat plate,
oice
Announce Unit
4. Mount the VAU on the wall using the three screws providd
(See Figure 5- 13.)
with the unit.
5. Connect the extension cable from the DBS to CNl on the VAU.
Note that two inside pins on CNI are port 1. The two pins on either side are
port 2, as shown in Figure 5- 12.
5-23
Installation,
Issue 2
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Section 300
,’
CNl on
ihe
bottom
of the VAU
I
\M/
Port2
f
i
5-24
Installation,
issue 2
Peripheral Equipment
August 30, 1993
Section 300
Door Box AdaDtor
Guidelines
l
l
The Door Box Adaptor (VB-43701) requires a door opener and door sensor.
In addition, a Door Box (VA-43705) is normally used with the Door Box
Adaptor. The door opener and door sensor are not sold by Panasonic; they
can be purchased separately from an electronics dealer.
Each Door Box and opener use one trunk port. Also, each sensor uses one
trunk port
0 Up to two door openers and two Door Boxes can be connected to a Door Box
Adaptor.
l
l
The Door Opener can be set to open for 15 seconds, 30 seconds, or one
minute.
The following tools are required to install the Door Box Adaptor:
- Phillips screwdriver
- Needle-nose
pliers
- Diagonal cutters
Installation
1. Remove the cover from the Door Box Adaptor.
2. Set the switches in the Door Box Adaptor according to Figure 5-l 5.
3. Remove the cable punch-out plate (Figure 5-14) in order to make an opening
for the cables coming into the Door Box Adaptor.
To remove the plate, cut the grooves on either side with diagonal cutters.
Then bend the plate back and forth with needle-nose pliers to remove it.
5-25
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
Figure S-14.Cable punch-out plate, D
L
4. Mount the Door Box Adaptor on the wall using the three screws provided
with the unit.
5. Connect the trunk line(s) to the Door Box Adaptor, as shown in Figure 5-15.
The “CO-D” connector is used for the Door Box and opener. The “C0.S”
connector is used for the sensor.
6. Connect the Door Box, door opener, and sensor to the Door Box Adaptor.
5-26
/-
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Figure 5-lS.InstaUation
Peripheral Equipment
August 30,1993
of the door box, door opener, and door sensor
12345676
DoorBoxAdefstor(vw3701)
Contact Ratings for
Opener 1 and 2:
120V AC: 0.3 amps
30V DC: 1 amp
Dl3S40
DBS721llBS96
5-27
installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 16, 1993
Chapter 6. Double-Cabinet Svstems
Two DBS cabinets can be connected in order to increase linesize. This chapter
includes connection procedures, as well as capacities for two-cabinet systems.
See Chapter 4 for instructions
on installing Tls in two-cabinet
6-l
systems.
installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Double-Cabinet Systems
August l&1993
Guidelines
Two DBS cabinets can be connected to increase linesize. The maximum
linesize consists of two DBS 96 cabinets, which provide 192 ports.
CPC-B and SCC-B are required for two-cabinet
systems.
If ground start or DID trunks are used in both cabinets, separate -48V
supplies must be supplied for each cabinet. If SLTs are used in both cabinets,
separate SLT ringer boxes must be supplied for each cabinet.
The following
table shows the acceptable combinations
of system types
Table 6-1. Trunk and extension port maximums for double-cabinet systems
Expansion Ports
k lines or exten-
Notes:
1. The slave cabinet must be used for expansion ports.
2. When a DBS72 and DBS40 are connected, expansion ports cannot be used.
l
Figures 6- 1 through 6-6 shows slot usage for two-cabinet
6-3
combinations.
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 16, 1993
i
Figure 6-I. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, DBS 40 + DBS 40
DBS 40 (Slave)
TRKl
EC1 EC2 EC3 EC/TRK SCC CPC AUXl
AUX2
5
DBS 40 (Master)
*See “Tl Interface” on page 4-9 for EC/TRK port numbers for Tl.
#A maximum of two MFR cards can be installed in a two-cabinet system. With Cable Kit
Version 1.1, one MFR is installed in the Master AUXl, and one MFR is installed in the Slave
AUX 1. With Cable Kit Version 1.2, both MFR cards are installed in the slave cabinet--one in
the CPC slot and one in AUX 1. (When two MFR cards are used, Strap S3 on the second card
must be cut.)
6-4
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 16,1993
Figure 6-2. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, DBS 72 + DBS 40
DBS 40 (Slave)
TRKl
EC1 EC2 EC3 EC/TRK SCC CPC AUXI
AUX2
xl
G
+
8
tt:
9
ii
0
z
f
G
s;
ii
Y
z
;
$
?
z
ik
2%
ir
DBS 72 (Master)
TRK
EC5 EC6 EC/
I
I TRK
Notes:
*A maximum of two MFR cards can be installed in a two-cabinet system.Wlth Cable Kit
Version 1.1, one MFR is installed in the Master AUXl, and one MFR is installed in the Slave
AUX 1. With Cable Kit Version 1.2, both MFR cards are installed in the slave cabinet--one in
the CPC slot and one in AUXI. (When two MFR cards are used, Strap S3 on the second card
must be cut)
6-5
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Figure 6-3. Slot usage for two-cabinet
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 1.6, 1993
systems, DBS 72 + DBS 72
DBS 72 (Slave)
DBS 72 (Master)
TRK1 TRK2 EC1 EC2 EC3 EC4 EC5 EC6 EC/TRK SCC CPC AUXl
AUX2
Notes:
YSee “Tl Interface”
on page 4-9 for EC/TRK port numbers for Tl.
Beginning with CPC-B Version 4, the EC/TRK slot in the slave DBS 72 can be used for trunks
or lines. Prior to CPC-B Version 4, this slot could only be used for lines.
,‘A maximum of two MFR cards can be installed in a two-cabinet system. With Cable Kit
Version 1.1, one MFR is installed in the Master AUXl, and one MFR is installed in the Slave
AUX 1. With Cable Kit Version 1.2, both MFR cards are installed in the slave cabinet--one in
the CPC slot and one in AUX 1. (When two MFR cards are used, Strap S3 on the second card
must be cut)
6-6
installation,
Issue 2
Figure 64.
Section 300
Slot usage for two-cabinet
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 16,1993
systems, DBS 96 + DBS 40
DBS 40 (Slavej
DBS 96 (Master)
*See “Tl Interface*’ on page 4-9 for EC/IRK
port numbers for Tl.
“A maximum of two MFR cards can be installed in a two-cabinet system. With Cable Kit
Version 1.1, one MFR is installed in the Master AUX 1, and one MFR is installed in the Slave
AUX 1. With Cable Kit Version 1.2, both MFR cards are installed in the slave cabinet--one in
the CPC slot and one in AUXl. (When two MFR cards are used, Strap S3 on the second card
must be cut)
6-7
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 16,1993
Figure 6-5. Slot usage for two-cabinet systems, DBS 96 + DBS 72
DBS 72 (Slave)
TRKl TRKZ EC1 EC2 EC3 EC4 EC5 EC6 EC/TRK SCC CPC AUXl
AUX2
DBS 96 (Master)
TRKl TRK2 TRK3 EC1 EC2 EC3 EC4 EC5 EC6 EC7 EC8 EC/TRK SCC CPC AUXl AUX2
b
*See “Tl Interface” on page 4-9 for EC/IRK
port numbers for Tl.
#A maximum of two MFR cards can be installed in a two-cabinet system. With Cable Kit
Version 1.1, one MFR is installed in the Master AUXl, and one MFR is installed in the Slave
AUX 1. With Cable Kit Version 1.2, both MFR cards are installed in the slave cabinet--one in
the CPC slot and one in AUXl . (When two MFR cards are used, Strap S3 on the second card
must be cut)
6-8
l-8
CBL-M
TRK 25-32* or
EXT 97-l 04
EXT 25-32
g I
;
,,,,
TRK 57-64* or 5
EXT 121-128
EXT 129-136
B
;
8
cd
N
%
Q,
$
I
5;1
Ix I
EXT 113-120
EXT 105-112
EXT89-96
EXT 81-88
EXT 17-24
F
IEXT
TRK 33-40
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 16,1993
Installation
1. Install the trunk and extension cards according to the layouts shown in the
Figures 6- 1 through 6-6.
Note that the port numbers for each slot are fixed.
2. If you’re using two MFR cards, cut Strap S3 on the second card.
Figure 6-7. Strap 3, MFR card
i
3. Using the cables provided, connect the CBL-M card in the master cabinet to
the CBL-S card installed in the slave cabinet.
Note: The EM1 filter must be instalkd less than 3/S inches from the right
sides of both the master and slave CBL cards.
6-10
(
Installation,
Issue 2
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 16,1993
Section 300
Figure 6-8. Double-cabinet
installation
Stave Cabinet
Digital Deskset
Pmgramming ~01-10
SMDR Printer
Master Cabinet
4. Connect two 24V power supply cords from the CE3L-S card to the 24V and
GND terminals on CN2 of the Connector Panel of the slave cabinet.
Figure 6-9. CBL-S to Connector
Panel connection,
slave cabinet
CBL-S
CARD
6-l 1
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Double-Cabinet Systems
August 16,1993
5. Set SW 1 on the CBL-M card according to the following table.
Table 6-2. CBL-M switch settings
System Combinations
Master
Slave
DBS40
Switch Settings
1
2
3
4
5
DBS40
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DBS72
DBS40
ON
OFF
ON
ON
DBS72
DBS72
ON
OFF
ON
DBS96
DBS40
OFF
ON
DBS96
DBS72
OFF
DBS96
DBS96
OFF
6
7
8
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OF@
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
f-
6-l 2
Installation,
Issue 2
Specifications
August 30,1993
Section 300
Chapter 7. Specifications
This chapter contains frequently referenced
DBS specifications.
Note that all maximums may not be attainable simultaneously. Also, attainment
of some maximums depends on levels of feature usage and optional hardware
requirements.
Though every effort was made to ensure the accuracy of these specifications,
Panasonic does NOT warrant them in regard to merchantability or fitness for a
particular purpose. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
7-l
Installation,
jssue 2
Section 300
Specifications
August 30, 1993
Electrical Characteristics
Table 7-1. Input power
1Equipment
1Power
Requirements
All DBS cabinets
)120VAC
DBS key phones
13 watts maximum
Table 7-2. Power consumption
I
60Hz+lO%
(powered from the DBS)
and heat generation
Power Consumption
(in Watts)
With no
traffic
170
250
320
340
420
500
490
570
640
216
324
444
432
540
648
660
768
888
With max.
traffic
Heat Generation
With no
traffic
(Btu per hour)
580
853
1092
1160
1433
1706
1672
1945
2184
737
1106
1515
1474
1843
2212
2253
2621
3031
With max.
traffic
Table 7-3. Battery backup capacity
System
Battery Pack
Capacity (with maximum traffic)
DBS 40
VB-2450A-2P
40 minutes
DBS 72
VB-2650-2P
40 minutes
DBS 96
VB-2650-2P
30 minutes
7-3
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Environmental
Requirements
Table 74. Temperature
~Environmental
Specifications
August 30,1993
and humidity requirements
Requirements
Conditions
‘Temperature
32 to 104’ F (0 to 40” C)
‘Relative Humidity
30 to 90%
Table 7-5. Dimensions
and weight, single-cabinet
Physical
Characteristics
systems and phones
_
DBS 96
DBS 72
DBS 40
Dimensions (H x W x D in inches)
21 x 15 x 9.35
Cabinet
21 x 19.5 x 9.4
21 x 19.5 x 9.4
VB-43225
4 l/S x 7 318 x 9
Other key phones
3 314 x 7 3/L(x 9
3 l/8 x 7 318 x 9 l/8
DSLT
DSSf72
3 l/2 x 7 l/2 x 9
EM/24
3 3/13 x 3 l/8 x 8 318
Weight (Ibs)
53
Cabinet
65
1
VB-43225
2.3
Other key phones
2.2
DSLT
1.6
DSSl72
1.6
EM/24
.9
Tczble 7-4. Dimensions
1Cabinet
for two-cabinet
68
systems
Installation
Cabinets installed one above the
other (I 0 in. between)
I
DBS 40 + DBS 40
52x 15x9.35
I
7-4
All ~~
Other
I ~~
~
~Combinations
52 x 19.5 x 9.4
-1
Section 300, Installation
Issue 2
Specifications
August 30,1993
Resource Maximums
Table 7-7. Trunk and line capacities
System
Resources
24
+
+
ES
gg
22
32
40
48
88
112
128
16
16
22
QQ
f
nonblocking
1 Trunk/Extension
speech path switching
Notes:
*Beginning with CPC-B Version 4, the EUIRK slot in the slave DBS 72 can be used for
trunks or lines. Prior to CPC-B Version 4, this slot could only be used for lines.
Table 7-8. Feature-related
capacities
Maximums
Resource
Attendants
No. of attendants
with CPC-A
2
No. of attendants
with CPC-B
4
(Version 2.0 or later)
No. of attendants
2 (ATT3 1 and 2 only)
that can be assigned DSW2s
No. of attendants that can be assigned Attendant
Consoles
CPC-A
0
CPC-B
4 (1 per attendant)
Callback requests
No. of requests that can be received by a single
station
4
Call coverage
No. of groups
16
No. of stations in a group
8
Call forwarding
No. of simultaneous
tions
call forwarding
No. of stations-in the system
registra-
7-5
16
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Specifications
August 30, 1993
Maximums
Resource
Conference circuits
SCC-A
3 four-party circuits
SCC-B
8 four-party circuits
DISA
No. of incoming authorization
codes
No.of outgoing authrorization
codes
No-of digits in each authorization
2
4
code
Hunting
No. of groups
No. of stations in a group
Least cost routing
1 Area Code table
No. of routing tables
1 Office Code table
4 Special Area Code tables
4 Special Office Code tables
1000
No. of entries in each routing table
No. of digit addition tables
8
No. of digits that can be added
16
No. of digit deletion tables
8
No. of digits that can be deleted
16
No. of time priority tables
15
No. of LCR trunk groups
Toll Restrictions
No. of Toll Restriction
8
types
No. of 7-digit restrictions
50
No. of area code restriction tables
4
No. of entries in each area code restriction
table
loo0 (4000 total)
4
No. of office code restriction tables
No. of entries in each office code restriction
table
loo0 (4000 total)
Paging
8
No. of groups
No. of stations in the system
No. of stations in a group
7-6
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Specifications
August 30,1993
Maximums
i L Resource
Speed dial
No. of personal speed dial numbers
10 per extension (90 - 99)
No. of system speed dial numbers
90 (00 - 89)
No. of digits per speed dial number
16
(personal and system)
Trunk Queuing
No. of trunk queuing registrations
Table 7-9. Hardware
1 per station
maximums for single-cabinet
systems
Quantity
Description
Part No.
DBS 40
DBS 72
DBS 96
Phones
VB-43210
16-key standard telephone with
handsfree answerback
VB-43220
22-key standard telephone with
handsfree answerback
VB-4322 1
22-key speakerphone
VB-43223
22-key speakerphone
display
with LCD
VB-43225
22-key speakerphone
LCD display
with large
VB-43230
34-key telephone with handsfree
answerback
_
VB-4323 1
34-key speakerphone
VB-43233
34-key speakerphone
with LCD dis-
play
7-7
32
56
72
_~
installation,
issue 2
Part No.
Section 300
Specifications
August 30, 1993
Quantity
Description
DBS 40
DBS 72
DBS 96
Phone Options
VB-433 10
24-key expansion
module (EM24)
VB-43320
72-key DSS/BLF module (DSS/72)
16
28
36
CPC-A: 4
CPC-B: 8 (up to 4 can be assigned as
DSS/72s; up to 4 can be assigned as
Attendant Consoles)
VB-43884
7 ft. handset cord
VB-43885
15 ft. handset cord
VB-43886
25 ft. handset cord
VB-43890
K-type handset
32
56
72
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
Printed Circuit Cards
VB-43 110
Cable kit for 2-system connection
VB-43410
Call processor card (CPC-A)
VB-43411
Call processor card (CPC-B)
VB-43420
Service circuit card (SCC-A)
VB-4342 1
Service circuit card (SCC-B)
VB-4343 1
DTMF signal receiver for 8 SLT
lines (MFR/8)
VB-435 10
4-port loop-start trunk card
(L-TLW4)
VB-435 11
s-port loop-start trunk card
(L-TRIv8)
VB-4354 1
Direct-inward-dialing
(DID)
VB-4353 1
g-port ground-start
(G-TRW8)
VB-4356 1
T 1 Interface
1
1
1
VB-43562
Tl MDF card
1
1
1
VB-43563
Tl Sync Unit
1
1
1
VB-436 11
8-port digital extension
VB-4362 1
g-port analog extension card (AEC)
trunk card
trunk card
card (DEC)
7-8
(44total)
3
(77total)
4
9
(9 total:
4
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Specifications
August 30, 1993
nistration Interface
Application
processor interface
(API)
VB-4398 1
VMS software
VB-43983
ACD software
VB-4399 1
PCAS software
7-9
installation,
Issue 2
Section
Table 7-10. Hardware
Part No.
300
Specifications
August 3d,lS93
maximums for double-cabinet
Description
systems
Quantity
+
%%
+
w$
+
22
+
2%
+
$2
+
S$
@
22
qq
22
qf3
22
qq
2%
qQ
22
Qf3
Phones
VB-43210
16-key keyphone
w/ handsfree answerback
VB-43220
22-key keyphone
w/ handsfree answerback
VB-4322 1
22-key speakerphone
VB-43223
22-key speakerphone
w/ LCD display
VB-43225
22-key speakerphone
56
72
104
104
128
144
56
52
64
72
w/ large LCD display
VB-43230
34-key keyphone
w/ handsfree answerback
VB-4323 1
34-key keyphone
VB-43233
34-key keyphone
w/ LCD display
Phone Options
VB-433 10
24-key expansion
32
44
module (EM24)
VB-43320
72-key DSS/B LF module
(DSW2)
CPC-A: 4
CPC-B: 8 (up to 4 can be assigned as DSS/72s;
up to 4 can be assigned as Attendant Consoles)
VB-43884
7 ft. handset cord
VB-43885
15 ft. handset cord
VB-43886
25 ft. handset cord
VB-43890
K-type handset
56
7-10
72
104
104
128
144
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Specifications
August 30, 1993
Quantity
Description
Part No.
+
+
+
+
+
+
S%
2%
22
s3
22
$2
$8
22
44
gj
22
44
z2
44
g
Printed Circuit Cards
VB-43 110 Cable kit for 2-cab. systems
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
5
6
7
8
VB-4356 1 Tl Interface
2
2
2
2
2
2
VB-43562
Tl MDF Card
2
2
2
2
2
2
VB-43563
Tl Sync Card
1
1
1
1
1
1
VB-43611
g-port digital extension card
7
9
13
13
VB-43410
Call processor card (CPC-A)
VB-434 11 Call processor card (CPC-B)
VB-43420 Service circuit card (SCC-A)
VB-4342 1 Service circuit card (SCC-B)
VB-4343 1 DTMF signal receiver for 8
SLT lines (MFR/S)
VB-435 10 4-port loop-start trunk card
_
(L-TRK/4)
VB-435 11 X-port loop-start trunk card
(L-TRK/8)
VB-43541
Direct-inward-dialing
card (DID)
VB-4353 1 g-port ground-start
card (G-TRW8)
trunk
trunk
(DEC)
VB-43621
&port analog extension card
(AEC)
_ (7
16
18
total) (U total) (13 total) (13 total) (16 total) (18 total:
6
7-11
7
8
7
8
8
Installation, Section
issue 2
Part No.
300
Specifications
August 30,1993
Description
Quantity
+
+
2%
S%
8s
22
QQ
+
22
+
%:$3
+
%2
+
Z$
22
Qf=l
2%
qa
2%
f2Q
22
Qf3
2
2
1*
0*
Expansion Connectors
VB-43 120
Trunk expansion
connector
VB-43 12 1
2
Extension expansion
2
2
2
-.-.-
connector
Doorbox Equipment
VB-4370 1
Door box adaptor
24
24
48
48
58
64
VB-43705
Door box
48
48
96
96
112
128
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
2
2
2
2
Optional Equipment
VB-43706
Remote Administration
Interface (RA 1-A)
VB-43707
Remote Administration
-
1
1
Interface (RA I-B)
VB-2450A-2P
Built-in system backup
batteries
VB-2650-2P
Built-in system backup
2
N/A
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
N/A
2
1
1
N/A
batteries
VB-2089P
SLT ringer box
VA-43703
Qline
VB-43702
Off-premise
power
failure unit
2
2
2
2
12
14
16
14
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
_
extension adaptor
VB-43940
Application
processor
interface (API)
VB-439X 1
VMS software
VB-439X3
ACD software
VB-43991
PCAS software
*Note: An expansion connector is not required to use an extension card in the E6flRK
slot of a DBS 96.
The DBS 96 uses connector CN 14 to accommodate an extension card in the ECflRK slot.
7-12
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Specifications
August 30,1993
Cabling Specifications
Table 7-11. Maximum cabling distances
Loop Type and Resistance
Key phone, EM/24
Resistance
Cable Gauge
(AWG)
Maximum Cabling Length in Feet
(Distance from the DBS)
22
1239
24
779
26
490
22
619
24
779
26
490
22
3097
24
1948
26
1225
40 Ohms
20 Ohms
DSS/72
00 Ohms
SLT
OPX (Loop between the
DBS and the OPX Adaptor)
OPX (Loop between the
DPX Adaptor and a pushbutton SLT)
Door-phone (Loop between
the DBS and the poorphone Adaptor)
Doorphone (Loop between
lhe Doorphone Adaptor
and the Doorphone)
22
10 Ohms
900 Ohms
1
:excluding end
.mpedance)
I
10 Ohms
40 Ohms
._
24
194
26
122
22
27877
24
17532
26
11025
22
I
Unit
I
26
I
22
I
10Ohms
309
194
1
I
24
I
779
26
I
490
I
24
I
26
7-13
122
I
1239
22
Voice Announce
309
I
309
I
194
122
I
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Communiciition
Specifjcations
August 30,1993
Parameters
Table 7-12. Voice path from KTELs to DBS
Speed
Channel
Overall communications
path
256 kbps
D-channel data
16 kbps
i B-channel
64 kbps
data
Table 7-13. Data communications
ports
‘art
Parameters
MDR
Interface
RS232-C
Baud rate
300,1200,4800
Parity
Even, odd, or none
4aintenance
(RAI card)
or 9600 kbps
IStop bit length
11, 1.5, or 2
IData bit length
IS, 6,7, or 8
(Baud rate
I300 (RAI-A) or 300 or 1200 @AI-B)
Stop bit length
1
Data bit length
8
Parity
Even
7-l 4
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Specifications
August 30,1993
Signaling Characteristics
Table 7-14. Signaling to CO
Item
Specif”rcation
Dial pulse
8 to 11 pulses per second (PPS)
Break ratio
58 to 64%
Minimum pause
0.7 to 1.0 seconds
Trunk start
Loop or ground start
Table 7-15. Signaling levels
Level
Item
Trunk input (DISA)
-40 dBm (minimum)
Output from DBS
High level: -8 d.Bm (minimum)
(at MDF)
Low level: -10 dBm (minimum)
Distortion
Less than 10%
1
Analog station input
(Dial status)
Analog station output
High level: -8 dE%m+/-0.5 dBm
(Talk path originated from a Low level: -6 dBm+/-0.5 dBm
key phone to an SLT)
Tdle
7-16. Transmission
specijicahons
km
Specifxation
mpedance
600 Ohms
Iverload level
600 Ohms
nsertion Loss
CO trunk to analog station
OdB
Analog station to CO trunk
OdB
CO trunk to digital station
OdB
Digital station to CO trunk
OdB
Digital station to digital station
6dB
Digital station to analog station
6dB
Analog station to digital station
6dB
Analog station to analog station
6dB
7-15
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Specifications
August 30,1993
Tone Characteristics
Table 7-17. Tone Phn
Tone Name
Frequency
1
Timing (seconds)
CO Call Tones
CO incoming call
550/400 Hz at 16 Hz
Programmable
Hold recall
55OMOOHz at 16 Hz
0.5 on/3.5 off
Transfer recall
550/400 Hz at 16 Hz
0.5 on/3.5 off
Trunk queuing
550/400 Hz at 16 Hz
0.5 on/O.5 off/O.5 on/2.5 off
CO offhook signal
550 Hz
logoff
Internal Tones (Key Phones)
Dial tone
CO incoming
call
4OOHz
Continuous
550 Hz
1 on/3 off (Prior to CPC-B 3.1)
Programmable
(CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
Callback
4OOHz
1 on/3 off
Busy
4OOHz
0.5 on/o.5 off
Busy override
4OOHz
0.25 on/O.25 off/O.25 on
Splash
550 Hz
0.5 on
Error
4OOHz
0.5 on/o.5 off
Reminder call
550 Hz
4 on/l off/4 on/l off/4on 1 off/4 on/silence
Call waiting
550 Hz
0.25 on/O.25 off/O.25 01-r/7.25 off
Key press
1kHz
Duration of the key press
Internal Tones (SLTs)
CO/Station ringing
20 Hz
1 on/3 off
20 Hz
0.5 on/3.5 off
20 Hz
Programmable
Hold recall
Callback
Transfer
(Prior to CPC-B
2.11)
Transfer
(CPC-B 2.11 or
higher)
7-l 6
f
Installation,
Issue 2
I
Section 300
Tone Natie
I
Specifications
August 30,1993
Frequency
1 SO/400
1 Voice mail ringing
Hz at 16 Hz
2 on/2 off
Table 7-18. DTMF frequencies
Digit
1
t
Frequency (.Hz)
697 + 1209
I
2
697 + 1336
3
697 + 1477
4
770 + 1209
5
770 + 1336
6
770 + 1477
7
852 + 1209
8
852 + 1336
9
852 + 1477
*
941 + 1209
0
941 + 1336
#
941 + 1477
7-17
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
Index
August 30,1993
ltidex
A
Analog extensions
DSLTs
installation 4-37
wall mounting 3- 16
DSS/72 4-37
DTMF frequencies 7- 17
4-34
B
Background music 5-8
Battery backup
capacities 7-3
installation 3-9
E
EM/24 4-39
EMI filter 4-36
Environmental requirements
Extensions
connectors 4-29
maximums 2-5
pinouts 4-30
External ringer 5- 16
C
Cabinet installation 3- 19
batteries 3-9
cards 3-6
DSLT wall mounting 3- 16
grounding 3-5
key phone wall mounting 3- 13
system iinitialization 3-19
test phone 3-20
wall mounting 3-3
Cabling distances 7- 13
Card installation 3-6
Channel service unit 4- 10
Clock sync cable 4-27
Configurations 2-5
Connector panel 2-3
Cover removal 3-3
CPC
description 2-8
F
Facility interface codes l-3
FCC registration number l-3
Fractional Tl 4-10
G
Grounding l-4,3-5
Ground-start trunks 4-6
H
Heat generation 7-3
RAMCLEAR 3- 19
RAMHOLD 3- 19
strap S 1 3-7
SW1 3-19
csu 4-10
Initialization
3-19
Lnput power 7-3
D
L
DID trunks 4-6
Door box adaptor 5-25
Door phone 5-25
Double-cabinet systems 6- 1
Lightning protection l-4
Line expansion 4-41
Loop-start trunks 4-6
I
X-l
l-3,7-4
Installation,
issue 2
Section 300
Index
August 30, 1993
M
R
MFR cards
in double-cabinet systems 6-4
slot locations 2-7
strap S3 6-10
Model numbers l-3
Mounting brackets 3-4
Music-on-hold 5-8
RAI 5-6
Registration number l-3
Remote administration interface 5-6
Ringer equivalence number l-3
RJ48 pinouts 4-23
RS232C
25-pin to 25-pin cable 5-4
25-pin to g-pin cable 5-5
N
S
Network address signaling code l-3
Network interface codes l-3
New function reset 4- 18,4-25,4-27
see
switch 4 3-6
variable resistors 5-9
Service order codes l-3
SLTs 4-34
SMDR 5-3
Specifications
backup batteries 7-3
cabling distances 7- 13
communications
parameters 7- 14
dimensions and weight 7-4
DTMF frequencies 7- 17
environmental requirements 7-4
feature-related capacities 7-5
hardware maximums 7-7
heat generation 7-3
input power 7-3
power consumption 7-3
signaling 7-15
tone plan 7-16
trunk and line capacities 7-5
Sync cable 4-22,4-25,4-27
Sync unit 4- 19,4-20
0
OPX 5- 10
P
Paging 5-14
Part numbers
VA-43703 5- 18
VB-2450A-2P 3-9
VB-2650-2P 3-9
VB-43030 l-3
VB-43 120 4-4 1
VB-43121 4-41
VB-435 11 4-6
VB-4370 1 5-25
VB-437025-10
VB-43705 5-25
VB-43706 5-6
VB-43707 5-6
VB-43708 5-2 1
VB-5353 1 4-6
PCAS 5-3
PFU 5-18
Power consumption 7-3
Power failure unit 5- 18
Printed circuit cards
card installation 3-6
descriptions 2-6
maximums 2-6
slot locations 2-7
T
Tl
distance from DBS to CSU 4-22
grounding 4-24
hardware requirements 4-9
MDF card 4-21
Test phone 3-20
,
Tone plan 7- 16
x-2
Installation,
Issue 2
Section 300
August
Trunks
maximums 2-5,7-j
trunk expansion 4-4 1
trunk numbering
single-cabinet systems 4- 11
Trunks and lines 4- 1
U
UNA device 5-16
V
VA-43703 5- 18
VAU 5-21
VB-2450A-2P 3-9
VB-2650-2P 3-9
VB-43050 l-3
VB-43060 l-3
VB-43 110 4-9
VB-43 120 4-4 1
VB-431214-41
VB-4354 1 4-6
VB-4356 l-4-9
VB-43562 4-9
VB-43563 4-9,4- 19
VB-43564 4-9,4-25
VB-4370 1 5-25
VB-43702 5- 10
VB-43705 5-25
VB-43706 5-6
VB-43707 5-6
VB-43708 5-2 1
Voice Announce Unit 5-21
W
Wall mounting
cabinets 3-3
DSLTs 3-16
key phones 3-13
x-3
Index
30,1993
MCC/Panasonic’
Business Telephone, Engineering
TO:
All DBS Dealers
FROM:
MCC/Panasonic
Business Telephone,
DATE:
Engineering
Department
Department
July 30, 1993
SUBJECT:
Documentation
Update
This documentation update contains new versions of Programming Guidance (Section 400) and
Forms and Tables (Section 450).
These manuals replace the existing versions of Sections 400 and 450.
In addition, Feature Operation (Section 700) has recently been updated and is now being shipped
with new CPC cards.
The Business Telephone Engineering Department is striving to improve the quality of documentation provided‘to our dealers. To help in this endeavor, please inform us of any corrections you feel
should be made. Simply mark up the pages in question and send them to the following address.
MCC/Panasonic
Business Telephone, Engineering
Technical Publications
200 1 Westside Parkway
Bldg. 200, Suite 260
Alpharetta, GA 3020 1
Department
zce_-_r
Digital Business System
Section 400
Panasonic
Section 400 FE
Issue 3 July 1993
DBS Programming Instructions
WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Chapter 1
General Program Outline
Prior to programming the system make
certain you have completed the following
steps.
Step 1:
Corr6rn-rthe DBS system feature operations
meet the end userrequirements as outlined
in Section 700.
Step
2: ‘-“.
~
,.,-’ :
Prepare section 450 with the end users
requirements.
Step 3:
Confirm the hardware required for the
end user.
_I._‘
:.
.,
Step 4:
Initialize the system to the default status.
See next page for this.
Step 5:
Follow the completed
program thesystem.
section
450 to
FFI Key
System program settings
FF2 Key
Central Office line program settings
FF3 Key
Extension program settings
FF4 Key
Ring Bz Hunt group program settings
FF5 Key
Flexible key program settings for lines
& features
FF6 Key
Name & Message program settings
FF7 Key
Toll restriction program settings
FE? Key
Least cost routing program settings
FF9 Key
Copy program settings
FFIO Key
system and personal speed dial program
settings
The DBS program entries are divided
into 10 primary groups stored under FF
keys on the phone. The Flexible Function
Keys listed to the right show the major
programming
groups.
Each group
contains sub groups which combine
similar functions together.
Section 400 FFl
issue 2 July 1993
Before beginning to program a newly
installed DHS for the first lime, set the
system programs to the default values by
following steps 1 through 5 below:
1.TurnoffthepowerfortheMainCabinet.
(Both cabinets if a dual cabinet
configuration is being used.)
WC-A
DBS Frogramming
Instructfon~
/ 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 /-3.0 / 4.0
This procedure
must alwap be performed
priortoprogrammingtheDBSforthefb-st
time.orincaseswhereitisdesir&toretum
allchangedprogramming parameters to
the default initialized values. Failure to
initialize the CPC card may cause
operational problems.
2. Slide the CPC RAM switch to the
CLEAR position.
3. Turn on the power for the Main
Cabinet(s), then wait until the bottom
LED on the CPC card stops flashhg.
Note: The CPC-B card will take about
twice as much time to initialize the
memory as a WC-A card does.
4. Slide the CPC RAM switch to-the RAM
HOLD position..
5. Verify the software version in the
system from any display telephone by
pressing the [ON/OFF]. [CONF], and
entering 7777.
Before upgrading fi-omone software version to another, you must tit enter the
“New Function Reset” command (FF18#
l#).
For example, if you are upgrading from
Version 3.0 toversion 4.0,you must enter
this command. However, if you are upgrading to a point release (4.10 to 4.11).
you do not need to enter the command.
The “New Function Reset” command
erases Tl and DID programming.
DBS Programming Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Chapter 2
Requirements for p~gramming
I
2-l PREPARING PROGRAMMING
DATA TABLE
.
I
Prior to programming the DBS, complete
Section 450 (Programming Tables).
Review the desired functionality with the
end user, making any additional changes
as required. Ifthe end user has requested
specific functionality you are unfaxmliar
with, refer to Section 700 to confum the
DBS operation prior to installation.
,
WhenPreparingProgrammingDataTable
Section 450. observe the following:
Leave the default values for all
programmable areas of central o&e
lines, extensions and equipment not
being connected.
Record all program modificationsmade in
the programming tables of Section 450.
Program
address
numbers
that
cannot be changed during normal system
operation have notes to this effect.
Program address numbers that are
specially marked arc available for the
specified version(s) of software only.
2-2 HOW TOACCESS
RR-G
MODE
Programming can be performed from the
attendant display telephone.
An
attendant telephone is connected to
extension port 1 and has an extension
number of 100, for all software versions.
Programming is also possible f?om other
extensions. See the note in “From a
Non Attendant Port”. Section Z-2.”
To enter the program mode from the
Attendant position perform the following
steps:
[ON/OFF], [PROG], ##, thenproceedwith
the FF key program desired.
Name settings can only be programmed
from the attendant telephone, or a DSS
console connected to it.
WhenprogmmminganactiveDBSsystem
through the Attendant position in a DBS
set for only one attendant, the DBS will
automatically change to the “night” mode.
3
-.
_
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
When programming from a telephone
connected to the test terminal (CN3) of
the main DBS cabinet, slide the switch on
the cabinet to the test mode. This switch
provides a direct connection to ports 7
and 8.
To enter the programming mode from the
test terminal port, perform the following
steps:
[ON/OFF], #98,9999 (or presently used
Authorization code), [PROG]. ##, then
proceed with the FF key program desired.
The #98 9999 designates this device as a
programming
port. Entering the
authorization code a second time turns
the authorization off for this port in
software versions olderthan3.17-CPCA,
or 2.05-CPC-B. In software versions
newer than these, activating the access
code at a second programming port
automatically turns off the authorization
at any previous port that has been
activated.
DBS Ro@amming instructions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
When programming from a display
telephone other than the attendant’s,
press:
[ON/OFF], #98.9999 (orpresentlyused
Authorization code). [PROG], ##. then
proceed with the [FF] key program
address desired.
The #98 9999 designates this device as
a programming port. You only have to
enter the authorization once. Entering
the authorization code the second time
turns the authorization off in software
versions olderthan 3.17-WC-A, or 2.05CPC-B. in software versions newer than
these. activating the access code at a
second programming port automatically
turns off the authorization at any
previous port that has been activated.
6
DBSProgrammingInstructions
CPC-A/ 3.0, CPC-B/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
When programming from a terminal
connected to the RS232C (SMDR) port,
perform the .following steps:
1. Make certain the cables are
configured and connected as outlined
in Section 300.
2. Make certain the DBS is in the SMDR
mode by performing the following steps
i?om the attendant port:
!’
!
Section 400 FFl
Issue3 JuIy 1993
When performing DBS programming
changes from a remote location (using an
ASCII terminal), perform the following
step:
1. Access the DBS through a DISA line.
Once the connection is made, press #6.
9999, P. then press enter. from the
terminal.
[ON/OFF], #93
3. Perform the following steps from the
terminal:..
.
#99, 9999
4. After the DBS responds, type:
P, then press the enter key:
When the communication parameters
are in the default settings, they should
be:
A call can be transferred by any
extension, if it is a digital phone, to
remote programming, provided the call
is placed on hold, and #6 9999 is dialed
from the attendant position dial pad.
This function will only work if the
attendant has no other active calls.
Active calls can be determined by the
appearance of flashing green LED’s at
the attendant position.
Remote access programming capability
through DISA requires an MFR card
and special DISA programming. (see
[FF2] program addresses).
parity check set to yes, 9600 baud.
data length 8, 1 start bit and 1 stop bit.
See program addresses [FFl], 2, 2. ( l5) for changes to these options.
5
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 JuIy 1993
2-3 PROG-
Example
entries:
WC-A
G METHOD
of date/time
program
To set the date from extension port
number 1:
Press [ON/OFF],
[PROG] (“F* is
displayed), # (“F#” is displayed), #
(“Program Mode” is displayed on line 1,
“MAIN MODE” is displayed on line 2).
Ffress [FFl]. (“System Program” is
displayed
on line
1, ‘SELECT
SUB-MODE” is displayed on line 2).
Press 1, #, (“Select Time Mode” is
displayed on line 1, u 1:DATE 2:TIME”.
is displayed on line 2).
Press 1, #. taDate Set Mode” is displayed
on line 1. “MONTH/DATE/YEAR” is
displayed on line 2).
From the keypad, enter the new date in
the following format:
Enter month as MM
Enter date as DD
Enter year as YY
DBS ProgrammingInstructions
/ 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Press # to store the program change.
After pressing the [ON/OFF] key, the
new date is displayed on all phones
with the LCD.
To continue with the next program
address, press the ‘Y#”key instead of the
[ON/OFF] key.
While programmin g, be sure to confirm
the changes being made on the display
of the phone being used.
Software UPGRADES
from CPC-B
version 2.0X to 3.0X can be done
by changing EPROMS, and mawally IFwn$gwingthepngnzmsthban5otdable in the 2.0X rxrsbnpreviously used.
&faulting the CPC-B card prior to the
instauationof the 3.0X uersion IS NOT
quin?d.2.OXwMonusersthathave
LdilwiDJDprq-ams~toaareJiLuy
reukw theNOlESjiAhwing /ltW], 8# pm
gram addresses. Complete manual
reprogramming of all features is not
requind.
Default values for each
pmgmlnalddmssaredenotedbyan
f
-
DBS Programming Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Default Value
i
Page
(FFI -1-1 ............................ DAY/DATE .......................................................................Jan. 1.1989 ............... 13
[FFI -1-2 ............................ TIME ................................................................................ 12:oo.. ...................... 13
[FFI -2-l-l ......................... CALL DURATION DISPLAY ............................................... Time displayed .......... 13
[FFI -2-l-2 ......................... SMDR/DISPLAY STARTTIMER (30/ 16) ........................... Starts at 16 sec.. ....... 14
[FF 1 -2-l-2 ......................... SMDR/DISPLAY START TIMER (CPC-B 3.0) ...................... Starts at 5 sec.. ......... 14
(FF 1 -2- 1-3 ......................... LEAST COST ROUTING ACCESS ...................................... Pooled trunk access.. 15
(FFI -2-l-4 ......................... OVERRIDE TRS FOR SYS’lEM SPEED DIALING ............... Disabled ................... 15
[FFI -2-l-5 ......................... SSD DISPLAY RESTRIClION ............................................ SSD displayed.. ......... 16
[FFI -2-l-6 ......................... AUTG FLASH REDIAL.. ..................................................... Autoilash .................. 16
[FFI -2-l-7 ........................-ONE-TOUC H CALL ........................................................... Enabled .................... 17
[FFI -2- l-8 ......................... ON-HOOK TRANSFER ...................................................... Enabled .................... 17
[FFl -2-l-9 ......................... CENTRAL OFFICE LINE AUTOMATIC HOLD .................... Disabled ................... 18
[FFl -2-l- 10 ....................... NON-APPEARING CO LINE HOLD ..................................... System hoid .............. 18
[FFI -2-1-11 ....................... SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FLASH CONlROL .................. Retrieve CO line call .-19
(FFI -2-l- 12 ....................... EXTENSION NUMBER DIGITS .......................................... 3 digits.. .................... 19
Alternate mode ......... 20
[FFI -2-l- 13 ....................... ALTERNATE ATTENDANT ............. . ...................................
-2-l- 14 ....................... ATIENDANT INTERCOM CALLING ................................... voice calI ..................20
voice call .................. 21
i::; -2-l- 15 ....................... EXTENSION INTERCOM CALLING ....................................
[FFI -2-l- 16 ....................... ALERT TONE FOR VOICE CALLS ..................................... Alert tone sounds......21.
[FFI -2-l- 17 ....................... ALERTTONE FOR BUSY OVERRIDE / OHVA.. ................. No sound .................. 22
[FFl -2-l- 18 ....................... SYSTEM INSTALLATION AREA CODE .............................. 1 + Area ....................22
[FFI -2-l-19 ....................... SSDNAMEDISPLAY.. ....................................................... 5names .................... 23
[FFl -2-1-21 ....................... VOICE MAIL BUSY TONE ................................................. Silence ..................... .23
[FFI -2-l-22 ....................... TRANSFER RING PATTERN (CPC-B 3.0) ........................... 3 . 1 set on/ 1 se-coff.. 23
[FFl -2- 1-22 ....................... ATIENDANT OVERFLOW old software (All) ....................... 8 calls .......................24
IFFI -2-l-23 ....................... DELAYED RING ................................................................ No Iines ring.. ............25
bFij-2- 1-24 ....................... SECOND ATIENDANT POSITION attfeature pkg ............. Extension 161 ... ..... ... 25
[FFlJ-2- l-25 ....................... THIRD ATTENDANT POSITION attfeature pkg ................. None ... ......... . ..... .... . .. 26
26
[FFl]-2- l-26 ....................... FOURTH ATTENDANT POSITION a&feature pkg.. ............ None ...._..___._.............
[FFl]-2-1-27 ....................... ATlENDANf TRANSFER EXT. attfeature pkg .................. None ..._..._........_........27
Enabled ... ..._.............27
[FFl]-2- 1-28 ....................... ATTENDANT OVERRIDE att.feature pkg.. .........................
[FFlJ-2- l-29.. ..................... ATTENDANT LED ALARM attfeature pkg.. ....................... Enabled .._..._.............28
[FFl]-2- l-30 ....................... EXIENSION (Bu;l DEIAYED RlNG (CPC-B 2.0) ..................... No delayed ring ...... ... 28
[FFl]-2- 1-31 ....................... TRANSFER RlNG PATTERN (CPC-B 3.0) ........................... 3-l set on/l set off ..28
[FFl]-2- 1-31 ....................... ANALGG’IRANSFER RING PATIERN (CPC-B 2.11). ............... .5secon/3.5secoff...28
[FFl]-2- l-32 ....................... MULDPIE DID (CPC-B 3.0) ................................................. Ring at 1 extension ... 29
DID/DNIS (CPC-B 4.0) ........................................ Off .. ..... ..... ..... ... ...... . .. 29
[FFl]-2- l-32 ....................... MI-IL=
[FFlJ-2- l-33 ....................... PAGE DURATION (CPC-B 3.0) ............................................ Unlimited ..... ..... ..... ... 29
(FFl]-2- l-34 ....................... SINGLE LINE ‘IEL DISA RING PAmRN (CFC-B 3.0) ............ 1 set on/3 set off .. ... 30
[FFl]-2-2-1 ......................... PARITYCHECK ................................................................ Parity check.. ............30
[FFl]-2-2-2.. ....................... ODD/EVEN PARITY .......................................................... Even Parity ............... 3 1
[FFl]-2-2-3.. ....................... DATA TRANSMISSION SPEED (BAUD RATE) .................... 9600 bps .................. 31
[FFl]-2-2-4 ......................... STOP BlT LENGTH ........................................................... 1 bit .......................... 32
8 bits ........................ 32
[FFl]-2-2-5 .........................
DATA LENGTH .................................................................
[FFl]-2-2-6 ......................... SMDR PRINTING MODE 1 ................................................ outbound & inhound.. 33
Local/long dis t. ......... 33
[FFl]-2-2-7 ......................... SMDR PRlNTlNG MODE 2 .. ..............................................
[FFl]-2-2-8 ......................... SMDR PIUIVI-ING MODE 3 ................................................ No header titles .........34
[FFl]-2-2-9 ......................... DATA DUMP MODE. X ON/X OFF.. .................................. No stop control. .........34
[FFl]-2-2- 10 ....................... F&II BAUD RATE (CPC-B 1.0) ............................................. 1200 baud ................ 35
[FFlj-2-3-( l-8) .................... PBXACCESS CODE(S) ..................................................... None .........................35
[FFl]-2-3-(9- 18) .................. AUID PAUSE FOR PBXACCESS CODES 1 THROUGH 8 ....... None ........................ .36
7
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
WC-A
DBS Pqpmming
Insimction~
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
[FFl]-2-4-1 ........................ RING PATIFRNS FOR UNA TERMINALS (M.C & Bl ........... 1 set on 3 set OR...... 37
[FFl]-2-4-(2-g) ................... EXTERNAL PAGE CONTROL FOR PAGING CROUPS .......... No settings ............... 37
ml]-2-5-(l-8)-( l-20) ............ EXIENSION CIASS OF SERVICE (CPC-B 3.0) ........................ Class 0 ...................... 37
l~11-2~~1-100)-@001-~l.. .... VERIFlEDFORCEDACCOUNTCODES(CPC-B 3.0). ................ Noneset.. .................. 38
fFFl]-2-6-(l-100)-2-(0-7) ....... ToLLREsT.FoRvERFoRcED~~CODEs(CpC-B3.0)
...... TypeO.. ..................... 39
(FFl]-3- 1 ...........................
[FFlj-3-2 ...........................
[FF 11-3-3 ...........................
[FFl]-3-4 ...........................
[FFl]-3-5 ...........................
[FF 11-3-6 ...........................
[FFl]-3-7 ...........................
(FFl]-3-8 ...........................
[FFl]-3-9 ...........................
pFl]-3- 10 .........................
[FFl]-3-11 .........................
[FFl]-3- 12 .........................
[FFl]-3-13 .........................
[FFl]-3- 14 .........................
[FFl]-3- 15 .........................
[FFl]-3- 16 .........................
[FFl]-3- 17 .........................
[FFl]-3- 18 .........................
[FFl]-3- 19 .........................
[FFl]-3-20 .........................
[FFl]-3-21 .........................
[FFl]-3-22 .........................
(FFl]-3-23 .........................
[FFl]-3-24 .........................
(FFl]-3-25 .........................
[FFl]-3-26 .........................
jFFl]-3-27 .........................
[FFl]-3-28 .........................
[FFlj-3-29 .........................
AUTO NIGHT MODE START TIME .................................... Not set.. .................... 40
ATTENDANT HOLD RECALL ‘IlMER .................................After 20 set ....__........ 40
EXTENSION HOLD RECALL TIMER ..................................After 140 see ............ 4 1
A’lllZNDAN! TRANSFER RECALL TIMER.. ...................... After 20 set .............. 41
EXIENSION TRANSFER RECALL IIMER .......................... After 140 set _.___.
...... 42
ATTENDANT HUNT GROUP RECALL ‘IIMER ..................... After 20 set .............. 42
EXTENSION HUNT GROUP RECALL ‘IIMER ..................... After 140 set ... ......... 42
ATTENDANT PARK HOLD RECALL TIMER.. ...................... After 20 set ...._......... 43
EXTENSION PARK HOLD RECALL -TlMER ........................ After 140 set ............ 43
ATTENDANT CALL REVERSION nME R. ........................... Afk 20 set .............. 43
UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE TIMER ........................... 10 min. ..........___....... 44
AU’IOMATIC PAUSE TIMER .............................................. 3.5 set ........... _._....... 44
CEIVlRAL OFFICE FLASH lJMER ..................................... .8 set ....................... 45
SINGLE LINE TEL. ON HOOK FLASH TlMER .................... 200.200- 1500.1500 . 45
CO RING CYCLE DETECIION TlMER ............................... 6 set .............._......... 46
INBOUND RING CYCLE EXPANSION TIMER.. ................... 350 ms.. ......... _. ....... 46
DIAL PAUSE lIMER.. ........................................................ 1.5 set ..........___
........ 47
PBX LINE FLASH ‘IlMER.. ................................................. .8 set ............___........ 47
CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER TIMER (CFC-B 3.0) ............. 12 set ............ ._._...... 47
GROUND STM
DElECTlON TlMER (CFC-B 1.0) ............. 4 set .............__.._...... 48
INBOUND GROUND DETEC’IION TYMER(CPC-B 1.0) ............ 1 set .............__._....... 48
A?TEMIANT ICM HOLD RECU’IIMER
(Cm-8 2.0) ............ 20 set ...................... 49
EXIENSION ICM HOFD RECAILlIMER (CIPC-B20) ............. 140 set ..........__........ 49
ATIENDM
ICMlRANS. RECALLTIMER (Cl%-B 20) .......:.. 20 set ............__........ 49
EXIENSION ICM’IRANS. RECAI&nMER (CFC-B 20) ........... 140 set .......... .......... 49
CO LJNEDEI&ED RING ‘llMER (CPC-B 3.0) ...................... 12 set ............_......... 50
EXTENSION DELAYED RING TIMER (CPC-B 3.0) ............... 12 sic ............_......... 50
HuNTGROUPNOANSWERRlTVGTlMER(cpC-B3.0)
........... 12 set ...........__......... 50
AUTO DAY MODE WC-B 4.0) ........................................... No setting.. .....__........ 50
[FFl]-4 ........._..._._............... REMOTE
[FFl]-6-(l-2)
~
PROGRAMMING ID CODE .... .. ............ ... ............ 9999 ..... ........_._........ 51
[FFll-5 ........ .. ... . ...... .. .. ... ... . DISA ID. CODE .... ......_.. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . /~..........................
Not set .. . .........__........ 52
...................... DISA OUTBOUND CALL ID CODES 1 & 2.. ....................... 9999 ........................
52
(FFl]-7.. ............................. ID CODE FOR SYSTEM PROGRAMMING .......................... 9999.. ....................... 53
[FFl]-8-1 ...........................
[FFl]-8-1 ...........................
(FFl]-8-2 ...........................
[FFl]-8-2 ...........................
pFl]-8-3(oooo-9999)(loo_
............................
..........................................
[FFl]-8-4- l- l .....................
[FFl]-8-4-1-2.. ...................
[FFlJ-8-4-l-3 .....................
[FFl]-8-4-l-4 .....................
[FFl]-8-4-2- 1 .....................
[FFlj-8-4-2-2.. ...................
[FFl]-8-4-2-3.. ...................
(FFl]-8-4-2-4.. ...................
[FFl]-8-4-2-5 .....................
[FFlj-8-4-2-6. ....................
[FFl]-8-4-2-7 .....................
8
DID RESET (CPC-B 3.0) ..................................................... No reset.. ..................
NEW FUNC’ITON RESET (CFC-B 4.0). ................................. No reset ....................
DID RESET CONFIRMATION (CFC-B 3.0). .......................... No confirmation ........
NEW FUNCTION RESET CONFIRMAnON (CI’C-B 4.0) ....... No amhnation .........
53
54
54
55
INBOUND DID DIALNUMBERS (CFC-B 3.0) .......................... Nonumbers set .......... 55
Tl PROGRAMMING (CFC-B 4.0). ..........................................................................
SYSTEM CONFIG .............................................................. DBS 40 .................... 56
IST SYNC ......................................................................... Free run.. ................. 56
None ........................ 58
2ND SYNC ........................................................................
None ........................ 57
3RD SYNC ........................................................................
NEIWORK RE-SYNC TIMER ............................................. No retries ................. 58
DISCON TIMER ................................................................. 200 ms.. ................... 58
1200 ms.. ................. 59
GUARD TIMER .................................................................
240 seconds.. ........... 59
RLS ACKlIMER ...............................................................
OUTPULSE DELAY ........................................................... 500 ms.. ................... 60
WINK TIMEOUT nMER .................................................... 5500 ms ................... 60
INCOMING DETECTION lYMER ........................................ 90 ms.. ..................... 61
‘)
(-
(
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A/ 3.0,CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0
Section 40OFFi
Issue 3 July 1993
[FFl]-8-4-2-8 ............ .... .._... ANSWER SUPERV ........ .. ... ........... ........... ......... ...._........... 600 ms ...-..........._.....61
[FFlj-8-4-2-9 ......I............... IMM-GLARE -lIMER .......................................... ......... ..... .. 60 ms ...-f..................62
[FFlj-8-4-2- 10 .......... .......... WK-GIARE TIMER ..... ........ .......... ......................... .......... .. 60 ms .. ....._.........._....62
[[FFlj-8-4-3 ... ....... .... .. ........ DIGITAL PAD SET ... ................ ...... .............. .......... ..._....... By circuit type . ......... 63
[[FFlj-8-4-4- 1- 1 . .. . .-. . . . . . . . .. . TFUJNK CONFIGURATION. MASIER CABINET .......... . .... ... Analog only ...... ....._.._65
[FFl]-8-4-5-1-1 .... ... ........... TRUNK CONFIGURATION, SLAVE CABINET .... ..... ......... ... Analog only ....._...__.... 65
[FFl]-8-4-4-1-2 ....... .... ....... NO. OF Tl CHANNELS., MASTER CABINET .......... ... . ..... .. None ....... ......... ..... .... 65
[FFl]-8-4-5-1-2 ....... .... ....... NO. OF Tl CHANNELS. SLAVE CABINET ._....................... None ....... . ............. .... 65
[FFl]-8-4-4- l-3 .......... ..... ... FRAME FORMAT. MASTER CABINET . ... . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . ESF .... ..... .... ..... ..... .... 66
[FFl]-8-4-5-1-3 ........ .. ........ FRAME FORMAT, SLAVE CABINET ............. ...... .... .... ...... . ESF .... ... ...... ..... ..... .... 66
[FFl]-8-4-4- l-4 .......... ........ CLEAR CHANNEL, MASTER CABINET ................. .. ........ ... AM1 ... ..... ............... .... 66
[FFlj-8-4-5-1-4 .. .... ............ CLEAR CHANNEL. SLAVE CABINET . ............... ....._.... .. .. ... AMI . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. 66
[FFl]-8-4-4-1-5 .......... .. ...... FAILURE MODE, MASTER CABINET .... ............ ..... .... ...... . Mode 1 ..... .... ..... .... .... 67
[FFl]-8-4-5-1-5 ..... ..... ... ...-. FAILURE MODE. SIAVE CABINET ............_......_...............Mode 1 .... .............. .... 67
(FFl]-8-4-4-1-6 .. ......... .... .. . R-LOOPBACK, MASTER CABINET .......................... ... .... ... No .. .... ..... .............. ._..67
[FFl]-8-4-5- l-6 ......... .... .... . R-LQOPBACK, SIAVE CABINEI. .... ........................ .... ..... .. No ....... ... . ......... ..... .... 67
[FFlj-8-4-4-1-8 .......... ........ FLASH KEY OPERATION. MASTER CABINET ... ............. ... None .. .... .......... ...... ... 68
[FFl]-8-4-5- l-8 ....... .. ......... FLASH KEY OPERATION. SLAVE CABINET ........... ..... ... ... None .. . .. . . . .. . . . ... . .. .. . . .. 68
[FFl]-8-4-4-1-7 .......... ..... ... YELL ALARM SEND, MASTER CABINET .......... ..... ...... ... ... Yes . ... ..... .. ... ..... ...... ... 68
[FFl]-8-4-5- l-7 .... ........ ... ... YELL AIARM SEND. SLAVE CABINET .................. .... ..... ... Yes .......... ......... ..... .... 68
[FFl]-8-4-4-2- 1 .. ..... ... .. ...... RED ALARM DETECTION. MASTER CABINET . ... .. ..... ... .. .. 8 ........ ...... .... .... ..... .... 69
[FFl[-8-4-5-2- 1 ........ .. ....... . RED ALARM DETECTION, SLAVE CABINET ......._............. 8 ........ ..... .............. .... 69
[FFl]-8-4-4-2-2 ........ . .... .. ... YELLOW ALARM DETECTION. MASlER CABINET .... .... . .. 50 ms ...... .... .... ..... . ... 69
[FFl]-8-4-5-2-2 ............... ... YELLOW ALARM DE’IECTION, SIAVE CABINET ... ..... .... .. 50 ms ...... ... ..... ......... 69
[FFl]-8-4-4-2-3 ........ .. ........ YELLOW ALARM RECOVERY. MASTER CABINET’ . ..... ... . .. 10 ms ..... ......... ..... .... 70
[FFl]-8-4-5-2-3 ....... .. ......... YELLOW ALARM RECOVERY. SLAVE CABINET ........ ..... .. 10 ms ... .. . ........ ...... ... 70
[FFl]-8-4-4-2-4 ....... .... ....... OTHER ALARMS DETECTION. MASTER CABINET .... .... ... 250 ms .... ... .......... .... 70
[FFl]-8-4-5-2-4 ......... ......... OTHER AIARMS DETECTION. STAVE CABINET .............. 250 ms ... ..... ..... .... .... 70
[FFlj-8-4-4-2-5 ............... ... OTHER ALARMS RECOVERY. MASTER CABINET ...... ..... . 250 ms ... . .... ..... .... .... 7 1
[FFlj-8-4-5-2-5 ....... ... ..... ... OTHER ALARMS RECOVERY. SLAVE CABINET .............. . 250 ms ... .............. ..1.71 .’ [FFl]-8-4-4-3- 1 ......... ..I...... FRAMING LOSS COUNTER MASTER CABINET ......... .... .. 9000 . ..... .......... ... .. .... 71
[FFl]-8-4-5-3-1 .... ... .. ......... FRAMING LOSS COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET .. .......... .... .. 9000 .. . .... ..... .... ..... .... 71
[FFlj-8-4-4-3-2 .......... ........ SLIP COUNlER MASTER CABINET ........................... ... . .. 9000 .. .... ._... .............. 72
L
[FFlj-8-4-5-3-2 ... ......... ... ... SLIP COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET .............................. ...... 9000 .. . ... ..... ..... ..... ... . 72 ’
(FFlj-8-4-4-3-3 .......... ... ..... RED ALARM COUNTER MASTER CABINET ......_.............. 9000 . ...... . ........ ..... .... 72
[FFl]-8-4-5-3-3 ............_.....RED ALARM COUNTER SLAVE CABINET .. ..... .. .... .... ..... .. 9000 .. . .... .. .. .......... . ... 72
[FFl]-8-4-4-3-4 ......... . .. ...... LOSS OF SIGNAL COUNTER MASTER CABINET . ...... ..... . 9000 ... ... . .............. . ... 73
[FFl]-8-4-5-3-4 ... .... ........... LOSS OF SIGNAL COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET .. ........ .... .. 9000 *........................ 73
[FFl]-8-4-4-3-5 ....... .. ......... SYNC LOSS COUNTER MASIER CABINET .... ............ .... .. 9000 .. . ... . .......... .... .. .. 73
[FFl]-8-4-5-3-5 ...... .... ........ SYNC LOSS COUNTER SIAVE CABINET .................. ..... .. 9000 ... .. ... ........ ...... ... 73
[FFl]-8-4-4-3-6 ....... .._........YELL ALARM COUNTER MASTER CABINET .......... ... ..... .. 9000 ... ... ..... ..... ...... ... 74
[FFlj-8-4-5-3-6 .. ....... .... ... .. YELL ALARM COUNlER SLAVE CABINET .. ........ .. .. ...... ... 9000 ... .... .............. .. .. 74
[FFl]-8-4-4-4- 1 ........ .. ....... . YELLOW ALARh4 RELAY, MASTER CABINET ...... ........ ... .. . Off . ...._.......................74
[FFlj-8-4-5-4-1 ..._..... ...... ... YELLOW ALARM RELAY, SIAVE CABINET ..........f............ off ..... ..... . ..... ..I.......... 74
[FFl]-8-4-4-4-2 ... ........ ....... RED AulRM RELAY. MASTER CABINn ... .._.................... Off . ...... .. .. .... ..... ..... .... 75
[FFlj-8-4-5-4-2 ... ........ ....... RED ALARM RELAY, SLAVE CABINET ......_...................... Off . ..... .... .. ........ . .... .... 75
[FFl]-8-4-4-4-3 .......... ........ SYNC LOSS RELAY, MASTER CABINET ........... ...... .... ..... .. Off ..... .... . .. ........ ..... .... 75
[FFl]-8-4-5-4-3 ..... ..... ... ..... SYNC LOSS RELAY. SLAVE CABINET ................ .... ..... .... . . off ...... .... . .... ....... ... . ... 75
[FFlj-8-4-4-4-4 ........ .......... FRAME LOSS REIAY. MASTER CABINET .......... ... ..... ..... .. Off . ..... . .. .. .... ..... .... ..... 76
[FFl]-8-4-5-4-4 ........ .....I.... FRAME LOSS RELAY, SLAVE CABINET ................. ..... ... . .. Off . .... ... .. ............... .... 76
[FFlJ-8-4-4-4-5 .... ..... . ... .. ... AIS RELAY. MASIER CABINET .......... ............... ..... .... ..... .. Off . .... ..... .. ... .... ....... ... 76
[FFl]-8-4-5-4-5 ....... .._... ..... AIS RJXAY. SLAVE CABINET ........ ............. ............ ... .._..... Off .. .... ... . ...... ... ....... ... 76
[FFlj-8-4-4-4-6 .. ..... ... ... ..... RELAY RESET, MASTER CABINET .. .......... ... ... ........... ... ... Auto ... ... .. ... ...... ..... .... 77
[FFlj-8-4-5-4-6 ... ...... .. . ...... RELAY RESET, SLAVE CABINET ............_.._......................Auto .. .. ... .. .. ...... ..... .... 77
.. ...... ... Tl TRUNK TYPE ... .. .. ........ .. ..... ................ .. ............... . ..... .. E&M .. . .. ... ... .... .. ........ 78
(FFlj-8-4-6-(1-64)-l
[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)-2 ........... DID/DNIS . ........ ... . .. .. .. ... ... ... .............. ............... ... .. .... .... .. . Not provided .......... .. . 78
[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)-3 ... ........ OUTGOING TYPE .. .... .... ... .. .......... ....................... ...... ..... .. Immediate start .... .... 79
[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)-4 ... ........ INCOMING TYPE . .. ... ..... .... ............. ......._... ... ............ ...... .. Immediate start ......,. 79
[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-641-5 .. ..._. . . . . TRUNK MODE ... ... . ... ...... .... ... . .. .... ................... ....... ....... ... Bothway . . .... .... ....... ... 80
[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-641-6 .. .. ....... ROBBED BIT SET .. ... ..... ...... ... ........ .......... .............. ... .... . . . On . .... ..I._. . . . . .. . . . ... . . .. . 80
[FFl]-8-4-6-(l-64)-7
... ........ INCOMING DIAL .. . .. ............ ..... .. ............. ......... ......... . ....... MT!@ . .... .. .... .... .....-..- 81
[FFl]-8-4-6-(l-64)-8
._._.......DT SEND ....... ... .... .. .. ........ ... ... ... .. ..... ... .... ..... .................. .. Off ..... .. .. . ..... ..... ....--... 81
[FFl]-8-4-6-(1-64)-g .. ... ...... BTSEND .............. . .. . ........... ..... ..._........ ...... .... ....... ........ .._ Off ..... .. .. . .......... ..... .... 82
[FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)- 10 . ........ IX- RECEIVE . ... ... .. .._........................................................ off ..... . ..... ......... .... . ... . 82
9
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
DBS Rogmmmfng
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
(FFl)-8-4-S-(1-64)-11 ........ RBTSEND ..... .... .............. ........................ .............._..........Off ........ . .......... .. .._.... 83
[FFlj-8-4-6-( l-64)-(0000-9999)-(100-699)
DNIS NUMBER SET .. ........ ..............._..........No Nos. Asstgned . .... 83
[FF2]-( l-64)- 1 .. ... .. ... .......... CENTRAL OFFICE LINE PORT OPERATlON ........... ..... ..... Ail lines tn service ..:. 84
[FF2]-(l-64)-2 .. ... .. ... ..... ..... TOUCH-TONE / PULSE DIALING ... ...... .... .............._...._..._ Touch tone .....-_.__.....84
(FF2]-(l-64)-3 .................... POOLED CO LINE GROUP 9 ACCESS.. .............................All lines accessible ... 85
(FF2]-(l-64)-(4-9) ............... POOLED CO LINE GROUPS 8 l-86 ACCESS ..................... No lines accessible ... 85
(FF2]-( l-64)- 10 .................. CENTRAL OFFICE LINE -IYPE ...........................................Cd’li&. .................... 86
87
(FF2]-(l-64)- 11 .................. DISA AUTO ANSWER ........................................................Disabled ...................
[FF2]-(l-64)- 12 .................. PRIVATE CENTRAL OFFICE LINE ..................................... No private lines ........ 87
[FF2]-(l-64)- 13 .................. AUTO PAUSE FOR PBX LdIUE............................................Pause set ................. 88
(FF2]-( l-64)- 14 .................. DIAL-l-ONE DETEClION ...................................................Dial digits after dt .... 88
(FF2]-(l-64)- 15 .................. OUTBOUND M’MJ? SIGNAL DURATION.. .......................... 75 ms on/50 ms off . 88
(FF2]-(l-64)- 16 .................. UNSUPERVISED CO CONFERENCE ................................. Dkabled ................... 89
(FF2]-( l-64)- 17 .................. INBOUND RING SIGNAL PATIF;RN ................................... Synchronized ........... 89
(FF2]-( l-64)- 18 .................. CENIRAL OFFICE LINE DISCONNECT TIMER.. ............... Greater than 350 ms .. 90
[FF2]-(l-64)- 19 .................. DISA SIXFZT TIME ............................................................ Disabled ................... 90
(FF2]-(l-64)-20 .................. DISA END TIME ................................................................Disabled ................... 91
[FF21-(l-64)-21 .................. TRUNKlYPE ................................................................................ L4xp start .................. 91
(FF2]-(l-64)-21 .................. LOOP START/GROUND START LINE (Cl%-B 1.11) ............ Loop start.. ............... 92
(FF2]-(l-64)-21 .................. UxlP ZXm/CRND SIXRT/DlD LINE (CPC-B 20) ............... Loop start ................. 93
(FF2]-( l-64)-22 ................... DID START (CPC-B 2.0) ......................................................Immediate ................ 94
(FF2]-(1X%)-23.. ................. WINK START’flMER (CPC-B 2.0) ........................................200 ms. .................... 94
(FF2]-( l-64)-24 ................... ‘IYME OUT FOR DIALED m DIGl’IS (CFC-B 20) .................. 18 see ....................... 95
(CPC-B 20) ............................. 80 ms. ...................... 95
(FF2]-(l-64)-25 ................... DID lNTERDlGlTllMEOUT
................................................. By circuit type.. ........ 96
(FF2]-(l-643-26 ................... TlPORTCLASS-TRUNK
FF2]-( l-64)-26 .................... Tl PORT CLASS - TRUNK (CPC 4.00) ............................... By drcuit type.. ........ 96
[FF3]-(l-144)-1 .................. EXTENSION NUMBERS .................................................... lOOto699(1Oto69). .97
[FF3]-(l-144)-2 .................. ‘IEFXMNAL -NPE ..............................................................Automaticallyset ..... 98
(FF3]-(l-144)-2 .................. TERMINAL TYPE (WC-B 3.0) ..........................................Aut~matkaUy set ..... 99
[FF3]-(l-144)-3 .................. EM/24 PORTASSIGNMENT ............................................. Extension port 0 ....... 100
(FF3]-( l- 144)-4 .................. FORCED LEAST COST ROUTING.. .................................... No forced LCR .......... 10 1
[FF3]-(l-144)-5 .................. FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ...............................................No code set. .............. 101
(FF3]-(l-144)-5 .................. VERIFIED FORCED ACCOUNT CODES (CPC-B 3.0) ........ No code set. .............. 102
(FF3]-(l-1441-6 .................. EXTENSION LOCKOUTCODE .......................................... No code set.. ............. 102
(FF3]-(l-144)-7 .................. OFF HOOK SIGNAL.. .........................................................Disabled ex 100,101 .. 103’
(FF3]-(l-144)-8 .................. CALL WAITING NOTIFICATION TONE / OHVA.. ................ Disabled ................... 103
(FF3]-(l-144)-9 .................. BUSY OVERRIDE SEND ................................................... Enabled.. .................. 104
(FF3]-(l-144)-10 ................ BUSY OVERRIDE RECEIVE .............................................. Enabled.. .................. 104
(FF3]-(l-144)-11 ................ PRIME LINE PICKUP.. .......................................................Disabled ................... 105
[FF3]-(l- 144)- 12 ................ AUTO PICKUP (RING LINE PREFERENCE) ........................ Enable.. .................... 105
(FF3]-(l-144)-13 ................ UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE ....................................... Disabled ................... 106
106
(FF3]-( l-144)- 14 ................ SMDR REPORT.. ...............................................................Disabled ...................
(FF3]-(l-144)-15 ................ OFF HOOK SIGNAL VOLUME ........................................... 2nd level .................. 107
[FF31-(l-1441-16 ................ OFF HOOK SIGNAL PATIGRN.. ......................................... Continuous .............. 107
(FF3]-(l-144)- 17 ................ PSD NAh4E DISPLAY.. ....................................................... 5 names ................... 108
None ........................ 108
[FF3]-(l- 144)-18-25 ........... EXIENSION PAGE GROUP ...............................................
[FF3]-( l- 144)-26 ................ DISPLAY WHEN IDIE .......................................................No change ................ 109
(FF3]-( l- 144)-27 ................ DISPLAY DURING DBS DIAL TONE ...................................No change ................ 110
[FF3]-(l-144)-28 ................ DISPLAY WHEN CAluNG AN JXfENSlON ........................... No change.. .............. 110
(FF3]-( l- 144)-29 ................ DISPLAY WHEN ACCESSING CO DIAL TONE ................... No change ................ 111
[FF31-(l-144)-30 ................ DISPLAY WHEN CONVERSING ON A CO LINE .................. No change ................ 111
(FF3]-(l-1441-31 ................ DISPLAY WHEN RECEMNG A PAGE ................................ No change ................ 112
................. No change.. .............. 112
(FF3]-(l-144)-32 ................ DISPIAYAFlERRECEIVINGACAILWAfI’TONE
[FF3]-(l- 144)-33 ................ DISPLAY WHEN DIALlNG AN EXTENSION ........................ No change ................ 113
(FF3]-(l-144)-34 ................ EXIENSION DIRECTORY DISPLAY &XC-B 2.0) ..................... 5 name .................... 113
(FF3]-(l- 144)-35 ................ INBOUND DID DIAL NUMBER (CIX-B 2.0 to 3.0) .............. No numbers assigned .. 114
[FF3)-(l-1441-35 ................ EXlENSlON CLASS OF SERVICE (CPC-B 3.0) .................... Class 0 ..................... 114
[FF3]-(l-144)-36 ................ RINGBACK TONE FROM BUSY SIGNAL (CPC-B 2.0) .............. Enabled .................... 115
(Flq-( l- 1441-37.................. Tl POKI- CL4SS--STA’IlON (CPC-B 4.0) ................................ No setllqq ................ 115
[FF3]-(l- 144)-38 ................ SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE HOOK FJASH (CPC-B 3.0) ........ HeId Itne amss ......... 116
10
DBS Programming Instructions
WC-A/
3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
section
400 FFl
Issue 3July 1993
(FF3]-(l-144)-39
.. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . EXTENSION RING PAl-l-ERN (CPC-6 3.0) .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . Emulates Line rtng..... 117
[FF3]-(l-144)-40
.._.............. DIGKALSLTRECEMNG
VOLUME (CPC-B 3.0) . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal . . . .. . . ._..._.._...... 117
.. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . AUTO SET RELOCATlON CODE (CPC-B 3.0) . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . None set . .. . . .. .. . ... . .. ... . 1 18
]FF3]-(l-144)-41
[FF3]-(l-144)-42
.. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . PERMANENTCALL
FORWARD ‘IYPE (CFC-B 3.0) .. . . . . .. .. . .. . Not set . . . .. . . . ... . ... . . .... . 119
[FF3]-(l-144)-43
. .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . PERMANJZN’I-CAU, FORWARD EXTENSION (CPC-B 3.0) . . . . .. . Not set . . . . .. . . ... . .. .. . .... . . 119
. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . ML/MC0 SEPARATION (CPC-B 4.0) . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . MC0 .. .. .. .. . . ... . . ... . ....__ 120
pF3]-(l-144)-44
. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . LARGE DISPLAY SCREEN APPENDIX . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . . .. . . ... . . .._....__...._.......... 121
[FF4]-l-(1-145)-(1-64)
[FF4]-l-(151-158)-(1-64)
......... CO DAY RING ASSIGNMENTS ...........................................
Msabled ex 100.101 . .126
.............. Disabled .................... 126
..... CO DAYRINGFORPILOTNUMBERS(CFcB2.0)
[FF4]-2-(l-145)-(1-64)
[FF4]-2-(151-158)-(l-64)
......... CO NIGHT RING ASSIGNMENTS
.......................................
DisabId ex 100.101 . .127
..... CO NIGHT RJNG FOR PILOT NUMBERS (CPC-B 2.0) ........... Disabled .................... 127
[FF4]-3-(1-S)- 1 ....................
]FF4]-3-(1-S)- 1 ....................
[FF4]-3-( l-8)-2 ....................
[FF4]-3-(l-8)-(3- 10) .............
[FF4]-3-( l-8)-2-(O-23 ............
[FF4]-3-( l-8)-3 ....................
....................
[FF4]-3-(l-8)-4
[FF4]-3-( l-8)-(5- 12) .............
TERMINAL / CIRCULAR HUNT GROUPS ...........................
PILOT EXIENSION NUMBER (CPC-B 2.0) ..........................
CALL NEXT HUNT GROUP ................................................
.
GROUP MEMBER TABLE ........................................
HUNT GROUP SEARCH METHOD (CPC-B 2.0) ...................
TRANSFER EXIENSION NUMBER (CPC-B 2.0) ...................
TRANSFER lXvlER ............................................................
HUNT GROUP EXlENSION
NUMBER.. ..............................
............... CALL COVERAGE
p4]4(1-16)-(1-S)
GROUP
MEMBER
TABLE
....................
Terminal ...................
None .........................
None .........................
None .........................
Terminal ...................
None .........................
2 set .........................
None .........................
128
129
130
131
13 1
132
133
133
None ......................... 134
........... CO DAY RING (DELAYED] @XC-B 1.07) ............................. Disabwex.
100.101 . .134
FF41-5-(l-145)-(1-64)
(CPC-B 2.0) .......... Disabled.. ................... 135
lFF4]-5(151-158)-(l-64) ......... CO DAY RING (DEIAYED) FORHUNI’GRP.
lFF4]-6-(l-145)-(1-64) ............ CO NIGHT RING (DELAYED) &XC-B 2.0) ........................... Disabled ac. 100.101 . .135
rFF4]-6(151-158)~(l-64) ......... CO NGI’. RING 0
FOR HUNl-GRP. (CFC-B 20) .......... DkabkxI ..................... 136
RING TABIE (CPC-B 2.0) ..................................
lFF4]-7-(l-144)-(1-144)
.......... IXlENSION
FF4j-8(1-144)-(I-144)
.......... EXIENSION DElAYED RING TABIE; (CPC-B 2.0) ...................
Disabled ..................... 136
Disabled ..................... 137
.............. FF KEY ASSIGNMEN-IS FOR EXl-ENSION ........................ C&deys
plq-(l-144)-(1-24)
FOR DSS CONSOLES .................. coltnekeys
ml-( 145- l&i)-( l-24)or(l-72J . FF KEY ASSIGNMEMS
.......... coIinekeys
m-(149-152)-(l-S)odl-32)
..AmNDANiFEKIURE KEYPACKAGEASSIGNMENIS
[FF6]-l-(1-144)
................... EXIENSION
pF6]-2-(I-
144)-(00-89) ......... SYSlEM
IFFq-3(1-
1441-w-99)
m]4-(5-9)
SPEED DIAL NAMES.. ....................................
MESSAGES..
....................................................
[FF6]-5-( l-64) ....................... CO LINE NAME ASSIGNMENT
(CPC-B 2.0) ........................
(FF6]-6-( 1-8) ........................ HUNTGROUPPIWTNAMEASSIGNhQZ~(CPC-B
[FF6]-7-( l-5) ....................... CALL WA.ITlNG/OHVA TEXT REPLY (CK-B
..........................................
Ext (number). ............ 144
SPEED DIAL NAMES ..........................................
.......... PERSONAL
........................ ABSENCE
NAME ...........................................................
l-48.. ...... 138
l-144 ...... 139
1-144 ...... 141
None .........................
144
None ......................... 145
None .........................
145
None .........................
146
3.0) ......... None ......................... 147
4.0) ............... Default messages ...... 147
CO LINE TOLL RESTRICTlON OVERVIEW.. ......................................................... 149
[FF7]-1-I ............................ INTERNAl-lONAL CALL ~RE-SlRICIlON
TYPES 3-6 ....
[FF7]- 1-2 ............................ RESTRICIlON
DURING INBOUND CALL ...........................
[FF7]-1-3 ............................ MAXIMUM DIALED DIGITS FORTRSTYPES
3-6.. .............
2-6.. ....................
FORTRS’IYPES
[FF7]- l-(4- 11) .................... .3 DIGlTRESlRICI’lON
................... SEVEN DIGIT TOLL RESlRICnON
TYPES 2-6 ..................
[FF7]-l-(12-16)
[FF7]-2-(3-6)
....................... AREACODETAI3LEFOR-IOURESIRICIlONlYPES3-6
[FF7]-3-(3-6)
....................... OFFICECODETABLE
FORTOLLRESIRlC’IlONlYPES
Restricted ..................
Enabled ....................
No hit
.....................
Restricted.. ................
Restricted ..................
15 1
15 1
152
152
153
...... No setting.. ................ 153
3-6 .. No setthg .................. 154
11
Section 400 FFl
DBS Rogramming Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
1993
[FF7]-4-( l-4) ........ ... .........._.SPECIAL AREA CODE TABLE FOR TRS TYPES 3-6 ..... ..._.. No setting .. .... ............ 155
Issue 2 Jdy
[FF7]-5-n-4) .. ......__... ....__.....SPECIAL OFFICE CODE TABLE FOR TYPES 3-6 ... ..... ... .... No set%
[FF7]-6-(l-50) ......_..._..........SPECIAL7 DIGVTABlE
FORlRS’IWES
/
... .. .....~...._.. 156
2-6 . ..... .. .... ... ... ... . No setttng .. ......... ..... .. 157
(FF7j-7-(1-w&)-(1-64) ........... DAY TOLL RESTRICTION lYPES O-7 ................................. Type 7.. ..................... 157
[FF7J-7-(l-144)-65................ DAY TOLL RESTRICnON TYPES O-7 ................................. No setting.. ................ 158
7.. ..................... 158
FF7j-8-(1-b&4)-(1-64) ........... NIGHT TOLL RESIRIC’IION TYPES O-7 ............................. m
O-7 ................................ No setting.. ................ 159
m-8-( l-144)-65 ................ NIGHTToILRESlRICIlON?ypEs
]FF7]-9-(1-4) ....................... AREACODETABLE FOR’IRSTYPES 3-6 (GWBALCOpy) ....
....................... OFFICE CODE TABIJZ FOR’lRS TYPES 3-6 (GLOBAL COPY) ..
[m-9-(5-8)
[FF7]-9-(9- 12) ..................... AREA&OmCECODETABIEFOR?IZS3_6(CU3BALCOPY)
[FF7]-9-( 13- 16) ................... SPECIAL OFFICE CODE TRS 3-6 (GLQBAL COPY) .............
No set&-g.. ................ 159
No sett.Q .................. 160
Nosetting.. ................ 161
No settiM.. ................ 162
.......................................... LEAST COST ROUITNG OVERVIEW ..................................................................... 164
[FF8]-l-(1-15)-(000-999) ..... LEAST COST ROUnNG AREA CODE ................................ No settinff .................. 166
..... LEAST COST ROUllNG OFFICE CODE ............................. No setting .................. 167
[FFS]-2-(l-15)-(000-999)
[FFS]-S( l-4)-(000-999) ....... SPECIAL LEAST COST ROUl-lNG AREA CODES TABLES .. No setttq
m-4-(
.................. 168
l-4)-( l- 15)~(000-999). SPECIAL LEAST COST ROUllNG OFFICE CODE TABLES . No setting.. ................ 168
[FF8]-5-(l-15)-(1-48)-(1-8)
...TlM E PRIOlU-lYROUIETABLES
....................................... No settiq.. ................ 169
[FF8]-S-(1-8)-(1-8)-(1-64) ..... LEAST COST ROUllNG Cd LINE GROUP TABLES ............ No setttq
.................. 170
TABLES.. .......... No setting.. ................ 171
[FF8]-7-(l-8) ....................... LEAST COST ROU-l-lNG DIGIT DELJZ-I-ION
f
[FF8]-8-(1-8) ....................... LEAST COST ROU’IlNG DIGIT ADD TABLES ..................... No setting .................. 172
]FFQ]-l-(1-64)-(1-64) .......... . CENTRAL OFFICE LINE COPY ...... .. .. ... .... .........m........._.....No settirq .._............._.174
[FF9]-2-(l-144)-(1-144)
....... EXlENSION COPY.. .......................................................... No s&m..
(FF9]-3-( l- 144)-( l- 144) ....... FF KEY COW ................................................................... No set-.
................ 174
................. 175
.................. 176
[FFlOJ-l-(00-89) ................. SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS.. .................................... No set-.
[FFlO]-2-(l-14%)-(90-99) ..... PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS.. ................................ No settiq.. ................ 177
i
12
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
3-l
SYSTEM PROGRAM
SETTINGS
I
To set the date to February25,1985, enter
the Month, Day and Year as follows:
FF1],1#,1#,022595#
The correct day is automatically
calculated from this information.
To reset the dav/date to the default
initialized value. Dress IFFll. l#. l#,
JCONFl. ION/OFFl.
Telephone conversation time with an
outside line is normally displayed on
telephones with an LCD. The DBS can
be programmed
so that the call
duration time is not displayed.
To set the DBS so that the call duration
time is not displayed. enter:
[IFIFl],
2#, 1w. I#, ow
To set the DBS so that the call duration
time is displayed, enter:
The day and date are also printed on the
Station Message Detail Recording
Proper LCR
(SMDR)
printout.
operation is dependent upon correct
date settings. Peripheral equipment
operation may depend on correct date
settings.
JFFll.2#. l#. l#. l#
Proper LCRoperation is dependent upon
co~~ecttimesettings.peripheralequipment
operation may depend on correct time
seuings.
To set the time to 3:28 pm, enter the
hour and minutes as follows:
FFl], 1#,2#, 1528CA
To reset the time to the default
initialized value. Dress lFFl1. l#. 2#,
ICONFl. ION/OFF1 .
13
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
Conversation time for central office calls
will start to display 16 seconds after the
completion of dialing the number, or 16
seconds after the initial ring tone of an
inbound call. The start timer can be set
to 16 seconds or 30 seconds.
WC-A
DBS Programming Instruct.io~~
/ 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
All incoming calls will start timing 5
seconds after the initial ring tone, even if
the call duration display is not activated.
To set the SMDR/display timer for 5
seconds, enter:
JFFll. 2w. I#.21. O#
All incoming calls will start timing 16
seconds after the initial ring tone, even if
the call duration display is not activated.
To set the SMDR/display timer for 16
seconds. enter:
To set the SMDR/display timer for 16
seconds, enter:
[eel],2w, l#. 2w. 1w
JFFll.2#.l#. 26. OU
To set the SMDR / display timer for 30
seconds, enter:
To set the SMDR/display timer for 30
seconds, enter:
WFll, 2#, l#,2#, 28
[FFl], 2#, l#, 2#, 1W
Conversation time for central office calls
will start to display 5 seconds after the
completion of dialing the number, or 16
seconds after the initial ring tone of an
inbound call, or 30 seconds after the
initial ring tone of an inbound call. The
start timer can be set to 5 seconds. 16
seconds, or 30 seconds.
14
The central office call duration display is
set by address [FFl], 2#. l#, l#.
WC-B software version 2.00 should be
upgraded to version 2.03 to eliminate two
intermittent potential SMDR defkiencies
in recording field codes. See Technote 8
(March 1992). for complete information.
CPC-B versions 3.00 or newer resolves
this potential SMDR deficiency.
(
DES Programming Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Outbound calls can be automatically
routed to special carriers when LCR is
activated. To access a non LCR line for
outbound calls, (when a “9” is dialed).
enter:
JFFll.2#. I#.39. 08
To automatically access a LCR line for
outbound calls, (when a “9” is dialed),
enter:
/’
cFF1],2#,I#, 3#, l#
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
A group of SSD numbers or a single
SSD number can be used, despite toll
restriction (types 2-6) that may be in
use for a specific area or offrce code. The
speed dial number entry used in this
program is the lowest entry number to
be able to override toll restriction. All
SSD numbers higher than the one
entered will also override toll restriction
that may be in use for a specific area or
office code.
To set a group of system speed dial
numbers from 56 to 89, (for example),
to bypass toll restriction types 2-6,
enter:
[FFl],26, 1#,4#, 568
All LCRoptions are set at address number
W-1.
The use of LCR requires cutting the
jumper on the CPC card. See Section
300 for specific
details on this
hardware modification. Make certain
to register the DBS with the FCC using
the proper registration number when
using LCR trunk access programming.
To reset the overriding of toll restriction
tvnes 2-6 of a grout of svstem sueed
dial numbers to the default initialized
value. Dress (FF11, 2#. l#. 4#. (CONFL
jON/OFFI.
If a SLT uses this feature to override toll
restriction, there is a 15 second delay
before audio is passed to the receiver.
15
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
’
You have the option of displaying, on
any LCD phone, the telephone number
associated with SSD codes (80-89). This
option also effects REDL&L and will
display or not display accordingly when
redialing one of these SSD codes.
Telephone numbers associated with
SSD codes (00-79). and all names
associated with all SSD codes will
always display.
To display the telephone number
associated with SSD codes 80-89,
enter:
DBS Programming Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Pressing the REDIAL key will redial the
most recently dialed number.
To deactivate the use of the redial feature,
enter:
ml],
21, l#, 6W. O#
To enable the use of the redial feature,
enter:
JFFll. 2W. 1%. 6W. l#
JFFll. 2#. I#. 5w. 06
To withhold display of the telephone
number associated with SSD codes 8089, enter:
FFl],
2#, 19, 5#, 19
Toll restriction for blocks of System
speed dial numbers is set at address
[FFl], 2#, l#. 4#.
Display of 5 or 10 System speed dial
numbers on a large display telephone is
set at address ]FFl]. 2#. l#, 19#.
System speed dial names are set at
address [FF6], 2#. (00-89)#.
System speed dial numbers are set at
address [FFlO], l#, (00-89)#.
16
If the DBS is installed behind a PBX,
this feature must be disabled. The
central office line flash and the redial
flash features are controlled by the same
timer.
The PBX flash timer is set at address
[FFl], 3#, 18#.
Central office line type is set at address
[FF2]. (l-64)#, lO#.
DBS Progmxmning Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
The one-touch call feature provides
dialing to an extension by pressing a
single programmable key, and is enabled
by both settings. This feature cannot be
deactivated.
8’
An incoming call can be automatically
transferred to another extensionbyplacing
thecallonhold,dialingan&ensionnumber . .
and hanging up.
To disable automatic transferring of a call,
to an internal extension, enter:
pm],
2#, l#* 8#, O#
To enable automatic transferring of a call
to an internal extension, enter:
JFFll. 2#. 1n. 88. 1w
...“fii$&@$
~~-I-
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
only central office line calls can be
transferred to other extensions.
Transfer recall time for attendant(s). is set
at address [FFl], 3#, 4#.
Transfer recall time for extensions other
than the attendant(s), is set at address
[FFl], 3#, 5#.
Transfer recall time for intercom calls
from the attendant(s), is set at address
[FFl], 3#, 24#. This feature is found on
WC-B ver. 2.00 or newer. so&ware.
Transfer recall time for intercom calls
from extensions, is set at address [FFlJ,
3#, 2%. This feature is found on WC-B
ver. 2.00 or newer sofhvare.
Calls transferred by an extension, that
recall to the extension, and then are not
answered, will transfer -toextension 100.
In CPC-B ver. 2.00 and newer, up to 4
attendant positions can be designated.
Addresses to be used to set these
extensions are [FFl], 2#. l#, 24-27#.
The time for this transfer procedure is
set at address [FFl], 3#, 9#.
If a Voice Announce Unit (VAU model
VB-43708) is used, this address must be
set to the default setting as follows: [FFl],
2#, I#, 8#, l#.
To transfer a call with this feature
disabled the [PROG] key must be
pressed after dialing an extension, but
before hanging up the handset. When
this option is enabled in a CPC-B
equipped system, intercom calls and
central office line calls can be transferred.
In systems equipped with a WC-A card,
17
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
Automatically places a central office-tie
that is in use on system hold, when you
press a ringing line key to answer a new
inbound call.
To disable the automatic hold feature for
a call on an existing central oflIce line,
when a new central office line call is
ringing in, enter:
WC-A
DBS Pro@ammin.
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Central office line-calls to a telephone that
does not have a dedicated
key
appearance. can be placed on either
system hold or exclusive hold. Access to a
second central office line while using this
feature is not possible.
To enable the exclusive hold fature for
central of&e lines that do not appear on
a telephone. enter:
pFlL 2#.1#,9#.0#
pFl],2#, l#,lO#,O#
To automatically
place an existing
central
office line call on system hold, and to
answer a new inbound ringing central
office call, enter:
To enable the system hold feature for
central office lines that do not appear on
a telephone, enter:
pFl],2#, 1#,9#,1#
JFFll,
21. l#.low. l#
This hold feature applies to Single-Line
Telephones and/or digital telephonesthat
do not have a dedicated keys for a central
office line(s).
18
DBS Programming Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To provide differing capabilities for SLT
hookflash operation, this feature can be
set to retrieve DBS dial tone, or to retrieve
a central office line caller that has been
placed on hold%-omthis telephone.
To activate the DBS intercom dial tone as
a result of a SLT hookflash, enter:
section 400 FF1
Issue 3 July 1993
When installing more than 60 telenhones,
you must use a 3-digit (100-699)
extension number dialing plan. For sites
using fewer than 60 telephones, Zdigit
( 1O-69).or 3digit extension numbers can
be used.
To set the DBS for 2 digit extension
number lengths, enter:
pFl], 2w, I#, ll#,O#
lFFl],2#, lW, 12#,0##
/
To retrieve a central office line caller that
has been previously placed on hold at this
telephone (via a hookswitch flash), enter:
To set the DBS for 3 digit extension
number lengths, enter:
JFFll.2w. l#. ll#. l#
JFFll.29. I#. 12w. I##
When this feature is set for DBS system
dial tone, a caU placed on hold at another
telephone can be retrieved by dialing 79
and the extension number that originally
placed the call on hold.
Thissettingcanadverse~~~ttyother
DBS setting that is based on extension
numbers. Examples of this are program
entries for DSS/BLF keys and call
forwarding.
ThispmgmrnoptionreouiresaconCnning#,
at the conclusion of the programming
sequence.
19
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
DBS Ro@umning
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
The alternate attendant extension wiII
have attendant features and can receive
overfknv intercom calls if the primary
attendant extension is busy.
To set attendant intercom calls to “tone”
calling, enter:
To enable an alternate extension, enter:
To set attendant intercom calls to “voice”
caIling. enter:
[eel],2#, l#, 14W.06
pm], 2#, l#, 13#,0#
JFFll.2#. lW.146. l#
To have no provision for an alternate
attendant, enter:
An alert tone for voice calling is set at
address [FFl], 2#. l#, 16#.
In CPC-B software versions earlier than
2.00. ifaSLTtmnsfersacentraIoi3celine
caI.Ito an extension set for call forward no
answer,
or calI forward busy, no answer,
This feature is not available if the
*AttendwdFeaturePack~"isusedwith the call wiII not transfer if addresses
[FFl], 2#, l#, 14 & 15# are set for tone
CPC-B 2.00 or later software.
calling (O#). If this setting is required,
CaIIs transferred by an extension, that
tmnsfeninga~tmIofEcelinecaIIkoma
recall to the extension. and then are not
SLT to an extension set as such can be
answered, wiIl transfer to the extension
completed by dialing an “8” after the
set as the attendant at this address.
extensionnumbertowhichthecaIIeristobe
‘The time for this transfer procedure is set
transferredis diakd. CR-B software verat address (FFl], 3#, 9#.
sionsnewerthan2.05donotrequimthe%”
tobediaIedafterthe&ensionnumberis
diakd. SeeTechnotes 9 & 12 (March 1992)
for completetionnation.
Ifthis addressis set to IFFlIt 2#. l#, 14#,l#
Pmicd'dir@, asopposedto ringtone, and
aVoice AnnounceUnit (modelVB-43708)is
connecfedto the DBS, the VAU wiII not
Intercom calls from an attendant
answeranintercomcaUtoitunlessthecaIIer
telephone can be established with a ring
diaIsa”1”akrtheVAU~ionnumber.
tone, or directly by voice. After the
See Technote 14 (March1992)for complete
connectionisestablished,theattendantcan
information.
changeii-omonetotheotherbydiaIing”1”.
pFll. 2w. l#. 13w. l#
20
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Intercom calls from an extension (non
attendant) telephone can be established
with a ring tone or by voice. After the
connection is established, the extension
user can change from one to the other by
dialing “1”. _.
To set extension intercom caIls to “tone”
calling, enter:
Section 400 FFL
Issue 3 July 1993
If this address is set to [FFl]. 2#, l#.
1%. l# rvoice” caIIing), as opposed to
ring tone, and a Voice Announce Unit
(model VB-43708) is connected to the
DBS. the VAU will not answer an
intercom calI to it unIess the caller dials
a “1” after the VAU extension number.
See Technote 14 (March 1992) for
complete information.
[eel], 2w, I#, 15#, on
Tosetextensionintercomcallingto”voice”
caII.ing,enter:
/
..
/
Dll.
2#. l#. 1%. I#
An alert tone for voice caUing is set at
address [FFl], 2#, l#, 16#.
In CPC-B software versions earlier than
2.00, if a SLT transfers a central office
line calI to an extension set for caII
forward no answer, or calI forward busy,
no answer, the ca.II wiII not transfer if
addresses [FFl], 2#, l#, 14 & 15# are
set for tone calIing (0% If this setting is
required, transferring a central office line
calI from a SLT to an extension set as such
can be completed by diaIing an “8” after
the extension number to which the
caller is to be transferred is dialed.
CPC-B software versions newer than
2.05 do not require the “8” to be dialed
after the extension number is dialed.
c..S. T~cBL-r\t~~
0 IzI 1 c) fA/l.-arr.k
1 aa
fnr
An initial splash tone for “voice” intercom
c&Is can be sounded for 0.5 second before
the caller’s audio path is connected.
Intercom caI.Iscan be set for no initiaI alert
tone by entering:
prlrll.
2#. 16. 16#. OW
Intercomcallscanbesetforaninftialalert
tone by entering:
ml], 28, I#, 16#,1#
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
Ifan active central office caIl is interrupted
by another caller. on an extension set for
busy override, an alert tone can precede
the interruption.
To have no alert tone preceding an
interruption of an active central office
line call, enter:
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
When a “1” must be dialed preceding an
areacode to make along distance call, this
option must be set.
If long distance dialing requires the
dialing of a “1” prior to the area code,
enter:
[eelI, 2W, l#, 18#,0#
JFFlL 2#. 1s. 17#.0#
To provide an alert tone preceding an
intenuption of an active central o&e line
call, enter:
If long distance diaIing does not require
the dialingofa’1”priorto
dialing an area
code. enter:
JFFll.2#.
l#. 18W. l#
pFl]* 2w, 18, 17#, 1w
A conference call, or a conversation on a
telephone which has off hook voice
announce enabled, cannot be interrupted
by the busy override feature.
Extensions to be interrupted, are set at
address [FITS], (1- 144)#, lO#.
22
This setting must be enabled when toll
restriction and/or LCR is used.
Toll restriction programming is set with
[FM] addresses.
Least cost routing programming is set
with [FFB] addresses.
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section
400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Five or ten names can be displayed on the
LCD telephone directory at once. When 10
are chosen, the maximum length for each
of the names is limited to 7 characters.
To set LCD. directories
capability, enter:
jFFll.an.
for 5 name
JPml. 2#. 1#.21#.0#
l#. 19#.0#
To set the DBS to send a busy tone at the
conclusion of a voice mail call, enter:
To set LCD directories for 10 name
capability, enter:
pFl],2#,
The DBS can be set to send a busy tone or
to send silence to a voice-mail port(s) at
the conclusion of a call. To set the DBS to
send silence at the conclusion of a voice
mail call, enter:
~1],2#.
1#,21#,
l#
l#, 19#, 1n
..
To restrict a certain block of system speed
dial numbers, see address [FFl]. 2#, l#,
4#.
To enable or disable the display of System
speed dialnumbers seeaddress [FFl]. 2#.
l#, 5#.
To assign a name to a system speed dial
number, see address [FFG]. 2#, (00-89)#.
Toassignanumbertoasystemspeeddial
bin, see address [FFlO], l#, (OO-89)#.
To utilize variable ring patterns for a
transferred call (specifically to amodem or
SLT user requiring ID of a transferred
call), this option must be used.
To set the transfer ring pattern to .4 sec.
on / 3.6 sec. off. enter:
pm,
2#. 1#.22#.0#
To set the transfer ring pattern to three .8
sec. on .2 sec. off bursts / 1.0 sec. off,
enter:
fml],
2#, 1#,22#,
1w
23
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
f
To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.
on burst / .2 sec. off, .8 sec. on / 2.2 sec.
off enter:
pm],
21, 1#,22#,2#
To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.
on / 2.2 sec. off, enter::
pm]* 2#, 1#,22#,3#
To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.
on / 3.2 sec. off, enter:
Toplacealimitonthenumberofincoming
calls that can be stacked to the first
attendant, a value must be placed in this
program. Calls exceedingthe set limit are
automatically
transferred
to other
extensions. The day and night delayed
ring tables determine which extension(s)
receive overflow calls.
To set the attendant overflow feature to 8
calls, for example, enter:
mm
2w. 1#,22#.8#
[eel], 2w, 1#,22#,4#
L...
To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.
on / 5.2 sec. off, enter:
(FF1].2#, 1#,22#,5#
To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec.
on / 3.2 sec. off / .8 sec. on / 7.2 sec. off,
enter:
ml).
2W, 1#,22#,6#
Hold recalls, transferred recalls, and
reversion calls are included in this
number. Hold recalls are dependent on
attendantandextensionholdtimersfound
in addresses [FFl] 3#. 2# & 3#.
Transfer recalls are dependent on
attendant and extension transfer timers
found in addresses [FFl] 3#, 4# & 5#.
Hunt group recalls are dependent on
attendant and extension hunt group
timers found in addresses [FFl] 3#, 6# &
7#.
Reversion recalls are dependent on
attendant reversion timers found in
program address (FFl] 3#, 2# & lO#.
The attendant telephone is not included
as an overflow position in the delayed ring
table(s).
24
DBS Programming I.nstnxtions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
An alternate
central
pattern
is assigned
ringing tables.
section 400 ITI
Is6ue3July1993
office line ring
in the delayed
To disallow
the use of delayed
assignments..in
the DBS. enter:
ring
To set any DBS extension number to be
the second attendant position, this option
must be used.
To set extension number
103 to be
attendant position 2, for example. enter:
JFFll. 2W. 1#.23#.0#
pFl],2#*
ToaUowtheuseofdelayedringass@mrents
in the DBS, enten
To reset the second attendant no&ion to
the default initialized value. Dress IFFlG
2#. l#. 24#. lOl#. ON/OFF.
tFF1],2#,
1#,23#,
103w
l#
. ..
Delayed
address
Delayed
address
1#,24#,
day ring programmmg
[FF4], 5#.
night ring programming
[FF4], 6#.
is set at
is set at
To clear the second attendant position
from extension number
101, set the
program address [FFl], 2#. l#. 24#,
ICONFJ. IOWOFFI.
The only way the second attendant
positioncanbeclearedistohaveadisplay
phone installed on the port.
The extension
number
must
number that is valid for the site.
be
a
Installation of Attendant feature package
so&ware involves the removal of EPROM
chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and
substitution
of the chip with one
specifically designed with the special
Attendant features. Be sure the new
EPROM is installed
in the proper
direction. See Technote 4 (September
1991). for complete information.
25
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 /.3-O / 4.0
f
To set any DBS extension number to be
the third attendant, this option must be
used.
To set any DBS extension number to be
the fourth attendant, this option must be
used.
To set extension 104 to be attendant
position 3. for example, enter:
To set extension 105 to be attendant
position 4, for example. enter:
pFl],2#,
ml].2#,
1#,25#,
104#
1#,26#,
105W
To reset the third attendant nosition to the
default initialized value. press IFFll. 2#,
l#. 25#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl.
To reset the fourth extension nosition to
the default initialized value. Dress 1FFlG
2#. l#. 26#. ICONFl. lON/OFFl.
Installation of Attendant feature package
software involves the removal of EPROM
chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and
substitution
of the chip with one
specifically designed with the special
Attendant features. Be sure the new
EPROM is installed in the proper
direction. See Technote 4 (September
1991). for complete information.
Installation of Attendant feature package
software involves the removal of EPROM
chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and
substitution
of the chip with one
specifically designed with the special
Attendant features. Be sure the new
EPROM is installed in the proper
direction. See Technote 4 (September
1991). for complete information.
26
Section4OO FFl
3 July 1093
DBS Programming
Instructiox~
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Iesue
To set any extension number to be the
overflow position to which calls will flow
when the attendant(s) are all busy, this
option must be used.
To set any attendant to be able to override
an existing conversation on a non
attendant telephone, this option must be
used.
To set extension 106, for example, to be
the overflow extension forthe attendant(s),
enter:
To disable all designated attendant
positions
to
override
existing
conversations
on non attendant
telephones, enter:
p1],2#,
I#, 27#, 106#
pFl],2#,
To reset the attendant overflow extension
position to the default iniUallzed val e,
press IFFll. 2#. l#. 27#. WON:],
ON/OFF.
1#,28#,0#
To enable all designated attendant
positions
to
override
existing
conversations
on non attendant
telephones. enter:
JFFll. 2#. 1#.28#. l#
This extension cannot be a pilot number.
Installation ofAttendant feature package
software involves the removal of EPROM
chip 1 from the CPC-B card. and
substitution
of the chip with one
specifkally designed with the special
Attendant features. Be sure the new
EPROM is installed in the proper
direction. See Technote 4 (September
199 1). for complete in.Sonnation.
Busy override splash tone is set with /
program address [FFl], 2#, l#. 17#.
Installation of At&dam feature package
tsofhm involves the removal of EPROM
chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and
substitution of the chip with one spedficalty
designed with the special Attendant
features. Be sure the new EPROM is
installed in the proper direction. See
Technote 4 (September 1991). for complete
kknnation.
27
Section 400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 /.3.0 / 4.0
To set an FF key that has been designated
as an alarm key on an attendant(s)
telephone to light, this option must be
used.
When a ringing extension is not answered,
calls can be distributed
to other
extensions on the basis of extension
delayed ring programming.
To disable the alarm key(s) on attendant
telephones from lighting, enter:
To disable the extension delayed ring
option, enter:
pm],
Fell.
2#, l#, 29#, on
To enable the alarm key(s) on attendant
telephones to light, enter:
pml.
2#. 1w. 308. ow
To enable the extension delayed ring
option, enter:
2w. l#, 29#. I#
Lnstallation of Attendant feature package
software involves the removal of EPROM
chip 1 from the CPC-B card. and
substitution
of the chip with one
specifically designed with -the special
Attendant features. Be sure the new
EPROM is installed in the proper
direction. See Technote 4 (September
199 1). for complete information.
Thisfeatureisusedtosetthetmnsferxing
signs pattern for devices connected
to an
analog extension port of the DBS. Any of
1 seven different ring pattern can be ’
chosen.
M
End
of Attendant
Feature
Package
,5 Seconds
ON / 3.5 M
I#
3.0 Seconds
ON/
I .O Second
OFF
2#
2.0
ON / 2.0 Seconds
:3t
1 .O Seccmd
ON /2.0
41
1 .O Second
ON / 3.0
Seconds
OFF
!i#
1 .O Seccmd
ON / 5.0 Seconds
OFF
OptiOIlS
Srconds
Seconds
1.O Second ( )N I 7.0 Secmds
28
OFF
OFF
OFF
DBS Programming
Instructiom~
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Four digit Direct Inward Dial numbers
can be set to ring at one extension port, or
at multiple extension ports.
To set DID numbers to only ring at one
extension, enter:
JFFll. 2W. 1#.32#.0#
To set DID numbers to ring at multiple
extensions, enter:
ml],2#,
1#,32#, l#
When this feature is set to ” 1”. all
&e.nsion ports that have a DID number
asigned will simultaneously ring on an
inbound Central O&x call. Ifthe setting of
thisfeatureis”O”,andaDIDnumberhas
been assigned to multiple &en&on ports,
only the lowest number extension portwill
w. .
Also, if this feature is set to “1”. and
multiple extension ports have a DID
number assigned, but some or all of them
are call forwarded, ONLY the lowest
extension port number will call forward
after the call forward timer expires. The
remaining extension ports will ring from
the DID assignment until the call
foxwarding has started.
If this feature is set to ” 1”. and multiple
extension ports have a DID number
assigned. and one (not the lowest port
number) is call forwarded. the remaining
extension ports will ring ikom the DID
assignment until the call forwarding has
started.
Section
400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
This programming address controls two
functions.
Ifonlyanalogtrunksareused,aItums
on multiple DID numbering. Multiple DID
numbering allows the assignment of one
DID number to multiple extensions. If
one DID/DNIS number is assigned to
multiple stations, the stations ring simultaneouslywhen the DID or DMS number
is dialed.
IfTl trunks are used, a I also turns on
DNIS (Dialed Number Identiiication Service). DNISisavailableonlywithTltrunks.
More than one DNIS number can be
assigned to a single extension.
o=off
l=On
The option to set the duration that the
page circuit will be active can be set for a
deiIned or unlimited time.
Tosetthepageduraliontimetounknikd,
en&
jFF11, 2#. 1n. 33#.0#
To limit the page duration time to 60
seconds, enter:
pm],
2#, I#, 33#, 1w
29
Section
400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
WC-A
The ring pattern to a device that is
connected to a Panasonic ringer box, and
receives an inbound DISA call can be set
to mering patterns. The pattern can be
set to a one second on, three second off
ring burst, or it can follow any of the
patterns found in the normal Central
Oi&etransferringpattemsfoundin[FF1].
2#, l#, 22#.
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
This part of the communication
parameters checks for errors in the
tmnsmission of data for SMDR application
products, and local/remote pro-g.
To disable the parity check for all
transmission of datathmugh the SMDR
port enterI
[eel], 2%,2#, lW, ow
TosettheSLTDiSAringpattemto
on / 3.0 set off, enter:
Jmll.
l.Osec,
Tosettheparitycheckforalltransmission
of data through the SMDR port, enter:
2R. 1#.34#.0#
EFll.
21y.21. I#. l#
To set the SLT DISA ring pattern to be the
same as the Central Office transfer ring
pattern setting, enter:
pF1],2#,
30
1#,34#,
l#
Be Sure to properly set all axnmunication
Programming dwfien modifjling
any single addressvalue. Communication
parametersaresetwithaddressesthatare
found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through lO##.
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
If the parity check has been set, this
option determines whether the check is
based on an even count or an odd count.
To set the parity check for an odd value,
enter:
pm]*
section
400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
The data transmission speeds between
the DBS SMDR port and peripheral
equipment can be set in arange from 300
bits per second to 9600 bits per second.
To set the data transmission speedto 300
bps, enter:
2#,2#, 2#,OW
fFFl],2#,2#,3#,
To set the parity check for an even value.
enter:
JFFll.2#.2#.2#.
1w
To set the data transmission speed to
1200 bps, enter:
l#
pm],
Be sure to pmpexiy set all axnmunication
pmgmmming addresses when modifjing
anysingleaddressvaiue.
Communication parameters are set with
addresses that are found at lFFl], 2#, 2#. 1
thmugh lo??.
2#,2#, 3#,2#
To set the data transmission speed to
4800 bps, enter:
pl],
2#, 2#, 3#,3#
To set the data transmission speed to
9600 bps. enter:
plw.
2#.2#. 3#.4#
Be sure to proper@ set all communication
programming addresses when modifying
single address value.
Communication parameters are setwith
addresses that are found at [FFl), 2#, 2#.
1 through lO#.
31
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructiona
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
f
‘This option sets the length of the stop-bit
for transmitted data.
Sets the length of *he transmitted data
string at 5 to 8 bits.
To set the length of the stop bit data to 1
bit. enter:
To set the length of the data string at 5
bits, enter:
~ll.2#,2#.4#.
CFFl], 2w, 2w. w, 1w
l#
To set the length of the stop bit data to 1.5
bits, enter:
To set the length of the data string at 6
bits, enter:
pFl],2#,2#,48,2#
WFl],2#,2#.
To set the length of the stop bit data to 2
bits, enter:
To set the length of the data string at 7
bits, enter:
[eel], 2#,2#,4#,
::......:
::.:..,:
:)J::>
:::>..
DJ&p&#@
IFFl],2#,2#,5#,
3#
Be sure to properly set all communication
addresses when modifying any single
address value.
Communication parameters are set with
addresses that are found at [FFll, 2#, 2#,
1 through lO#.
5W, 2W
3%
To set the length of the data string at 8
bits, enter:
11.2#.2#.
5#.4#
,*~
E3esure to properly set all communication
addresses when modifying any single
address value.
Communication parameters are set with
addresses that are found at (FFl], 2#, 2#.
1 through lO#.
32
f-
DBS Programming Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
The SMDR printer can record data for
outgoing calls only or both outbound
and inbound calls.
The SMDR printer can record data on
long-distance calls only or on all types
of outbound calls.
To set the SMDR. to record only
outbound call information, enter:
To record call data only on long distance
calls, enter:
EFl],
[IFFl],
2#, 2#, 6#, OW
2#, 28, 7#, O#
To set the SMDR to record inbound and
outbound call information, enter:
To record call data on all types of
outbound calls, enter:
FFll.
jFF11. 2#. 2W. 7#. l#
2#. 21. 6#. l#
The system must be in the SMDR mode
so that the printer can provide usable
SMDR data. This is done by performing
the following action from the attendant
extension: [ON/OFF], #, 93, [ON/OFF].
Al communication settings between the
printer and the DBS must be matched.
[FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through 5# addresses
encompass these options. Be sure to
properly
set all communication
addresses when modifying any single
address
value.
Communication
parameters are set with addresses that
are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through
lO#.
CPC-B software version 2.00 should be
upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate
two intermittent
potential
SMDR
deficiencies in recording field codes.
See Technote 8 & 12 (March 1992). for
complete information.
Be sure to properly set all communication
programming addresses when modifying
any single address value. Communication parameters are set with addresses
that are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through
lO#.
CPC-B software version 2.00 should be
upgraded to version .2.05 to eliminate
two intermittent
potential
SMDR
deficiencies in recording field codes.
SeeTechnotes 8 & 12 (March 1992). for
complete information.
33
Section
400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
h~~tn~ction~~
/ 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
f
Titles such as Time, Duration and CO#
are printed every 60 lines if this feature
is enabled.
To disable the printing of a title line on
every 60th line of the SMDR report,
enter:
JFFll. 2#.2#.
8#. 0#
To set the printing of a title line on every
60th line of the SMDR report, enter:
The X-On/X-Off feature of the DBS is a
k&ware switch” to temporarily stop the
DBS fkom sending data out the SMDR
portiftheprinterbufferhasreceivedmore
data than it can print. The ability to send
a control code to the DBS can be enabled
on most commercially available printers.
To disable the X-On/X-Off feature of the
DBS, so that SMDR data always flows
from the SMDR port, enter:
mm
leel],2#,2#,8#.
Be sure to properly set all communication
addresses when modifying any single
address
value.
Communication
parameters are set with addresses that
are found at [FF’l], 2#, 2#, 1 through lO#+.
CRC-B software version 2.00 should be
upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate two
intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies
in recording field codes. SeeTechnotes 8
81 12 (March 1992). for complete
information.
34
2#.2#.9#.0#
19
To enable the X-On/X-Off feature of the
DBS, so that
SMDR data will
temporarily stop flowing when the printer
bulk is fiAl, enter:
rFFll,2#,2#,
9n, 1n
Be sure to properly set all communication
addresses when modifying any single
address
Communication
value.
parameters are set with addresses that
are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#. 1 through lO#.
CRC-B software version 2.00 should be
upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate two
intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies
in recording field codes. See Technotes 8
& 12 (March 1992). for complete
information.
c-
DBS Programming
Inst~ctions
/ 3.0, CPC-B/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFl
Issue.3 July 1993
WC-A
The baud rate that is used for remote
programming capability can be set to 300
or 1200 baud.
To set the baud rate for remote
progmmmingcapabilityto 3OObaud. enter:
fH@Fl],2#,2#, lO#,O#
The DBS has the capability to dial 8
different PBX access codes. These codes
can be one, two. or three digits in length.
Thepurposeofthisfeatureissothatwhen
the DBS is installed behind a PBX or
Centrex, and toll restriction has been set
on the DBS, the DBS will disregard the
PBX access code digit(s) as part of the
dialed number.
To set the baud rate for remote
programming capability to 1200 baud,
enter:
To store “9” as the Grst PBX access code
(for example), enter:
jmll.
pFl],2#,3#,1#,9#
2#.2#.
low. 1n
To set the second PBX access code of “8”
(for example), enter:
When a remote administration “B” card is
used, either baud rate setting can be
utilized.
However when a remote
administration “B” card is used with a
dual DBS having a voice mail system
connected to an analog extension port,
the baud rate must be set to 300 bps. See
Technote 3 (April 1991) for complete
information.
When a remote administration “A” card is
used, only the 300 baud rate setting can
be used. Parity check, even or odd parity,
and stop-bit length parameters are fixed
on the WC-B card. The use of peripheral
equipment with this card necessitateSthat
the equipment communication pammeters
must be able to be modified. Be sure to
properiy set all communication addresses
when modifying any single address value.
Communication pammeters are set with
addressesthat are found at [FFl), 2#, 2#, 1
though
lO#.
To reset the PBX dial access code feature
tothedefaukinitializedvalue.~ressfFFll,
2#. 3#. (l-8)#. ICONFl#. fON/OFFl.
Use (FFl l] to store rr*nas awild card dialed
digit. Central office line type is set with
program address [FFZ?],(l-64)#. lO#.
The first parameter of the program code
(l-8). identies the number of the access
code. The second parameter of the
program code (O-999 or O*-99*), identifies
the actual coderequired to access the PBX
or Centrex.
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
To automatically insert a pause in the
PBX access code dialing (and SSD. PSD
codes), after the output of the first and/or
second, and/or third code number, use
this option. The purpose for the use of this
pause is that it may take several seconds
to connect with a central office telephone
line.
To set a pause after automatic outpuke of
the first dialed digit, (which is assumed to
be L(1” in this example), enter:
pFl],2#,3#,
9#, l#
To set a pause after automatic outpulse of
the second dialed digit, (which is assumed
to be “2” in this example), enter:
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To set a pause after automatic outpulse of
the sixth dialed digit. (which is assumed to
be “6” in this example), enter:
leel],2#,3#,
To set a pause after automatic outpulse
of the seventh dialed digit, (which is
assumed to be “7” in this example),
enter:
[FFl], 2#, 3W, 15#, 7W
To set a pause after automatic outpulse
of the eighth dialed digit, (which is
assumed to be “8” in this example),
enter:
@Wl].2#,3#,
pFl],2#,3#,
[eel], 2w, 3#, 12#,4#
To set a pause after automatic outpuke of
the fifth dialed digit, (which is assumed to
be “5” in this example), enter:
36
To reset the automatic cause for PBX
access code dialing to the default
initialized value. Dress lFF11. 2#. 3#,
]CONFl#. lON/OFFI.
11#,3#
To set a pause after automatic outpulse of
the fourth dialed digit, (which is assumed
to be “4” in this example), enter:
pm],
16W.81
10#,2#
To set apause after automatic outpuke of
the third dialed digit. (whichis assumed to
be “3” in this example), enter:
rFFl], 2#,3#,
14#,6#
2#, 3#, 13#,5#
lhe pause timer value is set with address
[FFl], 3#. 12#.
Central ofIke line flash timer options are
set at address [FF2], (l-64)+!. 13#.
DBS Programming
In8t~~ction.s
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
The ring pattern for the universal night
answer (UNA) relay-terminals can be set
foracontinuousorintermittent
ringburst.
section
400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
To enableaccesstoextemalpaginggroups
0 through 7. the relay(s) must be
activated.
To set the ring pattern for a 1 second on/
3 second off pattern, enter:
JFFll. 2#.4#.
l#.OW
To set the ring pattern for a continuous
ring burst, enter:
c
j
pFl],2#,4#,
ng@yJg$&
.::..
.:..::.:I.:::
lW, 1w
To reset the external nage interface to the
default initialized value Dress. IFFll. 2#,
#. ICONFl. lON/OFFl.
When using a non central office sound.
source for the buzzer, select 1 second on/
3 second off to simulate an incomingring.
Seesection 300, Insta.Uation Instructions,
for more information on UNA.
To establish a central office line ring over
external page speakers when the DBS is
in the day mode, (and WC-A software is
being used) see address (FF4], l#, 73#. To
establish a central of&e line ring over
external page speakers when the DBS is
in the night mode, (and WC-A sofkvare is
being used) see address ]FF4], 2#. 73#.
To establish a central office line ring over
external page speakers when the DBS is
in the day mode, (and WC-B software is
being used) see address fFF4], l#, 145#.
To establish a central office line ring over
external page speakers when the DBS is
in the night mode, (and WC-B softwareis
being used) see address [FF4], l#. 145#.
Extension class of service provides a
method to set defined groups of extension
features to a class of senrice. This class of
service is then assigned to an extension or
group of extensions, as desired. The 20
extension features can be assigned in any
order and in any amount to any of the 8
classes of service.
37
section
400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
DBS Pro@amd.n~
hstnrctions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
The 20 allowable features that can be
classified into
grouping are:
any class of service
There are 100 verified forced account
codes available for use. A four digit
account code ranging from 0001 to
9999 is checked against a list of up to
100 preset values. If the value of the
code matches one of the preset values,
Central Office line access is granted.
Fa8tum
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Dial Tone On/Off 1#50)
Head/Handset
Exchange (#51) BGM On/Off (#53)
(Absence Message Set/Reset (71)
Call Forward Set/Reset (72)
Do Not Disturb (73)
Station Lockout (74)
Park Access (75)
Park Pick Up (76)
Meet Me Answer (771
IUNA Pickuo (78)
IDirect pick Up (79)
/Group Pick Up (70)
(Tone/Voice Mode (1)
/Message Waiting Set (2)
IBusy Override (4)
Icall waitin&? (3)
Single Une Telephone
Transfer
For example, to set verified forced
account code 1 to a value of 8888, enter:
[eel],
I
6#,
l#, 8888W
For example, to set verified forced account
code 56 to a value of 5656, enter:
CFFl],2#,
6#,56#,
5656#
To reset the ve&ed forced account code
parameter to the default initial&d value,
press IFFll. 2#. 6#t. (l-lOO)#. lCOm
.
~ON/OFFl.
(8)
To set the extension class of sewice to the
default initialized value. press IFFll. 2#,
5#. (l-8)#. (l-20)#. O#. iON/OFFl.
The default value of this feature sets full
restriction on all classes of service. The
extension programmmg for this feature,
[FF3], (OOl-144)#, 35#, provides for all
features to be available on all extension
ports. When the DBS is in the default
condition, the extension programming of
this feature takes precedence.
38
2#,
Forced Account codes found in earlier
versions of software have been replaced
by this feature. The account code feature
(non forced) remains.
A veiled forced account code of 0000 is
invalid.
When viewing an SMDR report, the verified forced account that was used to access a Central Office line will appear
starting in position 70 of the call record
line.
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Verified forced account codes can have a
toll restriction class of service assigned to
them. A caller that uses a particular
account codewith atoll restriction class of
service assigned to it would then be
allowed to dial any telephone number
allowed under the toll restriction class of
service for the verified forced account
code.Theextensiontollrestrictionclassof
service in this case would be overridden.
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
To set verified account code number 100,
for example, to have a toll restriction class
of “type 3”. enter:
IFFll, 2#, 6#, lOO#, 2#,3#
To set verified account code number 63,
for example, to have a toll restriction class
of “type 4”. enter:
[eel], 29,6#, 63#, 2#, 4W
To set verified account code number 5, for
example, to have a toll restriction class of
“type 0”. enter:
To set vetied account code number 36.
for example, to have a toll restriction class
of “type 5”. enter:
Wl],
2#, 6#, 36#, 2W.58
To set verified account code number 40,
for example, to have a toll restriction class
of “type 1”. enter:
ml],
2#,6#,40#,2#,
To set verified account code number 44,
for example, to have a toll restriction class
of “type 6’. enter:
1W
ml],
To set vetied account code number 22,
for example, to have a toll restriction class
of “type 2”. enter:
2#,6#, 44#, 2#, 6U
To set verified account code number 61,
for example, to have a toll restriction class
of “Iypc 7”. enter:
[eel], 2#,6#,22#,2#,2#
Bl],
2#,6#,61#,2#,7#
39
Section4OOFFl
Issue2JuIylQQS
‘This option sets a time for the DBS to
automatically switch from day to night
mode.
DBSPro@amm~~~ctions
WC-A/ S.O.CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
A central office line that has been placed
on hold at the attendant extension, will
recall that attendant extension in the
amount of time set in this feature.
To set a night mode start time of 8:02 pm,
(for example) enter:
pwl],3#,
1#,2002#
To set anight mode start time of midnight,
(for example) enter:
pF1],3#,1#,oooo#
To disable the automatic m&t mode start
time. and reset it to the default initialized
value Dress. IFFll. 3#. l#. ICONFl. ION/
OFFl.
Automatic night start time is dependent
on the accuracy of the DBS clock. See
address (FFl], l#, 2#, HHMM.
40
cm
NoRed
7t4
14OsecOnds
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
section
400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
A central of&e line call transferred to an
extension by the attendant, that is left
unanswered, will recall to the attendant
extensionintheamountofUmesetinthis
feature.
A central oflice line that has been placed
on hold by a non-attendant extension,
will recall that extension in the amount
of time set in this feature.
o#
No Recall
7#
14ofL?econds
I&
20Secoods
a#
160 seconds
#
80!3ecmh
ll#
220
5#
loo
12#
24oisecmds
SeaRIds
!5iecalds
. ._
When a central office line call is placed on
hold at an extension. and the call is not
answered, the call will recall the extension. If the call is not answered at the
original holding extension, the call will
transfer to the attendant extension(s).
41
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
WC-A
A central office line call transferred to
another
extension
that
is left
unanswered, will recall to the transferring
extension in the amount of time set in this
feature.
o/t
NolhA
7#
14osfxmds
When a central office line call is
transferred to an extension, and the call is
not answered, the call will recall to the
transferring extension. If the call is not
answered at the original transferring
extension, the call will transfer to the
attendant extension(s).
42
DBS ProgrammingInstnmtions
/ 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
A central office line call transferred to a
hunt group by the attendant, that is left
unanswered, will recall to the attendant
extension in the amount of time set in
this feature.
on
No Recall
fry
14OSeCOtldS
lit
-
8ft
160 seconds
2#
4oz3ecods
w
180 seamds
3#
6oseaKKis
IOU
-2m.?eaJn&~
#
Bosemnds
111
22oseconds
5#
1OOZkCOdS
12#
24oseculA
6#
120 secunds
A central o&e line call transferred to a
hunt group by a non attendant &ension
that is left unanswered, will recall to the
extension in the amount of time set in this
feature.
T&!l ‘.
DBS Programming
I.nstructions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFl
hmue 3 July 1993
A central of&e line call that is parked
by the attendant in any of the 10 park
orbits, will recall to the attendant in the
amount of time set in this feature.
This timer determines how long a
recalling hold call will re-ring the
attendant(s).
I 3# I 6ot3camds
I *o#I 2ooseoDnds
I
11
A central of&e line call that is parked
by a non attendant extension in any of
the 10 park orbits, will recall to the
extension in the amount of time set in
this feature.
ExtensionrecallswUlringattheextension
for the length of time set in this option
before reverting to the attendant.
This feature is not available when the
DBS is in the night settjng.
Section 400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
The length of time a conference call can
continue between 2 central office lines,
after a DBS extension drops out is set
with this program. At the conclusion of
the timer, the conferenced central office
lineswill automatically disconnect. This
timer also applies to outbound central
office line calls made through the DISA
line.
To allow specific central of&e lines to be
used for unsupervised conference calls,
set program address [FF2], (l-64)#, 16#.
To allow specific extensions to be used for
unsupervised
conference calls, set
address [FF3], (l- 144)#, 13#.
44
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
This feature is used to set the length of
the pause that is automatically inserted
during the dialing of the PBX access
code. Each time the [REDIAL] key is
pressed during the entry of PBX access
code numbers, one pause time is stored.
This timer also sets the pause time
when a pause is inserted in a personal
or system speed dial number.
Section 400 FFl
lssuti 3 July 1993
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
This feature sets the time to release an
active central office line when pressing
the [FLASH] or (REDIAL] key.
!
F&h
al
B.-mllds
.2 Seconds
lO#
.9
.3 .secorKl.s
11#
(For future use.)
12#
(For future use.)
No
Seconds
Seconds
1.5 seconds
2.0 seconds
3#
.4
4#
.5 scconcls
13#
2.5 Seconds
(For uure
use.)
5#
.6 Seconds
14#
(For future use.)
8#
.7 Seconds
15#
3.5 seconds
(For f&u-e
use.1
’
To set the central office line flash on a SLT
to flash or disconnect when the hook
switch is pressed, use this feature.
3.0 seconcls
Single line telephones must press the
hookswitch and dial “87 to activate this
feature.
ms
1 200-500
ms
1 >500
ms
l#
4200 ms
200-750
ms
>750
ms
2#
4200
ms
200- 1000 ms
> 1000 ms
3#
4200
ms
200- 1200 ms
>1200
ms
4#
400
ms
200- 1500 ms
>1500
ms
5#
4200 ms
NONE
>200
ms
6#
4200 ms
30- 140 ms
9dCl
ms
O#
1 400
After setting this timer, the D&3 must be
turned off to set the option.
45
section
400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
WC-A
For the DBS to detect the length of time it
takes for the central office to complete a
fiAl ring cycle, this detection timer must
be set. Ifthe central office has a ring cycle
of 1 on and 4 off. for example, the DBS
setting should be placed at 6 to account
for two rings and one silent period of four
second duration.
OI
UL
4 seaonds
2t
8 SeoDnds
31)
10 fsccmds
Ixistructions
3.0 / 4.0
2.0 /
This timer expands the ring cycle to compensate for the time the DBS initcally
requires to detect the ring source.
OI
kurpansloo
a*
.40 seconds
3#
.5 sannds
90
.45 seconds
2#
.lO Sccoado
101
so
31
.lS secon&
11a
.55 Eiecmds
4#
-2o-
12*
60
51
.25seauMl¶
13#
61
.30-
14n
IurI.35
If this timer is set for to short of a time
period, the systemwUnotrecognizevalid
centml ofke ring signals.
DBS Ro@amming
/ 3.0. CPGB /
I
151
’
seconds
seconds
.6!5 seconds
.70 seconds
I
.75 seconds
Setting this timer for longer or shorter
periods oftimewill cause the first audible
ring cycle to be different from the source
ring cycle.
DBS Programming
InstrUctions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To set a pause before the outpulse of
digits after access of a central office line,
use this feature.
Time
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Ifan extension that has been set with call
forward/no
answer, a call to that
extension will ring for the period of time
set in this feature. If the call is
unanswered at the end of the timed
period, the call will automatically transfer
to an extension that has been designated
in setting up the call forward option.
The PBX flash timer sets the amount of
preprogrammed time that is assigned to
the [FLASH] key, for the release of a FBX
line.
OI
No Flash
61
.7 tckmnds
II
.2 .su%Jds
ztt
21
3 .sccorKls
81
.9 slxonds
31
.4 slxods
91
1.0 seconds
4r
5 t3econds
101
1.1 slxonds
5#
.6 Samnds
.,......*?.
a.jq@$p&$
When the DBS is behind a PBX, the
flash feature can be used to place a call
on hold.
47
Section 400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
DBS Pro#ammin~
I.nstructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
When ground start lines are used, the
DBS sends a ground signal to the centml
of&e and waits for a return signal. When
a return signal is detected, the DBS starts
the line connection process. If a return
signal is not detected within the sped&d
time set in this feature, the system
regards the trunk as not available and
sends a busy tone to the caller.
3w
4s
3sealfKl
71
7 8umnis
8#
8 SXONIS
This feature is only available with the use
of a CFC-B card.
A ground-start trunk card (W-43531) is
required
for ground
start trunk
connections. Central office line ports on
this card can be conElgured as loop or
ground start ports.
This timer determines how long aground
signal from the central office must be
present in order to start the connection
process. When the ground signal is
detected, the line LED will turn red
indicating that the trunk is in use, even
though the call has not been processed.
To activate the ground detection timer, .
set the parameters for the loop-start/
ground-start type to ground-start in
[FF2], 21# address.
Install
ground-start
trunk
card
(VB 43531)
according
to the
instructions in section 300.
Setting this timer for less then 3
seconds can cause false incoming calls.
This is due to the possibility of the
ground not being removed quickly at
the end of a call.
,
423’
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
CaJls made by an attendant(s) to another
extension, that have subsequently been
placed on hold by the attendant, will recall
the attendant in the time designated by
this timer.
Time
Ttule
I
O#
No Recall
7r
140 seamds
21
40 Seconds
91
180 seconds
31
60 seconds
101
200
seoonds
4x
60 sesonds
11r
220
seconds
5w
loo
12s
240
Seconds
6X
I
seconds
section
400 FFl
lssui 3 July 1993
A call transferred to an extension by an
attendant, that has not been answered by
the extension will recall the attendant in
the time designated by this timer.
O#
No F&call
lit
7w
140 SeaJnds
8X
160 seomds
3#
60 .semnds
lO#
200
.semnds
41
60 seconds
111
220
sesonds
5w
6W
I
100 SeaJrKls
11201
24osecmd-1
120 seconds
120 Eieaxlds
Calls made by an extension to another
extension, #at have subsequently been
placed on hold by the calling extension,
will recall the calling extension in the
time designated by this timer.
A call transferred to an extension by
another extension, that has not been
answered will recall the calling extension
in the time designated by this timer.
DBSRogramm~Instructiom
WC-A/ 3.0,CPC-B / 2.0 J 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
If a Central Office line has been set to
ring on an extension(s), and the call is
not picked up, this timer determines
the amount of time it will ring there
until extensions that have been set for
delayed ringing on a Central Oflice line
will begin to ring.
If an -ension call is ringing at another
extension, and the call is not picked up,
this timer determines the amount of time
it will ring there until extensions that have
been set for delayed ringing for extension
callswillbegintoring.
If a call has entered a hunt group, and an
idle extension in the group starts to ring,
but the call is not picked up, this timer
determines the time that the extension
will ring before the next idle extension in
the hunt group starts to ring.
2ii
-
31
After
16 Seumds
7W
( Afta
32 6eamds
1
104
Afta44seamda
ll#
Ana46second8
15U
1 A&r
64 6axmds
1
AutomaticDayModeallowstheDBStogo
into day mode automatically.
Automatic Night Mode (FFl, 3#, l#) allows the DBS to go into night mode automatically.
To turn automatic day mode off, enter:
FF13# 29# CONF key ON/OFF key#
1. If only one of the auto modes is turned
on, the NIGHT key is used to turn off the
auto mode. For instance, if night mode
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
has been activated automatically, the attendant must press the NIGHT key to go
into day mode.
2. Knowledge of the 4-digit DISA ID code.
(See-[FFl], l# through 5# program
2. If both auto day and auto might modes
are turned on, the attendant NIGHT key
cannot be used.
3. After the DBS automatically answers
your inbound call on the preset DISA line
with the intercom dialing tone, remote
programmingcanbeginbydialing#6and
the 4-digit remote-programming ID code.
3. Ifboth auto-modes are set, the starting
times must differ by at least one hour.
4. When one auto mode is turned on, the
mode cannot be reset by the NIGHT key
until 3 minutes after the auto mode is
activated. (Whenbothautomodesareset,
the NIGHT key cannot be used.]
addresses].
4. An attendant or extension user can
manuaily
transfer
the
remote
programmer into programming
by
putting the remote programmer on hold,
dialing #6. and the 4 digit remote
programming lD code.
5. The following remote operations are . possible:
al Remote programming:
If a remote programming ID code is set,
a dumb terminal or PC can be used to
program the DBS from a remote site or
on site, by connecting to the RS232C
interface.
Remotely setting any DBS parameter,
just as would be done with on site
P~gramming~
b) Bus monitor data:
To set the remote programming ID code
to 0001, for example, enter:
[eel],
4#, ooo1n
To reset the remote nro~ramrning
ID
code to the default initialized value,
press IFFll. 4#. lCONF1. ION/OFFl.
Remotelyviewbusmon.itordata..whichis
commonly
used to troubleshoot
operational problems. This may be
possible in real time. depending on the
buffer of the device being used.
Remote programming of the DBS requires
the foIlowing:
1. A central o&e line that is set with DISA
CapZlbility.
51
Section 400
issue 2 July
FFI
1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
The DISAID code provides direct access to
a DBS intercom dial tone, on an inbound
central ofIke Iine that is preprogrammed
as a DISA Iine.
To provide an inbound DBS caller with
access to “fresh” outbound central
office dial tone, a four digit access code
is required.
To set the DISA ID code to 0001, for
example, enter:
To set the first DISA outgoing call ID
code to 0001, for example, enter:
pFl1, St, OoolW
IFFlI,6#,
To reset the DISA ID code to the default
initiaIized value. Dress IFFll. 5#. ICONfl
ION/OFFl.
To reset the first DISA outgoiw calI ID
code to the default initiaked value,
press IFFll. 6#. l#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl.
The default setting of the DBS supplies
intercom dial tone to a Iine defined as a
DISA line. If a DISA ID code is stored in
place of the default setting (via remote
programming) an intercom dial tone wiII
not be heard, but rather a DISA dial tone
(fast busy tone).
The DISA dial tone is a signal to proceed
with your caII until you enter the stored
DISA ID code. After the DISA ID code is
entered, the intercom dial tone is
presented. This provides the opportunity
to make a DBS extension caII.
To provide an inbound DBS caller with
access to “fresh” outbound central
office dial tone, a four digit access code
is required.
To set the second DISA outgoing caII ID
code to 0002, for example, enter:
WF1],6#,
To make an outbound central office Iine
call. enter #7, dial 9 or 81-86 (to access a
central ofke line), then dial the 4-digit
DISA ID code. See (FFl], 6#, l# and 2#
addresses.
52
lW, OOOl#
2W, 0002#
To reset the second DISA outgoing caII
ID code to the default initiahzed value,.
press IFFll. 6#. 2% ICONFl. ION/OFFl.
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To perform DBS programming ikom an
extension other than the attendant
position, this option must be set. The
4-digit ID code set in this option must be
used as part of the access attempt to
program the DBS. when a non attendant
position is used in this manner.
To set the ID code for system
programming to 000 1, for example, enter:
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Direct Inward Dial numbers that have
been set up as a part of WC-B ver. 2.11 or
older software, need to be defaulted with
the use of this program after upgrading a
DBS to ver. 3.00 software. Also, at any
time that a default of ALL assigned DID
numbers is desired. this program must be
used.
To choose not to reset existing DID
number assignments, enter:
pFll.8#.
c- /
To reset the ID code for svstem
promamming to the default initialized
value. Dress IFFll. 7#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl.
l#.O#
At any time a reset of all assigned DID
numbers to the default value (no DID
numbers assigned) is desired, enter:
DrIrl], 8#. I#, 1n
Only one non attendant extension can be
a programming extension at a particular
time. To set a different non attendant
position as the programming &en&on.
cancel the capability of the first extension
by reentering the 4digit ID code at the
original non attendant extension, then
enter the same ID code at the second
extension.
DID settings have to be manually
configured if the DBS has a software
version older than 3.00, that is being
upgraded to version 3.00 or newer. Before
this manual reconfigurafion can be done
however, the DID reset program ([FFl],
8#, l#), must be done.
On CPC-A software versions later than
3.2 1, and WC-B versions later than 2.00,
entering the ID code for system
programming at a second extension, will
automatically cancel the programming
capabiltty that may have been previously
set but not canceled at a different
extension.
The maximum amount of DID number
assignments that a DBS can have is 500.
Multiple DID number assignments canbe
assigned to any extension port, and/or
the same DID number can be assigned to
multiple extension ports. Each DID
assignment uses one of the 500 that are
available.
53
Section
400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
DBS Programming
Instructi01~1
CPC-A / 3.0,CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0
c
This is a cor&rmation
program for the
resetting of DID numher assignments
that can be accomplished with the use of
program number [FFl], 8#, l#.
To not reset the
assignments, enter:
DID
number
DID
number
j?'Fll. 8#.2#.0#
To reset all of the
assignments, enter:
ml),
BW,2#, 1W
DID&tingshavet&emaWlllycO~
ifthe DBS has a software version older than
3.00, that is being upgraded to version
3.00 or newer. Before this manual
reco&gumtion can be done however. the
DID reset program ([FFl]. 8#, l#), must be
done.
The maximum amount of DID number
assignments that a DES can have is 500.
Multiple DID number assignments can be
assigned to any extension port, and/or
the same DID number can he assigned to
multiple extension ports. Each DID
assignment uses one of the 500 that are
available.
54
Resets program settings stored in SAM
(Static Random Access Memory). The reset
must be performed before upgrading from
one software version to another. For example. if you are upsadirq from Version
3.00 toVersion4.00, you need to perform the
reset. However, if you are upgradiq to a
point release (4.10 to 4.11). you do not need
to perform the reset.
CkNo (retain settinfls1
l=Yes (clear settings)
c.
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
The purpose of this display is to make sure
you want to reset the data Enter “0” or ” 1,”
depending on whether you want to complete
or cancel the reset.
::‘“‘~~~~~.
~~~
O=Do not reset
l=Reset
1. If you enter a “1,” the following display
appears:
CONFmM
0: NO 1: YES
2. This command erases a.UTl and DID
programming.
Section 400 FFl
issue 3 July 1993
Direct inward dialed numtws that have
been dialed by a cakr need to be assigned
to extension ports, so that the number
dialed will ring on all extensions they are
supposed to appear on. A DID number can
be set to ring on muhiple extensions, or only
one extension.
To set DID number 4444 to ring on
extension number 120, for example,
enter:
Wll, 8#, 3#, 4Q44#, 120#
To set DID number 6358 to ring on
extension number- 500, for example,
-LT.
enter:
@WI], 8#,3#,6358#,
5oon
To reset DID numbers that have been assigned to extensions to the default
initialized
value. Dress lFF1’. 8#. 3#,
didWCXX#. lCONFl#. ION/OFF.
55
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
I
Tl
DBS Programming
@iWuctions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
PROGRAMMZN
cwcKsETTnvGs
I
G OPTlONS
Allpcmmekm inthissectionreferbCPC-B,
Vet-son4.00 or newer.
The following information describes programming parameters for the Tl Interface.
The descriptions of each parameter include
alist of available options and the associated
programming address.
Default options are shown underlined.
Tl SYSTEM
SFXTINGS
The Sync Card (installed on the WC-B)
providesamethod ofsynchronizingtheDBS
with the public network. This parameter
determines the first clocking source for network synchronizmon. If the first source
kils, the system will switch to the second
source. The system will attempt to go back
to the first source based on thevalue entered
under the Network Re-sync Timer.
The system considers a clock source to have
failed when the slip rate error counter is
exceededwithin a 24-hour period.
In most cases, the 1st sync source is set to
“1.”
Idenmes the system size.
Optlons
M
4p
1 =DB!5
72
2=DBS
3=DBS
must
cabinet.)
96
40
be
4=DBS
IS
S=DBS
must
cabinet.)
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
back up again.
+
DES
the
40
slave
+
DBS
supportrd.)
40
in
72
not
72
be
+
tn
DEB
the
72
slave
6=DE3s
96
+
DBS
40
7=DL3S
96
+
DEE
72
R=DL3S
96
+
DEE
96
Cl-1
VI
VT1
To apply changes to this parameter, power
the system down, then back up.
56
DBS Programming
Inst~ctions
WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Determines the source of clocking for the
second sync source. The system will attempt to switch from the second source
back to the first source based on the value
entered under “Network Re-sync Tfmer.”
lfthe second source fails and the first source
is not working, the system will switch to the
third source..
ln most cases, a system with one Tl has the
2nd sync source set to “3.” Systems with two
Tls normally have the 2nd sync source set
to “2.”
One of the three sync sources should be set
to “3” (free run). A free-run setting is needed,
so the DBS Tl can provide its own clocking
if the network clock fails.
Options
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Deterrnines the source of clocking for the
third sync source. The third sync source is
used ifboth the first and second source fail.
The system will attempt to switch from the
third source back to the first source based
on the value entered under “Network Re_._
sync Timer.”
In most cases, a system with one Tl has the
3rd sync source set to “0.” Systems with two
Tl s normally have the 3rd sync source set to
“3.”
One of the three sync sources should be set
to “3” (free run). A free-run setting is needed,
so the DBSTl can provide its own clocking
if the network clock fails.
O=None
l=Tl
of the master
2=Tl
of the slave cabinet
3=Free run (internal
cabinet
clocking)
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
back up.
For changes to this paraxneter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
back up again.
57
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instnictions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
I
f
lf one clock source falls, the system will
switch to another clock source. The re-sync
timer determines how often the system attempts to return to the original clock source.
For example, if the first clock source (1st
sync) f&, the system switches to the second source. However, the system will try to
return to the fxst source based on the resync timer.
Ifthesecondsourcefailsandthefirstsource
continues to be out-of service, the system
switches to the third source. Again, the resync timer determines how often the system
will attempt to return to the first source.
3ptions
Determines how long the DBS waits before
sending a disconnect signal from the Tl to
the CO. (II&e CO Disconnect Timer (FF2 (l64)# 18# (0-15#)] determines how long the
system waits to receive a disconnect signal
from the CO.)
3ptions
o-15 (1)
rralues
0= 15Oms
1=200ms
2=25Oms
3=3ooms
O-25
O=lmmechatc
the
first
clock
(DBS returns
tmmedlately.)
4=4ooms
to
!XiOOms
I-24=hours
(Determines
how
often the DBS attempts
to
return
to the first clock)
I
f-
25=no
reties
(DBS
attemDt
to PO hack
clock.1
does not
to the tlrst
6= 1OOOms
7=15ooms
8=2oooms
(
9=25OOms
I
10=3000ms
11=35OOms
12=Off (DES does not
automatically send a
disconnect signal.)
When the system attempts to go back to the
fI.rst clock source, existing calls will be disconnected.
For changes to this pammeter
the system must
back up.
to take effect,
be powered down, then
‘-
Sectfon
Issue
400 FFl
1993
WC-A
2 July
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
/ ..
Determines how long the system waits before outpulsing dialed digits to the network.
3ptions
o-15
Values
O=lOO Ins
1=300
ms
2=500
Ins
3=700
ms
Whenwink-start signaling is used, the DBS
waits for a wink-start signal fi-om the CO
when a user goes ofbok. Once the DBS
receives a wink start, the DBS sends a CO
dial tone to the extension.
This timer determines how long the DBS
waits for a wink signal once an extension
goes ofbook.
lptions
o-15
Ialues
0=150
ms
ms
1=250
In.5
6=1500
ms
2=5ooms
7=1700
ms
3=7!50 ms
8=2000
ms
Jklooo
4=1000
ms
5=1200
ms
5=12!TJo Ins
60
6=1500
rns
7=1750
Ins
8=2ooo
ms
9=2!500
Ins
1o=sooo
Ins
11=3500
ms
12-4Qoo
ms
13=4500
ms
14=5ooo
ms
15=5500
ms
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FF,
Issue 3 July 1993
Once anincomingcallseizes aT1 trunk+ this
timer determines how long the DBS waits
before recognizing the seizure as an incomingcall.
This parameter only applies when E&M
signaling isused.
When the DBS generates a call over the Tl,
answer supervision is provided to determine
if the call is actually answered. This timer
determines how long the oflhook signal Tom
the called party must last before the DBS
treats the oilhook signal as an answer.
oplions o-8
v*es
lo=..=.. ms
I l=loo
I
ms
I
12=200 ms
I
3=6ooms
c
I5=70
7
ms
4=1ooo ms
l5=2ooo ms
I 12= 140
ms
I
l
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down. then
back up.
61
Section
400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
WC-A
Aglare is a conflict between an incoming call
and an outgoing call.
When immediate-start signaling is used,
this timer detennines how long the system
searches for an incoming call before connecting a station user to a trunk channel.
The timer begins when the station goes
offhook.
If this parameter is set to “0” (non glare), the
DBS does not check for glare. Therefore, if
a trunk call is coming into a station that is
going oi3hook. the station does not ring but
is connected to the incoming call automati*
3ptions
o-15
iralues
O=The DBS does not check for
glare.
DBS Ro@ammiq
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Aglareisaconflictbetweenaninconringcall
and an outgoing call.
Whenwink-startsignalingis used, the timer
determines how long the system.searches
for an incoming call before connecting a
station user to a trunk channel.
The timer begins when the a wink is received.
lf this parameter is set to 0 (non glare) and
a trunk call is coming into a station that is
going o@ook, the station does not ring but
is connected to the incoming call automatim
c
Iptions ~
IO-15
Jalues
ETlMdoesnotcheckforI
I
1=20 ms
2=40 ms
3=60 ms
I2=40
ms
I
14=80 ms
I
15=100 ms
I
I
I
1
16=120 ms
~7=140 ms
I 11=250
I 12=300
ms
I13=350
ms
ms
14=400
ms
IS=450
ms
I
I
I
DBS Programming
WC-A
section
Instructions
Issue
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
400 FFl
3 July1993
Adjusts the volume of connections made via Figure 2 shows the default values for the
the Tl. In this parameter. the first “(l- 12)” most common Tl connections.
represents the receiving circuit type. The
second “l-12” represents the sending circuit type. “0-30” represents the pad numFire 2. Default pad values
ber. The volume settings are controlled by
(Tl #1 = master, T1#2 = slave)
changing a pad number, which in turn
changes the loss or gain of the connection.
In most cases, the default pad settings do
not need to be changed. If the volume level
of a connection is unsatisfactory, include Tl #l
SLT
16
-2 dB
thereceivingandsendfngcircuittypes inthe
T1#2
SLT
16
-2 ClB
command, then adjust the volume by asK-TEL
Tl #l
16
-2 ClEt
signing a new pad number.
Figure 1 shows the numbers used to identify
each circuit type.
1Figure
1. Circuit-type
Numbers
CircuitTypes
No.
K-TEL
1
SLT
2
DATA#
3
Analog CO Trk
4
Tl Master
5
Tl Slave
6
OP-l-lON l*
7
OPTlON 2*
8
DTMF#
9
CONF (SCW
10
TONE1 (MFRlW
11
TONE2 (MFR2)#
12
K-TEL
T1#2
16
-2 dF3
SLT
Tl #l
16
-2 dB
SLT
T1#2
16
-2 dE3
1
#Circuit Types 3 and 9-12 are reserved for
future use.
*Options 1 and 2 can be used to assign
unique PAD levels to circuits that require
special volume levels. For example, if an
OPX station needs a higher volume level
than other SLTs, the OPX station could be
defined as an Option 1 circuit type.
The following table lists the adjustments
provided by each pad number.
63
Section 400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
Figure
Pad
No.
WC-A
3.
Pad
Nos.
I
Level
I
0
dB
+2
dB
I
.
14
+28
dB
dB
I
15
I
+30
I
.
I
16
I
-2
-4
from the master Tl to all SLTs is 16. You
can also tell by Figure 2 that the default
pad value for setting 16 is -2 dB.
To raise the volume by 2 dB, you can
change the pad value to 0. (As you can
see fkom Figure 3, the dB level for value 0
isOdl3.)
The following example shows the prorg
required to change the value to
..
I
FF18##3#2#5#0#
dB
I
dB
I
Circuit
type number for SLTs (Figure 1).
5=Circuit type number for the Tl in the
master cabinet (Figure 1).
O=Pad number for 0 dB loss/gain (Figure
3).
I
I
29
30
I
I
-28
dB
-30
dB
I
I
If calls to SLTs via a master Tl have low
volume levels, the PAD level for connections fi-om the master Tl to all SLTs can
be changed.
By referring to Figure 2, you can see that
the default pad setting for connections
64
DBS Programming Instructions
/ 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
section 400 FF
Insue3 July 1993
DBS Programming
In.structiona
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
thermore, the number of analog &unks that
canbeusedisahvaysdecrementedinquantities of 8.
For instance, if you’re installing a Tl in a
DBS 96 and you only want to use 12 Tl
channels, the logical: number of analog
trunks thatwould be available is 20 (32 - 12
= 20).
However, because the number of analog
Specifies the trunk combinations used in trunks must be decremented in quantities
of 8, the actual number of analog trunks
the DBS.
that can be used is 16:
(32 total trunks - 16 (two 8-trunk increments) = 16.)
For changes to this parameter to take effect, See Installation &rfion 3001 for a list of
the system must be powered down, then possible Tl and analog trunk channel combinations.
back up.
o=Analoa only
l=Tl and analog trunks
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
back up.
O-24 (0)
Determines how many Tl channels are
used.
Though each Tl Interface provides 24 trunk
channels, Tl trunks do not increase the
overall trunk capadty of the DBS. Each Tl
channel subtracts from the total number of
analog trunks that can be installed. Fur-
Section 400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
WC-A
DBS Ro@ammiqf
Imtnactionn
/ 3.0, CF’GB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
l
TZWlVKSIG-G
i
Selects the clear channel format used by the
Tl. The clear chan.neI format must match
what is offered by the CO.
Selects the framing format used by the Tl .
The framing format must match what is
offered by the CO.
&AIM1 @MI standsforaltematemarkinversion.)
l=B8ZS (B8ZS stands for Binary 8-Zeroes
Suppression.
O=SF (Superti-ame, which is also known as
D4. The superframe consists of 12 frames,
with each frame incIuding 193 bits. Each
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
frame is separated by a fi-aming bit.)
l=ESF (Extended Super Frame. An ex- the system must be powered down, then
tended super kame consists of 24 ti-ames, back up again.
thereby doubling the length of the super
fi-ame (SF)format. ESF also supports monitoring and maintenance capabiIities that
are not available with the SF format.)
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
back up.
i
66
DBS Ro@ammhg I.nat~ctiox.u3
WC-A / 3.0. CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
section 4OOFFl
IssneBJdyl993
This parameter only applies to a DBS within
a private network.
kZ&XIllS.
If the remote loopback parameter is turned
on, the DBS can receive a loopback command from another DBS.
Forexample,forDBS”A”toreceivealoopback
O=Mode 1 vl stays in operation even if
command i?om DBS ‘73,” this parameter
errors are detected.)
l=Mode 2 (II’1 shuts down if errors are must be turned on at DBS “A.” DBS 73”
would initiate the loopback by entering the
detected.)
“Remote tiopback” command.
Determines the way the system responds to
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then O=No (llxe system does not respond to
loopback si@Mls.)
back up.
l=Yes (Ihesystemdoesrespondtoloopback
signals.)
67
section
400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
In the current version of DES Tl, a
“switchhook flash“ releases and resizes
theT1 line.
Determines whether the DES sends a yellow
alarm signal to the CO.
O=Releaseand reseize
O=No
l=Yes
68
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FF1
Issue 3 July1993
The default value for this parameter is determined by network spec&ations. it should
not be changed.
Determines how long a yellow alarm signal
Lfared alarmoccurs. theCFALEDontheT1
must be on before the system detects a
card lights. Also, if the ‘Bed Alm Relay’ yellow alarm. When a yellow alarm occurs,
parameter is turned on, the alann relay on the YEL LED on the Tl card lights. Also, if
the Tl MDF card closes.
the ‘Yel Alm Relay’ parameter is turned on,
the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card closes.
3ptions
O-5
Values
0=4
>ptiOllS
1=6
o-15
o=oIIls
t34ooms
2=8
orDmedhte1
3=10
1-30
945orm
2=100 ms
10=5OOnzS
3=1!50
ITS
11=5!5oms
4=200
nB
12=600ITlS
25=25oms
(?+.?+.>
%&xpg
13=65OIIlS
14=700
6=3oom!3
j::
I
7=350
I
l-m
I 15=75OmS
Ins
I
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down. then
back up.
’ 69
Section
400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
CPGA
Determines how long the DBS tries to recover from a yellow alarm before it re-syncs
the Tl trunk.
Options
lo-15
Values
1O=Oms (immediate) I8=80 ms
I
1
DBS RolErpmmipg
hdxuctions
/ 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Detennineshowlonganoutoffixne(OOF),
loss of signal. sync loss. 0rAiS signal must
be on before the system generates an alarm.
lfan OOF, sync loss, or AIS alaxm occurs, a
corresponding LED on the Tl card lights.
(Sync loss alarms light the SLIP LED.)
‘IhealarmrelayontheTlMDFcardwillalso
closeifthe corresponding relay parameter is
turned on.
JElshls
!%I0 ms
2=2oms
lO=llOms
3=30 ms
11=120 ms
315
44oms
Lb130 ms
a=oms
8=mms
s=50 ms
13=140 ms
l=w)
9=25ooms
6=6oms
14=150 ms
2=5ahs
10=3000~
7=70 ms
15=160 ms
3=7soms
11=35ooms
4=1ooOmS
l2=4omlns
s=l2soms
l3=45ooms
6=15alms
14==mS
7=1750 ms
l5=5sahns
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down. then
back up.
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down. then
back
70
UD.
Section400
DBS Programming
Insl~~ctions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
bsue
3 July
FFl
1993
ERRORCOUVTERSMIRT1AIARM
The following counters determine when FF
alarm keys light. FF alarm keys light when
an error counter exceedsthe spectied number within 24 hours. FF alarm keys can
indicate the following types of alarms:
Red alarms
Determines how long the DBS tries to re- Loss of signal abmx3
cover from an out-of-frame (OOF), Loss of sync loss alarms
Signal, Sync Loss, or AIS alarm before it Yellow alarms
slip alarms
resyncs the Tl trunk.
Fl-arne loss alarms
Options
lo-15
values
lo=o~
I
18=3cxIoms
I
1=250 ms
9=4oooms
2=500 ms
lO=SCCIO
ms
13=7SOms
111=6OOOms
1
14=1OOOms
~12=7OOOms
I
I5=1500 ms
I 13=8000 ms
I
6=2000 ms
14=9000 ms
7=2500 ms
lS=loooO ms
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
hack up.
Thealaxmkeyscanbeassignedtoanykey
telephone. However, the keys onlywork on
a non-attendant phone that has the programming authorization code (#98 9999)
activated. With attendant phones, the keys
work whether or not the programming authorization code is activati.
Determines how many fi-ame losses occur
beforeaFbmeLossAlarrnkeyislit.
Thekeylightswhenthecountxxexceedsthe
spedfied number within a 24hour period.
0-9CXM/24 hours Jm
71
section
400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
Determines how many slips occur befonz a
Slip Loss Alarm key is lit.
‘Ihe key lights when the counter exceedsthe
specified number within a 24-hour period.
This parameter also determines the number
of slips that can occur before the system
switches to the next clock source. When the
system switches to the next clock source,
the slip en-or counter for the first clock
source is reset.
Slips are losses of data bits due to fixming
errors.
O-9000/24 hours I90001
72
CPGA
DBS Pro@amming
Intstruction~
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Determines how many red alarms occw
before a Red Alarm key is lit.
The key lights when the counter exceedsthe
specified number within a 24-hour period.
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section
400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Determines how many instances of signal Determines how many instances of sync
loss occur before a Signal Loss Alarm key is 1ossoccurbeforeaSyncLmsAkmnkeyislit.
lit.
The keylightswhenthecounterexceedsthe
The key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24hou.r period.
specitM number within a 24-hour period.
73
Section 400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
WC-A
DBS Ro#ammlqj
/ 3.0, CPGB
Instn~ctions
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Determines how many yellow alarm indications occur before a Yellow Alarm key is lit.
The key lights when the counter exceedsthe
specified number within a 24-hour period.
(Seeinstructions on programmingT1 alarm Determines whether the system closes the
keys.)
-alarmrelay&th&TlMDFcardinthee&nt
of yellow alarms.
like ah-m rday can be connected to an
tztemalalaxmdevicesuchasabuzzer.
The
external alarm device must be purchased
separate& it is noit provided with the DBS
Tl.
f-
‘~~
~
O=OfT@he alarm relay does not close.)
i
74
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Determines whether the system closes the
alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in the event
of red alarms.
The alarm relay can be connected to an
extemalalarmdevicesuchasabuzzer.
The
external alarm device must be purchased
separately; it is not provided with the DBS
Tl.
A red alarm indicates a loss of fi-ame @OF)
or loss of signal has continued for over 2.5
seconds.
O=OB (The alarm relay does not close: the
alarm is not reported.)
l=On (The alarm relay closes, so the alarm
is reported.)
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Determines whether the system closes the
alarm relay on the T MDF card in the event
of sync loss alalms.
The akmn relay can be connected to an
externalalanndevice suchas abuzzer. ‘Ihe
external alarm device must be purchased
separately; it is not provided with the DBS
Tl.
O=Off (the alarm relay does not close: the
alann is not reported.)
l=On (Ihe alarm relay closes, so the alarm
is reported.)
Sync-loss alarms result from clocking errors.
75
Section 400
Issue 2 July
FFl
1993
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 i 3.0 / 4.0
Determines whether the system closes the Determines whether the system closes the
alannrelayontheT1MDFcardintheevent
alannrelayontheT1 MDFcardin theevent
of fi-ame loss alarms.
of alarm indication signals.
The alarm relay can be connected to an An alann indication signal is comprised of
external alarm device such as a buzzer. The all l’s and is unfi-amed.
external alarm device must be purchased The alarm relay can be connected to an
separately; it is not provided with the DBS extemalalarmdevicesuchasabuzwr.
The
Tl.
cxtemal alarm device must be purchased
separateb it is not provided with the DBS
Tl.
O=Off CIhe alarm relay does not close: the
alarm is not reported.)
l=On me alarm relay closes, so the alarms
is reported.)
76
O=OB flhe alarm relay does not close; the
alarm is not reported.)
l=On me alarm relay closes, so the alarm
is reported.)
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFI
bsire 3 July 1993
Determines what trunk type each Tl channel emulates.
Determines whether the Tl alarm relay is
cleared (opened)automatically or manuaJly.
If cleared automatically, the relay is opened
approximately one second after the alarm o=LQop start
condition ceases.
l=Ground start 1
Ifcleared manually, the relay can be opened 2=Gmund start 2
by entering the Alarm Relay Clear code.
3=E&M
To enter the Alarm Relay Clear code, first
enter the programming authorization code
(#98 9999).
.
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
back up.
O=Auto
l=Manual
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
Deterrnines the type of trunk signaling that
each Tl channel emulates.
O=Loop start
I=Ground start 1
2=Ground start 2
3=Ex!zM
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
back up.
DBS Programming
Instruct.io~
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Determines if DID and/or DNIS is provided
for a trunk. DNIS is available only with Tl .
If DID is selected, the system uses a DID
Numbers Table, which supplies 500 DID
numbers. If DNIS is selected, the system
uses aDNISNumbersTable, which supplies
500 DNIS numbers.
The DID NumbersTable canbe used for DID
or DNIS. Therefore, ifall the numbers in the
DNISNumbersTableareused, aT1 channel
can be set to DID, and DIVE service can still
be used.
O=Not nrovided
l=DID
2=DNIS
1. The DBSonlysupports 4-digit DID/DNIS
numbers.
2. For changes to this parameter to take
effect, the system must be powered down,
then back up.
3. When the central oI3ce sends a DID/
DNIScalltotheDBS.itfi.rstrece.ivesawInk
from the DEB before sending the digits.
Once the wink is received, the central of&e
should wait at least 200 ms before sending
the digits. It is the installer’s responsibility
to request the delay from the central office.
i
78
section
400 FFl
bsue 3 July 1993
DBS Programming
Inst~ctions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Determines the signaling cbs
channels on outgoing calls.
used by T1
O=Immediate start
l=Wink start
2=Dial-tone start
~~~@ggzpJg;:;
i'
~
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then
back up.
Determines the signaling class used by Tl
channels on incoming calls.
O=Immediate start
l=Wink start
c?z!ym!J
..ij~~~
For changes to this parameter to take effect.
the system must be powered down, then
back up.
79
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
f
Determines whether Tl channels are used The robbed bit setting determines lfAJ3CD
as outgoing only, or bothway.
signaling is used. ABCD signaling robs bits
from the Tl channels and uses those bits to
..:“.$;,
transmit
signaling information.
~
O=Bothwav
l=Outgoing only
.:‘i~~~~~~
~~~
cw3
--::~~
O=Off (ABCD signaling is not used.)
l=On @BCD signaling is used.)
~~~
#@ggy$::
~
For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be powered down, then For changes to this parameterto take effect,
back up.
the system must be powered down, then
back up.
80
f--
DBS Programming
Instn~ctions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFl
Issue 3 July 1993
Determines whether the system expects DP ‘hnsmits dial tone hm the Tl channel to
or DTMF digits for incoming DID or DNIS another DBS within a private network.
calls.
If YXIVIF” is selected, the DBS must be
equipped with an MFR card.
c-
)
81
Section 400 FFl
Issue 2 July 1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
lbrmn.its busy tone from theT1 channel to lhnsmits dial tone from the Tl channel to
DBS stations.
another DBS within a private network.
o=off
l=On
o=m
l=On
c
82
DBS Programming
Instructiona
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Transmits ringback tone f?om theT1 channel to the central office or another DBS
within a private network.
o=off
section
400 FFl
Issut% 3 July 1993
Associates a dialed number with a station.
Associatesafour-digitdialednumberwitha
station number. DNIS is available onlywith
theT1 Interface.
l=On
Stations are numbered using one of two
patterns: 10-69 or 100-699.
83
Section 400
Issue 3 July
FF2
1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To set a central o&e line in service, or to
remove it from service, this option must be
used.
To set a central office line for touch-tone or
pulse dialing. (10 pulses per second), this
option must be used.
To set any central office line in service.
enter:
To set any central office line for touch tone
dialing, enter:
,lDBSl.ine~ort
numbed#.l#.OW
1. rDBs Iine
Dolt
mmbex~#.
To remove any central ofllce line from
service, enter:
To set any centml o&e
dialing, enter:
[FF2l,@BSlineportnumber)#,1#,1#
CPllrZ),@BSlineportnumber)#,2#,
2#. on
line for pulse
l#
/
A steady, red LED on any FF key
programmed as a line key, indicates
an out-of-service line.
If a central office line is removed from
service, a new caller to that line will
hear a ring, but the DBS user will never
be aware of the caller because ring
assignments for the line will not function.
84
If a central oflice line port is used for a
door-box adapter sensor, set the port for
pulse dialing.
If the central office line port is designated
as a ground start line (FF2]-(1-64-21)1 it
is imperative that the 48 volt external
power supply be properly connected to
the terminals on the DBS backplane.
Misconnection of this power supply
can result in serious damage to the
DBS main cabinet. See DBS In&all&on
Instructions manual (section 300). and
Technote 1 (March 1991). for further
information.
The j-lash and redial features will not
operate if a line has been designated as
“ground start*. See technote 13 (March
1992) for further information.
DBS Programming
CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B
Instructions
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FF2
Issue 3 July 1993
I
/
\
\
To place a central office line in a group so
that it can be one of many that can be
automatically
chosen for outbound
dialing, this option must be used.
When dialing a “9” from an SLT or
digital extension, or pressing an FF
key that is set as a pooled trunk key,
any available line in the group will be
accessed.
To not include a central office line to be a
member of the “9” access group, enter:
.- .:\
,i
~),@BSIlneportnumber)#,3#,0#
To place a central office line in a
group so that it can be one of many
that can be automatically chosen for
outbound dialing, this option must
be used. When dialing an “81, 82.83,
84, 85 or 86” from ‘an SLT or digital
extension. or pressing an FF key that is
set as a multiple central office (MCO)
line key, any available line in the group
wilI be accessed.
To set any central office line to be a
member of the “81” access group, enter:-:
~],@BSIlneportnumber)#,4#,1#
To set any central office line to be ‘a
member ofthe “9” access group, enter:
.IDBSline~ort
-To ‘set- any central office line to be a
member of the ?82” access group, enter:
number)#.3#.1#
n.
@gJgg’i
:..-.i.,.i,.,., ...e
Set FFl option “LCR Access” for “Pooled
Trunk Access” cdl. If this option is set for
“LCRAccess”, central o&e line selection
will default to pooled central office line
access group 9, if all lines that could be
used for “ICR Access” are busy.
The line selection is made from the
highest line number in the group, to the
lowest line number in the group.
To set any central office line to be a
member of the 333” access group, enter:
To set any central office line to be a
member of the “84” access group, enter:
To set any central office line to be a
member of the “85” access group. enter:
@FZJ,(DBSlineport
number)#,8#,1#
85
Section
400
Issue 3 July
FF2
1993
DBS Programxdq
WC-A
To set any central office line to be a
member of the “86” access group, enter:
[eez], (DBS line port number)#,
Ix~tructiona
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Each central of&e line port must be
identified as a regular central o!IIce line, or
PBX line.
9#, l#
To remove any central office line &om any
access group (81 through 86), enter:
To set the central of&e line type to central
offke, enter:
1.KBSl.ineportnumber)#.
1. (DBS line Mlrt numberld.
1OW. l#
(49lW,
06
The same trunks may appear in more
than one line access group and include
access group 9.
The line selection in a particular group is
madef+omthehighestavailablelinenumber
to the lowest availableline number.
To set the central of&e line type to PBX,
enter:
Toll restriction settings can be affected by
this setting.
lf a central o&e line port is used for a
door-box adapter sensor, set the port for
pulse dialing.
Ifthe central office line port is designated
as a ground start line [FF2]-21#. it is
imperative that the 48 volt external power
supply be properly connected to the
terminals on the DBS backplane.
of this power
nnection
aznmsuZtinsedusdamagetothe
DBsmainctlbheL
supply
SeeDBSlnstallation Instructions manual
(section 300). and Technote 1 (March
1991). for further i.nformation.
DBS Programming
Inst.ructions
WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FF2
Issue 3 July 1993
i
To set acentral officeIine(s)to automaticaRy
provide DiSAtone upon connection with an
inbound cakr. this option must be set
To set any central office line to provide a
DISA tone when connected to a new
inbound caller, enter:
~],@BSlinep0rtnumher)#,
ll#,
l#
To ‘setany central of& I&e so that it does
not provide a DISA tone when connected
to a new inbound caller, enter:
l.lDBSline~ortnumberM.
ll#.O#
To set automatic DISA start and end
times, see [FIG?] 19#. and 20# program
addresses, and the DISA code program
address at [FFl], 6#.
Any extension can be set with a private
centml ofIke line(s). A number of private
lines can belong to one extension, but
the same private line cannot be set on
multiple extensions.
To set extension port 15 for central office
Iine 12 to be a private central of&e I.i.ne(s),
enter:
pF2], lS#, 12#, 12#
To reset anv extension to the default
initialized ~rh&e he value. Dress IFI%?L
@BS line oort number)#. 12#. ICONFZ,
JON/OFl?l.
Anincom.ingcalIonaprivateIinewiIlonIy
ring on one extension.
Once the private line option is set, other.
extensions cannot make outbound calls
or receive inbound caIls on that line.
Ifthe private Iine setting is disabled, caIIs
cannot be made or received on that line(s)
without manualIy reprogrammingthe toil
restriction options of an extension(s) to
which the line should now appear.
In DBS instaIlations using the WC-A
card, the highest extension port number
that can be used is 72.
87
Section
400 FF2
Issue 3 July 1993
WC-A
To set an automatic pause during dialing
on a central of&e line defined as PBX this
option must be used.
To set the automatic pause on line 15 for
example, (once line 15 is defined as a
PBX). enter:
pm.
lfthis option is not set, the dialed number
is outpulsed according to the system dial
pause time.
SW. 13w. 19
To disable the automatic pause on line 12
for example. (once line 12 is defI.txd as a
PBX), enter:
pF2],
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To increase the duration of the MMF
signal when making an outbound call,
use this feature.
128, 136, ow
c
To set the on/off duration of an outbound
IXMF signal to 75 ms. on and sd’ms.‘tAT.
enter:
See [FFl], 3.# 12# program option, for the
timer used for this pause.
1.nlBSliDeDortllDmber~#.
15#.1#
To set the on,!off duration of an outbound
M’MF signal to 125 ms. on and 125 ms.
off. enter:
To define whether dialed digits will be
outpulsed after dial tone has been
detected, or not, this option is used.
To outpulse dialed digits only after dial
tone is detected, enter:
1,fDB!3liDeDOrtnumber~u.
141y.on
To outpulse dialed digits according to the
system dial pause timer, enter:
fFF2],@ESlineportnumber)#,
88
14#, 111
PW2],(DBSlineportnumber)#,
15#,2#
To set the on/off duration of an outbound
MMF signal to 250 111s.on and 250 ms.
off, enter:
lFF2], (DBSlineportnumber)#,
15#, 3W
.
DBS Programming
WC-A / 3.0 WC-B
Instructions
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To allow a central ofike line(s) to be able to
be used in an unsupervised conference
call, this feature is used.
Section 400 FF2
Issue 3 July 1993
The ring pattem of each central oflice line
can be set in one of nine patterns to
provide easy recognition of different lines.
To disable line 22, for (xample, so that it
cannot be used in aline to line conference,
enter:
JFKBl. 22#. 16W. OW
To set line 22 to be able to be used as one
of the lines in a line to he conference.
enter:.
c
‘>
m],
22W. 16#, l#
See [FF3], 13# program address to start a
conference call.
A conferenced call will be disconnected if
the call go& beyond the time set in
unsupervised conference timer.
-
I 1# I
I 2#I
I YI
I 4#I
3on/loff
2on/2off
MI
lon/3off
1
I 6# I
5
I
1
?I#
OKl/.5Off
5 on I.5 off 1.5onf2J
I
Off
I
lon/lon
I 8# I
5 onl3.5off
I
1 on/2off
I 9# I
lon/7off
I
There is no change in the ring pattern for
transferred calls.
89
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FF2
Issue 3 July 1993
WhenaazntmIoi3keIinecaIIisdisconnected,
theaxdralofficeSendSadiScoMectSignal.
TheDESneedstoint.erpretaIIvaIidsi@aIs,
so that the central office line can be
disco~ected
fbm
it This feature provides
this function.
I
.
-Ins
I
zQ5oms. I
I l# I
>5OIllS
I 2# I
>loOlllS I 1o#I
>5OORlSI
I 3ff I
>15oms
9350
I7#
235oms
90
1
14
1
I15#
11%
I
1
>75oms
ms
I
/
Any centraI of&e Iine that is set as a DISA
line, can be set to start DISAoperation at
a speciBed time.
To set a central of&e I.ine that has DISA
capability to start DISA operation at a
certain time, enter:
FW, @BS tie
HHMBM.
port number)#,
19#,
To reset DISA start time czmbiIitv to the
default initiakedvalue. mess lFF21.(DB!3
mrt numberl#, 19#. ICONFl. ION/
The start time is set in a 24hour format
without punctuation or a space between
the hour and minute.
f-
DBS Programming
Inst~ctione
WC-A
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
/ 3.0 WC-B
AI-IYcentral oflke line that is set as a DISA
line. can be set to stop DISA operation at
a speclfied time.
Section4OOFF2
3JulJr 1993
hue
Determines whether the trunk circuit is
ananaIogloopstart, analogground start,
analog DID, or Tl.
To set a central oflEe Iine that has DISA
capability to stop DISA operation at a
certain time, enter:
o=bOD
fFF2], (DBS line port number)#, 20#,
HH.MM#.
,f “\
\
To reset DISA ston time canabiI.itv to the
default i.nitializedvaIue. Dress IFF21.(DF3S
rmrt numberlt 20##. lCONFl. iON/
%I.
Start
l=Ground start
2=DID
3=Tl
For changes to this parameter to take
eBect,thesystemmustbepowereddown,
then back up.
‘Ihe stop time is set in a 24-hour format
without a space between the hour and
minute.
91
Section 400
Issue 3 July
FF2
1993
WC-A
Any central office line position in the DBS
can be set as either a loop-start or
ground-start circuit.
To set central office line position 3, for
example, as a loop start line, enter:
ml.
3#.21#.0#
To set central o&e line position 7. for
example, as a ground start line, enter:
pF2],7#,21#,
l#
Ground. start line capability is available
only with CFC-B configurations.
lfaground-starttrunk
is enabled, FFl],
3#. %I##and 21# progmm addressesmust
beset
Trunk card VB 43531 is also required.
The DBS must be turned off, then turned
on to set any change that is made in this
program option.
lf a central of&e line port is used for a
door-box adapter sensor, set the port for
pulse dialing.
If the central of3ce line port is designated
as a ground start line in this program
address, it is imperative that the 48
volt external power supply be properly
connected to the terminals on the DBS
backplane.
Miinnection
of this power suppZy
can result in serious damage to the
DBS main cabinet.
DBS Rogramming
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
SeeDBS installation Instructions manual
(section 300). and Technote 1 (March
199 1). for further information.
The j7mh and mdiaf features will not
operate if a line has been designated as
ground start”. See technote 13 (March
1992) for further tiormalion.
:
DBS Programming
CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B
Instructions
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
AnycentmlofficelinepositionintheDBScan
be set as either aloop-start, ground-start or
DIDcimuit..Loopstartlinesarethemost
common @peof centml office line. Ground
start lines pi&on-n similaj, except they
provide the” most reliable connection
between the Central office and DBS, in
terms of positive disconnect signals and
no possibility of line crashes or ‘glare”.
DiIrctInwaKlDiaJinglin~arebeneficialin
that the centml oilice can place multiple
inbound calls,with different numbers, over
thesamecircuit.Also, thesenumberscan
be .programmed to appear on multiple
DBS extensions. DID circuts can only be
used for inbound calls.
To set central office line position 3, for
example, as a loop start line. enter:
JFlm 3#.21#.0#
Section 400 FF2
Issue 3 July 1993
If a ground start line(s) is enabled. [FFl]
3#. 20# & 21# adresses must be set.
When a ground start card is in use, the
ports on that card can be configured as
either ground or loop start lines.
Trunk card VB 43531 is also required.
‘Ihe DBS must be turned off. then turned
on to set any change that is made in this
program option.
If a central office line p0i-t is used for a
door-box adapter sensor, set the port for
pulse dialing.
Ifthecentxalofficeliieportis~iii&akdas
a ground start line in this program
address, it is imperative that the 48 volt
external power supply be properly .connected to the terminals on the -.
DBS backplane.
IfDIDis chosen. checkthe [FE!] 22#, 23#.
24# & 25# adresses.
DID circuits involve the use of a dedicated
DID card.
To set central office line position 7, for
example, as a ground start Iine, enter:
pT2],7#,21#,
I#
To set central office line position
14, for
example, as a Direct Inward Dial line,
enter:
p=m]*14#,21#,2#
nnection of this pozoer supply
am result
in serious damage to the
DBS main cabinet.
SeeDBS Installation Instructions manual
(section 300). and Technote 1 (March
199 1). for fixther information.
‘The J&I
and red&I features will not
operate if a line has been designated as
“ground start”. See technote 13 (March
1992) for further information.
Ground start line capability is available
only with WC-B configurations.
93
Section
400 FF2
Issue 3 July 1993
WC-A
After connecting with a Central office,
the DBS will wait 65 milliseconds
before accepting the digits of a dialed
number, or can be set to wait for a
“wink” signal from a central office
before accepting the digits of a dialed
number.
If “wink” signalling is used for the
operation of Direct Inward Dialing
line, a timer is required to be set. This
timer sets the maximum time the DBS
will wait before accepting the dialed
digits from the central office.
numbed%,
To set the DID line to wait for the central
office wink signal before accepting the
dialed number f&m the central of.Ilce,
enter:
14oms.~
lw
3ooms.
l#
16OmS
9#
32om
2#
18OmS
lo#
34oms.
26oms.
I 14# I
42orIK
Id
7#
FW,
PBS
22#, l#
94
DID line port number)%,
. ...^-me..y
llun3 .~.
To set the DID line to immediately accept
the dialed number Tom the central oflice.
enter:
. CDBS DID line sort
22w. on
DBS Ro@ammin~
Ins~ctions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
28oms
44oms
I
DBS Programming
Section400
FF2
Issue 3July1993
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Once the central office starts to send the
dialed digits to the DBS over a DID line, it
is necessary to be able to disconnect the
line in the case of a transmission
disruption.-The maximum amount of
time that is allowed for the transmission
of the digits is set with this feature.
Tinle
Time
o#
No Time Out
8#
I l# I
15 seconds
I w
L
Oncethedigitsbegintobeoutpulsedii-om
thecentralofEiceonaDIDline,itisnecessary
to define the maximum allowable time
between digits. This -feature sets the
maximum allowable time between the
outpulsing of digits from the central
office, before a central office time out is
assumed.
22Second.5
I
23Second.s
2#
16Seconds
lo#
24 Seconds
3#
17Seconds
ll#
25 Seconds
48
18 Seconds
12#
26SecorKis
S#
19 Seconds
13#
27Seconds
6#
20 Seconds
14#
28Seconds
7#
21Seconds
1%
29Secods
I
95
Section 400
Issue 3 July
FF2
1993
WC-A
Assigns a port class to each trunk port
that will access the Tl. Port classes are
used to assign pad levels to connections
made via the Tl.
(Pad levels control
volume.)
Figure 1shows circuit-typenumbers. Circuit Apes 4-6 are used to assign port
classes to tlunks.
Figure
1. Circuit-type
circuit
Types
Numbers
No.
K-TEL
1
SLT
2
DATA#
3
Analog
CO Trk
4
Tl Master
5
Tl Slave
6
OPTION
l*
7
OPTION
2*
8
DTMF#
CONF
TONE1
9
(SCC)#
(MFRl)#
TONE2 (MFR2)#
96
10
11
12
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
DBS trunks are assigned a default circuit type. based on whether they are
analog or Tl. The circuit type is used
with digital pad settings to determine
the loss/gain settings for connections to
the Tl (See ‘Digital Pad Setting.“).
The Tl Port Class parameter is provided
in case a specific trunk or group of
trunks needs a unique pad level.
For example, aT1 in a slave cabinet
may be assigned as a ‘circuit type 6.”
However, the circuit type for the Tl
bunk port could be changed to 8 (Option 2). Once the port number is
changed to circuit type 8, the pad levels
for circuit type 8 could be changed to
provide the correct volume setting.
Circuit types are also provided for station ports. See Figure 1 for a definition
of circuit types.
This programming parameter allows
youtoassigncircuittypes
l-12toa
trunk port. However, the default circuit
type for a trunk port should only be
changed to circuit type 7 or 8 (Options
1 or 2).
c
DBS Romanming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
3-3 EXTENSION
PROGRAM
SETTINGS
The choice of 2-digit or 3-digit extension
numbers are assigned in this feature.
To set extension port 3 to extension
number 333, for example, enter:
The default DBS extension numbers are
1OOatpor-t 1,101 atport2.102atport3,
_
etc.
Extension 100 cannot be assigned to a
different port.
pF3], 3#, I#, 333w
To set extension port 4 to extension
number 222, for example, enter:
FF31,4#,
,’
i
I#, 222%
To clear a DBS extension nor-t number,
press lFF31. (DBS extension nort
number)#, l#. lCONF1.
If extension 10 1 or 11 is deleted, the
alternate attendant is canceled.
__.
ClearingtheextensionportnumberDOES
NOT retrun it to its default value. Once an
extension port number is cleared. the port
is inoperative
until an extension
number is reassigned to it.
&&)$gⅈ;
Cl>
3-digit extension numbers must be used
with 60 or more extensions.
See the [FFl], 12# program address to
check the digit length that has been set in
the DBS .
If an alternate attendant position is set,
the extension numbers are as follows:
Attendant telephone 1: Extension 100 or
10.
Attendant telephone 2: Extension 101 or
11.
97
Section4OOFF3
Issue 3July1993
Some DBS extension
ports are
automatically configured as to the type of
equipment, when the hardware is
physically installed on the port. Terminal
type designations
are assigned to
extension hardware as follows:
l#: Single-line telephone devices will
automaticallyconfiguretheextensionport
28: 16 key telephone devices will
automatically configure the extension port
3#: 22 key telephone devices will
automaticallyconQuretheextensionport
48: 34 key telephone devices will
automaticallyconfQuretheextensionport
58: Future option
6W: Future option
7W: EM/24 device will automatically
configure on the extension port
8W: OPX pulse device needs to be
manually configured on the extension
pod
9W: OPX touch tone’ device needs to be
manually configured on the extension
Poe
lO#: Voice mail (non proprietary) devices
that are corrected to an analog extension
port need to be manually configured on
the extension port
ll#:DSSl (forextension lOOor 10)needs
to be manually configured on the
extension port
12#: DSS2 (for extension lOOor 10)needs
to be manually configured on the
extension port
13W:DSS3 (for extension 10 1or 11) needs
to be manually configured on the
extension port
DBS Rogramming lnstn~ctions
CPGA/ 3.0, WC-B /;r.O / 3.0 /4.0
14#: DSS4 (for extension 10 1 or 11)needs
to be manually configured on the
extension port
15#: Voice mail (non proprietary with
OPX) needs to be manually configured on
the extension port
168 to lQ#: DSS consoles l-4 need to be
manually confIgured on the extension
port.. The Attendant feature package is
available with the use of CPC-B, ver. 2.00
or newer, as a special EPROM set.
206: Future option
21W to 286: Proprietary ACD channels
willautomaticaUy configure the extension
PO*
29U: Future option
39U: Futureoption .
31# to 38#: Proprietary Automated
Attendant channels will automatically
co*m
the extension ports
396 to 46#: Proprietary Voice Mail
channels will automatically configure the
extension ports
I
lfDSS1istobeinstalledonextensionport
2, for example, enter:
pF3].2#,2#,11#
‘lhedefaultinitia&edvalueofaoarticular
extension nor-t is based on the tvne of
extension card that is installed in the DBS
cabinet.
After manually setting types 1 l- 14, or
16- 19, disconnect the modularjacks from
the devices and then reconnect them.
’ :
DBS Programming
I.nstructionf~
CPGA/
3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Some DBS extension
ports are
automatically configured as to the type of
when the hardware is
equipment,
physically installed on the port. Terminal
type designations
are assigned to
extension hardware as follows:
OW:No assignment
l#: Single-line telephone devices will
automaticallyconfiguretheextensionport
2#: 16 key telephone devices will
automaticallyconfrgurethe extensionport
3#: 22 key telephone devices will
automatically configure the extension port
4C: 34 key telephone devices will
automaticallycotiguretheextensionport
5#: Future option
6W: Digital SLT telephone
7W: EM/24 device will automatically
configure the extension port
SW: OPX pulse device needs to be
manually configured on the extension
pod
9#: OPX touch tone device needs to be
manually confIgured on the extension
PO*
lO#: Voice mail (non proprietary) devices
that are connected to an analog extension
port need to be manually configured on
the extension port
11%: DSS 1 (for extension 100 or 10)needs
to be manually configured on the
extension port
12#: DSS2 (for extension 1OOor 10)needs
to be manually configured on the
extension port
Section4OOFF3
Issue 3July1993
13d: DSS3 (for extension 10 1or 11)needs
to be manually configured on the &ension port
14W:DSS4 (for extension 10 1or 11)needs
to be manually configured on the &ension port
SW: Voice mail (non- proprietary with
OPX) needs to be manually configured on
the extension port
16# to-19%: DSS consoles l-4 need to be
manually configured on the extension
port. The Attendant feature package is
available with the use of WC-B, ver. 2.00
or newer, as a special EPROM set.
lfDSS 1 is tobeinstalledonextensionport
2, for example, enter-z
W],2#,
2#, 11w
The default initializedvalue of anariicular
extension nort is based on the tyne of
extension card that is installed in the DBS
cabinet.
Aftermanuallysettingtypes 11-14, or 1619, disconnect the modular jacks from
the devices and then reconnect #em.
99
Scction4-OOFF3
Issue3JulylS93
Define the EM/24 extension module
hardware port number, then assign an
extension port number that will be used
with it. The first program entry relates
to the EM/24 port number, the second
program entry refers to the extension
port that the EM/24 works with.
To set a po& for the EM/24 to work with
extension port 30, for example, enter:
pF3], 55#, 31c;3ow
To reset the use of an EM/24 on anv
extension sort to the default initialized
value. Dress (FF31. (DBS extension DOI%
number). 3#. lCONF1. ION/OFF1
When a change to the default key
assignments is required on an EM/24,
and CPC-B 2.0X series software prior to
version 2.05 is being used, the program
procedure must be done in the following
order:
100
DBSRo@ammin~Ins~ctions
CF'GA/
3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
a. set the port that the EM/24 is on
[FF3], (l- 144)#, 2#.
b. Reset the EM/24 by unplugging it
and reconnecting it.
c. Proceed with key programming
[FF5], (l-144)#, (l-24)#.
via
When programming an EM/24 with
CPC-B software versions newer than
2.11. this programming order is not
required. SeeTechnote 15 (August 1992)
for complete information.
After manually reprogramming
an
EM/24 when any version of CPC
software is used, disconnect
the
modular jack from the device and then
reconnect it.
DBS Programming
Inst~~ctlons
CPGA / 3.0 CF’C-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
If an extension is set for Least Cost
Routing, the user must dial “9”. or press
an FF key that is set for the LCR h&ion,
in order to gain access to a central office
line.
To set an extension port so that the dialing
of a “9”. or the necessity to press an LCR
key is not needed. enter:
[FF3], (DBS eit&on
46, on
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
DBS extensions can be set so that central
office-line calls can only be made after
entering an account code.
“I.
To set an extension so that an account
code is not needed to make a central office
line call, enter:
1. IDBS extension sort number)%,
5#.0#
port number)#,
Tosetanextensionportsothatthedialing
of a “9”. or the necessity to press an LCR
key is needed, enter:
.
To set an extension so that an account
codeis neededto make a central of&e line
call, enter:
WI.
@BS extension port number)#,
5#, I#
1, lDBs extension sort
numb&#,
4#.1#
101
Scction4OOFF3
Issue3 July1993
DBS I’m@ammiq
DBS extensions can be set so that central
office-line calls can only be made after
entering a forced account code that is
verified. Verification
is enabled or
disabled on an extension basis.
To set an extension so that a verified
forced account code is not needed to make
a central of&e line call, enter:
1. lDB6
exte!nsion
DOIt
numberI%,
5#. on
To set an extension so that a verified
forced account code is needed to make a
central office line call, enter:
D31, @Bs extension port number)#,
5#, 1#
WC-B versions 3.00 and newer, do not
have the forced account code capability of
earlier versions. All forced account codes
have to be verified. The use of non forced,
non verified account codes is still an
option if stringent access to Central Office
lines is not required.
102
Iustructions
CF'GA/ 3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
A 4-digit lockout code can be set on an
extension to prevent unauthorized people
from making central office line calls from
the extension.
To set extension 100, with lockout code
452 1, for example, enter:
PF3],11y,6#,4521#
To reset anreviouslvlocked out extension
to the default inttialtzed value. DRSS lFF3l
IDBS extension sort number)#. 6#,
jCONFi. lON/OFFI,
DBS Pro@ammh~
I.nstructions
CPGA/
3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To be notified by a tone. when a new
central o&e line call has anived at an
extension that is currently engaged in a
conversation, this option must be set.
To disable extension 100, for example. for
off hook signaling, enter:
ml,
,'
\
./'
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
To send a tone from acaJling extension to
an extension that is in use, this option
must be set. A tone is not sent however,
when off hookvoice announce is enabled.
ln the case of OHVA being used, the
calling party to an extension in use can
verbally
override
the
existing
conversation.
I#* 7#,0#
To enable extension 100, for example, for
off hook signaling, enter:
To disable the call waiting notitication
tone or the OHVA capability on extension
100, for example, enter:
JFF3L I.#. 7#. l#
pFe31. 1#,8#,0#
To reset anv extension DORIS to the default
initialized value, Dress IFF31. uort.#. 7#,
conf#. ION/OFFl.
To enable the callwaitingnot&alion
tone
or the OHVA capability on extension 100.
for example, enter:
pm.
This tone will not be sent during a
conference call, while the called extension
is on hold, or during a &l on m central
office line for which there is no kne key on
the telephone.
The off-hook signal volume and the
off-hook signal pattern are separate
settings. See program addresses [FF3],
15#, & lf3. When an off-hook tone is
enabled on an extension. the extension
will be excluded Tom any hunt group
setting that may be enabled for it.
I#. 8#. l#
The call waiting noti&ation tone cannot
be sent to an extension set with an
absence message, or that is on hold, or
that is receiving another call or that is
involved in a conference call.
IfaVoiceAnnoun~
Unit (modelVB-43708)
is co~ected
to the DEB off hook signalkng
@ES], (l-144)#, 7#, l#) must be enabledon
all&ensions.SeeTecbnote 14(March 1992)
for complete tiormation.
103
Section
400 FF3
Issue3July1993
DB3RogmmmhnInstructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPGB /2-O / 3.0 / 4.0
To be able to “barge into” an extension
that is currently in use from another
extension, this option must be enabled
on the baruinq extension.
To allow an extension to be able to be
“barged into” from another extension,
this option must be enabled on the
barged extension.
To disable the use of the busy override
option from extension 100, for example,
enter:
To disable extension 101, for example,
from being barged into by another
extension enter:
plea.
fFF3],2#,10#,0#
l#. 9#,0#
To enable the use of the busy override
option from extension 100, for example.
enter:
To enable extension 101, for example,
to be able to be barged into by another
extension enter:
pF31, lW, 9#, l#
jFF31.2#.10#:1#
The busy override option cannot be
disabled on the attendant telephones in
all WC-A software versions, and CPC-B
softwareversi0nsearlierthanversi0n2.00.
The override tone can be set to sound
during an ongoing central office call, to
indicate a new call arrival.
The busy override option can be
disabled on the attendant telephones in
CPC-B software. newer than ver. 2.00
Busy override is not possible to an
extension: that is not set to accept it, or
is involved in a conference call.
To be able to override a busy extension,
the calling extension must be in the
same page group. Page group 00 is not
included in this exception.
104
l
DBS Pro@ammin~
Instmctions
CPCA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
Access to an available central office line
assigned to the FFl key can be
automatic by picking up the receiver.
If the FFl key is a pooled trunk key, an
available central office line is accessed
in numerical order from the highest line
number assigned to the key, to the
lowest.
Picking up the receiver at
extension connects the
central office line call, hold
transferred
call, if this
enabled.
..
To disable auto pickup at
100. for example, enter:
a ringing
incoming
recall, or
option is
extension
p3],1#,12%,0#
To disable prime line pickup
extension 100, for example, enter:
pF31.
on
To enable auto pickup at extension 100.
for example, enter:
l#. ll#.O#
@F31. l#. lb.
To enable prime line pickup
extension 100, for example, enter:
l#
on
fm3],1#,11#,1#
Intercom calls cannot be made with this
option enabled, unless an intercom call
key is assigned to another FF key.
105
Section 400 FF3
Issue3 July1993
DBS~ogmumiq~ Instructiona
WC-A
/ 3.0. CPC-B /2.0
/-3.0
/ 4.0
c
To enable a DBS user to initiate a three
party conference between 2 central office
lines and his extension, this option must
be set. Once the conference is initialized,
the DBS msion
user can drop out of the
callbypmssingeitherofthecentralofficeline
keysusedtocalltheoth~parties.
To disable extension 100, for example, to
not be able to initiate a three party
conference, enter:
mm
1#.13#.0#
Any extension can be removed from the
SMDR report, so that call activity from
that port will not be recorded.
To not include extension 100. for
example, in the SMDR report, enter:
ml,
lW, 14#, ow
To include extension 100, for example,
in the SMDR report, enter:
ml.
I#. 14#. l#
To enable extension 100, for example to be
abletoWiateathreepartyconfen3rce,enten
pF31, 1n,131Y, l#
TheDBSusercanreentertheconferenceby
pressing either of the two centml office line
keys used to initiate the conferenaz. The
conferencewillautornaticallyexpireafterthe
period of time set in the Unsupervised
conference l7me.r. set by the Wl], 3#, 1l#
address.
Seeauto pause for PBX line address (FF2],
13#. Auto pause cannot be used ifthe
mnfmce feature is desiredwhen the DBS
isusedbehindaPBX
The Central Office line program for
conferencing, [FF2], 16# must also be
set when conferences are allowed.
106
Check the SMDR start timer feature
found at program address [FFl], 2#, l#,
2#. Communication program options
that need to be checked when this
option is set include all options found
under [FFl], 2#, 2#, l-lO#.
I
CPC-B software version 2.00 should be
upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate
two intermittent
potential
SMDR
deficiencies in recording Aeld codes.
See Technotes 8 & 12 (March 1992). for
complete information.
DBS Ro@ammin~
Instructions
CPGA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Off-hook signaling volume can be set to
either of four different levels.
To set the off hook signal volume to the
minimum level on extension 100, for
example, enter:
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
When off hook signaling is set on an
extension, the tone pattern can be sent
continuously or only once.
To send a continuous tone pattern for
an off hook signal to extension 100, for
example, enter:
wF3], 19, 15#, l#
LFF31. 1#.16#.0#
To set the off hook signal volume to the
next level on extension
100. for
example, enter:
To send a single tone pattern for an off
hook signal to extension 100, for
example, enter:
jFF31. l#. 15#.2#
lep3], l#, 166. 1W
To set the off hook signal volume to the
third level on extension
100, for
example, enter:
(pLIp3], lW, 15#,3#
To set the off hook signal volume to the
maximum level on extension 100, foi
example, enter:
See alert tone for busy override at address [FFl], 2 #, l#, 17#.
See off hook signal address [FF3], 7#.
Seeoffhook signal volume address [FF3],
15#.
(FF3],1#,15#,4#
See alert tone for busy override at
address [FFl], 2 #, l#, 17#.
See off hook signal address ]FF3]. 7#.
See off hook signal pattern address
[FF3], 16#.
107
Section4OOFF3
Issue3July1993
DBS Ro@ammin~ Instructions
WC-A/ 3.0, WC-B /2.0 13.0 / 4.0
The large screen telephone can show
either 5 or 10 personal speed dial names
when this feature is chosen.
If an extension is to be included in one
or more of the eight hunt groups, this
option needs to be set.
To choose to display 5 names on a large
display telephone that is at extension
100, for example, enter:
To exclude extension 100 from page
group 0, for example, enter:
m3],1#,18#,0#
JFF31.1#.17#.0#
To choose to display 10 names on a
large display telephone that is at
extension 100, for example, enter:
wF31, l#, 17W, l#
To include extension 100 in page group
1. for example, enter:
rFF31, 18, 19#, l#
To exclude extension 100 from page
group 2, for example, enter:
.
pw3],1#,20#,0#
When the 10 name option is used, the
maximum
length of a name is 7
characters.
To include extension 100 in page group
3, for example, enter:
pm],
See address [FFG], 3#, to assign
personal speed dial names to personal
speed dial numbers.
See address (FFlO], 2#, l-14# to assign
personal speed dial. numbers to an
extension.
1#,21#,
1w
To exclude extension 100 from page
group 4. for example, enter:
ml.
1#,22#,0#
To include extension 100 in page group
5, for example, enter:
lFF3],1#,23#,1#
To exclude extension 100 from page
group 6. for example, enter:
tFF3],1#,24#,0#
10s
/-
DBS Pro@mmhg
CFGA/
3.0 CPGB
Section
Inb-uctions
Issue3
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
400 FF3
July1993
ThejXowing
program options apply
toI~dispZayte&phonesonZy.
To include extension 100 in page group
7. for example, enter:
p3],
c\
I#, 25#, I#
To display soft key options on the large
display telephone (VB-43225). when the
phone is in the idle mode, this option
must be set.
To reset Dagle IlrOuD inclusion to the
default initialized value. Dress lFF3L
IDBS extension
Dart number)#,
j18-25)#. O#. lON/OFFl:
To review the screen prompts associated
with the options of this program, see the
appendix following this section.
I
.
-I
109
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
DB3 Programming
Instructtons
WC-A / 3.0. CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To display soft key options on the large
display telephone (VB-43225). during
the time DBS dial tone is heard, this
option must be set.
To display soft key options on the large
display telephone (VB-43225). when
calling another extension, this option
must be set.
o#
No Change
12#
Function Saeen 2
o#
No Change
12#
Function Screen2
1#
Main Menu
lut
Function Saeen 3
l#
Main Menu
13#
Function Screen3
2#
Personal Speed Dial
14#
Function Screen4
2#
PersonalSpeedDial
14#
Function Saeen 4
3#
System Speed Dial
15#
Function Saeen 5
3#
system speed Dial
15#
Function Screen5
4#
Extension Index
16#
Function Screen6
4#
Extension Index
16#
Function Screen 6
5#
Guidance Menu 1
17#
Function Screen 7
6#
Guidance Menu 2
1%
Function Screen8
1 7# 1 Guidance Menu 3 I->#
8#
Attendant Menu 1
20#
Function Screen 10
y#
Attendant Menu 2
21#
Function Screen 11
1 lo# 1 Attendant~ Menu ---22#
3
1l#
Function Screen 1
2ut
Function Screen 13
2#
Function Screen 14
To review the screen prompts associated
with the options of this program, see the
appendix following this section.
110
1Function Screen 9 I
11#
Function Screen 1
[~Function Saeenl2
23#
Function Screen 13
2#
Function Saeen 14
I
To review the screen prompts associated
with the options of this program, see the
appendix following this section.
DBSPro@-~Instructions
WC-A/
3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Scction4OOFF3
July1993
Issue3
To display soft key options on the
large display telephone m-43225).
when accessing a central office line,
this option must be set.
No Change
(1#)nMen
u
::..i .pb9
LCD Menu
LCD Menu
o#
To display soft key options on the large
display telephone W-43225). when in
conversation on central office line, this
option must be set.
12# 1 Function Screen 2
:
...I ~~eQll
a#
No Change
12#
Function Screen 2
1 13# 1 Function Screen 3 1
2#
.PersonalSpeed Dial
14#
Function Screen 4
3#
System Speed Dial
15#
Function Screen 5
4#
Extension Index
16#
Function Screen 6
4#
Extension Index
16#I
Function Screen6
5#
Guidance Menu 1
17#
Function Screen7
5#
Guidance Menu 1
17#
Function Saeen 7
6#
Guidance Menu 2
18#
Function Screen 8
7#
Guidance Menu 3
19#
Function Screen 9
ll#
Function Screen 1
23#
Function Screen 13
24## Function Screen 14
rir-
Guidance Menu 2 I 1~
I
Function Screen8
I
1
D
-:#@J!$$p
.... .::. : .. ..*:‘.
To review the screen prompts associated
with the options of this program, see the
appendix following this section.
To review the screen prompts associated
with the options of this program, see the
appendix following this section.
111
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
DBS Pro@ammiqf
InsIndions
CPGA / 3.0, WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To display soft key options on the large
display telephone (V&43225), when
receiving a page, this option must be
set.
To display soft key options on the large
display telephone (VB-43225). when a
receiving a call waiting tone, this option
must be set.
LCJI Main
Function Saeen 2
I 1# I
I
I
I
2#
1 13# 1 Function Screen 3 I
Main Menu
I Personat Sueed Dial I 1~
I Function Screen4
I
I
OH
No Change
!2#
Function Screen 2
l#
Main Menu
13#
Function Saeen 3
2# I PersonaiStreed Fiat I 14#
I
Function Screen 47
3##
System Speed Dial
15#
Function Saeen 5
3#
System Speed Dial
1%
Function Screen 5
4#
Extension kdex
16#
Function Screen 6
4#
Extension Index
16#
Function Saeen 6
H
I
GuidanceMenu 1 I 17# I Function Saeen 7 I
6#
Guidance Menu 2
18#
Function Saeen 8
7#
Guidance Menu 3
I#
Function Saeen 9
8#
~1Attendant Menu
1 I 20# I Function Screen 10 I
I 8# I Attendant Menu 1 --I 20#
I Function Screen 10 I
9#i
Attendant Menu 2
21#
Function Screen 11
9#
Attendant Menu 2
21#
Function Screen 11
1W
Attendant Menu 3
22#
Function Screen 12
10#
Attendant Menu 3
22#
Function Screen 12
I Id
Function Saeen 1
ll#
Function Screen 1
23#
Function Screen 13
24#
Function Screen 14
I 23# I Function Screen 13 I
24#
Function Screen 14
To review the screen prompts associated
with the options of this program, see the
appendix following this section.
112
To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program,
see the appendix following this section.
DBS Pro@ammin~
Instructions
CPGA / 3.0 CF’C-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
The large display telephone (W-43225)
can be set to display 5 or 10 extension
names after the extension menu hasbeen
displayed.
To display soft key options on the
large display telephone W-43225).
when dialing an extension, this option
must be set.
UJDMUIU
No Change
12# 1 FunctionScreen
Main Menu
1 13# 1 FunctionScreen
o#
I 1# I
I
rxD h4eau
LCDMHUI
I
I 1# I
LcDMe4ltt
No Change
12# I Function keen 2
Main Menu
I 13# I Function Screen3 1
2#
I Personal speed Dial I
1~
I Function Screen4 I
3#
System Speed Dial
1%
Function Screen 5
3#
System Speed Dial
lS#
FunctionSaeen5
16#
Function Screen 6
4#
Extension Index
16#
Function Saecn 6
5#
6#
#
Extension Index
I 2# I krson~ Speed Dial I 14# I Function Screen4 I
Guidance Menu 1
c
Guidance Menu 2
7#
Guidance Menu 3
8#t
Attendant Menu 1
9f#
E
I Id
Attendant Menu 2
lO#
Attendant Menu 3
~Functton
:- Screen 1
Guidance Menu 3.
Function Sacen 9
Function Screen 10
ll#
Function Screen 1
23#
Function Screen 13
24#
Function Screen 14
To set an extension port to display 5
extension names. enter
To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program,
see the appendix following this section.
1. fD=
341.
extt%MiOXl
DOti
Xlumber)#,
on
To set extension port 22 for example, to
display 10 extension names, enter:
FF3],22#,
341, 1w
113
Section 400 FF3
Issue3July1993
Direct inward dialed numbers that have
been dialed by a caller need to be assigned
to extension ports, so that the number
dialed will ring on all extensions they are
supposed to appear on. A DID number
can be set to ring on one extension port
only.
To set DID number 0000 to ring on a DBS
extension port number, enter:
1. (Dm
C?XtC!DSiOllDOrt llUIDk~~#,
35#.oooo#.
To set DID number 4444 to ring on
extension port 50. for example, enter:
DBSRograrmPaingI.n&ructions
CPGA/ 3.0, WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Once extension features have been put
into one of 8 possible classes of service in
address [FFl], 2#, 5#, aparticularclass of
service has to be assigned to an extension.
To assign all extension features to a DBS
extension for exxnple, enter:
1. tDBS extension
port numberl#,
35#.0#
To assign class of service 4 to extension
port 54, for example. enter:
ml*
54#,35#,4#
~
:_... :*: :.
*FF
See programming at the (FFl]. 2#, 5#
address for the list of features that can be
applied to a class of service.
This feature has been moved to address
[FFl], 8#, 3# in UC-B software versions
3.00 and newer. This changes provides
greater flexibility in the assignment of DID
numbers.
114
DB!3F'rogrammh.g~~ctio~
WC-A/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
The ringback tone a caller hears when
arriving at an extension that is busy
because the same multi line key is in use
bythecalledparty,canbesetintbis
address.
To give the calling party a ringback and
busy tone, enter:
1. (DBS extension Port number)#,
36#.0#
To give the calling party a busy signal,
enter:
fFF3], (DBS extension port xwmber)#,
36#,1#
To give the calling party a ringback tone,
enter:
[FF3), (DBS extension port number)#,
36#,2#
Section4OOFF3
iseue 3July1993
Assigns a port class to each station port
that will access the Tl. Port classes are
used to assign pad levels to connections
made via the Tl.
(Pad levels control
volume.)
By default, DEB phones are assigned a
circuit type, based on whether they are
lCEI.s or SLTs.
The circuit type is used with digital pad
settings to determine the loss/gain settings for connections to the Tl. (See
“Digital Pad Setting.”
The Tl port Class parameter is provided
in case a specific phone or group of
phones needs a unique pad level.
For example, an SLT is assigned by default as “circuit type 2.” However, if an
SLT in a remote warehouse has inadeQi2.e volume levels, the circuit type for
the SLT could be changed to 7 (Option
1). Once the SLT is changed to drcuft
type 7, the pad levels for circuit type 7
could be changed to provide the correct
volume setting.
Circuit types are also provided for trunk
ports. See Figure 1 for a definition of
drcLlit types.
This programming parameter will allow
youtoassigncircuittypes
l-12toastation port. However, it should only be
changed to circuit type 7 or 8 (Option 1
or 2).
115
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
DBS programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0. CFGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
f
Figure 1 shows circuit-type numbers. Cir- To determine what type of action will occur
cuit ‘Apes 1.2.7, and 8 are used to assign when an SLT user hook flashes while in
port classes to stations.
~nversationwithacallerwithanothercaIler
already
on
hold,
this
feature must be set. The two possible types
of action are alternately tog@ng between
the party on hold and the party being talked
Figure 1. Circuit-type
Numbers
to, or, conferencing the two parties together
with the SLT user.
circuit
Types
1
K-TEL
SLT
No.
_
2
DATA#
3
Analog CO Trk
4
Tl Master
5
Tl Slave
6
OPTlONl*
7
&llON
8
2*
DTMF##
9
CON-F (SCC)#
10
TONE1 (MFRl)#
11
TONE2 (MFR2)#
12
116
To toggle between the two parties
connected to an SLT user, enter:
.
mBs
extension
DOrt
number)#.
38w. O# -.- ..
c
To conferencetwopartieswiththe
enter:
P31,
38#,
@BS extension
l#
SLTuser,
port number)#,
Section 400 FFS
issue 3 July 1993
DBS Rogramminx
instructions
CF’GA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To set a distinctive extension ring pattern
for central office calls that are set to ring at
an extension, this feature must be set.
The ring patterns for proprietary DBS
phones are different than those of SLT or
OPX phones. Either of ten different
patterns can be set for an extension.
The handset receive volume of the digital
single line telephone can be set to a
normal or louder than normal volume.
The louder than normal setting gives a
+fSdBgain over the normal setting, which
results in a volume level approximately
twice that of the normal setting.
To set the digitial SLT handset receiving
volume to the normal level, enter:
40#.
.fDBs
ow
extensionDOrt
numberl#.
To set the digitial SLT handset receiving
volume to louder than normal, enter:
W],
(DBS
extension
port
number)#,
40#,1#
117
Section4OOFF3
Issue3July1993
DBSRo@ammin~Instructions
CPGA/ 3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Digital Ring Pattan
lSecondOnl3
Sceonds OFF
.5 Second ON/ .5
Second OFF
7#
.5 Second ON/ .5
Second OFF.
.5 Second ON/ .5
SecondsOFF,
.5 Second ON t3.5
SecondsOFF
2#
2 SecondsON/
2SecondsOFF
3#
1 Second ON/ 1
Second Off
.5 Second ON/ 3.5
Seconds OFF
4#l
1 Second ON/ 2
SecondsOFF
1 Second ON/7
Seconds Off
This feature enables an extension to be
physically moved from one position to
another, and to take all features that have
been applied to the extension in it’s
origInal position, to the new position
without doing manual program changes.
By applying an auto set relocation code to
a phone, and using this code when an
extension is moved, extension moving is
eflkient and quick.
To apply no auto set relocation code to an
extension port, enter:
1. mBs
extension
Dolt
number)#,
4lklCONFl
SLT&X?XRing
F%ttan
.
w
DeDendsOn SLT
Transfer Ring
Settine
l#
3 SecondsON/ 1
Second OFF
2#
I I
2 SecondsON/
2Seconds OFF
I 3#I
1 Second ON/2
Second OFF
4##
1 Second ON/ 3
SecondsOff
118
SLT/ovxRia~.
Pattan . . .
5#
1 Second On/ 5
Sctxnds OFF
1 Second ON/7
Second Off
7#
.5 Second ONn.5
Second OFF,
I
8#
.5 Second ON/ 3.5
Seconds OFF
I
I
I
I
.5 Second ON/ 3.5
SecondsOFF
To apply an auto set relocation code of
7777 to extension port 45, for example,
enter:
rFF3]*45%*41#,7777#
~
:..::.:...:::,..:..
_,... *
The auto set relocation code is applied to
the original extension being moved. After
the extension is plugged into the new port
position, press ON/OFF. #lo. (original
DBS port number)#, then the (4 digit auto
set relocation code number). After the
process is complete, reset the phone on
the new port by disconnecting the
modular plug, and reconnecting it. The
origlnal port position converts to a “0”
type. The transfer of phones between
digital and analog ports cannot be done.
The transfer of phones between analog
ports, or between digital ports can be done.
DBS Rogrammin~
hstructions
CE’GA/
3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
An extension can be set in a permanent
call forward setting. This fatunz is mainly
forusewithperipheralequipment(s~~
voicemail applications)),where it is desiredto
haveanexknsionring for a period oftime,
and then always forward to the same
extension port.
To not have an extension permanently
call forwarded for all calls, enter:
l
rDBs
extension
Dort
If permanent call forwarding is applied, an
extension number must be set as the
target of forwarded calls. This address sets the call forward target.
If permanent call forwarding is not
enabled, no call forwarding extension
is required. The default initialized
value of this adddress would then be:
jFF31. (DBS extension
43w. ICONFL
DO&
number)#,
numberl#,
42W. On
To turn permanent
enter:
Section 400 FF3
Issue3 July1993
call forwarding off,
FF3], (DBS extension port number)#,
.-.
42#, 1W
To set extension number 333 as the
target extension of calls from source
extension number 105, enter:
(FF3],105#.
438.333%
To have an extension permanently call
forwardedwhenanextensionuserisbusy,
enter:
(FF3], (DBS extension
42#, 26
port number)#,
To have an extension permanently call
forwarded when an extension user does
not answer, enter:
(FF3]. (DBS extension
426.36
port number)#,
Permanent call forwarding
can be
overridden by call forwarding set at
the extension level.
119
Section 400 FF3
issue 3 July 1993
DBS Rogmmmin~
WC-A
As of CPC-B Version 4, extensions can
have MC0 or ML keys. In previous
versions, the keys were avaiIable on a
system-wide basis. The type of key
available ditTered with the software
release. In this parameter, “(00 1- 144)”
represents the extension port number.
In “0 or 1,” ” 0” represents the MC0 keys
and ” 1” represents the ML keys. The
following table shows MCL/ML availability.
1. The initial setting for all extensions
(except the first attendant phone) is
MCO.
2. The initial setting for the first attendant phone (port 1) is ML.
CPC Version
1
I
1 TypeofKey
CPC-A
I
MC0 only
I
CPC-B 1.0
I
MC0 only
I
ML only
1
1 CPC-B 2.0 - 3.1 1
I
I
I
120
1
I
CPC-B 4.0 and
above
I
I
MC0 or ML
I
/ 3.0, WC-B
Instructions
/2.0
/. 3.0 / 4.0
DBS Pro@mming
CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B
Large display
Instructions
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
%‘%tion
Issue
400 FF3
1993
3 July
screen APPElVDlX
The fotlowing
are the possible screen appearances of the large display
telephone (‘VB-43225), when any of the 25 screen selections are chosenfor a
particular
telephone condition, Some screens can not be set to display during
certain telephone conditions if the prompts are not reteuant to the conditions
of the phone.
‘No Change”
(/
\
T%sonaz speed Did”
rnJ,
CDBSext port rlum&+,
09:51
Thu
(26-33)#, 2#
APR
02
‘system speed Dial”
PT3J,(Dss set pat ruunkd#. @6-3333)#,
3#
09:Sl
Thu
APR.02.
CH
6 0 4
RICH
>
- PSDSO
-PSD95
SSD
>
-PSDOl
-PSD96
ABC
MN0
<
>
- PSD92
-PSD97
DEF
PQRS
c
>
- PSD93
-PSD96
GH I
TUV
<
>
-PSD94
-PSD99
JKL
RI
‘!&tension
0 9 2.5 1
R 1.C
.EXT.
H
Thu
APR
02
4 0 4
DIRECTO‘RY
<
R.ECTORY
WXYZ
0 9 : 5 .1
<
DEF
PQRS
TUV
WXY2
r,
T h: u:
&i?:@+O
:..- ‘.. 2
,.[a
R I CH
Absence
MN0
JKL
DI
“Guidance Menu I ”
Index”
ABC
GH I
804
ACCT
Code
0 4
y
1HQ -,.i
ye
E.n tti--
<
<
S.t a t I o n ;..L-o c k 0 u:.t
<
Reminder
<
T I me
FF-Key
Sett
lnQ
<
121
Section
400
DBS Prorpammins
Instructions
CPGA / 3.0, CPC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
FF3
Issue 3 July
1993
“Guidance Menu 2”
ml,
ms
ext. port numbaf#,
c26-331#, is
‘Guidance Menu 3”
ml,
DE3 at pt
rtumbe#*
cxxE#k
<
-2
<
*
*
ml,
‘IAttendant Menu 2”
D~ex?Qofinumber)#, tz?6-33..#*
9?Y
Attendant
0nl.g
<
<
<
f
<
<
‘Attendant
Em, DBssctport-.
At&U&&J&
00 :Si,.
Thu
RI
CR’
> PI
og’t
> Ou
tgolng‘.Amount
122
a-mm
Menu 3”
1,1m
l%3--33)#
A-PR
02
0 0 I
In g
Y o d-e
Tunction
Screen 1 *V
DBS F’ro@ammin~ hst~ctions
hAion 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
CPGA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
‘Function
pl?3],
DBS
exL pat
Screen
lllm&ed#,
I 0 9 .: F :I .. 1 ‘I! ‘U
(2&33M,
1%
(
APR
Thu
CH
Set
C6
set
Y 0,s
set
co
6
I I
13#
0 .*.-.
‘!Function Screen 6”
f-31, Iz>Bsfzxt port number3#,(26-331#,16#
RI
3”
WJ, DES ed pat rurmber)#, Wz)#,
rnL
09:51
Screen
A P R -‘,o’-a
RICH
I
‘Function
2”
W8I
9 a g 0
‘Function
ml.
DB
02
0
O-9
act pat
: 5 t
Screen
numberf#,
.;r
7”
(B33)#,
17#
h-u
RICH
4
tlng
‘Function Screen 5”
DB-Qxldnumber)#,
(26-33Pt,15#
-
>
A c c 1 ,Yc 0 d 0
>
L.C
d ‘:.,c @ i’ I
-Queu!ng
Busy--0vrrrIdo
R e I e a’s
e
123
Sectton 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
DBS Rogrammtng
Instructions
/ 3.0, WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
CPGA
‘Function Screen 8”
m3L 03s ext p-t number3#,t26-331#.18#
>
>
>
>
>
‘Z%mction Screen 2 l)(
P-J
Ri
r e-as-a.
Function
z
>
>
>
>
toti*
c- 0 8’ ‘f .e c 0 n c 0
Park
Screen 12”
‘Function
P
Screen 13”
m 3h
09
Thu
:Sl
APR
RICH
s
a 'V
6
e
SSD-DIR
0.2
0
uu
4
r
09:Sl
RI
t
4
RBlars4
PSD-DIR
Transfer
Rdrirrn’dar
coit ^.
-.
cc..: E a. i: r y . ‘,
A C-C,.T,‘.- 6 0. d .;
124
iz?ix.BM* 21#
Thu
cm
, Plge> Itlordaet
.
> T 0. n 0
>
>
APR
6
Answer
02
6
4
Mute
UNA_
,
<
.c
DBS
Pro@mmiqj
WC-A/
/\
3.0 CPGB
/ 2.0 / 3.0 /CO
‘!hnction
Screen
LFF31,DES ext p-t nuJnM#,
0 9 :51
R I CH
Thu
14”
c=331#,
APiI
09
02
DND
<
>
Conference
<
>
Transf.er
<
>
<
>
>
Release
>
>
:, 5 1
RI
0 0.4
>
Telkback
Tunction
Screen 15”
DBsct
port number)#, c26-33)#, 2!3#
ml,
24#
<
>
>
Section 400 FF3
Issue 3 July 1993
Instructions
Park
T h u;
_.
CH
:A:.P
.” p.. ::,iJ
.,.I ?
8 0.4
HOLDING
N 0 1 II‘ .i N- i
TRF’-TO
WAI
T:
0 0
125
Section
400 FF4
Issue 3 July
I
1993
WC-A
DBS Rogramming
I~tructions
/ 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
3-4 RING8tHUNTGROUP
PROGRAMMING
P
Central office line “day mode” ring
assignments for all extensions are set
with this option.
Central office line “day mode” ring
assignments for all hunt group pilot
numbers are set with this option.
To set extension 120 not to ring on
central office line 19 when the DBS is in
the “day mode”, for example, enter:
To set pilot number 600 (which has
been assigned as. the pilot number for
hunt group 3, in this example) not to
ring on central office line 14 when the
DBS is in the uday mode”, for example,
enter:
JFF41. l#.
l#. 19W. OW
To set extension 120 to ring on central
office line 50 when the DBS is in the
“day mode”, for example, enter:
_ P'F41, lW, lW, 50#, 1X
DefhIt initialized mIues for DBS extension
port 1 is: EF41. l#. l#. (1-64I#. l#. ION/
OFFI. and for extension rxxt 2 is: IFF41.l#,
2#. fl-W#. l#. ION/OFFl.
If an outbound central office call is
made from an extension that is not set
to ring on for any inbound cent.ra.I ofice
line calls. the automatic answer option
wiII not function. To answer inbound
central office Iine caIls, press the &&.ing
green Iine key. To pick up a central office
linecallthatisrin&ingatanothertelephone,
use the Dimcted caIl pickup or Group caII
pickup options. Port number 145 is used
to assign ringing to the extemaI page /
UNA interface. Ail unassigned ringing
trunks wilI be directed to the attendant.
126
jFF41.
1W. 153W. 14Q. O#
To set pilot number 500 (which has
been assigned as the pilot number for
hunt group 1, in this example) to ring on
central office line 10 when the DBS is in
the @daymode”, for example, enter:
pF4],
I#, 151#, lO#, l#
DBS F’ro@amming
CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B
hStruC~onS
/ 2.0
Central office line “night mode” ring
assignments for all extensions are set
with this option.
To set extension 120 not to ring on
central ot&e line 19 when the DBS is in
the “night mode”. for example. enter:
JFF41.2#. 218. lQ#.O#
To set extension 120 to ring on central
offke line 50 when the DBS is in “night
mode”, for example, enter:
~F4].2#,21#,50#,
1n
Defiult initialized values for DBS extension
port 1 is: lFF41. 2#. l#. (1-64M l#. ION.+!
OFFI. and for &ension uort 2 is: 1FF41.2#,
2#. 11-641#.l#. ION/OFFl.
Section 400 FFQ
issue 2 June 1993
Central office line “night mode” ring
assignments for all hunt group pilot
numbers are set with this option. The
address numbers 15 1- 158 refer to hunt
group numbers l-8.
To set pilot number 300 (which has
been assigned as the pilot number for
hunt group 2, in this example) to ring on
central ofiice line 13 when the DBS is in
the “night mode”, for example, enter:
@'F4].2#, 152#, 13#, l#
To set pilot number 350 (which has
been assigned as the pilot number for..
hunt group 4, in this example] not to
ring on central of&e line 17 when the
DBS is in the %ight mode”, for example,
enter:
JFF41.2#. 154w. 17%.0#
Ifanoulboundcentmlofficecallismade~m
an&ensionthatisnotsettoringonforany
inbound central office line calls, the
automatic answer option wiIl not function.
To answer inbound central office line calls,
pressthefkhinggreenlineky.
Topickup
a central office line call that is ringing at
another telephone, use the Directed call
pickup or Group call pickup options.
Port number 145 is used to assign ringing
to the external page / UNA interface.
Toresetcentiof3ceni&Wingass&nments
for nilot numbers to the default fnitialized
value. mess lFF41.2#. 151-KM. kentral
offie sort numberl#. CM.ION/OFFl.
127
Section
400
Issue 3 July
FF4
1993
A maximum of 8 extensions can be put
in each of 8 hunt groups. Each hunt
group can be designated as a “terminal
type”, or “circular type”.
Terminal Hunt Group Operation
The call must be transferred
or a
central office line set to ring at the
first extension in the grout in order
for the terminal hunt feature to work.
If the first extension of the hunt group is
busy, an incoming call will automatically
access the next extension of the group.
If all the extensions in the group are
busy, an internal caller will hear a
busy tone, a non transferred central
office line caller will hear ring tone. If
additional feature options are chosen, the
search will continue with an additional
hunt group,(s).
To use the first extension position (analog)
as a pilot position, place a 2 watt 450 ohm
resistor across the tip and ring. This will
busytheport,andallowittobeusedasa
“pilot numb& for the remaining &f!nsions
inthegroup. Directcallstomembersofthe
hunt group will not hunt to other members
of the group ifthe called extension is busy.
CPC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Circular Hunt Group Operation
Circular Hunting is performed when any
extension in the group is ringing and left
unanswered. The ringing can originate
from tranferred, or extensions assigned to
ring for outside lines. No pilot number is
provided for this type of hunting.
The hunting will follow the next member
in the hunt group until the end ofthe hunt
group is reached. When the end of the
hunt group is reached the call will then be
directed back to the first member until
one full circle has been completed. At this
point of time the call will overflow to the
next hunt group assigned.
If all the extensions in the group are
busy, an internal. caller will hear a
busy tone, a non transferred central
office line caller will hear ring tone. If
additional feature options are chosen, the
search will continue with an additional
hunt group(s).
To set hunt group 5. for
terminal type, enter:
to
JFF41. 3w. 5n. l#.O#
To set hunt group 4, for example to
circular type, enter:
Iee41, 3#, 4W, l#, l#
128
example,
/-
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0
6
If all extensions are busy, an incoming
call will wait for an available extension.
If an extension within either type of
hunt group: is set with an absence
message, with a call forward feature, or
to DND, the hunt feature will skip that
extension, and procede to the next
extension within the group. If the fast
extension within either type of hunt
group is set with an absence message,
with a call forward feature, or to DND,
the hunt feature will not work.
”
If a SLT hunt group member takes a
central office line call, puts it on hold,
and replaces the handset, additional
central office line calls will not hunt to
idle extensions.
Previously searched hunt groups
cannot be searched again. If all
members of all searched groups are
busy, the call will be parked for the frst
group searched only.
Central of&e lines that are set to ring at
extensions set to call forward to a hunt
group will not call forward to extension
types 10 and 15.
An extension that is a member of a hunt
group cannot be a member of another
hunt group, nor a member of a call
coverage group. The off hook signaling
[FF3]- 16 address should be removed
from members in a hunt group.
Section
400 FF4
Issue 2 June 1993
A maximum of 8 extension numbers
can be assigned to work as one of a
maximum of 8 pilot numbers. One
pilot number can be,used as the lead
number for each of the 8 hunt groups.
To assign extension number 255, for
example, as a pilot number for the frost
hunt group, enter:
WF4], 3W;l#,
lW.2558
To assign no extension number (and ..
therefore no pilot number), for example,.’ ., ..:.
for the first hunt group, enter:
,. ..I
pF4], 3W, lW, lW, conf,#
To assign extension number 110, for
example, as a pilot number for the
second hunt group, enter:
cIpIp4).3#, 2W, l#, 1lOW
To assign extension:.number 300. for
example, as a pilot number for the third
hunt group. enter:
IFF4],3#,3#,
l#, 3006
To assign extension number 699, for
example, as a pilot number for the
fourth hunt group, enter:
WF4], 3#,4#,
lW.6996
To assign extension number 600. for
example, as a pilot number for the fifth
hunt group, enter:
129
Section 400
Issue 3 July
FF4
1993
FF4],3#,5#,
CI’GA
1#,600#
To assign extension number 199, for
example, as a pilot number for the sixth
hunt group, enter:
[FF4],3#,6#,
l#, 199#
To assign extension nuqber 400, for
example, as a pilot number for the
seventh hunt group, enter:
lFF41.35
DBS Ro@amrnin~
Inst~ctiom~
/ 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
If all the extensions in a particular
hunt group are busy, the calI can be
automatically transferred to another
hunt group. A call to hunt group 3
could be made to overflow to hunt
group 5, if all the extensions in group
3 are busy. If all extensions in the
overflow group are also busy, the call
will rem-t back to group 3, and con&me
to search extensions until one becomes
available.
7C, 1#,400#
To assign extension number 255,. for
example, as a pilot number for the
eighth hunt group, enter:
[FF4], 3#, 8#;1#,
255W
To reset the uilot extension number
assignment for anv hunt Q~OUD.Dress
jFF41 3#. (hunt groun number l-81#,
l#. ICONFl. fON/OFFl.
To set hunt group 3 to overflow to hunt
group 5, for example. enter:
[FF41, 3w, 3#, 21, 51
To set hunt group 4 not to overflow to
any other hunt group, for example,
enter:
rFF41, 3#, 48, 26, [CONF]
To reset hunt
particuku hunt
initialized value.
gr-ou~numberl#.
130
grout overflow for a
PROUDto the default
Dress lFF41.3#. (hunt
2#. ICONFI. lON/OFFl.
DBS Programming
Inst.ructions
WC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0
Section 400 FF4
Issue 2 June 1993
Use this option to insert an extension in a
specific position of one of the eight hunt
groups. A maximum of 8 extensions can
be put into a hunt group.
To place extension number 500 in the
first hunt group’s first position, enter:
pF4],3#.
The type of extension search that is
used once the call is connected to a
hunt group can be set to terminal,
distributed, or longest idle.
.-..TenninuZ Hunt Group~Operation
The call must be transferred or a central
office line must be set to ring at the nilot
number of the hunt groun in order for
the terminal hunt feature to work.
lW, 31.5001
(FF41. 3t. (l-SW. (3)t. (IOO-699H
1st member for hunt groups ( l-8)
?OCorXXX.#
(FF41, 3U. (l-8lrt. (4)#, (loo-699M
2nd member for hunt groups (I-81
xx0rxxx.n
(FF41, 3#, (l-81#. (5)#, (loo-6991#
3rd member for hunt groups (l-8)
xx0rxxx.t
(FF41. 3#. (1-8l#. (6)#. (IOO-6991#
4th member for hunt groups (l-81
xxorxxx.%
IFF4). 3t. (I-8)t. (7’J#. (loo-699)#
5th member for hunt groups (l-81
xxorxxx,#
(FF41. 3#. (l-8)#. (8)#, (lOO-699)t
6th member for hunt groups (1-B)
xx0rxxx.U
(FF41. 3#. (l-8)+!, (9)#. (IOO-699)#
7th member for hunt groups (l-8)
xxorxxx.#
(FF41. 3#, (l-8,!+. (lOl#. (lOO-699M
8th member for hunt groups (l-81
I
xx0rxxx.U
To reset an extension to it’s default initialized hunt $30~~ value. press: IFF41. 3#
(DBS hunt grow numberl#. (DBS hunt
grout nositionI#. fCONFl#. fON/OFFl.
An extension that is a member of a hunt
group cannot be a member of another
hunt group, nor a member of a call
coverage group. The off hook signaling
[FF3]- 16 address should be removed
from members in a hunt group.
The hunt begins with the pilot number,
and sequentially moves through the
eight extensions. If all the extensions in
the group are busy. the hunt for a free
extension W-III terminate.
If the pilot number of another hunt
group, or same hunt group. is specified,
the search will continue with an
additional hunt group(s). If not, the
caller will receive a busy tone.
Distributed
Hunt Group Operatim
The call must be transferred or a central
ofke line must be set to ring at the Dilot
number of the hunt croup in order for
the distributed hunt feature to work.
The hunt begins at the extension after
the last one to pick up the previous
caller, and continues in a circular
manner for successive calls.
If the pilot number of another hunt group
is specified, the search will continue with
an additional hunt group(s). If not, the
caller will receive a busy tone.
131
section
400 FF4
hue
3 July 1993
Longest Idle Hunt Group Operation
The call can be transferred or a central
of&e line must be set to ring at the pilot
number of the hunt a-OUD in order for
the longest idle hunt group feature to
work.
The hunt begins at the extension in the
group that has been idle for the longest
period ofTtime, and progresses through
the other extensions in the same manner.
lfthe pilot number of another hunt group
is spedfled, the search will continue with
an additional hunt group(s). If not, the
caller will receive a busy tone.
..
To set hunt group .l, to the termin&
search method, for example, enter:
JFF41. 34. I#. 2W. O#
To set hunt group 2, to,,the distributed
search method, enter:
WF4], 3#, 21, 2#, l#
To set hunt group 3, to the longest idle
search method, enter:
rFF4].3#,
132
3#,2#.2#
WC-A
DBS Rogrammixag
In#ructi~ns
/ 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Once all extensions in a hunt group
have been searched, the caller can be
transferred to the pilot number of a
different hunt group, an individual
extension, the attendant, or an SLT
device. This option sets the extension
numberthatthecallwillbetransferredto,
in the event of an overflow Tom the hunt
group.
To set extension number 600 as the
~owMensionafteracallhasoverflowed
hunt group 3, for example, enter:
[FF4),3#,3#,3#,600#
To set the overflow extension from anv
hunt BOUD to the default initialized
value. Dress (FF41.3#. (DBS hunt Proun
numberHI. 3#. O#. ION/OFFi.
P
DBS Programming
In!kructiox.w
WC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0
section
4c90 FF4
Issue 2 June 1993
To set the maximum amount of time
before the caller overflows to an extension
or additional huntgroup, this option must
be set.
To assign an exkMon to an exact position
within a hunt group, this option must be
used.
To place extension 3OO.inhunt group 1,
in the tist position, for example, enter:
pF4], 3w, 1#,5#y,300#
To reset an extension to the default
initialized DBS hunt groun setting. Dress
jFF41.3#. lDBS hunt LOUD numberl#,
JPositionwithin hunt grounj#. ICONFl#,
JON’OFF’*
111
11 seconds
271
27 Seconds
121
12 seamcls
281
28 semnds
13u
13 seconds
291
29 seconds
141)
14 seamds
301
30 tseamds
15#
15 seconds
31 #
31 SeoJnds
16#
16 Sea&s
32 I
32 !Seamds
To set the transfer timer for hunt group
1 to 10 seconds, for example, enter:
[FF4], 3W,lW, 4#,10#
.:.
._ :..
IFF41. 3#. (1-81s. (51#. (100-6991#
1st member for hunt grows (l-8)
I
(FF41, 3#. (I-8lU. (8H. (IOO-699M
4th member for hunt groups
(l-8)
I
I
(FF41. 31. (l-8)#, (9)#, (100-6991X
5th member for hunt gmuns (l-81
I
I
(FF41..3#. (I-811. [lOl#, (100-6991#
6th member for hunt gmuns (l-81
I
I
IFF4J. 3W. (l-8)ff. (1 IIN. (loo-6991#
7th member for hunt gmuos I1 -81
I
I
(FF41. 3U. (l-8)#, (121X. (lOO-6991#
8th member for hunt grows (l-81
I
I
XX0rDCX.U
_
I
xx0rxxx.l
xx0rxxx.W
I
xx0rxxx.t
xxorxxx.#
I
xx0rxxx.n
Versions older than 2.11 do not have
program settings 0 or 1.
133
Section 400
Issue 3 July
FF4
1993
-C-A/
An extension can be assigned to any
position within any one of the 16 call
coverage groups in the system. Each
group has a maximum of 8 extensions,
comprising 6 member extensions and 2
secretarial covering extensions.
To set extension 100 as the first secretary
caIl coverage member of call coverage
group 1, for example, enter:
DBS Ro@ammiq
Inst~ctions
3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Central o!3ce Iine “day mode” delayed ring
assignments for all extensions are set
with this option. When inbound centml
o&e line cab are not answered in the
time
set in the Call-Forward/
No-Answer/Delayed-RingUmer,thedelayed
ring assignments are utilized.
To set port 115 for no delayed ring in the
day mode on line 6, for example, enter:
[FF4], 48, I#, l#, lOO#
W41.
;&&;
iFF41. 41.
coverage
‘1-1611.
group
#
I~41.
4#.
cavenge
(1-16)X.:
@-up#
‘1)X.
Fiea-etaly
‘.A
&
k
, #
x2
xxorxn.#
pF4],
IFF41.
-eraBe
41.
tFF41. 4X.
Q=rage
I
IFF41. 4#.
covcra&?e
(l-16)1.
ID-UP #
‘6)#.
Member
#4
(I-16)#.
group
#
(7)#.
Member
#5
I
‘l-16)#.
SOUP t
‘8M
Member
#6
I
COVeraf!e
aOUD)#.
XXW?ZX.#
xxorxxx
I
.#
I
iCONF1.
An extension can not be a member of a
hunt group, as well as a member of any
other call coverage group. The second
covering extension becomes active only
when the first covering extension is set
for Do-Not-Disturb.
134
5#, 110#,22%,
l#
xx0raa.t
To reset call cover=
~OUDS
to the
default initialized settings. Dress IFF4L
4#. lcall coveraee groun)#. (oosition
within
5#. 1151y. 6#.0#
To set extension 110 to delayed ring in
the day mode on line 22, for example,
enter:
xxorxxx.#
I1
(211.
.’
secretary
,t
:,.
Inclusion of the first-attendant position
in the delayed-ring tables. wiIl disable
the attendant-overflow feature.
If the delayed ring function
is
enabled and no extensions are assigned,
or capable of ringing (DND, unpluged.
etc...),
the
ringing
line
will
automatically ring the attendant.
DBS Pro@amming hdruCti0~
WC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0
Central office line “day mode” delayed ring
assignments for pilot numbers of hunt
groups are set with this option. When
inbound central office line calls are not
answered in the time set in the
Call-Forward/No-Answer/Delayed-Ring
timer, the delayed ring assignments are
unlized.
To set the pilot number for hunt group 1
for no delayed ringin the day mode on line
22, for example. enter:
(
3eCtion4OOFF4
Issue 2 June 1993
Central office line “night mode” delayed
ring assignments for all extensions are
set with this option., When inbound
central office line callsare not answered
in the time set in the, Call-Forward/
No-Answer/Delayed-Ring
timer, the
delayed ring assignments are utilized.
To set extension 120 for no delayed ring
in the night mode on line 3, for example,
enter:
JFF41. 6#. 120#. 3W. O#
JFF41. 5#. 151#. 22#.0#
To set the pilot number for hunt group
2 for delayed ring in the day mode on
line 15, for example, enter:
WF4].
5#, 152#,
To set extension 400 to delayed ring in
the night mode on line 20, for example,
enter:
[FF4], 66, 120#, 3#, l#
15W. l#
Inclusion of the first-attendant position
in the delayed-ring tables, will disable
the attendant-overflow feature.
If the delayed ring function
is
enabled and no extensions are assigned,
or capable of ringing (DND, unpluged.
line
will
etc...).
the
ringing
automatically ring the attendant.
,135
Section4OOFF4
Issue3July1993
Central of&e line “night mode” delayed
ring assignments for pilot numbers of
hunt groups are set with this option.
When inbound central office line calls are
not answered dn the time set in the CallForward/No-Answer/Delayedelayed-Wngtimer,
the delayed ring assignments are utilized.
To set the pilot number for hunt group 4
for delayed ring in the night mode on line
28, for example, enter:
JFF4l. 6W. 154#.26i/.O#
To set the pilot number for hunt group
1 for no delayed ring in the night mode
on line 10, for example, enter:
DBSRo@ammfngInstructions
WC-A / 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Extensions th at have a DSS/BLF key
assignment for other DBS extensions
can be set to ring on those keys for
any type of call that is directed to the
other extensions. This feature allows
a second extension user to answer a
ringing call to an absent extension
position(s) by accessing the DSS/BLF
key on their phone that represents
the other extension position(s). The
first extension enumerated in the
address is the target extension; and
the second is the source extension.
To set extension port 15 not to ring for
calli directed to ‘extension port 44, enter:
JFF41. 7w. 44w. 15W.06
[FF4], 6#, 151#, 106, l#
To set extension port 1 to ring for calls
directed to extension port 60. enter:
tFF41, 76,6O#,l#
136
1n
DBS ROM
WC-A / 3.0 WC-B
Inntnwtions
/ 2.0
section
400 FF4
Isane 2 June 1993
Extensions that ham a DSS/BLF key
assignment for other DBS extensions can
besettodelayedringonthosekeysforany
type of caU-*t
is directed to the other
&ensions.‘cs
feature allows a second
extension user to answer a ringing call on
a delayed basis to an absent extension
position(s) by accessingthe DSS/BLFkey
on their phone that represents the other
extension position(s).?he Brst extension
enumerated in the address is the target
extension. and the second is the source
extension.
To set extension port 13 not to delay ring
for calls directed to extension port 44,
enter:
JFF41. wt. 44u. 13#. ow
To set extension port 5 to delay ring calls
directed to extension port 40, enter:
W4],
su, 4ow, 5# l#
137
Section
Isrue
400
FFS
July
1993
CPCA
DBS Ro@ammin~
I~tructio~~
/ 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
f
Each flexible feature key on the
telephones and EM24 consoles can be
programmed with a code so that pressing
it wiU perform the function associated
with the code assigned to the key.
To set extension port 120. FF key
number 5, to be an Alarm key, for
example, enter:
PF5], 12OW. 5#, pF12],
4#
To set extension port 55, FF key
number 10, to be a call forward/all calls
key, for example, enter:
EF5], 55#,10#,720#
To reset the FF extension kevs to an
unassigned value. [which must be done
before a feature can be aDDlied to a
defaulted CO line kevl. Dress lFF51. (l1441#. (l-24I#. ICONFI. IONIOFFI.
To reset FF Extension kevs to the
default initialized value. Dress fFF5L
jl-1441#. 11-241#. (DBSCOlinenumber
that is the same as the kev number on
the nhoneI#.
When using CPC-B software later than
ver. 2.00. the default values for all kevs
on the attendant nositions default to
Pooled Trunk 89 kevs.
71#
[FFl2]. 7#
[FF12], 4#
IFFll], l#
IFF121,53#
Absence Msg
Accountant Code
Alarm
Answer Key
BGM
720#
C-F/AU CaIls
721#
C-F/Busy .NA
722#
C-F/Busy
723#
C-F/CO Line
724#
C-F/NAWGB~~.~~
Qm
79#
DkCtCdlpfckup
70#
Group call pllckup
Ol-64#
CO Lines
73#
DND
[PROGI, lo-69#
2 dQgi~~ensions
IPROGI, lOO-699#
3 dglt F57di&ions
(FF121,51#
Headset
1FF121,8#
Intercom Key
lFF121,50#
Internal Dial Tone
89#
Stop LCR
77#
.
Meet Me Answer
[FFl lj,[FF12]#
Mute
”
IFF121,52#
Night Mode
IFF121,00-07#
Page
75#
Park Hold
81-86,89#
MC0 Access
[FFll]. 2#
Release
74#
-onLockcnlt
[AUTOI. 00-89#
SSD Key
IAUTOI, 90-99#
PSD Key
IFFlll, 3#
Talk Back
78#
UNA Pickup
IPROGI,[FRGGI,xzawcx -Y Key
[AuToI, [REDIAL]
Auto Redial to Ext.
81-86,
89
MuIUpleIzop (United
to3pereKtfnsi~
12
per attendan m-2
138
(-
i
section
400 FFS
Issue 3 July 1093
DBS Promming
Inst~ctio~u
CPC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
‘lhedef&knumbenngschemeonextension
FFke@AayedoutstarUngfmmbottoml&
andendingattopright.AUFFkeys
default
to LCR/MCO keys.
Only the first 24 FF keys will light for
CO lines that are assigned to them, the
remaining keys on anyextensionhaving
thatmanyFFkeyswillnotlightifCOhne
assignments have been given to them.
Sincethe~and#keysonthedialpadare
used for entering data, when the use of
these symbols are required for feature
codes, (FFll] provides the 0 and (FF12)
provides the #. When entering these
symbols by using the FF keys, the
display will not indicate that any data
was entered.
To program several telephones with the
same key layout, see [FF9] progmmming.
Each flexfble feature key on the DSS
console can be programmed with a code
so that pressing it will perform the
functionassodaWwiththecodeassigned
tothekey.
To set DSS console 1, FF key number
25. to be a BGM key, for example, enter:
lFF51, 145w, 251, [FF12].53#
TosetDSSconsole 2, FFkeynumber44,
to be a call forwarded all call key, for
example, enter:
@'F5],148#,44#,720#
To reset DSS Console 1 & 2 kevs to the
default initialized val e. Dress fFF51,
J145-148w fl-721#. YDBS extension
number~#. DSS Consoles 3 814 have no
default values set,
To reset the DSS Console kevs to an
unassigned
value. Dress fFF51,
J145-1481#. fl-144N.
ICONM. IONI
OFFI.
139
Section 400 FFS
luue SJuly1993
WC-A
DBSRo~rammin~Instructio~
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
KEYQDE-
71#
[FFlZ],
[FF121,
[FFll].
[FF12],
720#
721#
722#
723#
7248
7#
4#
l#
53#
Absence
Msg
Accountant
Code
Alarm
Answer
Key
BGM
C-F/Au
calls
C-F/BusyNA
C-F/Busy
C-F/CO
Line
C-F/NA(c~~~versoo
@=aerer)
IAUTOI, [=Dml
Direct Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup
CO Lines
DND
2 d&it E7clxnsions
3 dlgtt I3dm!3ions
Headset
Intercom
Key
Internal
Dial Tone
Stop LCR
Meet Me An&er
Mute
Night Mode
Page
Park Hold
MC0 Access
Release
ExiznstonLcchut
SSD Key
PSD Key
Talk Back
UNA Pickup
AnyAuto Redial to Ext.
81-86,
Multiplex
79#
70#
Ol-64#
73#
[PROG], lo-69#
[PROG], lOO-699#
[FF12], 51#
[FF12), 8#
[FF121. 50#
89#
77#
[FFl l],[FF12]#
[FF12], 52#
[FF12]. 00-07#
75#
81-86,89#
[FFll].
2#
74#
IAUTOl, 00-89#
[AUTO], 90-99#
[FFl 11, 3#
78#
IPROGI. I~oGl*
~
89
(limited to 3 per
extension, 12 per
ElttfBldaIl~
140
K==Brer
The default numbering scheme on
extension FF keys is layed out starting
from bottom left and ending at top right.
All FF keys default to LCR/MCO keys.
Only the first 24 FFkeyswilllight for CO
lines that are assigned to them, the
remaining
keys on any extension
having that many FF keys will not light
ifC0 line assignments have been given
to them.
Sincethe~and#keysonthedialpadare
used for entering data, when the use of
these symbols- are required for feature
codes, (FFll] provides the * and [FFl2]
provides the #. YWhen entering these
symbolsbyusingtheFFkeys,thedisplay
will not indicate that any data was
entered.
To program several telephones with the
same key layout. see (FF9Jprogramming.
DBS F’ro@amxdng
WC-A
/ 3.0 CPGB
Instructiona
Section
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Eachflextblefeature keyontheAttendant
console can be pmgmnmed with a code
so that pressing itwill perform the function
assodatedwitbtbecodeassi$ledtothekey.
Tosetatt@antcmsole
1,FFkqynumber
25, to be a BGM key, far example, enter
(P'Irg], 145#,25#,
pFl2],
53W
batte
71#
[FF12],
[FF12],
[FFll].
[FF12],
720#
721W
722#
723#
724#
i
:
79#
70#
Ol-64#
73#
[PROG], lo-69#
[PROG]. lOO-699#
[FF12], 51#
(FF121. 8#
[FF12], 50#
89#
77#
[FFl l],[FF12]#
[FF12]. 52#
IFF121. 00-07#
75#
8 1-86,89#
(FFlll. 2#
74#
[AUTO], 00-89#
[AUTO], 90-99#
[FFll]. 3#
78#
m-4.
mm*
FFS
1993
Absence Msg
Accountant Code
Alarm
Answer Key
BGM
C-F/AU CalIs
C-F/BusyJW
C-F/Busy
C-F/CO Line
C-F/NA
7#
4#
l#
53#
(CPGB
When usin#
softwa.re Ihe DSS Console kevs default
as indicated in the am endix following
this section
To reset the Attendant Console keys to
m unassigned value. mess IFF5L
1149-152)#. (l-144)#. lCONF1. ION/
OFF1.
400
SJ*
w
2.00
or a-)
DirectCanPlckup
GroupCaIlPichp
CO Lines
DND
2 d.ig¶tl9cknsiorls
~3 digtt Rctensions
Headset
Intercom Key
Internal Dial Tone
Stop LCR
Meet Me Answer
Mute
Night Mode
Page
Park Hold
MC0 Access
Release
ExtensionLockout
SSD Key
PSD Key
Talk Back
UNA Pickup
Jmmxx *Key
[AUTO] t IREDIAL]
81-86. 89
Auto Redial to Ext.
Multiple Loop
(limited to 3 per
extension, 12 per
attendant)(cpc-B VQ
2.00
or -1
141
section
400 ma
I~sue3 July1993
The default numbering
scheme on
attendant console FF keys is layed out
starting from bottom left and ending at
top right. All FF keys default to LCR/
MC0 keys.
Only the Arst 24 FF keys will light for CO
lines that are assigned to them, the
remaining keys on any attendant console having that many FF keys will not
light if CO line assignments have been
given to them.
Since the * and # keys on the dial pad are
used for entering data, when the use of
these symbols are required for feature
codes, [FFl l] provides the * and [FI712]
provides the #. When entering these
symbols by using the FF keys, the display
will not indicate that any data was
entered.
To program several telephones with the
same key layout, see [FF9] progmmming.
142
CF’GA
DBSRo#ammin~Instructions
/ 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
CPGA/
3.0 CPGB
DBS Pro@-ammh~
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Instruction
section
400 Flw
Isaue3Juiy1993
143
section
400
Issue 3 July
,
FM
1993
WC-A
DBS Programming
Instructions
/ 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
c
3-6NAMEANDlUESSlGE
PRrnRAMS~Gs
Names of up to 10 characters can be
assigned to each extension number. This
name appears on the second line of a
telephone with a display, and on the top
line of a display extension that is calling.
,.
To assign a name to extension port 40,
with the characters RICH M.. for example,
enter:
ml,
iw, 40#, C0NPW. (see am-~
following this sectim)#
,.
To assign a name to extension port 1, with
the characters Operator. for example,
enter:
Names of up to 16 characters can be
assignedtoSystemSpeedDialnumbersOO89. The namesaredisplayedalphabeticauy
on large screen ICD telephones to provide
comlnnation of the name of the person
being cakd when using a SSD code.
Toassignthename”Panasonic”tosystem
speed dial number 05. for example, enter:
(ITS), 2#, 05#, (see appendix following
this s+ion)#
To reset the names of s&em sneed dial
numbers to the default initialized values,
press IFF21..2#. 00-691#. ICONFl. ION/
OF-n.
[FF6], l#, IS. [CONFIn, (see appendix
folbwing this sectim)#
To reset &ension names to the default
iniuauzed
val e. DIZSS rmw. l#. fl-144
jCONFl#. fONU/OFFI.
If the “Attendant
Feature Package”
sotiisbeingused.theDSSConsole
mustbejn&3llysetastypellin[Fl?3],2#to
enaIdethelqsfo--es.
SeeIhe appendix following this section for
key designations on the DSS Console
which is used to store characters for
extension names. IfaDSS is not available
seesectfon700,intheopgatingInstructions
Manual under UAttendant Telephone
Features” for alternate instructions
on how to store characters.
144
.:W$
~~~
If the “Attendant Feature Package”
sofhvare is being used, the DSS Console
mustbein.iUallysetastype llin(FF3]2#,
to enable the keys for programming
capabilities. See the appendix following
this section for key designationson the DSS
Consolewhichisusedto store characters
for system speed dial numbers. If a
DSS is not available, see section 700,
in the Operating Instructions Manual,
under “AttendantTelephone Features”
for alternate instructions
on how to
store characters.
DBS Pro@8mxd.n~
WC-A / 3.0 CPGB
section 400 FF6
Instn~ctions
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Issge 3 July
Names of up to 16 characters can be
assigned to PersonalSpeed Dialnumbers
90-99. The names are displayed alphabetically on large screen LCD telephones
to provide con3rmation of the name of the
person being called when using a PSD
code.
.
To assign the name “Bill” to personal
speed dial number 90, on prt 21 for
example, enter:
1903
Amessageofupto
15chamdemcanbe
aeatedsothatapemoncalkngfmma
displayphonetoanextensionthatissetwith
anabsencemessage,canbetiomxdofthe
status ofthe extensionwer.
Toassignthemessage”Leavingat3:00”to
absence message 5, for example, enter:
: W61, 4#, 5% [coNelK (see appendix
following this secfiion)#
(see
To assign the message “Don’t Bother Me”
to absence message6, for example, enter:
To reset the names of nersonal sneed dial
numbers to the default initiaked values,
press
rFF61. 3#. (ool-144#.
@o-99)#,
JCONFl. ION/OFFl.
W61,4#, 6% ICOW% b= appendix
m,
3#, 021#,
90#,
[CONFl#,
appendix following this section)#
If the “Attendant
Feature Package”
software is being used, the DSS Console
must be initially set as type 11 [FF3] 2#,
to enable the keys for programming
capabilities.
See the appendix following this section
for key designations to be used to store
chara~forpemonalspeeddialnumbers.
IfaDSSisnot availabe, see section 700, in
the Opeding Instructions Manual, under
“AttendantTekphoneFeatures*faaakemate
instruc%nsonhowtostomcham&zs.
following this section)U
To assign the message ‘Call Later’ to
absence message 7, for example. enter:
[eesl, 48, 7#, [CONFj#, (see appendix
following this section)#
To assign the message “Return at 2:OO”to
absence message 8, for example, enter:
lFW, 4#. 8% ICOlW% (see appendix
following this section)#
To assign the message “In Bathroom” to
absence message 9, for example, enter:
ml,
4#, 9#, [CONFlU, (see appendix
following this section)#
SeeTechnotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for
complete information.
145
_
section 400 FF6
IssueBJulylQQB
To reset the absence me-es
default initialized values. press
J5-91#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl.
DBSRogrmnmh~Inrtrrrctioxu
CI'GA / 3.0, CFGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
to the
IF’FU. 4#,
Central office Iines can be given names of
up to 6 characters to help ident@ the
source of the caII. When an inbound calI
rings at an &ension, the top lfne of the
ED indicates the Iine name.
If the “Attendant Feature Package”
software is being used, the DSS Console
mustbeinitiaIIysetastypellm[FF3]2#,
to enable the keys for programming
capabilities.
To set central o&e line 3 to “support!‘. for
example. enter:
See the appendix folIowing this section
for key designations to be used to store
characters
for absence messages.
, To reset central omce Ihe names to the
defauItinitiaI&dvaI
e . press IFF61.5#,
fl-641#. ICONFM. ,0uN/&.
BW,
SK 3% KONW,
folhwing
be
appendix
this section)#
A DSS Console must be used to set
absence messages.
If the “Attendant
Feature Package”
software is being used; the DSS Console
mustbemMaIIysetastype11in[FFB]2#,
to enable the keys for programming
capabilities.
See the appendix following this section
for key designations to be used to store
characters for central of&e line names.
If a DSS is not available, see section 700,
under “Attendant Telephone Features”
for alternate instructions on how to store
characters.
See Technotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for
complete information..
146
f-
DBS Pro@ammin~
h~tructions
CPGA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0
2%ction
/ 4.0
Hunt grouppilot numbers can be given a
name of up to 11 characters to help
identify the source of an inbound centraI
office line call_-to the hunt group pilot
name.
To set a hunt group pilot name for hunt
group 1 to “support”, for wple,
enter:
lees], 6#, l#, [CONFlU, (see appendix
following
this section)#
To reset hunt E~OUD Dilot names to the
default initialized values. Dress IFI?
6#. ll-8l#. ICONF]#. ION/OFFI,
400 FF6
bme3JdylSQ3
When a busy party receives an indication of an incoming intercom call, the
busy party can respond by sending a
text message back to the caller.
.In this parameter,
“p’
represents a
15character text message.
The text message can be sent after a
call waiting tone, a call waiting tone
followed by a text message, or an
oflhook voice announce.
The following table shows the default
text associated with messages 1 to 5.
These messages can be changed
using an attendant phone or a DSS/
72.
If the “Attendant Feature Package?
software is being used, the DSS Console
mustbeinit&IIysetastype11i.nFF3)2#.
to enable the keys for programming
capabilities.
See the appendix following this section
for key designations to be used to store
characters for hunt group pilot names.
If a DSS is not available, see section 700.
under “Attendant Telephone Features”
for alternate instructions on how to store
characters.
I
2
I Please Hold
I
I
3
I Will Call Back
I
ITransfer
I
IUnavailable
I
4
5
SeeTechnotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for
complete information.
147
section 400 FF6
Issue
3 July
1993
WC-A
DBS Rogramming
I~tmctions
/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
\
\
\
148
DBS Ro@axnmin~
CPGA/
hstructions
3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0
se!ction
Iasue3
400 FF7
July1993
I
S-7 TOLL RESTRICTION
PROGRAM SETTINGS
CENTRAL OFFICE
(0fxi?fview)
LINE TOLL RESTRICTION
There are 7 types of toll-restriction that can be used to curtail dialing of certain types
of calls on a central office line. Toll restriction is effective on a line by hne basis per
extension, for the DBS day and night operation modes. The following is a brief
description of each type.
-.
Type 0: Full restriction of outbound dialing and inbound calls on a central of&e line
Calls can be answered on a type 0 line when the line is assigned to ring on the restricted
extension..
Tppe 1: Full restriction of outbound dialing on a central off&x line. Inbound ringing
central office lines to all telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 1
toll restricted telephone.
me 2: Partial restriction of outbound dialing on a central office line. 3 digit dialing
of 211-911 numbers is restricted according to the program option [FM], l#, (4-l 1).
Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program
option [FFl]. 2#, l#, 4#. Up to fif@ 7 digit numbers that are preset in program option : .,’
[FF7], 6#. are restricted (depending on the setting in [FF7]. l#;. -12#).:Operator. calls
are restricted. International calls are restricted. Toil free dialing is allowed. Inter-digit
timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing central office lines to all telephones can be
answered and/or transferred by a type 2 toll restricted telephone.
me 3: Full restriction (in default condition) of all access to any area or office code.
Options to allow outbound dialing to selected area codes [FF7], 2#, 3#, and selected
of&e codes [FF7], 3#, 3# to ease full restriction. 3 digit dialing of2 1 l-9 11 numbers
is restricted according to the program option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of
system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFl], 2#,
l#, 4#. Outbound dialing of up to fifty preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM],
6#, is restricted (depending on the setting in (FM], l#, 13#). Four specially selected
area codes [FF7]. 4#, (l -4)# will restrict the first 6 digits, by tying each of these special
area codes to a special ofhce code table [FF7], 5#, (l-4)#, 000-999# of restrictions.
International calls are restricted according to program option [FF7]. l#, l#. Operator calls
are restricted. Toll fkee dialing is allowed. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound
ringing central ofEke lines to all telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type
3 toll restricted telephone.
me 4: No restriction (in default condition) of all office code dialing. Full restriction
(in default condition) of all area code dialing. Options to allow outbound dialing to
selected area codes [FIV], 2#, 4#. and selected of&e codes [FM], 3#, 4# to alter default
149
section 400 FF7
Isaue3Jdy1993
DBS PrognmminqInat~~tio~~
CPGA3.0, WC-B / 2.0/.3.0 / 4.0
restrictions. 3 digit diaIing of 2 1 l-9 11 numbers is restricted according to the program
option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted
according to the program option [FFlJ, 2#, l#, 4#. Outbound dialing of up to fifty
preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM]. 6#, is restricted (depending on the
setting in [FF7], l#, 14#). Four specialIy selected area codes (FF7], 4#, (l-4)# will
restrict the first 6 digits. by tying each of these special area codes to a special of&e
code table [FF7], 5#. (1-4)#, 000-999# ofrestrictions. International caI.Isare restricted
according to program option [FM], 1#. l#. Operator caIIs are restricted. Inter-digit
timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing centraI office lines to aI.I telephones can be
answered and/or transferred by a type 4 toII restricted telephone.
Type 5: No restriction (in default condition) of aII area code diaIing. No restriction (in
defauh condition) of alI office code diahng. Options to restrict outbound dialing to
selected area codes (FF7],2#, 5#, and selected office codes [FF7], 3#, 5# to alter default
restrictions. 3 digit dialing of 2 1 l-9 11 numbers is restricted according to the program
option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted
according to the program option [FFl], 2#, l#. 4#. Outbound diaIing of up to fifty
preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM], 6#, is restricted (depending on the
setting in [FF7], l#, 15#). Four specially selected area codes [FM], 4#, (l-4)# wiII
restrict the tirst 6 digits, by tying each of these special area codes to a special of&e
code table [FF7], 5#, (1-4)#, 000-999# of restrictions. International calls are restricted
according to program option [FM], 1#, l#. Operator caUs are restricted. Inter-digit
timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing central office Iines to alI telephones can be
answered and/or transferred by a type 5 toll restricted telephone.
t’ .
c
Type 6: No restriction (in default condition) of dialing to any area or of&e code.
Options to restrict outbound diaIing to selected area codes [FM], 2#, 6##;and selected
ofIke codes [FM], 3#, 6#. 3 digit diaI.ing of 2 11-911 numbers is restricted according
to the program option [FM], l#, (4-l 1). Outbound diaI.ing of system speed dial
numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFl], 2#, l#, 4#. Outbound
dialing of up to Wty preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FF7], 6#, is restricted
(depending on the setting in [FM], l#, 16#). Four speciaIIy selected area codes (FIV),
4#, (1-4)# wiII restrict the first 6 digits, by tying each of these special area codes to a
special office code table [FM], 5#. (1-4)#, OOO-999# of restrictions. International caI.Is
are restricted according to program option [FM], l#, l#. Operator calls are restricted.
ToII free dialing is allowed. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing
cent& office lines to a.II telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 6
toII restricted telephone.
Type 7: No restrictions
configuratlon.
to outbound dialing on ah central office Iines in the defaulted
For ToII Restriction types 3 through 6 operator calIs are allowed in default if FMl#- l# is set to l#. The Of&e code tables are used to restrict aII 0 plus diaIi.ng,
the next two digits wiII also be anahzed.
150
i
DBS Pro@ammhqf
CPGA/
3.O,CPC-B
hdructiona
3tction4oom7
Inllt-3JutylQQ3
/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
The dialing of international calls can be
allowed or denied on all central office
lines set with a toll restriction classes of
3-6.
When a new outbound call is being
placed on a central of&e line (with class
of service 3 through 6). immediately
after a call has been received on that
line, this option enables toll rest&ion,
To restrict dialing of international
calls
for central office lines set with a toll
restriction classes of 3 through 6, for
example, enter:
To restrict
additional
outbound
restriction
the use of the flash key and
digits dialed, to make an
call on a line set for a toll
class of 3 through 6, enter:
_
(FF71,1#,26,0#
To enable dialing of international calls
for central office lines set with a toll
restriction classes of 3 through 6. for
example, enter:
To allow the use of a flash key to make
a new outbound call on a line set for a
toll restriction class. of 3 through 6,
enter:
jFF7l.l#.2#.
l#
This progmm option is tied to the System
installation of&e code address [FFl], 2#,
l#, 18#.
If international calls are allowed,
011
should be allowed in types 3 through 6
offlce code tables.
151
DBSRo@amming Instxuctio~
section 400 FF7
lrsue3July1993
CFCA3.0,CPGB
/ 2.0 /S.O / 4.0
The m-urn
number of digits that
can be dialed on central offke lines set
with a toll restriction class of 3-6 can be
limited to 15 to 29 digits, or can be
unlimited.
Special three digit numbers (2 1 l-9 11)
can be restricted from being dialed on
central ofke lines set for toll restriction
class types 2-6.
;I
I l# I
I
15 Digits
~s#:D~tglts
7#
21Dlgits
86
22.Digits
I
23 Digits
1 14# 1
28 Digits
I 9#
:‘
151
”
I
I
211
I”
Is.1
1
la
911
I
., 29 D&its
JJo L&&
To allow 411 to be dialed on a central
ofilce line having a toll restriction class
of 2 through 6, for example, enter:
JFml.
18.7#.0#
To restrict 911 fkom being dialed on a
central o&e line having a toll restriction
class of 2 through 6, for example, enter:
2 1 l-9 11 are allowed in default.
152
DBS FVo@mmh.
Jndructions
section
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Seven digit toll restriction allows or
denies the dialing of a certain 7 digit
number when a toll restriction type 2
through 6 is set. Reference is made to
[FF7], 6#. That address is for special 7
digit numbers. If there are any entries
set in [FFV];-6#, these entries will be
reviewed before the call continues to be
processed.
( \
400 FF7
Insue 3 July 1983
Areacode dialing restrictions on central
oflice lines set for toll restriction types
3-6 are set in this program option.
Telephone users that access a central
ofllce line set to one of these classes of
service, will be allowed or denied access
to a specific area code; -according to the
setting in this option.
To disable the 7 digit table for type 2 toll
restriction, enter:
To allow dialing to area code 404 on a
central office line set with a toll restriction
class of service of 3, for example, enter:
~,1#12#,0#
lr(le7l,2#,3#,404#,0#
To enable 7 digit toll restriction
type 3, enter:
”
:’
pF7l.l#
for
To allow dialing to area code 406 on a
centralo~celinesetwitha~~restriction
class of service of 4, for example, enter:
13#.1#
(FFTj. l#, (12-16)# the 12-16 refers to types 2
through 6 toll restriction.
7 digit toll restriction when enabled will
look at the last seven digits dialed, area
codes which are allowed may be denied
telephone
access
to
specific
numbers such as WX 555- 12 12.
To restrict dialing to area code 212 on a
central of&e line set with a toll restriction
class of service of 5. for example, enter:
Iee7],2#,5#,212#,1#
To restrict dialing to area code 506 on a
central of&e line set with a toll restriction
class of service of 6, for example, enter:
[FF71,2#,6#,508#,1#
153
&?ction 400 FF7
I.asut3Jtdy1993
To reset area code toll restricllons for
central office lines set as classes 3 and
4 to the default initialized value. Dress
jFF71,2#. I3 or 4)#. KKIO-999)#. l#. ION/
OFFl.
To reset area code toll restrictions for
central of&e lines set as classes 5 and
6 to the default initialized val e. press
JFF71.2#. (5 or 61#. 1000-9991#k. ION/
OFFI.
DBS~IMXUCtiOM
CPC-A 3.0. CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Oflke code dialing restrictions on central
oflice lines set for toll restriction types 36aresetinthisprogramoption.‘Ikkphone
LlsasthatacJcEss acentmlofEcehnesetto
oneoftheseclassesofsewi~willbeabwed
or denied accesstoaspecffko&ecode,
accordingtotheseUinginthisoption.
To allow dialing to o&e code 663 on a
centralofkeline setwithatollrestriction
class of sewice of 3. for example. enter:
Iee7],3%,3#,663#,0#
This address is tied to the system
installation area code address. (FFl],
2#, l#, 18#.
;
f
To restrict dialing to of&e axle 346 on a
centraloBkeline setwithatollrestriction
class of sewice of 4, for example. enter:
Iee7],3#,4#,346#,
l#
To restrict dialing to o&e code 261 on a
1central of&e line set with a toll restriction
class of sewice of 5, for example, enter:
154
DB3Pro@ammingInstructio~
CPGA/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To restrict dialing to of&e code 588 on a
central of&e line set with a toll restriction
class of service of 6, for example, enter:
.-.
m,
3#, 6#, 588%. l#
To reset ofike code toll restrictions for
central of&e lines set as classes 3 to the
default initialized value. press IFF71.
3#. 3M. @OO-999)#. l#. ION/OFFL
To reset of&e code toll restrictions for
central ofhce lines s t as classes 4. 5
and 6 to the defaulteinitialized values
press lFF71. 3#. (4. 5 or 61#. fOOO9991#.0#. ION/OFFl.
Four area codes can be tied to four special
oflice code tables to allow or restrict a
broad range of o&e codes on central
of&e lines set with tollAriction
classes
of service 3 through 6’ Typically, area
codes such as 900 are selected as special area codes.
For example, to select area code 900 as
the first “special area code” enter:
To select area code 808 as the second
“special area code”, enter:
plq.
ThisaddressistiedtolheSystcminstallation
area code address pl], 2#, l#, 18#.
1#,900#
m,41y,
4#, 26,808#
To select area code 408 as the third
“special area code” enter:
pFq,
4#, 3#, 408W
To select area code 600 as the fourth
“special area code” enter:
[FF71,4#,
4#,600#
To reset anv of the four special area
codes to the default initialized value,
p ess IFF7). 4#. tl-4M. lCONF1. ION/
OkF, .
lb8
&ction 400 FF7
Iuuc3July1833
DBs~gmnmingInstmctions
CFGA3.0, CPGB / 2.0/.3.0 / 4.0
Four special of&e code tables are tied
to four special area codes to allow or
restrict a broad range of office codes for
each special area code, on central office
lines set with toll restriction classes of
service 3-6.
To select of&e code 976 as an office
code to be restricted with the third
“special area code”. on a central office
line set for toll restriction class 3 through
6, for example. enter:
Iee7], SW, 3W, 9761y, l#
Typically, office codes such as 976.555
or other *pay for call” line sexvices are
selected as special o&e codes.
To select of&e code 976 as an oflice code
to be restricted with the first “special area
code”, on a central of&x line set for toll
resMction class 3 through 6, for example,
enter:
.5#.
lIy.9768.
l#
To select oflIce code 555 as an allowed
office code to work with the second
“special area code”, on a central office
line set for toll restriction class 3 through
6, for example, enter:
[FF71,5#, 2#, 555#, O#
To select of&e code 444 as an of&e code
tobe allowedwiththefourth”specialarea
code”, on a central ofWe line set for toll
restriction class 3 through 6, for example,
enter
t(FF71,5#, 4#, 4448, on
To reset mecial office code 1 & 2 toll
restrictions for central oflke lines set as
classes 3-6 to, the default initialized
value. Dress lFF71. 5#. I1 or 2M. fOOO999M. l#. lON/OFFl.
To reset soecial office cod 3 & 4 toll
restrictions for central officz lines set as
classes 3-6 to the default initialized
value. Dress lFF71. 5#. (3 or 4)#. KM30999M. O#. ION/OFFl.
Special office code tables 1 and 2 are
restricted as default values, special
ofike code tables 3 and 4 are allowed as
default vaules.
Default values can be changed globally
in FM 9#, 13- 16#.
156
DBS Pro@ammh~
CPGA/
h~truction8
section 400 FF7
Issue3JuIy1803
3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Up to 50 preset 7 digit numbers can be
restricted from being dialed behind all
area codes on central of&e lines set for
toll restriction types 2 through 6. The
identifkation of these numbers are set
in this program option. [FM], l#, (1216)#, determines whether the seven digit
number that is dialed is reviewed by
this address.
There are 7 types of toll restriction that
can be used to curtail dialing of certain
types of calls on a central office line.
when the DBS is in the day setting. Toll
restriction is effective on a line by line
basis, per extension. See the overview
at the beginning of this programming
section for a review of each type of toll
restriction.
Toassign5551212asthef%tof50preset
numberstoberestxictedfiombeingdtaled
onacentral office line set for toll restriction
class 2 (assuming [FF7], l#, 12# is set
witi l#), for example. enter:
To set toll restriction on extension port
60 (when the DBS is in the day setting)
for central office line 10 to type 3. for .
:; :
example, enter:
[FF7),6#,1#,5551212#
-
To assign 976- 12 12 as the second of 50
preset nuxnbers to be restricted from
being dialed on a central office line set
for toll restriction class 3 (assuming
[FF7), l#, 13# is setwith l#). forexample,
enter:
m,6#,
2W.97612128
To reset anv of the 50 nreset restricted
7 digit numbers to the default initialized
value. Dress lFF71.6#. (l-50)#. ICONFl,
JON/OFFl.
To set toll restriction on extension port
22 (when the DBS is in the day setting)
for central office line 5 to type 7, for
example, enter:
_
Iep71,7#,22#,5#,7#
To reset central office toll restriction on
am line on anv extension (when the
DBS is in the dav setting). to the default
initialized value. Dress iFF71. 7#. fl144)#. (l-64)#. 7#, lON/OFFk
157
section 400 FF7
Issue3July1993
This option provides the ability to take
a single toll restriction class of service
and apply it to all lines that appear on
a specific extension, when the DBS is in
the day setting. There are 7 types of toll
restriction that can be used to curtail
dialing of certain types of calls on a
central office line. Seetheovemiewatthe
nofsection3-7forareviewofeach
type of toll mstriction.
To set all lines that appear on extension
port 14, when the DBS is in the day
setting, to central of&e toll restrictfon
class 4, for example, enter:
IIfIF71,7#, 14#,65#,4#
To reset the toll restriction on anv
extension when the DBS is in the dav
setting. to the default initialized value,
press lFF41.7#. (l-1441#. 65#. 7#. ION/
OFFl.
DB3Frogrammin~~~~ons
CPGA3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
There are 7 types of toll restricUon that
can be used to mrtail dialing of certain
types of calls on a central office lihe,
when the DBS is in the night setting.
Toll restriction is effective on a line by
line basis, per extension. Seethe overview
at the beginning of section 3-7 for a review
of each type of toll restriction.
To set toll resUicUon on extension port
50, central of&e line 11 (when the DBS
is in the night setting) to type 3, for
example, enter:
m7l,8#,50#,11#,3#
To set toll restriction on extension port
6, central of&e line 15 (when the DBS
is in the night setting) to type 7, for
example, enter:
IFF7),8U,6#,15#,7#
To reset central of&e toll restriction on
anvline on anvextensionwhen the DBS
is in the night setting. to the default
initialized value. Dress lFF71. 8#. (l144M. IL-64M. 7#. ION/OFFl.
The program option outlined above
has an address specifically for CPC-B
software versions. To perform the same
task with WC-A software, the address is:
[FM], 7#, (l-72)#. 33#, (0-7)#.
158
/-
section 400 FF7
Issue3July1993
DBSPro@ammh&jInstructio~
CFCA/
3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0
c
\
This option provides the ability to take
a single toll restriction class of service
and apply it to all lines that appear on
a specific extension, when the DBS is in
the night setting. There are 7 types of toll
restriction that. can be -used to curtail
diali.ngofcertaintypesofcallsonacentral
office line. See the overview at the
beginning of section 3-7 for a review of
each type of toll restriction.
To allow or restrict all area codes of each
area code table of each toll restriction
class of service to the same setting, this
program option must be used.
To set aJl lines that appear on extension
port 31, when the DBS is in the night
setting, to central oflice toll restxiction
class 5. for example, enter:
To restrict dialing to all area codes in
the table that controls central office line
toll restriction class 3, enter:
To allow dialing to all area codes in the
table that controls central office line toll
restriction class 3, enter:
[Irp'/l,9#,16,0#
Iee7],9#,1#,1#
IFF7],8#,31#,65#,5#
ToresetthetollrestHctiononanve~tension
whentheDBSisintheniQhtsetUng.tothe
default initialized value. DIFSS f’FF41.8#. (I144]#. 65#. 7#. ION/OFFl.
To allow dialing to all area codes in the
table that controls central office line toll
restriction class 4, enter:
To restrict dialing to all area codes in
the table that controls central ofhce line
toll restriction class 4, enter:
The program option outlined above
has an address specifically for CPC-B
software versions. To perform the
same task with CPC-A software, the
address is: [FF7], 8#. (l-72)++. 33#. (O-
7)#.
To allow dialing to all area codes in the
table that controls central office line toll
restriction class 5, enter:
159
Section
400 FF7
laaue3July1993
DB!3Progfaxmhg~~tio1~
CPGA3.0.
CPC-B / 2.0 /.3.0
/ 4.0
f
To restrict dialing to all area codes in
the table that controls central office line
toll restriction class 5, enter:
To allow dialing to all area codes in the
table that controls central office line toll
restriction class 6, enter:
To allow or restrict all o&e codes of each
of&e code table of each toll restriction
class of sewice to the same setting, this
program option must be used.
To allow dialing to all of&e codes in the
table that controls central of&e line toll
restriction class 3, enter:
[p’esrl, 9#, 5#, O#
To r&&& dialing to all area codes in
the table that controls central ofike line
toll restriction class 6. enter:
To restrict dialing to all of&e codes in
the table that controls central office line
toll restriction class 3. enter:
f
Ir(le71,9#,5#,1#
IFe7].9#,4#,
l#
.
_. ,
Toresetthe~ohalareacodetollrekicUons
forcentraloEkeIinessetasclasses3and4
to the defkult inWaked value. press iFF’?‘l.
9#. (1 or 21#. l#. ION/OFFS.
To reset the piobal area codetoll restrictions
forcentralofflixhwssetas&sses5and6
.
to the defkult initiahzed value. DRSS m
9#. 13or 41#.O#. ION/OFFI.
To allow dialing to all of&e codes in the
table that controls central 0Bice line toll
restriction class 4, enter:
To restrict dialing to all of&e codes in
the table that controls central office line
toll restriction class 4, enter:
(pIIr7.91y.66,
ThisprogmmoptionistiedtotheSystem
inst.&Won area code address, (FFl]. 2#. l#,
18#.
FIT 9#,(1-4)# the l-4 represents types 3-6.
160
l#
To allow dialing to all office codes in the
table that controls central o&e line toll
restriction class 5, enter:
DBS Pro@.ammhg
CPGA/
section 400 FF7
Issue3July19fl3
Insbuctio~
9.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To restrict dialing to all office codes in
the table that controls central office line
toll restriction class 5, enter:
[FF71,9#,7#,
Toalloworrestrictallareaandofhcecodes
of each toll restriction class of service to
the same setting, this program option
must be used.
1Q
To allow dialing to all office codes in the
table that controls central office line toll
restriction class 6, enter:
To allow dialing to all area and office
codes in the tables that control central
office line toll restriction class 3, enter:
[FF71,9#,8#,0#
To restrict dialing to all o&e codes in
the table that controls central office line
toll restriction class 6, enter:
To restrict dialing to all area and office
codes in the tables that control central
of&e line toll restriction class 3, enter: --. ; :‘
rF-e71,9#*9#*
To reset the global office code toll
restrictions for central office lines set
as tvne 3 to the default initialized
value. Dress IFF71. 9#. (5 or 6M. I#,
]ON/OFFl.
To reset the global office code toll
restrictions for central office lines set
as classes 4. 5 and 6 to the default
initialized value. Dress IFF71.9#. 17or
$I#. O#. fON/OFFl.
This pro@m option is tied to the System
instakUonareacodeaildress, FF1],2#, l#.
18#.
l#
To allow dialing to all area and office
codes in the tables that controls central
office line toll restriction class 4. enter:
wF7l,S#,
lO#,O#
To restrict dialing to all area and office
codes in the tables that control central
office line toll restriction class 4, enter:
~,9#,10#,
1w
To allow dialing to all area and oEice
codes in the tables that control central
of&e line toll restriction class 5, enter:
161
section 400 FP7
DB3 Ro@am&q
I.ustructio~
CPGA 3.0, CF’GB / 2.0 /.B.O / 4.0
Issue3July1993
To restrict dialing to all area and of&e
codes in the tables that control central
of&e line toll restriction class 5, enter:
Fourspedalof3cecodetablesthataretied
to four special area codes can be globally
set to allow or restrict all of&e codes for
each special area code, on central of&e
lines set with toll restriction classes of
service 3-6.
To allow dialing to all area and office
codes in the tables that control central
office line toll restriction class 6. enter:
To restrict all special office codes for the
first “special area code” , enter:
leP7],9#,12#,
[FF71,9#,13#,
ow
To restrict dialing to all area and of&e
codes in the tables that control central
office line toll restriction class 6. enter:
l#
To allow all special office codes for the
second “special area code” , enter:
pw7],9#,12#,1#
To reset the alobal area and of&e code
toll restrictions for central ofIke lines
set as classes 3 to the default initialized
value. Dress IFF71. 9#. 9#. l#. ION/
OFFl. Tide 4 can not be returned to
default values usin@ this Drogram.
To reset the mobal area and office code
toll restrictions for central office lines
set as classes 5 and 6 to the default
initialized value. Dress lFF7l. 9#. (11 or
12)#. O#. ION/OFFi.
‘Ihis program option is tied to the System
installation area code program option,
[FFl],
2#, l#, 18#.
F’F7 9#. (9-12) represents types 3-6.
162
To restrict all special of&e codes for the
third “special area code” , enter:
rFF7L 9#,15#,1#
To allow all special office codes for the
fourth “special area code” , enter:
To reset all of&e codestied to swxial ama
codes 1 & 2 for central of&e lines set as
classes 3-6 to the default i.nitialized value,
press lFF71.9#. (13or 141#.l#. lON/OFFl.
To reset all of&e codestied to special area
codes 3 & 4 for central of&e lines set as
classes 3-6 to the default initialized value,
press IFIV1.9#. (15or 16)#. O#. lON/OFFl.
section400FF7
DBS Pro@=amming
lnatructtonr
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
FF7 9#, (13- 16) represents
office code tables 1-4.
Default
values
for special
Special
Special
Special
Special
office
oflice
office
office
code
code
code
code
Imue3July1999
special
office code tables
table
table
table
table
1
2
3
4
All Denied
AU Denied
All Allowed
AllAllowed
163
Sect.ion400 FFS
DBS Rogmmmin~ Instruction
July 1093
bsue3
WC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 /.3.0
/ 4.0
LEAST COST ROUTING
t-d
Least cost routing is designed to route calls on central o&e lines that are supplied
by speciffc carriers. By identifying a certain group of these lines along with a specific
cost to place outbound calls on them during certain time periods of the day. a cost
savings will accrue. Additionally, non dialed digits can be added or deleted from the
prefI.x of the dialed string by the DBS.
Call processing flow
To determine how to route a specific number. this DBS program group uses 10 tables,
each containing 1000 numbers. All tables are set up in the same manner. The tables
are defined as Area Code, Office Code, 4 Special Area Code, and 4 Special Office Code
tables. Each block in the table has an “z& block connected to it. This xx area is used
to store the route table number (l- 15) that it’s pre& is to use. The pre& is a defined
3 digit area or o&e code, or 3 digit special office or area code numbers. An example
of an LCR table is shown below.
LCR Table
The Special Area and Special OfRce code tables are designed for 6 digit LCR dialing
analysis. The Office code table is used for all 7 digit dialing. One plus 7 digit dialing
lxx
001
xx
004
xx
011
xx
012
xx
014
zuc 015
ZM 016
020 lxx
#
021
xx
022
xx
024
xx
025
xx
026
0281 xx
etc. ~etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc. etc. etc.
=tt
xx 19611 xx
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
962
xx
964
xx
965
xx
966 .xx
xx
974
xx
975
xx
976
xx 19771 xx ,978( xx
xx 1981) xx
984
xx
985
xx
986
xx 19871 xx
19881 xx
xx 1991) xx
994
xx
995
xx
996
xx 1997)
19981 xx
xx
etc.
960
xx I9711
005
xx
006
TF
xx
xx
007
xx
008
xx
xx
017
xx
+108
xx
etc. I etc. I etc.
19671 xx
xx
I etc.
etc. I etc.
‘968)
xx
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
969
989
<
searches the Area code table, or the Special office code tables, when the DBS program
address [FFl], 2#, l#, 18#. is configured with a “1”. When this program address is
improperly set, the LCR may search incorrect tables.
164
DBS Programming
Instructions
WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section400
Issue 3 July
FFS
1993
After a specific number to be dialed has been identified in one of the tables above, the
process proceeds to one of the 15 time priority route tables. If no time priority route
table has been assigned to a specific 3 digit number or segment thereof, the call will
exit LCR routing, and be placed on a pooled group “9” central office line. If all central
office lines have been removed from the “9” pooled group the call will stop being
processed, and the caller will receive a busy tone.
The 15 time priority route tables are used to determine which LCR w
groups
a.rtz
selected, and the priority on which those trunk groups are used. The “lookback”
capability of the DBS provides for multiple searches of the highest priority line groups
before lower priority groups are searched. The highest priority line group is initially
chosen to route the call. If the line is available, the LCR add and-,.LCR delete tables
associated with the central oflice line group are reviewed for additions or deletions to
the dialed digit string. If no lines of the defined group are available. a warning tone is
sent to the caller, a 2 second wait ensues. and the group is searched again. If a line
is still unavailable, the second line group is accessed. This process continues until all
8 line groups in the priority are searched for an available line. In the event that all
prioritized line groups are busy, caller can dial the digit 2. This procedure will enable
a callback and a reservation of the first line in the group. When the DBS recalls the
extension, the caller accessesa line, and the DBS will automatically redial the previously
dialed number.
Time Priority Route Guide Table (0-Z 5)
older versions of software (WC-A, olderthan3.2 1, WC-B, older than 2.11). when LCR
is used behind Centrex, special precautions are needed in the O&e Code table. -To+. ,:,.
eliminate the need to dial a “9” before such numbers as 411. 555,91.1,800. and 0, there
With
weekend
44#
1
45#
1
46W
1
47#
48#
are Oflice Code Table numbers that MUSTlVOTbe assigned to a time priority mute guide
table. These numbers are 94 1,955,980, and 99 1. If OfEke Codes such as 94 1.955.99 1,
and 980 are found in the locale that the DEE is installed in, it is recommended that LCR
should not be used in combination with Centrex, or behind FBX applications. Further
clari&ation of LCR operation maybe found inTechnote 5 (November 1991). and Appnote
165
Section
400 FFS
Issue 3 July 1993
WC-A
When an outbound central o&e line is
accessedto make a call, in a DBS set with
Least Cost Routing, the DBS searches one
of 15 preprogrammed routing tables for
the least expensive central oflIce line,
based on time of day and cost of the hne.
Toll restriction settings for the line are
checked, and the number is then
outpulsed.
DBS Pro@ammhq
Instruction
/ 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To remove 609 from time priority table
four, for example, enter:
Df’F8], l#, 4%. 609#, 08
To reset the LCRArea Code tables to the
default initialized value. Dress IFF78L
l#. (l-15)#. (OOO-999)#. O#. ION/OFFl.
To add 203 to route. using time priority
table 1, for example, enter:
FFS], I#, I#, 2031, l#
To add 5 16 to route, using lime priority
table 2, for example. enter:
[ee8], lW, 2W, 5166, l#
To remove 409 from time priority table
three, for example, enter:
p7F8], lW, 31y.4091,
O#
The time priority route guide table option
found at address: [FFS], 5#. (l-15)#, (l4$3)#,(l-8)#. must be set.
Once a line has been accessed through
LCR, the [FLASH] operation will not
work.
All area code numbers must be pointed
td a specifh time priority table and
enabled
in order
for LCR to
automatically route the call.
When executing changes in this address,
a “1” entry signifies addition to the table,
and a “0” signifies the o&e code is not
part of the table.
I
166
DBSRo~ammingIns~ctions
CFC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
When an outbound central office line is
accessed to make a call, in a DES set with
Least Cost Routing, the DBS searches one
of 15 time priority routing tables for the
least expensive central of&e line, based
on time of day and cost of the line. Toll
restrictionseUingsfortheknearechecked,
and the number is then outpulsed.
To use the fifth time priority route table
for a call made to office code 222, for
example, enter:
fFFS], 2#, 5#, 222#,
!
j
1W
To use the sixth time route table for a call
made to of&e code 546, for example.
enter:
cples], 2W, 66, 5461,
l#
To remove office code 999 from routing
through the seventh time priority table,
for example, enter:
lFF8]*
2w, 7#, 999n,
Section4OOFF8
Issue 3July1993
To remove of&e code 447 from routing
through the eighth time priority table,
for example, enter:
[eesl,
2#, 8#, 447#,
‘o#
To reset the LCR Office Code tables to
the default initialized value. Dress IFF8L
2#. (l-151#. OXKb999)#. O#. lON/OFFI.
The time priority route guide table option ..
found at address: [FF8], 5#, (l-15)#,
(l-48)#, (l-8)#. must be set.
Once a line has been accessed through
LCR the [FLASH] operation will not
work.
All office code numbers must be
pointed to a specific time priority
table and enabled in order for LCR to
automatically route the call.
ow
When executing changes in this address.
a ” 1” entry signifies addition to the table,
and a “0” sigr&es the o&e code is not
part of the table.
167
.
Section 400
Issue 3 Juiy
FF8
1993
Four special area codes, designated as 1
through 4 in the address above, can be
specially chosen for LCR routing. and tied
to four special LCR of&e code tables to
allow a broad range of numbers to be
dialed by the least costly route.
This operation keys off the first six
digits dialed. where the first three digits
represent an area code, and the second
three digits represent an of&e code.
To select area code 407 as the first
“special LCR area code”, to be used for
CPGA
DBS Programming
Instruction
/ 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To reset the snecial LCR area code tables
to the default initialized value. Dress
]FFSl. 3#. (l-4)#. (CONFl#. (ON/OFFl.
‘Thethe priority route guide table option
found at address: [FF8], 5#, (l-15)#, (l48)#, (l-8)#. must be set.
Once a line has been accessed through
LCR, the [FLASH] operation will not
work.
LCR dialing for example, enter:
[ees],
3#, I#, 407#
To select area code 609 as the second
“special LCR area code” to be used for
LCR dialing for example, enter:
[IrIF8]. 3#, 2#, 609#
To select area code 404 as the third
“special LCR area code” to be used for
LCR dialing for example. enter:
FF8]*
3#, 3#, 4048
To select area code 508 as the fourth
“special LCR area code” to be used for
LCR dialing for example, enter:
PF8],
3W, 4#, 508U
Four special office code tables,
designated as 1 through 4 in the
address above. can be tied to four
special LCR area codes to allow up to
1000 office codes per special LCR area
code to be dialed by the least cost
routing.
This operation keys off the first six
digits dialed, where the first three digits
represent an area code, and the second
three digits represent an office code.
To set special office code entry 1, time
table 13 for office code 776 to be dialed on
the least expensive route, for example,
enter:
lep8],
168
4#, l#,
13#, 7768,
l#
’
DBS Ro@ammiq
Inst~ctions
cpc-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To set special o&e code entry 2, time
table 5 for office code 392 to be dialed on
the least expensive route, for example,
enter:
~F8],4#,2#y,5#,392#,
i
'
l#
Section 400 FF8
lsstie 3 July 1993
Since central of&e line costs can vary
by time of day, when least cost routing
is being used outbound calls will be
automatically placed on difkrent central
office line groups depending on the time of
day. This option provides for this.
To set special ofke code entry 3, time
table 15 for of&e code 248 to be dialed on
the least expensive route, for example,
enter:
For example, to use time route table
1, priority 1, LCR line group 1 for
outbound calls placed by the least
cost routing method, enter:
pF8],4#,
pF8],5#,
3s. lS#, 248#, l#
To reset the snecial LCR office code
tables to the default initialized value,
press lFF81. 4#. (l-4M. (l-15)#, fOOO999)#. O#. ION/OFFI.
For ewmple, to use ‘time route table 2,
priority 9, LCR line group 6 for outbound
calls placed by the least cost routing
method, enter:
W8L
When executing changes in this address,
a “1” entry si@es addition to the table,
and a “0” signifies the o&e code is not
part of the table.
l#, l#, l#
5#,2#,9#,
6#
For example, to use time route table 15,
priority 17, LCRline group 4foroutbound
calls placed by the least cost routing
method, enter:
FF8], 5#, 15#, 17#,4#
169
Section 400
Issue 3 July
FFS
1993
WC-A
DBS Ro@-ammin~
Instmctio~
/ 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
/‘.
To reset anv CO line DOLID Dosition in
anv time Drioritv route table to the
default initialized value. Dress IFF8L
5#. (l-15)#. (l-48)#. fCONF1. ION/OFFl.
’
The 15 time priority route tables are each
divided into 6 preset time periods, with 8
priority positions in each time period for
LCRhegroupassignme.nts.‘Ihesixpmset
timepcriodsareasfollows:
1. 7:00 am to 7:59 am, positions
2. 8:00 am to 4:59pm positions
3. 5:00 pm to 7:59 pm, positions
4.8:OO pm to 11:59 am, positions
5.12:OO art-t to 6:59 am, positions
6. WEEKEND, positions 41-48
l-8
9-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
See feature options [FFl], 2#, l#. 3#,
(System setting for LCR), and [FF8], 6#,
&CR Trunk group table.)
See Time Priority Route Guide Tables
(1- 15), for priority numbers 1 through
48 on page 133.
‘Iheu.seofI.CRrequhspnxietermhed I.CR
line @mp to be pri01MM awordhgto the
cost of line(s).‘Ihe.xxare 8 gmups, and each
group has 8 positions for central ofIke lines.
Once the central oflice line priorities have
bWle&lblish~these~Rgmups~
inserted in the time priority muk g&de
tables, so that predetermined ER @oups
willbeutilizeddurhgeachpresetthneperiod
for outbound calling.
To set up LCR group 1, position 1 with
central office line 16. for example, enter:
[eF8],6#,
I#, I#, 16#
To set up LCR group 2, position 1 with
central o&e line 3, for example, enter:
lFF8], 6#, 2#, lW, 36
To set up LCR group 3, position 2 with
central office line 6, fdr example, enter:
lFF81, 6#, 3#,2#,6#
To set up L.CR group 4, position 5 with
central of&e line 64, for example, enter:
[ee81, 6W.4#, 5#,64#
To set up LCR group 5, position 6 with
central of&e line 12, for example, enter:
F'FSI, 6#,5#,
170
6W, 12W
Section4OOFF8
DBS Programming
Inst~ctions
WC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To set up LCR group 6, position 5 with
central of&e line 10, for example, enter:
[IfIFs]. 6W, 6W. SW, 109
To set up LCR.group 7, position 1 with
central of&e line 33, for example, enter:
[FFS], 6#,7#.
1#,33#
Issue 3 July
1993
The first digits in the dialed string that
match the digits stored in the delete
table are automatically deleted before
dialing the telephone number.
If LCR trunk group 1 is accessed, and
the dial string is 1-212-666-1212 and
l-2 12 should be deleted prior to dialing
for example, enter:
To set up ICR group 8, position 8 with
central of&e line 60, for example, enter:
[eesl, 7W, I#, 12124
pF8],6#,
If LCR using trunk group 2 is designed
to eliminate the first digit 1 in all area
codes for example. enter:
8#,8#,60#
To reset a nosition within an ICR central
office line Q'~OUD to the default initialized
setting. mess lFF81. 6#. (l-8)#. (l-W+,
]CONFl. ION/OFFl.
See feature options [FFl], 2#, l#, 3#.
(System setting for LCR), and (FF8], 6#,
(LCR Trunk group table.)
Trunks are selected in the order they
are stored in the LCR trunk groups. To
lower the possibility
of call glare
remember to place the trunks in reverse
order.
[FFs1,7#,2#,
16
If LCR trunk group 3 is used to route
calls to a specific carrier and to prevent
connection to another carrier such as
10288 for example, enter:
[FFS), 7W.3W.102888
If LCR trunk group 4 is used behind
centrex or a PBX and a digit 9 is
automatically added (dial add table)
you can eliminate incorrectly dialing
the digit 9 twice by deleting the 9 each
time it is dialed for example, enter:
[IrIrs], 7w, 4#, 9#
171
Secti0n400FF8
Issue 3 Juiy 1993
WC-A
If LCR trunk group 5 is a direct Tl
access line to another facility in a different area code such as 7 14, and the digit
string 714 should not be dialed for
example, enter:
[eesl,7#,
5#, 714W
To reset the LCR delete tables to the :,
default initialized value, Dress lFF8L
7#. (l-8)#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl. .:
DBS Rogrammb~
/ 3.0. CPGB /
lnst~~tions
2.0 / 3.0 /4.0
Digits in the dialed stringthat are needed
to be outpulsed after a central of&e line
has been seized (such as access codes),
are automatically added before the dialed
telephone number is outpulsed on the
central of&e line. This option allows for
the addition of digits.
If LCR line group 1 is to be accessed.
and the digit string 10288 is to be added
before the dialed number is outpulsed
for example. enter:
@W8],8#, l#, 10288#
,.
^
Digit Delete Tables are matched to the
LCR trunk groups. Each time one of
these groups are accessed the dial
delete table is checked.
If LCR trunk group 2 is to be accessed,
and you want to add the digit 1 before all
long distance numbers dialed for
example, enter:
lees], SW, 2#, l#
If LCR trunk group 3 is to be accessed,
and the digit 9 is to be added before the
dialed number is outpulsed for example,
enter:
P'FS], 8#, 3#, 9#
If LCR trunk group 4 is to be accessed,
and the digit string 8 is to be added
before the dialed number is outpulsed
for example. enter:
[FF81, SW, 4U, SW
172
,
I
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
Section 400 FFS
Issue 3 July 1993
To reset the LCR add tables to the
default initialized value. Dress rFF8L
8#. (l-8)#. lCONF1. ION/OFFl.
.‘.
If digits are being added and deleted
from the same CO line group. the DBS
will delete digits first, then add digits.
5
,
173
section
400
Issue 3 July
,
FFQ
1993
3-9
DBS Ro@ammiq
Instructione
WC-A 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
/
COPY PROGRAM
SETTINGS
To copy all the attributes of one central
office line to another, this option is
used. Copying must be done on aline by
line basis. The first line number of this
address is the source line being copied,
the second line number is the target
destination.
To copy the attributes of central office
line port 1 to that of central office line
port 5, for example, enter:
To copy aJlthe attributes of one extension
to another, this option is used. Copying
must be done on an extension by
extension basis. The first extension
port number of this address is the
source extension being copied, the
second extension port number is the
target destination.
To copythe attributes oftiension port 10
to that of extension port 5. for example,
enter:
IFF9J,2#,10#,5##
To copy the attributes of central office
line port 7 to that of central office line
port 3, for example. enter:
To copy the attributes ofmension port70
to that of extension port 3, for example,
enter:
p9],1#.7#,3##
pF9]* 2#,70#,3##
There is no default initialized value for
this ontion.
There is no default initialized value for
this
Using this address to copy central office
line attributes results in the copying of
all attributes for the line except the
private line attribute.
lke second # a&r the second central oflIce
lineentxyisapartoftheproglamsequence,
which confhns the copy action.
ODtion.
Using this address to copy extension
attributes results in the copying of all
attributes
including toll restriction
for an extension except the extension
number,
telephone
type, station
lock-out
code, and EM 24 port
number (BLF port setting).
The second # after the second extension
entry is a part of the program sequence.
which confIrms the copy action.
174
f
DBS Programming
Instruction
WC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0
To copy all the attnbtrtes of one extensions
LED FF keys to another, this option is
used. Copying must be done on an
extension by extension basis. The first
extension port number of this address
is the FF key source extension being
copied, the second extension port number
istheFFkeytargetextensionportnumber.
To copy the LED FF key attributes of
extension port 2 to that of extension
port 5, for example, enter:
[pF9]*3#,2#,5##
section
400 FF9
Issue 3 July 1992
When copying the FF keys of a phone to
another that is in the default condition,
the originally assigned keys must first be
cleared. This is done in address [FFS],
(l-144)#, (l-24)#.
A quick way to accomplish copying the
same FF key settings (that are diBerent
than the default settings) is to go to the
FF5 addressindicated above, and clear all
keys. Then copy the cleared keys to all
other extensions with address [FW], 3#.Return to the (FF5], (l-144)#, (1-24)#
address and create the key configuration
desired. Finally, return to [FF9], 3#, and
copy those features to all extensions.
To copy the LED FF key attributes of
extension port 6 to that of extension
port 10, for-example, enter:
Dres],3#,6#,
lO##
There is no default initialized value for
this ontion.
The options
to the FF key copypro@am
arethatoNLytheLEDFFkeypn@xmMg
canbecopied.NonLEDFFkeysettingswill
not be copied. The second # after the
second extension entry is a part of the
program sequence, which conGms the
copy action.
175
Section 400
Issue 3 July
FFlO
1993
3- 10 SYSTEM AND PERSONAL
SPEED DIAL, SETTINGS
The storage of up to 90 speed dial
numbers for use by designated DBS
extension users are set in this feature
option.
To set the telephone number (203)
555-1212, in system speed dial bin
number 00, for example. enter:
EFlO],
lW, OOW, 2035551212%
To set the telephone number (800)
555-1212, in system speed dial bin
number 64, for example, enter:
WFlO],
l#, 64#,8005551212#
To set the telephone number (203)
555-1212, in system speed dial bin
number 00. for example, enter:
EFlO],
I#, OO#, 20355512121
To set the telephone number (404)
555- 1212. in system speed dial bin
number 44, for example, enter:
[FFlO],
DBS Programming
Instructions
CPC-A / 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 /3.0 /4.0
I
systemspeeddialnumberswiIldisplayon
largediSp~~OrleSiIl*~tiCalOIdff.
Abkrckof~speeddialnumbemcanbe
restricted from general use. To aeate this
partition, seeffzatuteoptionFFl], 2#, l#, 4#.
To restrict the display of system speed dial
numbers, see[FFl], 2#, l#, 5#. To&large
displaytelephonestodisplay5orlOsystem
speeddial numbem, seeml], 2#, 19#. To
storeanassociatednameforasystemspeed
dialnumber seelFl%),2#. (00-89)#. IfaDSS
consoleis availablefw m
it is
possible to assign a central office line
group as part of a system speed dial
number. To make use of this capability,
insertaC asthefirstcharacterofthespeed
dialbin,followedby1-6todesignatetheline
group number. A 9 can also be used to
accessthe pooled line capahilty. The C is
required for an SLT to use SSD. A P will
insert a pause, complete the entry with
the COMPLETE number as it would be
dialed if manuaJly done. The following
keys perform the indicated functions for
the programming of speed dial numbers:
lW, 44#, 4045551212#
To reset a svstem speed dial bin to
the default initialized
value. Dress,
JFFlOl.
I#. (OO-891#. fCONF1. ION/
OFF1 .
[COW, on the phone clears entered data
1X-1,on the DSS backspaces
iBS], on the DSS backspaces
[->I, on theDSS forward spaces
P, pauses
EXAMPLE:
C 1P555 12 12 will access line group 1,
then pause, then dial 555-1212.
176
DBS Programming
Instructiona
WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 /3.0
The storage ofup to 10 personal speed dial
numbers for use by each DBS extension
user are set in this feature option.
To set the telephone number (203)
555- 12 12 for extension port 20, in
personal speed dial bin number 90,
for example, enter:
FFlO],
2#, 2OW. 90#,2035551212#
To set the telephone number (800)
555-1212, for extension port 140, in
personal speed dial bin number 95,
for example, enter:
F‘FlO],
2#, 140#,95#.
Section 400 FFlO
Issue 3 July 1993
/4.0
8005551212W
To reset a oersonal sneed dial bin to
the default initialized
value. Dress,
JFFlOl. 2%. (l-144lW. I90-991#. ICONFL
JON/OFFl.
Personal speed dial numbers will display
on large display telephones in alphabetiti
order.
CPC-B software version 2.00 requires
the use of a large display telephone on
port 1. in order for the personal speed
dial keys to function. WC-B soflsvare
newer than version 2.05, allows personal
speed dial key operation with the use of
any model telephone. SeeTechnotes 10
& 12(March 1992)forcompletetionnation.
Apersonalspeeddialnumbercanonlybe
usedbylheMensionportitisseton.Toset
large display telephones to display 5 or
10 personal speed dial numbers, see
[FF3], (l-144)#, 17#.
Tostoreanassociatednameforapersonal
speeddial number, see (FFG),3#, (l-144)#,
(9&99)#.
IfaDSSconsolefsavaiWleforp
it is possible to assign a central o&e line
group as part of a personaI speed dial
number. To make use of this capability,
insert a C as the first character of the __.
speed dial bin, foIlowedby l-6 to designate
thelinegroupnumber.A9canalsobeused
toaccessthepooledlinecapabil~. TheC isrequired for an SLT to use SSD. A P will
fns&apause.completetheentrywiththe
COMPLEIEnumberasitwouldbedialedif
manually done. The followfng keys perform
theindicatedfforthep~
.
ofspeeddialnumbersz
EXAMPIES:
ClP5551212will accesshnegroup81,then
pause, then dial 555-1212.
C9P120155512i2,
willaccess pooled
line group 9, then pause. then dial 1
(201) 555-1212.
177
Preface
Preface
CPC-B
- VERSIONS
1.0 and 2.0
There are now two versions of DBS CPC-B.
CPC-B, Version 2.0 (DBS III) has many new or
improved features. Included in this publication
new programming
are
addresses as well as addresses
for CPC-B, Version 1.O (Enhanced DBS).
See DBS Progr atnming
other programming
Insi~uction.s,
Section 400, for
addresses:
Page 1
Issue 1 September
Addendum
to the DBS Programming
1991
Instructions
Section 400B
CPC-B Versions 1 .Oand 2.0
Contents
Preface
1
CF’C-B V2.0 - Data Tables
9
CPC-B Vl .O - Data Tables Vl .O
2
FF 1 Key - System Programming V2.0
13
FF 1 Key - System Programming Vl .O
3
FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming V2.0
18
FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming Vl .O
FF4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups Vl .O
6
FF 3 Key - Extension Programming V2.0
FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0
21
FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment V1.0
8
FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment V2.0
FF 6 Kev. - Name Assinnment V2.0
28
31
Index
7
23
32
CPC-B
WI.o
DATATABLES
Initial
‘i
/
Initial
Settings
- Data Tables,
Settings
FF I KEY - System
Default
Programming
3
l-2#-l#-22#-(0
or l-15)#
Attendant
overflow
l-2#-l#-23#-(0
or l)#
Delayed-ring
l-2#-2#-lO#-(0
or l)#
RAl baud
capability
rate switch
8 calls
3
Disable
3
1200 baud
4
5
FFl-3X-
1
Page
3
FFl-2#-
,i’ ’
3
V1.0
1.0
Version
Feature
AddreSS
- Data Tables
l-3#-20#-(0
or l-8)#
Outbound
l-3#-21#-(0
or l-8)#
incoming
FF 2 KEY - Trunk
ground
ground
detection
detection
timer
timer
4 seconds
5
4 seconds
5
Programming
6
FF22-(Ol-64)#-21#-(0
6
or l)#
FF 4 KEY - Ring Assignment
Loop-start/ground-start
and Hunt
switch
Loop-start
Groups
6
7
FF4-
7
4-5#-(OOl-145)#-(Ol-64)#-(0
or l)#
Daytime
4-6#-(OOl-145)#-(Ol-64)#-(0
or l)#
Nighttfme
FF 6 Key - Flexible
Key Asignment
Feature
delayed-ring
delayed-ring
tables
No ring
7
No rFng
7
8
FFS5-(145-148)#-(Ol-72)#-CONF-Code#
tables
8
DSS/72/BLF
consoles
8
Page2
FF 1 KEY
SYSTEMPROGRAMMING
“-:._“:
VI ‘0
FF 1 Key System Programming
COMMON
SYSTEM
ATTENDANT
FFl-2#-l#-22#-(0
0#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
j3#:
9#:
lO#:
ll#:
12#:
13#:
14#:
15#:
i\
No stacked
1 call
2 calls
3 calls
4 calls
5 calls
6 calls
7 calls
8 calls
9 calls
10 calls
11 calls
12 calls
13 calls
14 calls
15 calls
NOTE:
SETTINGS
OVERFLOW
or l-15)#
calls
Determines
the maxImum
number of incoming calls
that can be stacked to the frost attendant.
The
overflow calls are transferred
to other stations set
in the delayed-ring
tables.
9
Attendant
overflow is available only in CPC-B. Version
Version 2.0 does not have this feature.
DELAYED-RING
FFl-2f-l&239-(0
g#: Disable
l#: Enable
V1.0
1 .O.
CAPABILITY
or l)#
If there is no answer at an extension set to ring in
the extension-ring
tables, the call can also ring at
an extension set in the extension delayed-ring
tables
if the system is set up for it. This setting enables the
system to program delayed-ring
tables.
See the
section
on Delayed-Ring
Tables
under FF 4 Keu
Rina Assianment
and Hunt Gtourq
elsewhere
in
this manual.
Page 3
FF 1 Key System Programming
COMMON
SYSTEM
V1.0
SETTINGS
RAIBAUDRATESWlTCH
FFl-2#-2X-10%-(0 or l)#
O#: 300 Baud (RN-A or RAI-B)
l#: 1200 Baud IRAI-Bl
The baud rate that serves the system’s remote
administration
capability can be switched to
either 300 or 1200 baud when the RAI B card
is installed .
The settings for Data Length and Stop-Bit Length
are the sane for both TTY and FM. However, the
No Parity Check setting is always fixed on the RAI
regardless of the TIY settings.
Page 4
FF 1 Key System Programming
DETECTION
OUTBOUND
GROUND
FFl-3620#-(0
V1.0
TIMERS
DETECTION
TIMER
or l-8)#
The system sends a ground signal to .the ground-start
trunk and wafts for a return ground signal from the
telephone company’s central office.
0#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
No detection
1 second
2 seconds
3 seconds
4 secon&
5 seconds
6 seconds
7 seconds
8 seconds
The returning
ground
timer and the system
If a return ground
regards the trunk
tone to the caller.
To activate
ground-start
Install
INCOMING
O#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
No detection
1 second
2 seconds
3 seconds
4 seconds
5 seconds
6 seconds
7 seconds
8 seconds
signal activates the detection
starts the outgoing process.
signal is not detected. the system
as unavailable
and sends a busy
the Detection Timer. set the loop-start/
switch at ground start.
loop-start/ground-start
GROUND
DETIXTION
FFl-3#-21#-(0
or l-8)#
trunk
card VB4353
1.
TIMER
The time between detection of a ground signal on
a ground-start
trunk coming from the central office
during the idle state and the start of a call process
can be programmed.
At the moment the ground signal is detected. the
line LED on the key set will turn red indicating
that
the trunk is in use, even though the call has not
yet been processed.
To activate
ground-start
Install
the Detection Timer. set the loop-start/
switch at ground-start.
loop-start/ground/start
tnmk
card VD-43531.
Page 5
FF 2 KEY
TRUNKPROGRAMMING
VI .o
FF 2 Key Trunk Programming
V1.0
SWITCHES
LOOP-START/GROUND-START
SWITCH
FF2-(Ol-64)#-21%-(0 or l)%
O#: Loowstart trunk
l#: Ground-start trunk
Trunk-by-trunk switching for either the loop-start
or ground-start circuit allows a flexible trunk setup
between the two trunks.
When the ground-start trunk is enabled, check the
parameters for the Outbound Ground Detection
Timer and the Inbound Ground Detection Timer.
Install loop-start/ground-start
trunk card V-B-4353 1.
Page 6
FF 4 KEY
il )
RINGASSIGNMENT
AND
HUNTGROUPS
VI .o
FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V1.0
DELAYED-RING
DAYTIME
DEWIYED-RXNG
FF4-5#-(OOl-145)#-(01-64)#-(0
0#: No rim
TABLES
TABLE!3
or l)#
Assigned extensions will ring at this table when
there is no answer at the extensions assigned to
the Daytime CO-Line Ring Tables.
sim&
l#: Ring signal
Port 145 Is for Universal Night Answer KJNAI
NIGHTTIME
DELAYED-RING
FF4-6#-(OOl-145)#-(01-54)#-(0
0#: No rim2 simal
l#: Ring signal
TABLES
or 1)#
Assigned extensions will ring at this table when
there is no answer at the extensions assigned to
the Nighttime CO-Line Ring Tables.
Port 145 is for Universal Night Answer (UNAI
Page 7
FF 5 KEY
FLEXIBLEFEATUREKEY
PROGRAMMING
VI .o
FF 5 Key Flexible Feature Assignment V1.1)
DSS/72/BLF
FF 5 KEY ASSIGNMENT’
FF5-(14%148)#-(01-24)
CONF: Clears d&
Code#: See Section 700.
DBS Proammmfnc~ Insfructio~
.
under “FF 5 Key Mode” for codes.
CONSOLES
FOR DSS/72/BLF
or (Ol-72)#-CONF-
CONSOIZS
Code#
Dedicated trunk lines (01-64) or pooled
trunk lines (81-86.89)
can only be
stored on the first 24 FF keys (0 l-24). A
other codes can be stored in any of the
72 FF keys (01-72).
145: DSS 1 for First Attendant
146: DSS 2 for First Attendant
147: DSS 1 for Second Attendant
148: DSS 2 for Second Attendant
Page 8
CPC-B
v2.0
DATATABLES
Initial
\
Initial
Settings
Address
- Data Tables,
Version
Feature
Settings - Data Tables V2.0
2.0
Default
Page
FF I KEY - System Programming
13
FFl-2#-l#-
13
_-
1-2#- l#-24#-CONF-( 101-699/l l-69+0
Second attendant
101
13
l-2#-l#-25#-CONF-(101-699/l
l-69#)
Third attendant
CONF
13
l-2#- l#-26#-CONF-( 101-699/l l-69#)
Fourth attendant
CONF
13
l-2#-l#-27#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69#)
Attendant transfer extension number
CONF
14
l-2#- l#-28#-(0 or l)#
Attendant override switch
Enable
14
l-2#- l#-29#-(0 or l)#
AIM key LED
Lights
15
l-2+ l#-30#-(0 or l)#
Extension delayed-ring capability
Noring
15
16
FFl-3#-
l-3#-22#-(0 or l-12)#
Att. intercom hold-recall timer
20 seconcjs
16
l-3#-23#-(0 or l-12)#
Ext. intercom hold-recall timer
140 seconds
16
l-3#-24#-(0 or l-12)#
Att. intercom transfer-recall timer
20 seconds
17
l-3#-25#-(0 or l-12)#
Ext. intercom transfer-recall timer
140 seconds
17
Page 9
Initial
Initial
Settings
- Data Tables,
FF 2 KEY - Trunk
Version
Feature
Address
Settings - Data Tables V2.0
2.0
Default
Page
Programming
18
FF2-(01-64)-
18
2-(Ol-64)#-21#-(O-2)#
Loop-start/ground-start/did
loop-start
18
2-(Ol-64)#-22#-(0 or l)#
DID - immediate or wink start
Wink
19
2-(Ol-64)#-23#-(0-15)#
Wink-start timer
200 milliseconds
19
2-(Ol-64)#-24%(0 or l-15)#
Dial time out for digits
18 seconds
20
2-(Ol-64)#-2%(O-15)#
DID interdigit dial time out
80 milliseconds
20
FF 3 KEY - Extension
Programming
21
FF3-(001-144)X-
21
3-(OOl-144)#-2#-(0 or l-19)#
Telephone types
3-(OOl-144)#-34#-(0 or l)#
Extension directory display
3-(OOl-144)#-35#-@OOO-9999)# DID dial outside tel. number
3-(OOl-144)#-36#-(0-2)#
21
Displays 5 extensions
21
0000
22
Ringback tone with busy signal RE3Twith busy signal
22
Page 10
Initial
Initial
Settings
- Data Tables,
Settings - Data Tables V2.0
Version
Feature
Address
FF 4 KEY - Ring Assignment
2.0
Default
and Hunt Groups
23
FF4-16
23
4-l#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0
or l)#
Hunt-group daytlme CO-line
ring tables
No W
4-2#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or W
Hunt-group nighttime CO-line
ring tables
No ring
23
24
FF4-3#-
Hunt-group pilot ext. number
No assignment
24
4-3#-( l-8)#-2#-(0-2)#
Hunt-group search niethods
Terminal
24
4-3#-(l-8)#-3#-(0 or lOO-699/ lo-69)#
Transfer extension number
No assignment
25
4-3#-( l-8)#-4#-(2-32)#
Transfer timer
2 seconds
25
No assignment
25
4-3#-(l-8)#-l#-(0
or 101-699/l l-69)#
,’
!
23
23
FF4-2#-
(
Page
4-3#-( l-8)#-(5-12)#-(0 or lOO-699/ lo-69)#
Hunt-group extension (l-8)
26
FF4-5#4-5#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)#
Hunt-group daytime delayed
ring tables
Noring
27
FF4-6X4-6#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or 1)s
Hunt-group nighttime delayed
ring tables
No ring
Extension-ring tables
Norfng
27
27
FF4-8#4-8#-(OOl-144)#-(OOl-144)#-(0 or l)#
27
27
FF4-7#4-7#-(OOl-144)#-(OOl-144)#-(0 or l)#
26
Extension delayed-ring tables
Noring
27
Page 11
Initial
Initial
Settings
- Data Tables,
Settings - Data Tables V2.0
Version
2.0
Feature
Address
Default
Page
FF 6 KEY - Flexible Feature Key Assignment
28
FF5-
28
Extensions
28
5-(CKIl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG
5-(OOl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG
lo-69/1OO-699#)
EL/ML keys
or (81-86,
PROG xmzxx#) or (xxxxxx#)
hy key/Pre-programmed
89#)
codes
CONF
28
CONF
28
DSS/BLF Console
5-( 145- 148)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG
5-( 145- 148)#-(01-72)#-CONF-(PROG
Attendant
29
lo-69/ lOO-699#)
EL/ML keys
or (8 l-86,
89#)
CONF
PROG xxxxxx#) or (xxxxm#)
Any key/Pre-programmed
codes
CONF
Console
5-(149-152)#-(Ol-32)#-CONF-(PROG
5-(149-152)#-(Ol-32)#-CONF-(PROG
lo-69/100-699#)
EL/ML keys
or (81-86.
PROG ===#I
(xxxxxx#)
Any key/Pre-programmed
89#)
codes
CONF
30
CONF
30
FF 6 KEY - Name Assignment
31
FF6-51
31
6-5%(Ol-64)#-CONF-(XSXXX#)
CO-trunk-line
name assignment
CONF
31
pilot name assign.
CONF
31
FF6-6t
6-6#-( l-8)#-CONF-(w#)
Hunt-group
Page 12
FF 1 Key System Programming
i
\
MULTI-LINE
V2.0
KEY FEATURES
Attendants
When all the multi-line keys on the first attendant’s
telephone are busy, a call will transfer in sequence
to the second, third and fourth attendant.
If all four attendants are busy, the call will transfer
to a preset destination which must be a real extension number, such as a single-line telephone, answering machine or other single-line device. The
transfer-destination
extension cannot be a pilot
number.
101: Second atte ndant
10 l-699/ l l-69#: Extension number
COW No third attendant
lOl-699/ 1 l-69#: Extension number
SECOND
ATTENDANT
EXTENSION
NUMBER
FFl-2#-l#-24%CONF-(101-699/11-69X)
THIRD
ATTENDANT
EXTENSION
NUMBER
FFl-2#-l#-25#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69#)
CONF: No fourth attendant
lOl-699/ 1l-69#: Extension number
FOURTH
ATTENTUSNT
EXTENSION
NUMBEF
FFl-2X-l#-26#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69%)
Page 13
FF 1 Key System Programming
MULTI-LINE
V2.0
KEY FEATURES
Attendants
ATTENDANT
TRANSFER
FFl-2#-l#-27X-CONF-(
CONE No extension number
10 l-699/ 1 l-69#: Transfer extension
NOTE:
EXTENSION
101-699/
number
NUMBER
1 l-69#)
If the attendants
are busy, the system
will transfer the call to the attendant
transfer extension number.
The transfer extension should be a reaI
extension.
It cannot be a piIot extension
ATTENDANT’
OVERRIDE
FFl-2X-1X-28U
O#: Disable
l#: Enable
f
number.
SWITCH
0 or l)#
If the attendant
tries to override a call
once the system is set for Attendant
Oven-ide Disable, a busy tone will
sound.
Page 14
FF 1 Key System Programming
COMMON
SYSTEM
V2.0
SETTINGS
ALMKEYLED
FFl-2X-1X-29#-(0
The Alarm (ALM) key on the Attendant
Console will either light or not light
with this setting.
O#: Does not light
l#: Li@hts
EXTENSION
(BUSY LAMP
FIELD)
FFl-2#-l#-30#-(0
i
\
O#: NQ
l#: Yes
OX 1)X
DELAYED-RING
CAPABILITY
or l)#
When there is no answer at the
extensions set in the extension
ring tables, calls are distributed
to other extensions set in the
extension delayed-ring
tables.
See the section on DelayedRing Tables under FF 4 K&y
.
ma Assianment
an4
Hunt GIVUDS elsewhere
in
this manual.
Page 15
FF 1 Kev Svstem Programming
MULTI-LINE
Intercom
Intercom-Recall
V2.0
KEY FEATURES
Recall
Timers
Timers are a new feature for the DBS system
Intercom
HOLD-Recall
Timers
If a held intercom call does not respond
after a preset time, a recall signal will
sound. The time for the begining of the
signal is programmable.
The Attendant
and the Extensions
each set separately.
0#: No intercom-HOLD
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
lO#:
1 l#:
12#:
20 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
160 seconds
180 seconds
200 seconds
220 seconds
240 seconds
0#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
lO#:
1 l#:
12#:
No intercom-HOLD
20 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seco rids
160 seconds
180 seconds
200 seconds
220 seconds
240 seconds
are
recall
Attendant
INTERCOM
FFl-3X-22+(0
HOLD-RECALL
TIMER
or 1-12)X
recall
Extensions
INTERCOM
FFl-3#-23#-(0
HOLD-RECALL
TIMER
or l-12)#
Page 16
:
,
FF 1 KEY
SYSTEMPROGRAMMING
v2.0
FF 1 Key System Programming
t’
MULTI-LINE
‘\
Intercom
Intercom
V2.0
KEY FEATURES
Recall
Timers
Transfer-Recall
Timers
If a transferred
intercom
call does not
respond
after a preset time, a recall
signal will sound.
The time for the
begining of the signal is programmable.
The Attendant
and the Extensions
each set separately.
i
\
O#:
J#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
lO#:
1 l#:
12#:
O#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
lO#:
1 l#:
12#:
No intercom-transfer
20 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
160 seconds
180 seconds
200 seconds
220 seconds
240 seconds
No intercom-transfer
20 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 secon&
160 seconds
180 seconds
200 seconds
220 seconds
240 seconds
are
Attendant
recall
INTERCOM
FFl-3X-24X-(0
recall
TRANSFER-RECALL
TIMER
or l-12)#
Extensions
INTERCOM TRANSFER-RECALL
FFl-3#-25#-(0
TIMER
or l-l2)#
Page 17
FF 2 KEY
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
v2.0
FF 2 Trunk
TRUNK
Prograryming
V2.0
CARDS
LOOP-START/GROUND-START/DIRECT-IN-DIAL
TRUNK
CARDS
FF2-(Ol-f34)#-21X-(O-2)#
There are three types of trunks:
Ground-start
and Direct-in-Dial
Ok L.ooD-start trunk
l#: Ground-start
trunk
2% DID trunk
Loop-start.
(DID).
When installing
a DID trunk. check the
parameters
for Immediate or Wink start.
Also check the parameters
for the Wink-Start
Timer, Dial Time Out for Digits and the DID
Interdigit
Dial Time Out.
See also following
pages.
Page 18
FF 2 Key Trunk
DIRECT-IN-DIAL
DID - IMMEDIATE
V2.0
(DID)
OR WINK
FF2-(Ol-64)#-22%(0
Programming
START
1
or l)%
Start - After comxcting
with a distant
switching system. the DBS system will wait 65
milliseconds
before accepting the digits of a dialed
number.
Immediate
Q#: Wink start
l#: Immediate
start
WinIs Start - The DBS system waits for a
momentary
signal hink~ before accepting the digits
of a dialed number.
WIN-K-START
TIMER
0#: 140 milliseconds
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
lO#:
1 l#:
12#:
13#:
14#:
15#:
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
msec
msec
msec:
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
1
Maximum
accepting
amount of time the system waits before
the digits of a dialed number.
Page 19
FF 2 Kev Trunk Programming
DIRECT-IN-DIAL
DIAL
TIME
V2.0
(DID)
OUT FOR DIGITS
FF2-(Ol-64)%-24#-(0
or l-15)%
O#: No time out
l#: 15 seconds
2#:
3#:
4%
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
lO#:
ll#:
12#:
13#:
14#:
15#:
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
Maximum
amount of time before a time-out
signal. indicating
an incomplete
dialed
number. is sent from the telephone
company’s central office.
DID INTERDIGIT
DIAL TIME
OUT
FF2-(01-64)#-25t-(O-15)W
0#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
O#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
30 milliseconds
40 msec
50 msec
60 msec
70 msec
80 mseg
90 msec
100 msec
110 msec
120 msec
130 msec
140msec
150 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
Sets the amount of time for dialing each
digit before a time-out
signal is sent from
the telephone company’s
central office
indicating
an incomplete
dialed number.
Page 20
FF 3 KEY
EXTENSION
PROGRAMMING
v2.0
FF 3 Kev Extension Programming
EXTENSION
PROGIMMMING
TELEPHONE
TYPES
FF3-(001-144)X-2%-(0
Ok No assignment
l#: Analog telephone
2#: Digital telephone (FF 6 key)
3#: Digital telephone
(FF 12 key)
4#: Digital telephone (FF 24 key)
5#: Reserved
6#: Reserved
7#: EM/24 W-43310
8#: OPX (pulse)
9#: OPX (tone)
lO#: Voice mail &EC)
1 l#: DSSl - Extension
lOO/ 10
12#: DSS2 - Extension
lOO/lO
13#: DSS3 - Extension
10 l/ 11
14#: DSS4 - Extension
101/l 1
15#: Voice mail (OPXI
CPGB,
16#:
17#:
18#:
19#:
Version
V2.0
or l-19)%
.
Stores telephones
in the system.
2.0
First attendant
console
Second attendant
console
Third attendant
console
Fourth attendant
console
EXTENSION
DIRECTORY
FF3-(OOl-144)#-34#-(0
O#: DisDlavs
l#: Displays
5 extensions
10 extensions
DISPLAY
or l)#
Extension
directory display on
a large-screen
display telephone.
Page 21
FF 3 Key Extension Programming
DIRECT-IN-DIAL
DID DIAL
OUTSIDE
V2.0
i\ -*.
(DID)
TELEPHONE
NUMBER
FF3-(OOl-144)#-35#-(0000-9999)#
QOOO#: Default
0000-9999#:
Outside
telephone
RINGBACK
number
A signal is sent from the DID CO-trunk
line to the DBS system and converted to
a DBS extension number.
The parameters
represent the last four digits of the DID
outside telephone number.
TONE WITH
RINGBACK
TONE WITH
BUSY SIGNAL
BUSY SIGNAL
FF3-(OOl-144)#-36#-(0-2)X
Q#: Rirwback tone with busv siQnd
l#: Busy signal
2#: Ringback tone
Sets ringback tone on a busy Multi-Line
key. A caller ringing in on a busy multi-line
key will hear the tone set by this address.
This tone can also be set to a Voice-Mail
port.
Page 22
FF 4 KEY
RING ASSIGNMENTAND
HUNTGROUPS
v2.0
FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0
(
)
RING ASSIGNMENT
AND HUNT
GROUPS
In the DBS system, you can have up to eight hunt groups
with a maximum of eight extensions plus a pilot extension
number in each group.
The pilot extension number is not
receiver of incoming ring signals.
reaches the hunt group through the
then rings at the frost free extension
to the hunt-group search method.
a real extension, but a
Once the ring signal
pilot number, the signal
in the group according
Seefollowing
page.
INCOMING
CO-LINE RING SIGNAL
TO A HUNT GROUP
CO-line ring signals are set in Day Ring. Night Ring, Day
Delayed-Ring and Night Delayed-Ring tables. You can set a
ring signal for each hunt-group pilot number (15 1- 158) and
each CO Iine (01-64).
HUNT-GROUP
DAYTIME
RING TABLES
CO-LINE
RING TABLE3
FF4-l%-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0
Q#: No ring simd
l#: Ring signal
Sets the hunt-group
NIGHTTIME
CO-LINE
FFQ-P%-(El-1581%(01-64)#-(0
Q#: No rim signal
l#: Ring signal
Sets the hunt-group
or 1)#
pilot numbers
for daytime
ring.
RING TABLES
or 1)X
pilot numbers
for nighttime
ring.
Page23
FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0
HUNT-GROUP
PILOT
EXTENSION
FF4-3#-(1-8)#-l#-(0
O#: No Assi~men~
101-699/l
l-69#:
Extension
PROGRAMMING
NUMBER
GROUP
or lOl-699/11-69)#
Pilot extension
number
HUNT-GROUP
FOR A HUNT
SEARCH
number
in a hunt
group.
METHODS
FF4-3X-(l-8)#-2#-(O-2)1
There
Q#: Terminal
1 #: Distributed
2#: Longest Idle
are three
types
of hunt
groups:
Terminal
Begins its search with the pilot number
and then moves through the eight
extension numbers,
in sequence. before
transferring
after a set time to the pilot
number of the next hunt group.
Distributed
Distributes
calls through the pilot
number based on which extension in the
group received a call in the last search.
The next extension in sequence receives
the new call.
Longest
Idle
Searches through the pilot number for
an extension in the group which has
Page
24
FF 4 Key Ring Assignment
HUNT-GROUP
TRANSFER
FF4-3#-(
and Hunt
Groups
V2.0
PROGWiMMING
EXTENSION
l-8)#-3#-(0
NUMBER
or lOO-699/10-69)#
I ._
_ ..: : .
D#: No assirmment
lOO-699/ lo-69#: Extension
Once a ring signal ends its search in a
hunt group, it can be transferred
to a
pilot number in another hunt group,
an extension. the attendant.
an
answering machine or another
destination.
number
TRANSFER
FF4-3#-(
l-8)%-4#-(2-32)#
Sets the maximum
amount of time
before a call is transferred
to another
hunt group.
2#: 2 seconds
3-32#: 3-32 seconds
HUNT-GROUP
FF4-3#-(l-8)+(5-12)%-(0
0#: No assignment
lOO-699/
lo-69#:
TIMER
JZxtension
number
EXTENSION
(l-8)
or lOO-699/10-69)#
Assigns an extension number to one of
the eight places in a hunt group.
J
Page 25
FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0
DELAYED-RING
TABLES
HUNT-GROUP DAYTIME DELAYED-RING TABLES
FF4-5%-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0 or l)#
Q#: No rine sienal
l#: Ring signal
Sets the hunt-group pilot numbers (151- 158)
in the daytime delayed-ring tables.
Page 26
FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0
DELAYED-RING
HUNT-GROUP
NIGHTTIME
TABLES
DELAYED-RING
or 1)R
FF4-6#-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0
Q#: No rinP .sjg&
l#: Ring signal
Sets the hunt-group
pilot numbers ( 15 1 - 158)
in the nighttime
delayed-ring
tables.
EXTENSION-RING
TABLES
FF4-7#-(OOl-144)#-(001-144)X-(0
Q#: No ring signal
l#: Ring signal
or l)#
This sets the ring on an extension-line
key.
The first set of port numbers (OOl- 144)
represent your telephone.
The second set of
port numbers
(OOl- 144) belong to’the target
telephone.
EXTENSION
DELAYED-RING
FFQ-8#-(OOl-144)X-(OOl-144)#-(0
Q#: No ring signal
l#: Ring signal
TABLES
TABLES
or l)#
If the set extensions
on the extension-ring
table
do not answer, a call will also ring on extensions
set in the extension delayed-ring
table.
The first set of port numbers (00 1- 144) represent
your telephone.
The second set of port numbers
KKll-144)
belong to the target telephone.
Page 27
FF 5 KEY
FLEXIBLEFEATUREKEY
PROGRAMMING
v2.0
FF 5 Key Flexible Feature Assignment V2.0
MORE
FLEXIBILITY
FF KEY FEATURE
FOR FF KEYS
ASSIGNMENT
EXTENSION
FOR EXTENSIONS
LINE (EL) AND MULTI-LINE
FF5-(OOl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF(PROG lo-69/100-699#)
CONF: Clears data
PROG lo-69/ lOO-699#: EL keys
Sl-86.89#: ML keys
or
(ML) KEYS
(81-86,
89X)
Programs Extension-Line (EL) and Multi-Line (ML)
keys. Store the Multi-Line key as 81-86.89. There
can be a maximum of 12 ML keys on the Attendamtelephone. On other telephones. there can be up
to 3 ML keys assigned to any of the 24 FF keys (Ol24).
See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS ODerating
lr&uction~
under “Line Key Fea,tures”for
nation ofEL and ML keys.
an ewpla-
ANY XEY OR PRE-PROGRAMME
D CODES
FF5-(OOl-144)#-(01-24)#-CONF(PROG PROG xxxxxx#)
or (xxxxxx#)
-#)
will program the Any Key
feature. You can program any digits up to a
maximum
of six. Use this feature to store, for
example, code 5 for OHVA. There can be a maxfmum of
24 FF keys (01-24).
(PROG PROG
CONF: Clears d&
PROG PROG xxxxxx#:
Any key, maximum of six digit
Note: The LCD screen will only display up to four digits.
(=xxxx#)
is for setting pre-programmed codes.
xxxxxx#: Pre-programmed codes
See Section 700. DBS Owemtbw lnsbuctions. under “~
the FF Keys” for a chart of these codes. See also Section
700B. Addendum
to the DBS Ormatina Instructions
under
“More Flexibility for FF Keys” for instructions
on how to
store CF codes plus an extension to an FF key.
NOTE:
use the programming mode through
the telephone to assign the FLASH or CONF
features to an FF key.
You cannot
See Section 700B. Addendum
to the DBS
Operatim
lns~ctiorq
under “More
Flexibility for FF Keys” for instiffons
on
how to assign these features
to FF keys.
Page 28
FF 5 Ker
MORE
FLEXIBILITY
FF KEY ASSIGNMENT
Flexible
CONSOLES
147: DSS 1 for Second Attendant
148: DSS 2 for Second Attendant
DSS/72/BLF
AND POOLED-TRUNK-LINE
KEYS
FFS-(145-148)X-(01-24)
or (Oi-72)#-CONF(PROG lo-69/100-699#)
or (81-86,
89#1
Pmgrams DSS/72/BLF
and Pooled-Trunk-Line
(MCO)
keys. Store the MC0 key as 8 l-86,89
on the first 24
FF keys (0 l-24). All of the 72 FF keys can be used for
DSS/72/BLF
keys.
CONE Clears data
PROG lo-69/1OO-699#:
DSS/72/BLF
keys
81-86,
V2.0
Assignment
FOR FF KEYS
FOR DSS/72/BLF
145: DSS 1 for First Attendant
146: DSS 2 for First Attendant
Feature
89#: MC0 keys
See Section 700B. Addendum
to the DBS ODeratinq
Instructions
under “Line Key Features” for an euplanatim ofEL and ML keys.
ANY KEY OR PREPROG
RAMMED
CODES
FF5-(145148)#-(01-72)#-CONF(PROG PROG XXXXXX#) or (xxxxxx%I
CONF: Clears daQ
PROG PROG xxxxxx#:
Any key, m-urn
of six digits
KXXXXX#: Pre-programmed
codes
(PROG PROG xxxxxx#)
will program the Any Key
feature. You can program any digits up to a
maximum
ofsix.
Use this feature to store, for
example, code 5 for OHVA. There are 72 FF keys (0 1-72).
..
Note: The LCD screen
(rxrxxr%)
is for setting
will only display
pre-programmed
up to four digits.
codes.
See Section 700. DBS ODemtina lnsb-uct&~~. under
the EF Keys”for a chart of these codes. See also
7OOB. Addendum
to the DBS ODeratina Instructions
“‘More Flexibility for FF Keys” for insb-uctions
on
store CF codes plus an extension to an FF key.
“Storing
Section
mder
how to
NOTE: You cannot
use the programming
mode through
the telephone
to assign the FLASH or CONF
features to an FF key.
See Section 700B. Addendum
to the DBS
ODeratina InstructionS
under ‘More
lQxibility for FF Keys” for instructions
on
how to assign these features
to FF keys.
.
Page 29
FF 5 Kev Flexible
MORE
FF
FLEXIBILITY
KEY ASSIGNMENT
Feature
Assignment
V2.0
FOR FF KEYS
FOR ATTENDANT
CONSOLES
with Optional Attendant Feature Package (VB-43330)
Attendant
Console User Guide. Section 760 for FF Key Layout.)
Use
(See
DSS/72/BLF
AND POOLED-TRUNK-LINE
KEYS
FF5-(149-152)#-(01-08)
or (Ol-32)X-CONF(PROG 10-69/100-699%)
or (81-86.
CONF: Clears dau
PROG lo-69/100-699#:
DSS/72/BLF
81-86,89#:
MC0
89#)
Pmgrams DSS/72/BLF
and Pooled-Trunk-Line
(MC01
keys on the Attendant
console. Store the MC0 keys
as 8 l-86.89
on the first eight FF keys (0 l-08) only.
keys
keys
ANY KEY OR PRE-PROG
XUIMMED
FF5-(149-152)X-(Ol-32)#-CONF(PROG PROG xxxxxx#)
CODES
or (-#)
(PROG PROG xnxxx#)
CONF: Clears data
PROG PROG m#:
Any key, maximum
xxxxxx#:
will program the Any Key
feature. You can program any digits up to a
maximum
ofsix.
Use this feature to store, for
example. code 5 for OIWA. There are 32 F’F keys (0 l-32).
of six digits
Pre-programmed
codes
Note:
The LCD screen will only display
(xrxxxxX)
is for setting
pre-programed
up to four digits.
codes.
See !3ecm 700. DBS OKETU&W Instn&ions.
URder “Storing
the FF Keys” for a chart of these codes. See also Section
700B. Addendum
to the DBS Oweratina Instructions
under
“More Flex-&i@ for FF Keys” for instructions
on how to
store CF codes plus an extension to an FF key.
NOTE
You cannot use the programming
mode through
the telephone
to assign the FLASH or CONF
features to an FF key.
See Section 700B. Addendum
to the DBS
Qperatina lnsbuctions
under “More
FZexibUity for FF Keys”for
instructions
on
how to assign these features
b FF keys.
Page 30
i
I
FF 6 KEY
NAME ASSIGNMENT
v2.0
FF 6 Key Name Assignment V2.0
NAME
ASSIGNMENT
CO-TRUNK-LINE
NAME
ASSIGNMENT
FF6-5W-(01-64)#-CONF-(xxxxxx#)
COW;
Clears data
xxxxxx#I: Name or message assignment
- up to six characters
You can set CO-trunk-line
name assignment
in the programming
mode during remote
maintenance
or you can set it with PCAS.
Programming
through a telephone set requires
a 72-port
Direct Selection
Station (DSS/72).
Note: The DSS/72 must be set to Telephone
Types 11 for extension
100 or 13 for extension
101.
See under F’F 3 Keu Extension
Proaramminq,
V2.0 elsewhere
in this manual.
HUNT-GROUP
PILOT
I
NAME ASSIGNMENT
FF6-6X-(l-8)#-CON-F-(naanaaxrmx#)
CONl?
m#:
Clears data
Name assignment
- up to 10 characters
Assigns a name of up to 10 characters
a Hunt-Group
Pilot Extension number.
to
Page 31
\
Detection timers, V1.0
5
Dial time out for digits
10.20
DID dial outside telephone number
DID interdigit
dial time out
10. 20
Index
A
ALMkeyLED
DID. immediate or wink start
DID trunk cards
10. 18
Direct-in-dial
(DID) - extensions
9.15
Any key
Attendrqrt
12.28.29.30
console FF key assignment/Any
key/Pre-programmed
Attendant
console
codes
DSS/72/BLF
12.29.30
keys
12.29.
30
Attendant
consoles
Attendant
Attendant
intercom
intercom
12.29.30
hold-recall
timer
9. 16
transfer-recall
timer
9.
Direct-in-dial
(DID) - trunks
Direct
Direct
Select console,
Select console.
Station
Station
30
Distributed.
DSS/72/BLF
DSS/72/BLF
10. 22
10, 19
22
10. 18, 19. 20
V1.0
V2.0
2. 8
12. 29.
hunt groups
24
2. 8
consoles, V1.0
12. 29. 30
consoles, V2.0
17
Attendant
Attendant
overflow
override
2.3
switch
Attendant
Attendants
transfer extension
9. 13, 14
E
9. 14
9. 14
number
B
EL (extension Iine) keys
12.28
Extension delayed-ring
tables
11. 27
Extension
delayed-ring
capability
9, 15
Extension directory display
10. 21
Extension
FF key assignment/Any
key/Preprogrammed
codes
12.28
BLF
8, 12, 29, 30
10.22
Busy signaI
Extension
C
Common
Common
name
system
system
CONF
28.29.30
CPC-B - Version
- Version
assignment
setttngs.
settings,
V1.0
V2.0
12.31
3.4
9, 15
(See NOTE)
1.0
2-8
9-31
2.0
&tension
Extension
intercom
intercom
hold-recall
timer 9, 16
transfer-recall
timer 9.
17
Extension
Extension
12.28
line (EL) keys
programming,
V2.0
10. 21.22
Extension
ring tables
11, 27
F, G
D
Data tables.
Data tables.
Daytime
keys
12.28
CO-trunk-line
WC-B
FF key assignment/EL/ML
Vl.0
V2.0
delayed-ring
Delayed-ring
Delayed-ring
Delayed-ring
FF 1 Key - System
2
9- 12
tables. V1.0
capability
2.3
tables, V1.0
7
10.26.
tables. V2.0
2. 7
27
Programming.
4. 5
FF 1 Key - System Frograrnm
V1.0
irlg. v2.0
14. 15. 16. 17
FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming.
W-0
FF 2 Key - Trunk
V2.0
Programming.
2, 3.
9. 13.
2.6
10.
18
Page 32
FF 3 Key - Extension Programming,
V2.0
10.
21.22
FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment
and Hunt Groups,
v1.0
2, 7
FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment
and Hunt Groups,
V2.0
10. 23, 24. 25, 26, 27
FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment
V1.0
2. 8
FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment
12, 28. 29. 30
V2.0
FF 6 Key - Name Assignment
12.31
FIASH
28.29.30
(See NOTE)
Fourth attendant
extension number
Intercom
Intercom
recall timers
transfer-recall
9. 16. 17
timers
9. 17
L
Longest
idle. hunt
groups
24
Loop-start/ground-start
switch.
Loop-start/ground-start/direct-in-dial.
V1.0
2, 6
V2.0
10. 18
M
9. 13
MLkeys
12.28
More flexibility for FF keys
Multi-line
(ML) key features
12. 28.29. 30
13. 14. 16. 17
H
N
Hunt-group
23
Hunt-group
Daytime
CO-line
11,
ring tables
Name assignment
daytime
26
Hunt-group
Hunt-group
23
Hunt-group
27
delayed-ring
tables
11,
Nighttime
tables. V1.0
2. 7
(
11,
Outbound
nighttime
11,
p*
tables
delayed-ring
0
extensions
11.25
nighttime
CO-line ring tables
delayed-ring
12.31
ground
detection
V1.0
2. 5
for a hunt
group
11.
9
Pilot extension
number
11, 24
Hunt-group-pilot
extension number
Hunt-group-pilot
name assignment
12. 31
Hunt-group
programming
11, 24. 25
24
Preface
1
Pre-programm
ed codes
Hunt-group
ring tables
Pooled-Trunk-Line
Hunt-group
search methods
11. 23
timer.
keys
12. 28. 29.30
12. 29. 30
11.24
R
I. J, K
Incoming
CO-line
23
Incoming ground
Initial
Initial
settings
settings
ring signal to a hunt
detection
timer,
- data tables, V1.0
- data tables. V2.0
V1.0
HOLD-recall
timers
V1.0
2, 7
Ring assignment
V2.0
11.
2. 5
2
Ringback
9. 10. 11.
Ringback
12
Intercom
group
RAI baud rate switch, V1.0
2. 4
Ring assignment
and hunt groups,
9. 16
and hunt
groups,
23. 24. 25. 26.27
tone
22
tone with busy signal
Ring tables.
Ring tables.
V1.0
V2.0
10.22
2. 7
11. 23. 24, 25. 26.27
Page 33
S
Second attendant
extension
Switches
2. 6
System programming.
System programming.
16. 17
v.
T
number
9. 13
V1.0
2. 3. 4
V2.0
9. 13. 14. 15,
Telephone types
10.21
Terminal. hunt groups
24
Third attendant
extension number
Transfer extension number
11.25
Transfer timer
11.25
Trunk cards
10. 18
Tnmk programming,
V1.0
2. 6
Trunk programming,
V2.0
10.18
9. 13
U
UNA7
Universal
night
answer
7
V
Voice mail
Wink-start
21, 22
timer
10. 19
Page
34
m
Panasonic
Issue 3 -
July 1993
DBS Programming
Forms and Tables
Section
450
CPC-B Versions 1.0,2.0,3.1, and 4.0
CPC-A Versions 3.0,3.1, and 3.2
he new DBS Ffogramming
Forins‘ and
Tabks, section 450, has fewer pages, yet
contains more information on how to make
programming easier by using the newly-designed
forms to record programmed data. How-to instructions precede each FF Key chapter.
While some forms overlap in information, every form
charts a specific kind of programming. The instructions make clear who will use each form.
This manual is for software versions:
CPC-B 1.0, 2.0, 3.1.4.0
and
CPGA3.0,
3.1, 3.2
All of the forms in this manual are intended to be
photocopied. Saue your origin&
and use them as
copy masters.
5
Y
8
t
e
/
m
W
he FFl Key is for system-wide programming. There are seven submodes (l# to 7#)
for this key.
i
d
e
S
8
t
t
i
n
Q
8
Time and Date, Recall and Pause timers, and DISA
(Direct Inward System Access) are a few of the nearly
100 features available for programmin g on the FFl
Key.
Features programmed on this key affect the entire
system. In contrast, the other nine FF keys affect only
one extension or trunk, and are programmed on an
extension-by-extension
or trunk-by-trunk
basis. The
exception to these keys is System Speed Dial. in the
FFlO Key which also affects the entire system.
(
The programming forms and tables for the FFl Key
apply to each DBS system (single or double cabinet).
The data options for most features are 0 and 1, but
some features have more than these two programming
options. For example, the options for the Paging feature range from 00 to 07. Other features offer up to 15
options, such as the Automatic Pause Timer and
Unsupervised Conference Talk-Time (trunk-to-trunk
conferencing).
Save Your Original
Foims!!!
/
2
I
EFIKey-Sgskem
Account
s
Y
6
.t
Address
e
m
W
i
d
e
S
e
t
t
SMDR timer/starting
One-touch
time display
-lO#-(0
HOLD (DSS BLF)
or 11%
CO line hold
or l)#
Sets number of extension
-14#-(Oar
1)X
-15#-(0
Extension
intercom
or 1)X
intercom
1: Enable
0: Exclusive
1: System
0: Intercom
1: Retrieves
SLT FLASH control
-12#-(0 or I)##
Attendant
16 sec.
0: DisaWe
(automatic)
Non-appearance
-1 l#-(0
from
dialin
-9#-(0 or l)#
Key-bank
1: Starting
i
P
ST
s
hold
ho/d
dial tone
he/d CO line
0: 2 digits (10 to 69)
digits
1: 3 digiis (100 to 699)
0: Tone
1: Voice
0: Tone
1: Voice
3
l?FlKey-System
DBF Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
sheet
of
i..
1
S
t
8
Address
/ Feature
m
W
-16#-(0
Solash
-17#-(0
Splash
-1w(0
or l)#
(alert) tone
or 11%
(alert) tone
or 11%
i
d
e
on a voice
call
See FF3-99, lO#
on a busy override
Area code or 1 + area code
-19#-(0 or I)#
SSD name display - large display
-21X40 or 1)C
Voice mail tone
-22#-(0 or 1 to lS)#
Attendant
overflow
-23#-(0 or l)#
Delayed-ring
capability
-248~(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (WC-B
Second
attendant
-2514101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (UC-B
1: 10 names
calls (CPC-B Vs. 1.0)
Vs. 20)
Vs. 2.0)
Third attendant
-26#-(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (CPC-8 Vs. 2.0)
Fourth attendant
-27#-(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)t
(WC-B Vs. 20)
Attendant
transfer extension
(CPC-8 vs. 2.0)
-28140 or 1M
Attendant
override
switch
(CPC-B Vs. 2.0)
-29WO or l)i
Alarm LED mode
(WC-B Vs. 2.0)
-3O#-(0 or 1)R
BLF (extension)
delaved
ring
-31#40
Analog
to 6M
port transfer
ring interval
1: 3.0 Set
2: 2.0 Set
3: 1.O Set
4: 1.O Set
ON
ON
ON
ON
/
/
/
/
1.O Set
2.0 Set
2.0 Set
3.0 Set
OFF
Off
OFF
O#
S
e
t
t
i
n
Q
8
I
FFIKey-System
s
Y
S
t
Address
/ Feature
Program
e
Options
m
-32#-(0
to 1)W (CPC-B
DID/DNIS emulation
-32X-(0 or l)# (CPC-B
Vs. 4.0 or higher)
0: Disuble
W
Vs. 3.0 or higher)
1: Enable
0: Disable
i
d
e
Multiole DID --33%-(0 or 1 )#
1: Enable
0: No limit
Paging duration
-34%-(0 or 1)#
1: 60 seconds
0: ISecON/3SecOFF
-I#-(0
0: No parity
or l)#
SMDR lTY parity
SMDR lTY parity
-3#-(0 or 1)R
SMDR baud
-4#-(0 or 1)X
SMDR stop-bit
check
check
1: Purify check
type
0: Odd
1: Even
-2#-(0 or I)#
-
(CPC-A
Vs. 3.0 and above)
1: 300 bps
rate
2: 1200 bp - WC-A
3: 4800 bps
V 2.0
4: %lXl bps - WC-A
V 3.0, CPC-B V 1.0,2-O
1: l.Obits
. ..
length
2: 1.5 bits
3: 2.0 bits
-W-(0
or 1)X
SMDR data
1: 5.0 bits (less than 90 ports)
length
2: 6.0 bits (less than 90 ports)
3: 7.0 bits
4: 8.0 bits
See FF3-14R
-6#-(0 or l)#
SMDR print mode
1
-9#-(0 or l)#
Dump data mode
1: lncofning
und outgoing
1: Ail outgoing
2
calls only
calls
O:lWCklfUonly
-8X-(0 or I)#
SMDR print mode
calls only
0: Long-distance
-7#-(0 or l)#
SMDR print mode
0: Outgoing
1: Titles and llY data
3
0: No control
(Xon/XoffI
-lO#-(0 or I)#
RAI baud rate switch
I: Control
0: 300 bauds
(
(RAI-A, RAI-B)
S
e
t
t
i
n
B
8
FFlKey-System
me
Account
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main
Address
Address
-I#-(Up
/ Feature
W
to 3 dlglts)#
PBX access
code
i
1
d
e
-2X-(Up to 3 dlgits)#
PBX access
code
2
-3X-(Up to 3 digits)#
PBX access
code
S
e
t
t
3
-4X-(Up to 3 dlgltsM
PBX access
-5HUp
code
4
to 3 dlgtts)P
PBX access
code
2
Y
8.
t
e
m
i
5
n
-6#-(Up to 3 dlglts)#
PBX access code 6
-7#-(Up to 3 dlgits)t
Q
8
PBX access
-8WUp
code
/-
7
to 3 dlglts)#
PBX access
code
8
-9%~(1to 3)#
Automatic
-low
pause
See FF2-13#
after
dialing
pause
1: Pause - 1st digit
See FF2-13t
to 3)X
Automatic
1
after
dialing
2
2: Pause - 2nd digit
3: Pause - 3rd diait
-1 l#-(1 to 3)#
Automatic
pause
after
dialing
See FF2-131
No entry at default
3
1: Pause - 1st digit
2: Pause - 2nd digit
3: Pause - 3rd diait
-12#-(1 to 3)#
Automatic
pause
after
dialing
See FFZ- 13#
No entry at deiautt
4
1: Pause - 1st digit
2: Pause - 2nd digit
3: Pause - 3rd digit
-13w
See FF2-131
to 3)#
Automatic
pause
after
dialing
5
No enfry
at default
1: Pause - 1st digit
2: Pause - 2nd digit
6
PFlKey-System
Account
S
Y
Address
S
t
Address
-14#-(1
/ Feature
to 316
Automatic
-W-(1
pause
after dialing
pause
after dialing
W
6
1: Pause - 1st digit
i
2: Pause - 2nd digit
d
e
1: Pause - 1st digit
7
See FF2-13#
after
dialing
e
m
No entry at defauff
2: Pause - 2nd digit
-l#-(1
to 3)#
Automatic
pause
Options
See FF2-13#
See FF2-13#
to 3)#
Automatic
Program
8
S
e
t
t
No entry of defuu/f
i
1: Pause - 1st digit
2: Pause - 2nd digit
n
Q
S
-17#-(1
See FF2-13#
to 3)#
Automatic
pause
-18#-(1 to 3M
Automatic
pause
after dialing
1: Pause - 1st digit
2: Pause - 2nd digit
9
See FF2-13#
after dialing
0
1: Pause - 1st digit
2: Pause - 2nd digit
-l#-(0
Universal
-2#-(0
External
See FF4- 1#, 2#
or l)#
Nigtif‘ Answer
1: Continuous
(UNA) ring pattern
0: No fP/ reluy
or l)#
Page
Interface
(EPI) page
group
OC
-4#-(0
External
-5#-(0
External
Page
Interface
(EPI) page
group
01
Interface
(EPI) page
group
0:
Interface
(EPI) page
group
0:
Interface
(EPI) page
group
01
-6#-(0 or l)#
External
-7#-(0
Page
or l)#
1: EPI relay
0: No EPI rew
or l)#
Page
1: EPI relay
0: No EPIrely
or l)#
Page
1: EPI relay
0: No ffl reluy
-3#-(0 or l)#
External
0:3secson/l
secot7
FFIKey-system
Account
Address
Account
I
Address
Phone (Main List)
Y
s
t
e
I
/ Feature
m
8x-(0 or I)#
ixternal
Page
interface
(EPI) page
group
06
W
1: EPI relay
(Not in use)
0: No EPI relay
lxternal
Page
Interface
(EPI) page
group
07
(l-8)+( l -20)#-(0 or 1)X
:lass of Service settina
(Not in use>
0: Restricted
1: Not restricted
(l-100)X-l#-(0001~9999)X
‘erified Forced Account
(1-l OO)#-2#-(0-7)s
Codes
‘erified
Code
Forced
1: EPI relay
l “*:
No uccount
codes
cooo1-9999w
0:TRSTypeO
Account
toll restrictior
1: TPSType
1
2: m.S Type 2
3: TRS Type 3
4: lRS Type 4
5: TRS Type 5
6: TRS Type 6
(0000 to 2359)#
Uomatic
switch
No infry
to night
(0 or 1 to 12)#
rttendant
HOLD-recall
mode
timer
(HHMM)
af defautf
OWO to 2359: Automatic
0: No recall
I: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 140 seconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
12: 240 seconds
me
i
d
e
RF1 Key - System
Account
Account
Address
Address
/ Feature
HOLD-recall
timer
S
Y
8
t
e
In
W
0: No recall
-(O or 1 to 12)X
Extension
Phone (Main List)
1: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
i
d
e
S
e
t
t
i
n
7: 14Oseconds
Q
8: 160 seconds
8
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
-(O or 1 to 12)#
Attendant
transfer-recall
timer
0: No recall
I: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 140 seconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
12: 240 seconds
9
I?FlKey-Systam
9.
F
Y
8
t
e
m
Address / Feature
W
i
-(O or 1 to 121%
Extension transfer-recall timer
Attendant
Hunt Group recall timer
0: No recall
1: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 14oseconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
12: 240 seconds
d
e
0: No recall
1: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 140 seconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
10
FEY Key - System
f-‘
\
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Bs Account Name
ccount Address
Sheet
of
S
Y
8
t
e
m
Address
/’ Feature
W
i
d
e
Extension
Hunt Group
recall
timer
1: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 14Oseconds
8: 160 seconds
S
e
t
t
i
n
Q
s
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
0: No recall
Attendant
park HOLD recall
timer
1: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 140 seconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
1:
FFY Key - Sgstem
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
BS Account Name
ccount Address
Sheet
of
u
/r.
t8
e
In
Address
/ Feature
&tension park-HOLD recall tlmer
(0 or 1 to 12)#
Wendant reversion timer
W
0: No recall
1: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 140 seconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
i
d
e
S
e
t
t
i
Il
Q
8
0: No recall
1: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 140 seconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
12
l?Fl Key - System
unt Phone (Main List)
Address
t
e
m
/ Feature
W
(Oor 1 to 1511
Insupervised
i
See FF2-16#, FF3-131
conference
talk-time
1: 5 minutes
2: l0m//wfes
3: 15 minutes
4: 20 minutes
5: 25 minutes
6: 30 minutes
7: 35 minutes
8: 40 minutes
9: 45 minutes
10: 50 minutes
11: 55 minutes
12: 60 minutes
13: 65 minutes
14: 70 minutes
*(O or 1 to 1SM
4utomatic
pause
timer
0: No pause
1: 0.5 second
2: 1 .O second
3: 1.5 seconds
4: 2.0 seconds
5: 2.5 seconds
6: 3.0 seconds
7: 3.5 seconds
8: 4.0 seconds
9: 4.5 seconds
10: 5.0 seconds
11: 5.0 seconds
12: 5.0 seconds
13: 5.0 seconds
14: 5.0 seconds
d
e
S
e
t
t
i
n
sr
a
FFlKey-@stem
Account
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Name
Address
Address
Sheet
of
S/
Y
s
t
e
m
/ Feature
W
see 18#
-(O or 1 to 1OM
CO line FLASH timer
i
d
e
0: No FLASH
1: 0.2 second
2: 0.3 second
3: 0.4 second
4: 0.5 second
5: 0.6 second
6: 0.7 second
7: 0.8 second
8: 0.9 second
9: 1.0 secorld
f
-(O or 1 to 6)#
SLT onhook
FLASH(0
FLASH timer
Disconnect
(D)
I
0: 200-500 ms (I? Over 500 IT-ISCD)
1: 2OW50 ms (0 Over 750 ms 0
2: 200-1CXlO ms (0 Over
1Ooo ms (D)
3: 2O@l200 ms (0 Over
1200 ms (0)
ms 0
4: ZW-15W
5:
6: 30-W
15W ms (0
Over 200 ms CD>
rns CR Over 500 ms (D)
0: 4 seconds
-(O to 3M
incoming
Over
ring
timer
1:8seconds
14
P
FFYKey-System
Account
S
Y
8
t
e
Address
Address
m
/ Feature
W
O: Synchronizes
-(O 01 1 to 15)#
ncoming
ring delay
timer
1: Expand
2: Expand
3: Expand
to 50 ms
to 100 ms
to 150 ms
4: Expand
5: Expand
6: Expand
to 200 ms
to 250 ms
to 300 ms
7:
Dial pause
Expand to 350 ms
8: Expand
9: Expand
to 400 ms
to 450 ms
IO: Expand
I 1: Expand
12: Expand
to 500 ms
to 550 ms
to 600 ms
13: Expand
14: Expand
to 650 ms
to 700 ms
0: 1.2 seconds
-(Oto lS)#
timer
to incoming
1: 1.2 seconds
2: 2.0 seconds
3: 3.0 seconds
4: 4.0 seconds
5: 5.0 seconds
6: 6.0 seconds
7: 7.0 seconds
8: 8.0 seconds
9: 9.0 seconds
10: 10 seconds
11: 11 seconds
12: 12 seconds
13: 13 seconds
14: 14 seconds
ring cycle
i
d
e
S
e
t
t
i
xl
Q
8
lTF1 Key - System
j
st
8
t
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
BS Account Name
ccount Address
e
m
Address
/ Feature
w
i
-(O or 1 to lO)#
0: No FLASH
d
PBX-FLASH
1: 0.2 second
e
timer
2: 0.3 second
S
3: 0.4 second
e
4: 0.5 second
t
5: 0.6 second
6: 0.7 second
t
i
n
Q
8
7: 0.8 second
8: 0.9 second
9: 1 .O second
10: 1.1 seconds
-(O to 15)#
Call Forward-No
Answer
timer
0: Call forward
after 4 seconds
1: Call forward
after 8 seconds
2: Cd
forward
affer
12 seconds
3: Call forward
after
16 seconds
4: Call forward
5: Call forward
after 20 seconds
after 24 seconds
6: Call forward
after 28 seconds
7: Call forward
after
8: Call forward
9: Call forward
after 36 seconds
after 40 seconds
10: Call forward
after
11: Call forward
after 48 seconds
12: Call forward
after
13: Call forward
after 56 seconds
14: Call forward
after
1
32 seconds
44 seconds
52 seconds
60 seconds
16
FFlKey-Systxm
i’- ’
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
dBS Account Name
Account Address
Sheet
of
S
Y
8
t
Address
e
m
/ Feature
W
-(O or 1 to 8)#
Outbound
ground
detection
timer
i
d
e
1: 1 second
2: 2 seconds
3: 3 seconds
4: 4 seconds
S
e
t
t
i
n
Q
8
5: 5 seconds
6: 6 seconds
7: 7 seconds
-(O or 1 to 818
Incoming
ground
detection
timer
0: No detection
1: 1 second
2: 2 seconds
3: 3 seconds
#:#seconds
5: 5 seconds
6: 6 seconds
7: 7 seconds
0: No intercom
-(O or 1 to 1216
Attendant
(UC-B
intercom
Vs. 2.0)
HOLD-recall
timer
HOLD recall
I: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 140 seconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
1
RF1 Key - System
Account
Addre
Y
8
t
e
m
Address
/ Feature
Program
Options
W
i
-(O or 1 to 12)#
Extension
WC-B
intercom
HOLD recall
timer
0: No intercom
1: 20 seconds
HOLD recall
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
Vs. 2.0)
d
e
S
e
t
t
5: 100 seconds
i
11
Q
6: 120 seconds
7: 14oseconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
8
11: 220 seconds
12: 240 seconds
-(O or 1 to 12)#
Attendant
WC-8
intercom
Vs. 2.0)
transfer
recall
timer
0: No intercom
1: 20 seconds
transfer
recall
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6:
7:
8:
9:
120 seconds
140 seconds
160 seconds
180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
12: 240 seconds
18
RF1 Key - Sgstem
D’BS Account Name
Account Address
Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
/ Feature
Program
Sheet --
of
S
Y
8
t
e
m
Options
W
i
-(O or 1 to 12)#
Extension
intercom
transfer
(CPC-6 vs. 2.0)
CO delayed
ringing timer
WC-B
Vs. 3.0 or higher)
recall
timer
0: No intercom
1: 20 seconds
2: 40 seconds
3: 60 seconds
4: 80 seconds
5: 100 seconds
6: 120 seconds
7: 140 seconds
8: 160 seconds
9: 180 seconds
10: 200 seconds
11: 220 seconds
12: 240 seconds
0: CO delay
1: CO delay
2: CO delay
3: CO delay
4: CO delay
5: CO delay
6: CO delay
7: CO delay
8: CO delay
9: CO delay
10: CO delay
11: CO delay
12: CO delay
13: CO delay
14: CO delay
transfer
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
ringing
d
e
recall
S
e
t
t
i
n
!3
8
I
after
after
ufier
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
4 seconds
8 seconds
12 seconds
16 seconds
20 seconds
24 seconds
28 seconds
32 seconds
36 seconds
40 seconds
44 seconds
48 seconds
52 seconds
56 seconds
60 seconds
I
FFIKey-System
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Address
Sheet
of
P
Y
8
t
e
/ Feature
m
EXT. delayed
(WC-6
ringing
timer
Vs. 3.0 or higher)
Hunt Group no answer
(CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or higher)
0: EXT. delay
ringing
after 4 seconds
1: EXT. delay
2: EXT. deby
ringing
thgbhg
after 8 seconds
crlyer 12 seconds
3: EXT. delay
4: EXT. delay
ringing
ringing
after 16 seconds
after 20 seconds
5: EXT. delay
6: EXT. delay
7: EXT. delay
ringing
ringing
ringing
after 24 seconds
after 28 seconds
after 32 seconds
8: EXT. delay
9: EXT. delay
ringing
ringing
after 36 seconds
after 40 seconds
10: EXT. delay
11: EXT. delay
ringing
ringing
after 44 seconds
after 48 seconds
12: EXT. delay
13: EXT. delay
ringing
ringing
after 52 seconds
after 56 seconds
14: EXT. delay
ringing
after: 60 seconds
0: H. Group
no answer
after 4 seconds
1: H. Group
no answer
after 8 seconds
2: If. Grout
no mswer
offer
12 seconds
3: H. Group
no answer
after
16 seconds
4: H. Group
5: H. Group
no answer
no answer
after 20 seconds
after 24 seconds
6: H. Group
7: H. Group
no answer
no answer
after 28 seconds
after 32 seconds
8: H. Group
9: H. Group
no answer
no answer
after 36 seconds
after 40 seconds
10: H. Group
no answer
after 44 seconds
11: H. Group
12: H. Group
no answer
no answer
after 48 seconds
after 52 seconds
13: H. Group
no answer
after 56 seconds
no answer
15: H. GrouD no answer
atier 60seconds
after 64 seconds
14: H. Group
-(HHMMM
(WC-B Vs. 4.0 or higher)
W
i
d
e
S
e
t
t
i
n
Q
8
c
c
HH: Hours (00 to 23)
MM: Minutes
(00 to 23)
2c
FFl
Key -
DBS Account Name
Account Address
System
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Address
/
Sheet
of
S
Y
s
t
e
Feature
m
-(4 digts)#
Remote
Ako
used with DISA
maintenance
W
I
i
d
e'
-(4 diglts)#
See FF2-ill.
191, 20#
-(4 d@tsM
See FFZ-11X, 19#, 20#
1111:
S
e
t
t
Default
i
n
-(4
digtk)#
-(O Of 1)Y
DID
reset
-(O to 111
DID/l1
reset
-(O of l)#
Confirmation
-(O or I)#
(CPC-B
Vs. 3.0 or hlghed
(CPC-B
(6)
Vs. 4.0 01 hlgher)
(WC-B
Dekutt
0:
(do
No
l-l
not
reset
DID
Q
8
numbers)
of higher)
of
DID reset
(WC-B
Vs. 4.0 or higher)
-(O to 9999)#-(10
to
DID Number
Set
-1X-1X-(0
System
(CPC-B
Vs. 3.0
9999:
69 or
to W
size
Vs. 4.0 OT higherl
100 to 699I1
10 to 69
loo to 699
#
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
D6S 40
DBS 72
DBS 96
DBS 40 +
(Tl must
Df3S 72 +
DE3S 72 +
01 must
DES 96 +
DEE 96 +
DES 40
be in slave
DBS 40 fll
DBS 72
be In slave
DES 40
DBS 72
cabinet.)
not supported)
cabinet.)
2
EFIKey-system
Sheet
Account
Address
Account
of
?
Phone (Main List)
L
Y
8
t
e
m
Address / Feature
W
-l#-2#-(1
to 3)Y
i
1: Tl of the master cabinet
Synchronization
setting for the first sync
d
e
2: Tl of the slave cabinet
some
- l #-3#-(0 to 3)#
S
e
t
t
o:NCYE
Synchronization
setting for the second sync
sauce
1: Tl of the master cabinet
2: Tl of the slave ccbinet
3: Free Run (Internal clocking)
-l#-#-Cl
to 3hv
Synchronization
i
n
Q
s
OrNOne
setting for the third sync
some
1: Tl of the master cabinet
2:Tl oftheslavecabinet
3: Free Run (lntemd docking)
-2#-l#-(0
to 2sM
Neiwuk
Resync timer
(
Oto25hous
= No Entries
-2#-2#-(IJ to 12)#
Diiconnect
timer
-m-3#-(0 to 15)#
Guard timer
-2#-4#-(0 to lS)#
Release acknowiedge
timer (RLS ACK Timer)
-2#-!i#-(0 to 8)Y
Duipdse
Oto8
delaq timer
-2#45#-(0 to 1511
tink timeout
timer OJVinkTimeout)
~2#-7#-(oto15)#
ncoming
detection
timer
-2#-W-(0 to 8)x
Oto8
Ynswer supervision timer (Answer Super4
(3)-6mMs
.2#-9#-(0 to 15)#
oto 15
mmediate
Glue timer (Imm-Glare
Timer)
t-i
(3)=6clMs
*2#- 1or-<0 to 15)#
&ink Glare timer M-Glare
Timer)
22
Key - Sgstem
FFl
r \Account
Address
Account
-3X-(1
Digital
m
Program options
W
1
to 8)X-(1
pad
S
Y
.s
t
e
Phone (Main List)
Address / Feature
-8#-4W
P
to 8)#-(0
settings
to 3OM
(Digital
Pad
Set)
1
CklJitTvr>es
K-TEL
SLT
DATA
PmbgCOTrk
Tl Master
Tl slave
OPllONl”
OlllON2”
DPVW
CoNF~C)#
Tone 1 &lFRl)#
Tone2&lFM)#
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
lo
11
‘12
Figure
circuit
1 shows
type.
Figure
most
2 shows
common
figure
pad
I
used
to
identify
the defautt
values
Tl connections.
for
the
3 lists the
numbers
adjustments
provided
each
i
d
e
by each
number.
I
I
the
F/awe
2:
Default
wd
vaiues
From
To
Sefflng
Tl%l
Tl f2
Tl Xl
Tl f2
K-TEL
K-TEL
SLT
SLT
K-TEL
.K-TEL
SLT
SLT
Tl Rl
Tl 62
Tl 81
Tl #2
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
I
Value
-2 dB
-2 dB
-2 dB
-2 dB
-2 dB
-2 dB
-2 dB
-2 dB
F&we 3: Ptd Nos.
Pad No.
#CrcuitType3&912cxe
rae4vedtifuiureuse.
1 Level
]
i +28 dB
1
YJse~~la7d2to
CX&lUliCjUePADlevels
tocicuikthutrequke
speddvdmew
29
30
-28 dB
-30 dB
23
IF1
Key - System
n
Account
Address
Account
Phone (Main List)
Y
8
t
e
Address
/
Feature
-4#-l#-l#-(0
to I)#
(Master cablnet)
-5#-l#-l#-(0
to l)#
Glave cabhot)
Trunk
class
-4#-l#-2X-(0
to 24)#
(Master cabhot)
-M-l#-2#-(0
to 24)#
Glave cablnetl
Number
of channels
used
-4#-l#-3#-(0
to l)#
@laster cabinet)
-s#-1x-3#-(0
to 1)#
(Slave cabinet)
Frame
format
-4#-1#-4#-(0
to l)#
(Master cabinet)
-5#-1#-4#-(0
to l)li
Wave cablnet)
Clear
chawwl
-4#-l#-sr-co
to l#
(Master cabinet)
-St-l#-5#-(0
to 1M
(slave cabhot)
Failure
mode
-4+1#-6+(0
to l)#
(Master cabinet)
-5X-it-M-(0
to I)#
Gtave cabinet)
Remote
loopback
(R-Loooback)
-4+1#-7#-(0
to l)#
(Master cabhot)
-5#-l#-71(0
to I)#
(Slave cabinet)
Yellow
akxm
send
-4#-2#-l#-(0
to 15)#
(Master cablnet)
-5#-2#-W-(0
to iS)#
tslave CabInetI
Red alarm
detection
(Red
Aim
Det)
-4#-2#-2#-(0
to lS)#
Nader
cablnen
-SI-2#-21-(0
to isjr
kitave cabtnell
Yellow
detection
(YeI Aim
Det)
-4#-2#-3#-(0
to 15)#
(Master cablneb
-St-263#-(0
to lS)#
Mave cabinet)
Yellow
alam
recovq
(YeI Aim
Ret)
-4#-2#-4#-(0
to 1511
(Master cabhot)
-s#-2##-(0
to 1511
fslave cabinen
3her
darms
detection
(Other
Alm
Det)
-4#-2#-5#-(0
to lS)#
(Mastor CabInen
-5#-2#-5#-(0
to 1511
Grave cabtnen
Other
alarms
recovery
(Other
Aim
Ret)
-4#-3#-ll-(0
to 9ooo)#
(Master cabinet)
-St-Jli-l#-(0
to 9ooo)#
&v*
CaMnet) Frame
loss counter
(Frame
Count)
-4#-31-2#-(0
to 9ooo)#
(Master cabinet)
-4+3#-2#-(0
to 9alo)#
(Skve cabinet)
Slip counter
(Slip Count)
-&l-3&3+(0
to I)#
(Master cabinet)
-4+3#-31140
to 1H
Slave cabirmt)
Red alarm
counter
(Red
Aim
Count)
m
W
0: Analog
only
1: Tl
analog
and
i
d
e
trunks
0 to 24
co,
0:
SF (Super
1: ESF @Mended
0: AM
(Alternate
1: B8ZS
(Binary
0: Mode
1
1: Mode
2
0: No
1:
Yes
Super
Mark
8-zeros
Frame)
t
lnverslon)
t
i
n
SJ
suppression)
8
(No system
(System
S
e
Frame)
response
responds
to
to
loop&ac&.)
loopback.)
c
aoff
1: on
0 to 5
(2)
0 to
15
j
24
RF1 Key - System
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Sheet-of
S
Y
8
t
e
Address / Feature
In
-4#-3#-4#-(0to 9oooM (Master cabinet)
-5#-3#-4#-(oto5QOO)u (slave cabinet)
0 to 9000/24h
sianal counter (Sla LossCount)
-4#-3#-5+(0to 5xmo)# (Master cabinet)
-5#-3#-5#-(0t09000)x (Slave cabinet)
Svnc loss counter (Svnc LossCount)
0 to 9000/24h
d
e
Loss
-4#-3#-#-(0t05aOO)x
-S#-3#-#-(0 to 9000)#
(Master
cabinet)
(slave cabinet)
Yellow alarm counter (Yet Alm Count)
(Master cabinet)
-4x-4#-l#-(0 to 1)X
(5lave cabinet)
-5#-4#-1X-(0 to I)#
Yellow alarm relay (Ye1Alm Relay)
(Master cabinet)
-4X-4X-2+(0to 1)#
(5lave cabinet)
-W-4%-2+(0 to l)#
Red alarm relay (Red Aim Relay)
(Master cabinet)
-4%-4#-3%-(Oto1)R
(slave cabinet)
-5#-4#-3n-(oto I)#
Loss relay
(Master cabinet)
-4#-4#-4%-(0t0 1)X
(5Jave cabinet)
-5#-4#-4n-(oto l)#
Frame loss relav (Frm Loss Relav)
(Master cabinet)
-4#-4#-5n-(oto I)#
(slave cabinet)
-5#-4#-5#-(0t0 I)#
A6 relay
(Master cabinet)
-4#-4#-6#-(Oto I)#
(Slave cabinet)
-5#-4#-6#-(Oto l)#
&limed
Alarm relay reset
1: Manual
Trunk Type
W
i
1: Ground Start 1
2: Ground Start 2
3: E&M
l?FlKey-Sptem
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Sheet
of
Y
8
t
e
m
W
i
DID/DNIS
table
(DID/DNIS)
-6#(1 to 64)#-3#-(0
Outgoing
1: Outgoing
bit setting
(Robbing
to 64)#-7#-(0
dialing
Dial tone
I 0: off
(BT Send)
0: off
1: On
to 1M
detection
0: on
1: On
(RBT Send)
to 2)#
(Other
I
1: On
(DT Receive)
-7#(o to 99%9#-2#-(0
-&/(I
1: On
to 1)Y
transmission
alarms
0: off
(DT Send)
generation
-6#(1 to 64)#-ll#-(0
Ringback
1: DtMF
Dial)
to l)#
-6#(1 to 64)#-lO#-(0
Dial tone
(Incoming
to l)#
transmission
f
signal not used)
0: Dial pulse (1 OPPS)
method
transmission
only
1: On CABCD s/gnu/ used)
bit set)
to l)#
-6#(1 to 64)#-9#-(0
Busy tone
0: Off (ABCD
to I>#
-6#(1 to 64)#-8#-(0
Other
0: Bothwoy
to 2)#
mode
Incoming
Sfat/rlngdown
1: Wink start
type
-6#(1 to &I)#-61140
-6#(l
0: lmmedlote
to 1I#
-6#(1 to 64)#-H-(0
Robbing
Staff
1: Wink stati
2: Dial Tone start
-6#(1 to 64)#-4#-(0
Trunk
0: lmmedute
to 211
type
Incoming
d
e
1: DID
2: DNIS
Aim
Det)
oto
15
oto
15
(1) (1 - 250 ms)
I
I
to &a)#-(10 to 69 or 100 to 699M
26
FFl
Key - System
S
Y
8
t
e
m
W
i
d
e
S
e
t
t
i
n
Q
8
2
r
c
d
F
F
2
he FF2 Key is for programming trunk lines
and acts as an interface between the CO
or DID trunk lines and the DBS system.
K
e
Y
There are two programming forms for the FF2 Key:
The Trunk Port list is for assigned names
and TelCo circuit numbers.
The Trunk Features list is for recording any
of the 25 features that can be programmed
on each trunk port.
Notes:
(1) The Pooled Tmk Group Access settings in the FF2
Key (Trunks’ programming) are different from the
Trunk Group settings in the FF8 Key (LCR programming):
(a) Trunk lines set in the FF2 Key are accessed by
the user with access codes (9, 8 1 to 86).
(b) Trunk lines set in the FF8 Key are automatically
selected by the system.
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
28
FF2Key-TrunkRwts
Account
Address
Addre
Account
Phone (Main List)
T
r
U
n
k
P
0
r
t
L
i
8
t
#?F2Key-TmnkPb~
Trunk
Ports
I ~‘.y”.-..
(Circuit
..“...D.
Number)
U
n
L
i
S
t
f
FlCZKey-TmnkRrts
DBS Account Name
Account Address
r
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Adctre~~ I Feature
I
Progrcml
optkms
I
I
I
I
Sheet
Trunk Ports (01-W
I
I
I
P
of
I
T
r
I
I
I
U
n
k
0: No pooled
Pooled trunk access, Group
-(l to 6A)#-W-(0
or 111
Pooled trunk access, Group
-(l to 64#-9#-(0
or l)#
Pooled trunk access, Group
-(l to 64)Clow1
or a0
Trunk llne type
-(l to 64)#-1 l#-(0 of l)#
Enables DISA
Private
84
85
86
1: Group 84
0: No pooled
l:GfoupE!s
0: No poded
1: Group 86
1: CO line
2: PBX he
trunk access
i
trunk access
trunk access
line port number
MF signal sending
omlng
ring signal
S
e
t
t
time
1:3secsON/l
secOFF
2: 2 sea ON/2 sea OFF
3: 1 set ON/l set OFF
4: 1 secON/2secsOFF
5: 1 secON/3secsOFF
6: 5 set ON/.5 set OFF
7: .5 set ON/.5 set OFF
.5 see ONl2.5 sea OFF
8: .5 set ON/X5 sea OFF
n
Q
s
FF2Key-IVunkPorts
Account
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Address
r
Addross
/ Fwh~ro
I
Program
OptIons
I
I
I
I
sheet
Trunk Ports (01-64)
I
I I I
of
T
r
I
I
U
n
k
Trunk disconnect
timer
P
0
r
t
-(l to 64)#-19f-(HHMMM
7: SO ms
8: 4OOms
9: 45orns
10: 5ooms
11: 55oms
12: 6ooms
13:65orn.s
ld: 7txms
15: 750 ms
No entry d defaun
S
e
t
t
i
n
Q
s
c
1: Ground-start
trunk
(CPC-B Va 2.0)
r
32
FF2Key-TrunkPorts
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Sheet
of
T
r
u
n
k
P
(CPC-B Va 2.0)
3.0 FF3-351
0
1: 15seconds
2 16seconds
3: 17smnds
4 I8socalds
5 19seconds
6:2oseconds
7: 21 seconds
8:22seconds
lo:
11:
12:
13:
r
t
S
e
t
t
i
18 seconds
18 seconds
18seconds
18seconds
n
!Y
a
(CPC-8 Va 2-a)
!30. FF3-351
Tl port clas
- trunk
(CPC-B Vs. 4.0 or high.0
r
he FF3 Key is for programming
extensions. The 36 feature available for this
key represent 36 submodes (l# to 36#).
F
F
3
Telephone Types, submode 2#, default automatically to data
settings 1 through 7 or can be set in programming mode using
data 8 through 19.
K
e
Y
The number ofbuttons or keys on the telephone determine how
many FF keys are available for programming.
DBS telephone
models come in 16-, 22-, and 34-button sets.
There are several programming
programming:
forms
avaiZable for extension
The Extension Ports form summarizes the
programming on all extension ports and is for
use by the installer/programmer.
below are located at the backof this mama2
inunediately following the RF1 0 Key information:
Theforms
expU.ned
The Extension Summary form is for recording
features programmed on a single extension port.
The salesperson or programmer and the system
administrator
will use this form to design a
program for an extension port. Refer to the
Extension General hformztim
and the Extension
Programning boxes on this form. Use a separate
form for each extension port. Photocopy the
original form and use only the copies.
The Summary
the Customer.
To copy extension
another extension
Key Plan or the Key Plan are for
Use either form as appropriate.
featuresjhm
one extension
port, use the FF9 Key.
Save Your Original
port
to
Forms!!!
i\
34
EF3Key-mns
J
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Addross
-(l
to
/
144)#-11(100
to
699/10
Extension
numbers
-(l to 144)#-2#-(0
Telephone
types
of
(CPC-6
hlghor)
Vs.
20
of
F.&MO
1 to
Program
to
Extonskn
options
140
0:
1:
2:
19)#
-(l to
EM/24
144)#-3#-(001
to 144)X
console
station-port
number
-(I
144)X-/#-(0
Forced
LCR
-(l to
Forced
-(l to
Station
or
to 6W/10
to 69:
No assignment
Analog
telephone
Dlgital
telephone
Of 1M
account
144)~~66(4
lockout
L
-
Extonslons
or l)#
slgnal
-(l to lM)W-#-(0
Call
waiting
or
I)#
-(l to 144)#-Pi-(0
Busy
override
or
1)X
to
144)#-W-(0
or
Busy
overridden
-(l to
Prime
144)#-116(0
of
line preference
-(l to
Ringlng
144)#-12#-(0
01 l)#
line
preference
-(I
to
144)C13#-(0
Unsupervised
-(l
SMDR
to
printout
l)#
o(
conference
144)#-14#-(0
of
FFl-2#-I#-174
l)O(FF2-lH,FF-3#-11I
-
Extension-wide
or
l)#(FFl-21.-21-61)
Incomlna
cdts
t
0
telephone
(12
FF Ilnes)
telephone
(24
FF lines)
i
(6 FF Ilnes)
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
Reserved
DSLT (Vs. 3.0 or higher)
EM/24
VB-43310
OPX (pulse)
OPX (tone)
Voice
mall (AEC)
11:
12:
13:
14:
DSSl
DSS2
DSS3
DSS4
-
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
EM/ar
1 to
0
n
P
0
r
t
8
lO/lCKl
lo/100
ll/lOl
ll/iOl
nd
connoclod
144~ Stored
extensions
LCR
restrict/cm
for
on
oubld~
d delmli
9999: Statlon
2 to
lockout
W
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EM/24
cd/s
LCR
I:Exhns&nPortstand2
0: Eafonsbn
Potts
0: No call wattlng
l)#(Seo
X
4: Dlgttal
No dry
ooa3 to
code
-(l to 144)#-7(1-(0
CO line off hook
-(l
code
R
E
3: Dlgltal
1: Forced
0: Disabk
1: Enable
digits)##
144)
n
a
Q No
1)X
restriction
144)~~W-(0
verified
(1 to
69)#
15: Voice
mall (OPX)
16: First attendant
console
17: Second
altendant
console
18: Third
attendant
console
19: Fourth
aftendant
console
to
Pats
code
-
I:
0:
1:
0:
Cd
wattha
Dbab&
Enable
Rejects
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I:
0:
1:
0:
Accepts
Dbabh
Enable
Dkable
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I: En&k
0: Dkabh
1: Enable
0: Dkable
I: EndJk
c
FF3Key-Extensions
Account
Address
Account
c
Phone (Main List)
h
E
-(I
to
CO
lU)#-15f-(0
line
of
off-hook
1 to
slgnol
-(l
to
lU)I-W-(0
Q
CO
-(l
llne off hook
to lU)#-171-(0
slgml
PSD
-(l
names
to
(5
or
ICI
sets
extensions
-(l
to lU)C20#-(0
to
10
norms)
- large
poQe
groups
u
l)#
02
Sets extensl0ns
-(l
to lu)(r-22+(0
to
page
groups
of l)#
03
%tS
t0
PClge
04
QRXPS
u
to
medium
0
l)#
p&Je
groups
u
11*
05
1:
Page
0:
9o.a
not
1:
Page
0:
o0.a
1:
Page
grocp
0:
D0.a
no/
Page
grq
05
0o.a
not
behmg
page
1
to
0:
1
No ctnngo
to 24: See
Sets adnskms
-(l to lU)#-26+(0
idle
dkpkxy
-(l
to
ID1
off
-(l
to
ID1
colt
t0
-
large-dkpluy
144)&27#-(0
hook
PaQ0
Qt0’JPs
u
1 to 24H
Q
dkpW
lU)I-28+(0
u
status
kXQe-dkpkYY
24)#
diillng
1 to
during
-(l
CO
to lu)r-sor-(o
u
line call
d&pkry
1 to 24)l
after
diing
-(l
to lU)r-31r-(0
Page
call
dkplay
u
-
1 to 24)1
brge-dkplcw
-(l
Q
1 to
Cal
-(l
waltlng
to
Intercom
-(l
to
Extension
dkplay
lu)r-3s(0
busy
tone
lU)#-34C(O
u
directory
-(l to 1u)~-35.-(0
hlghor)
Extension
clcss
u
kxJe-dkplov
1 to
24)#
dkpkzy
-
display
of
24)#
I)#
oI
to
pqp
Qc4@
01
P
to
m
qoLp
02
to
pqp
Qolp
05
to
page
gu#J
04
to
pqa
qarp
07
0
r
t
a
c.
06
-9
24:
See
programming
Mawal
ograrwnlng
Mcnud
24H
-
to lU)M9e-(0
u
line call
dkplay
lU)(I-32#-(0
n
24)#
-(l
CO
to
00
kq?AkP~
1 to
display
Qarp
07
telephone
1 to
-
Qroql
not
page
04
Mong
1:
0o.a
to
01
-9
0:
1:
l)r
I
00
Mong
group
not
0:
of
wing
grq
not
-(l
lU)I-2940
e
volume
I
sets extensions to WQe Qrwps 06
to
t
wkme
display
Doea
sets
extensions
to
-(l
to 144)#-21I-(0
sets
extensions
-(l
to lU)II-w-co
l-igher
l)#
01
lu)r-zsr-(o
3:
me&ml
i
page
groups
of l)#
0xtensionS
Lowu
pattern
00
to
2
volume
n
8
page
groups
u
l)#
-(l
Mlnlrnum
I)#
u
Sets extenslms
-(l
to lU)r-lPI-(O
1:
1H
OI
lU)*-lM-(O
X
4)(1
volume
1 to
service
0:
large-dkpluy
(CPC-B
6)#
large
(CPC-I)
setting
va.
1
No
to
Rogrammlng
Manual
Programming
Mcnwl
dratgo
24:
See
2.0)
dkpm
VI
3.0
i
0
1 to
8:
Set
to
IndMdwl
extension
36
FlQ Key - JZxtensions
DES Account Name
kcount
Address
Address
-(I
to
14&#-36#-(0
RIngback
tone
Cutover Oate
Account Phone (Main List)
/
to
wtth
Extmston
Foaturo
2H
(WC-B
busy
Vs.
0:
3.0)
to
lU)#-37#-(1
Tl port
(CF’C-B
to
3 or
class
station
Vs. 4.0 or hQh.0
7 to
-(l to
hlghor)
~MH-39#-(0
Extension
-(I
to
hlghor)
DSLT
-(l
ring
IM)#-UU-(0
handset
to
144)#-41#-(0001
-(l
to
hlghor)
Permanent
call
tone
e
n
0
7: OPT1
i
n
lo:
CONF
11:
MFRl
MFRZ
0
(SCC)
Vs.
3.0
or
0: BrokUs
hobd
1:
conference
9H
(WC-B
Vs.
3.0
or
0: 0-d
(CPC-B
to
Vs.
3.0
(CPC-B
lnltiie
on
1: 3 set
ON/l
set
OFF
ON/2
set
OFF
ON/l
set
OFF
ON/2
set
OFF
5:
ON/3
set
1 set
@hrrt
Vs.
3.0
or
(WC-B
(CPC-B
Vs.
Vs.
OFF
set
OFF
set
sac
OFF
OFF
set
OFF
OFF
SlT
t-
h proonrm
ON/l
set
OFF
2: 2 set
3: 1 set
ON/2
ssc
OFF
ON/2
set
OFF
4: 1 set
ON/3
set
OFF
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
1 set
ON/5
set
OFF
1 set
ON/7
set
0.5 set
0.5 set
0.5 set
0:
Nonmaf
“=:
rtng
sdng
1: 3 set
1: Louder
9999H
dng
2: 2 set
3: 1 set
4: 1 set
6: 0.5 set ON/OS
7: 0.5 set ON/OS
0.5 set ON12.5
8: 0.5 set ON/3.5
9: 1 set ON/7
set
0: DO&WICWI~
on
or
call
trunk
OFF
ONf3.5
ON/J.5
ON/3.5
set
OFF
set
OFF
set
OFF
(+6dB
Gain)
No
relocallon
Nof
lowurdod
codas
-
sot
-
codes
144~~42#-(0
to
X
t
Wngback
(WC-B
level
3.0 w hlghor)
Auto
set
relocaiion
s/gnat
sQnal
l#
111
vdume
Q
E
144)
8: OPT2
9: DTMF
(.SlT/OPW
or
(1 to
3: DATA
.. c
PM
pattern
busy
wltt~
Ports
2: SLT
MTEL)
to
ton.
of
1: KTEL
13H
12:
-(l
to 144)#-3W-(0
or
hlghor)
SLT hook
flash
-(l
to 144H-39#-(0
to
hlghorl
Extension
ring
pattern
Rtngback
1: Busy
signal
2:
-(l
sheet
3)#
3.0
0:
or
1: Busy/No
forward
answer
2: eusy
3: No answer
-(l
to
higher)
Permanent
-(I
to
hlahor)
MljMCil
144)#-UI-(NN(N))#
call
(WC-B
forward
IM)#-UI-(O
separailon
or
Vs.
3.0
01
NN(N):
extension
l)#
(CFC-B
Call
forward
exMnsion
number
Vs.
4.0
or
0: MC0
1: ML
keys
kevs
3
';
I
he FF4 Key is for setting ring assignments to each trunk.
F
The attendant position (port 1) defaults to ring (data 1). All
other extension ports default to no r-kg (data 0).
F
Ring settings are assigned for day, night, day-delayed,
delayed, extension, and extension-delayed ring.
K
night-
4
e
Y
To assign a ring to Recall timers or to set Call Forward No Answer, refer to the FFl Key forms on pages 8, 9, 10,
11, 12, and 17.
There are four programming
assignment information:
forms
for
recording
ring-
The Hunt Group Tables form and the Call Coverage Group
Extension Tables form are surnmary sheets for the installer/
programmer
and are helpful
cross-references
for the
Customer since the same information is also on the Extension
Summary form and Key Plan.
The forms explained below cue located at the buck of this
manual immedia.teZy foUowing the FFIO Key information:
The Extension Summary form is for the salesperson
system administrator.
Refer to the Ringing Assignment
on this form.
Note: See the DBS Programming Guicfance Manual
five (5) ring-assignment addresses.
and
box
Section 400, for the
See the Addendwn
to the DBS Progranuning lnsb-uctions. Section
400B, for the eleven (11) Hunt Group addresses.
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
i
38
liYF4 Key - Ring Assignment
DBS Account Name
Accbunt Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
sheet
of
cl
Day
FF4-1X-(1 to 145)%-(1 to &I)#-(0 or l>U
See FFl -2X-4+ 1#
0
Night
FF4-2X-(1 to 14!Wo
See FFl-2#-4R-lt
0
Day-Delayed
FF4-5+(1 to 14%&o to &W-(0 or 1Y
c1
Night-Delayed
FF4-W(1 to 14!5)#< 1 to 64)%<0 or 1I#
cl
Extension
FF4-7#-(1 to 144)#< 1 to 144)%-tO or 1)B
c
cl
Extension-Delayed
FF4-#<1 to 14&W
to &I)#-(0 or 1)P
to L&W-CO or l>a
A
tl
3
i
n
Q
A
8
s
i
Q
n
m
e
11
t
FIT4 Key - Ring Assignment
Adcount
Address
-
Hunt Group 1
Yot Name
lot ExVPofl
me
qF Extension
?F Timer
tiension
xtension
xtension
xtension
xtension
xtension
xtension
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Pilot Name
Pilot ExVPOrt
Type
TRF Extension
TRF Timer
Extension 1
Extension 2
Extension 3
Cdbneinn
d
-ensIon
‘ilot Name
TRF Timer
Extension 1
Extension 2
Pilot Name
Pilot Ext./Port
Type
TRF Extension
TRF Timer
Extension 1
Extension 2
Extension 3
H
Pilot
Pilot
Type
TRF
TRF
Name
ExVPort
Extension
Timer
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
U
n
t
1
2
3
4
5
T
0
a
b
Day Delayed RingNight Delayed Ring-
lay Delayed Ring-
Hunt Group 3
Day Delayed Ring-
i
FF4 Key - Ring Assignment
DBS Account
\i
Account
Name
Cutover
Date
Addre
Extension Tab14
cdlCoverogeGfoup2
CdlCoverogeGroup3
Cdl Coverage
Group 4
Extension
l-
Covering
Extension
1-
Covering
Extension
l-
2-
COVWiIlQ
k-tension
2-
Covering
&tension
2-
A
Covering
Extension
l-
Covering
Covering
Extension
2-
Coveting
Exiension
Extension
3
Extension
3
Extension
3
a
Extension
4
Extension
4
Extension
4
Extension
5
Extension
5
Extension5
1
1
Extension
6
Extension
6
Extension
6
Extension
7
Extension
7
Edetion
7
C
Extension
8
Extension
8
Extension
8
0
a
C
V
Cdl Coverage
Group 5
cdl
coverage
Group
6
Cdl Coverage Group 7
Cdl Coverage
Covering
ExtensiOn
l-
COV&lQ
Extension
l-
Covering
Covering
Extension
2-
covefinQ
Extension
2-
Extension
3
Extension
3
Extension
4
Extension
Extension
5
Extension
Extension
b
Extension
Extension
Group 8
Extension
l-
Covering
Extension
l-
CovefinQ
Extension
2-
Covf3finQ
Extension
2-
Extension
3
Extension
3
4
Extension
4
Extension
4
5
, Extension
5
Extension
5
Extension
6
Wetion
6
Extension
6
7
Extension
7
&tendon
7
Extension
7
8
Extension
8
Extension
8
Extension
8
e
r
a
Q
e
G
r
0
U
P
Cdl Coverage
Gfoup 9
cdl coverage
Group 10
Cdl Coverage Group 11
Cdl Coverage
Group 12
Covering
Ex.tension
l-
Covering
Extension
l-
Covering
Extension
l-
Coveimg
Extension
l-
Covering
Extension
2-
Covering
Extension
2-
Covering
Ex-tension
2-
Covering
Extension
2-
Extension
3
Extension
3
Extension
3
Extension
3
Extension
4
Extension
4
Extension
4
Extension
4
5
Extension
5
Extension
5
Extension
5
Extension
Extension
6
Extension
6
Extetion
6
Extension
6
Extension
7
Extension
7
Edension
7
Extension
7
8
Extension
8
Extension
8
Extension
8
Extension
Cdl Coverage
Group 1:
Cdl Coverage
CdlCoverogeGfoupl4
Group 15
Cdl Coverage
Group 16
Covering
Exfension
I-
Covering
Extension
I-
Covering
Extension
l-
Covering
Exkmsion
1__
Covering
Extension
2-
Covering
Extension
2-
Covering
E&nsbn
2-
Covering
Extension
2-
3
Extension
3
Extension
3
Extension
3
Extension
Extension
4
Extension
4
Extendon
4
Extension
4
Extension
5
Extension
5
Extension
5
Extension
5
Extension
6
Extension
6
Extension
6
Extension
6
Extension
7
Extension
7
Extension
7
Extension
7
Extension
8
Extension
8
Extension
8
s
4
i
he FF5 Key is for setting pre-programmed
feature codes to extension ports. Remooe any
CO line or pooled trunk information with the
CONF key before programming the FE5 features.
In addition to the 16-, 22-, and 34-button telephones, you
can also prograxn FF5 features on the AFP (Attendant
Feature Package) Console, the DSS/72, and the EM/24.
forms for 8F5 Key features.
7here are four prtgrm
AU of these forms are for the instakr/pmgrummer:
TheExtensionKe~formonpage43andthe
sample form on page 44 are for recording
Personal Speed Dial and Flexible Feature
information for a single extension. Use one
for-r-nfor each extension port. Photocopy the
original form and use only the copies.
The AFP (Attendant
Feature Package)
Console F’F Keys form on page 45 is for
recording AFP progmmming. The shaded areas on the form represent fIxed AFP console
keys. The AFP is available only on CPC-B
Version 2.0.
The DSS/72 FF Keys form on page 46 is for
recordi.ngallattendantconsoleprogrammmg,
including the AFP.
The EM/24 FF Keys form on page 47 is for
recording trunks or extensions assigned to
specific extension ports.
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
E
F
F
5
K
e
Y
I??5 Key - Fkible’Featums
Penonal Speed Dial (PSD)
FFl O-2#-( 1 to 144)#-(90
P!sD
CODES
90
to W#-( 16 digits)#
Name / Number
L
B
E
X
J
93
94
95
96
97
98
t
e
n
8
i
99
0
n
I
Mullt-llne Key Assignment
I
FFKeys
1 ML5 (85) 1
1
Flexible Feature Key Assignment
FFS-( 1 to lM)#-(
1 to 24WCONF-(Up
Feature
Code
1
I
1 ML9 (9) I
to 6 digits)ll
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
19
20
21
22 .
23
24
13
.14-
15
16
17,
18
7 -
8 .
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6-
c
16 Key Telephone
22 Key Telephone
34 Key Telephone
(VW221
0,42211,42213)
(VB-43220,43221,43223,43225)
(VB-43230,43231,432X3)
= FF Keys 1 to 6
= FF Keys 1 to 12
= FF Keys 1 to 24
1
(For Feature Codes and Tl
Alarm Key Assignment, See FFKey Code Chart on Page 74)
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Sheet
of
Personal Speed Dii (PSD)
FFlO-2141 to 144)+(90 to 99)#-(16 d@ts)#
Name / Number
I
90
,opmtm
a
91
solis
92
sauk
3m
4m
93
94
95
ap-*t-m
73
BCCW.
c91-w1-555-f234
1
E
x
t
e
P
S
i
0
n
MutMne Key Assignment
FF5-(1 to 144)#-(1 to 24WCONF-(81 to 86,89M
T-
Name / Number
FFKeys
1
Flexible Feature Key Assignment
FFS-(1to 144)#-(1 to W&CONF-(Up’
Feature
Code
ML1 (81)
ML2 (82)
ML3(83)
faZ3
ML4(84)
ML5(85)
ML6 (86)
ML9 (9)
8
L
4,s
6 7
I4
15 th$gh 22
4 thmvBlr u, 23
to 6 Qgits#
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
..
Feature
Code
19
20
21
.22
23
124
13
14
15 .
1 16
17 .
I 18.
7 .
1 -
D&s 210
Pa0
ML1
81
8
2
!D.ssm
I1220
!ML9
89
K
9
3
GP*-h
70
ML9
89
,.
4
XllTage
RIO
lXSl20
m
16KeyTelephone(\16-42210,42211,a2213)=ff
Keys 1 to6
22 Key Tete~hone (V&43220,43221,43223,43225)
= FF Keys 1 to 12
34 Key Telephone (\/B-43230,43231,43233)
= FF Keys 1 to 24
11,
5
BPf
~~
lxs
130
!Pl30
,12
6 .
-Rhk
‘3
!D.s.s140
m40
(For F&turn Codes and 11
Alarm Key Assignment, See FFKey Code Chart on Page 74)
..
44
FF5 Key - FkxibZe
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Featzms
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Sheet-of
This Table for
1 st Attendant
Console
2nd Attendcmt
Console
3rd Attendant
Console
4th Attendant
Console
E
A
F
P
c
0
P
s
0
1
e
F
F
\ r
K
FFS-(149
k 1s2wm
to SwcoNF-
m
wS/7ldlFkyr
e
hvkw
Y
s
u
F&(149
k Ia-(01
to 32WCONF-
[PIK)CPPOCUD
Riitsii
/Key1 Feahin
*
1Kev i -Feature
Indicate External Page
Zone with an asterisk.
Feah~ro
Feature
1Kevl Feature
- Fixed Feclture
I Kev I Feature
EZKI
I Kevl
- D&un
Feature
for 3 dii
I Kev I Feature
(or 2 digits)
4-c
FE5 Key - FZexibZe Features
Account
Address
Account
Phone (Main List)
DSS/72 FF Key Assignments
B
lettside
Key Fealure
65
Key Feature
PAGE0
57 pAGia3
66
PAGE1
58
PARK1
Key Feature
67 pAGE2
Key Feature
59 p-
68
PAGE.3
60
PAM3
D
S
S
/
7
2
F
F
K
e
Y/
8
Ext.
,
p~No.
1stDSSConsotefor
1st Attendant
2nd DSS Consot.
1St Attendant
1st DSS Ccnsole
mdAblu!ant
2nd
2nd
*
Indicate
DSS Console
Attefldant
f-J
for
for
for
0
Key Feature
69
PAGU
61 p-
Key Feature
70 pPAW5
Key Feature
71pPNM
Key Feature
72PNW
0
0
External Page Zone with an asterisk.
46
E‘FS Key - Flexible Features
DBS Account Name
Account Addre
Cutover
Date
EM/24 FF Key Assignments
You need both the FF3 key crnd the FF5 key to program
the EM/24 Cons/e.
47
he FF6 Key, in combination with the
DSS/72, can create messages for absence message codes 5 to 9, and can
assign names to extensions, system speed dial,
personal speed dial, trunk lines, and hunt group
pilot extensions.
1
13
F
F
6
K
e
When there are several DSS units, use only the unit
positioned nearest the telephone for programming.
Y
Use the Name Assignment formwith the Speed Dial
I&t, Key Plan, and Summary Key Plaq. All these
forms are for the installer / programmer.
Save Your Original
1
(
.-
Forms!!!
1
48
FEY3 Key - Nane
Account
Addre
Assignment
Account
(CON0 Clear Data
Phon
Use the DSS to enter Names
1
13
N
a
m
e
A
8
s
Sp:
Bs:
C:
-:
Use Keypad to enter Numbers
EXWlSbNFM-IX-(1 to lM)R-(10
-M==w
chamcters~
Use with Key Plan or Summary
FF6-M-(5
Key Plan
SSDNcme&sQment
FF6-28400 to 89)#-( 16 &xactersM
A name can be stored in each System Speed Dial
code (00 to 89).
Use with Speed Dial list
PSD Name iesignment
FF6-3#-(1 to 144)#-(90 to 99)#-(16
charoctws)#
A name can be stored in Personal Speed Dial
codes (90 to 99) for each extension port (001 to
144).
Use with Speed Dial list
i
Q
n
m
e
xl
t
8
Space
Backspace
Movetoieft
Move to right
to 9)#-(15 chamctefsb
Store Absence Messages in message codes (5 to 9).
Each message can be a maximum of 15 characters.
Messages (0 to 4) cannot be changed.
0: In Meeting
1: At Lunch
2: Out of Office
3: Vacation
4: Another Offrice
5:
6:
7:
8:
9
Ttunk Ncme Asigmmt
(CPC-8, V2.0)
FF6-SR-(1 to 64)#-(6 chcmcters)#
A trunk name can be a maximum
Hunt Group f’ilot Name Ass&merit
FF6-#-( 1 to 8)#-( 10 charcicters)#
A pilot name can be a maxtmum
of 6 characters.
(CPC-B, V.2.0)‘
of 10 characters.
Cd WcMng Text Reply (cpc-E, m.o or higher)
FF6-7#-(1 to 5)#-(15 chcm&rsM
The answer can be a matimum
of 15 characters.
4 (_
he FF7 Key is for programming
toll
restricted
Area and Office codes. The submodes are (l# to 9#).
7hereareseuenfoms
ades:
iheinstaller/prqgrammer
canusetorecord
these
The TRS System Settings form is for submode l#. ‘This
programming affects the entire toll restrict system.
TheTRS&eaCodes/OfficeCodesformisforsubmodesZ#
and 3#. It establishes restrictions for Classes of Restriction
3 to 6.
The TRS Special Area Code Tables form is for submodes 4#
and 5#. It is for Classes of Restriction 3 to 6. Each of the four
tablescanacceptonethousand(1,000)officecodeoramacode
entries.
The 7-Digit Call Restrict form is for submode 6#. Use this
optional table to restrict up to tMy 7-digit numbers for Classes
of Restriction 2 to 6.
PI
F
F
7
K
e
Y
c
The TRS Day / Night Assignments form is for submodes 7#
and 8#. In most cases, the “all-trunk” setting is used for each
extension, but excepfioIls can be made wherever needed.
Enter trunk number and COR (0 to 7). Photocopy the original
form and use a separate page for day and night.
The TRS Block Mode form is for submode 9#. Record default
changes (deny, allow) for each CORkom 3 to 6 throughout the
toll restrict system.
7hefol7nexpzuinedbebwislocatedattibackofthismanual
.
.
zmm&at@foUowing
the IF1 0 Key information:
Summary form is for assigning toll reslrictions to each extension. Use one form for each extension port.
Photocopy the original form and use only the copies. Refer to
the TdRes~nbox
on this form.
The Extension
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
50
FlVKey-TRS
’ 3%
Account
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Name
Sheet
of
I
n Settings 1
International
calls
ofWe
-l#-2#
Incoming
calls
-l#-3%
Maximum
digits dialed
code
tab/8
0: Disable
I: m&8
T
R
S
Not f8Shkted
-I#-AX
211 dial restriction
-l#-5#
311 dial restriction
-l#-6#
411 dial restriCtiOn
-l#-7#
511 dial restriction
-111-M
611 dial restriction
-l#-9#
7 11 dial restriction
-l#-low
811 dial restriction
-I#-1 l#
911 dial restriction
See FF7-M
-111-121
74g1i
1 to 15: 15th to 29th digit
0: Allow
1: Deny
0: Allow
1: Deny
0: A/low
1: Deny
0: Allow
1: Deny
0: Allow
1: Deny
0: Allow
1: Deny
0: Allow
1: Deny
0: A/law
1: Deny
0: Allow
resirkt table COR Tvpe 2
See FF7-M
-l#-13#
-11-141
7-ciigit
restrict table COR Tvpe 2
see FF7-6#
restrId table COR TYW 2
1: R8ddCt
0: Allow
?: i?8SfdCt
0: Allow
I: Resfrkf
S
Y
s
t
e
m
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
A
r
e
f
-
-
-
-
-
----
-
.::~::::::::::
.\...:..:.-
1:
-
I-
bi ::.:.:.z::::::
-
-
-
-
-
~
-
___
~
-
-
-
-
-
. . . . . . . . ..y.
7..
.:.A:.:.:.‘:..:.:
.::
,.:.
,.
.::
,.
-
-
-
. ....
Class of Restriction
~
(COR)
-
-
52
FYVKey-ZftZS
1
PBS Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Sheet
---
(3 to 6)l
-
-
--
-
-
-
-
-
of
::i$!:.
F:F&
T
R
S
COR
(
‘:
A
r
e
---m----
(3to6)
I
-
-
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
------
--------
a
/
0
f
f
i
C
e
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
__
-
-
COR
l-----------(3 to 64 ___
. .: ....:;.
3......“...:
___
___
d Special Office Codes (000 to 999)
Class of Restriction
(COR)
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
sheet
of
FF7-6#-(1
F7-l#-(12to
16)#-(Oar
l)#
D
i
Q
i
t
c
C
a
1
1
R
e
s
t
r
i
C
t
i
0
n
S
l Noentriesatddautt
54
Account
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main Ust)
Address
sheet
0
DAY
FF7-7#-( 1 to 144)#-( 1 to &I)# or (65)#-(0 to 7)#
0
NIGHT
FF7-8#-( 1 to lb!)+(
1 to 64)# or (&)#-(0
of
to 7)#
R
42
43
s
44
D
a
Y
49
I
53
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
N
t
I
26
77
-65
1
I
I
I
I
I
5-c
DES Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Sheet
of
FF7-9#-(1 to 16)#-(0 or l)#
-9#- 1%
Area Code - COR 3
-9#-2%
Area Code - COR 4
-9#-3w
Area Code - COR 5
0: Allow
1: Deny
0: Allow
1: Deny
0: Allow
1: Deny
B
Office Code - COR 3
1
0
ck
Office Code - COR 5
M
0
Office Code - COR 6
d
e
he FF8 Key controls economy trunk lines for
designated calling areas. The submodes are
(l# to 8#).
The following forms are for the iizstaUer/pr
The LCR Area Codes/Office Codes form for
submodes l# and 2# establishes area code
tables and office code tables.
The LCR Of!fice Codes for Special AreaCodes
form is for submodes 3# and 4#. Ifthe customer
requires special area codes, set them in tables
1 to 4.
‘l3eLCRTimePriorityTabksformforsubmode
5# sets up time priority tables for the trunk
groups.
The Ix=R Trunk Groups form for submode 6#
separates trunks into groups.
The LCR Delete/Ad$
Tables form is for
submodes 7# (delete) and 8# (add).
TheDeleteTablerecordsupto
16digitsstripped
Tom an outgoing dialed number. Example:
delete an area code or l+ area code.
The Add Table records up to 16 digits added to
an outgoing dialed number. ICw-@e: adds a
carrier’s (MCI, Sprint, etc.) account number or
equal access number (1m).
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
K
e
Y
DBS Account
Name
Cutover Date
FFS-l#-(1
L3
-- -- -~
1I -~ -~ --
--- -- -- -
I
I
-
to 15)#-(000
I
I
or l)#
II
-
-
-
-
-
~
-
I-
-
-
-
~
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
~-
I-
to 999)#-(0
1!
of
1
------ - - ___
------ -- ~- -- --
-
I
Sheet
-
-
-
-
~
-
-
-
-
-
-
-.-
-
-
-
I
I
e
-
A
I: f
a
/
0
-
-----
I
f
f
I
.i
- - -
~
-
- - I- - - - - I
~
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
___
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
___
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
___
--
I
e
-----
J
1
c ___-
C
-
___- I I
-
-
-
-
I
I
Time Prlorlty
Table
(1 to 15)
58
DES Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Time Priority
Table
Special Area Codes FF8-3#-(1
-
-
-
-
-
-
to 4)#-(000
sheet
of
to 999)#
-
-
S
P
e
-
C-
fiecial
Area Code
-
i
a
1
(1 to 4)~
Table
A
-
-
-
-
-
:: :. .: . . . y.:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
:.:.:.:
:.-.
-
-
dOffice Code Entries (000 to 999)1
t
e
a
BlBKey-LCR
DES Account Nam
Account Address
unt Phone (Main List)
7:00 am - 8:OO am
:.:.>..
.+:.:
lK--2#~3#~4#
5#
6# P
7# -
s#
(Tnmk
ll#
9# --ax---
12#
13#
16#
14# -15#(Tmnk
17# .---18#-1~-~#-
25#
26#
21# -
27!#
28#
29#
3=L-~%~~#.-.-~#
22# ~-
30#
38#
42#
43#
4.M
45#
Groups)
@
..:::
.:::.:::
:...-.
i......
ii....
i......
:.:.“.
.......i
.:(.:.:.
..
.:...>
:.,_:.:.
..-..
.....
..:.>:..
.#
;$$!
....A
:::.
::j:::::
.::,x..
....
.._....
......
.._..A
..:.
..._...
...A.
..,.
.
::...
2
;,.,,._
..._
.-..
.:.:.:.:
Q
......
..:i.
.i..:.
::.
.:..
>..,i
.:.:.,.:
.:.
:::
:._j..
..
31#
a#
g
(Td Group) i$
.::.>:.
...:;
::
.._...
.:.::.:
.::..
::
.A....
...l
.
::.
..:
..:.:>
..;
:..
..A
.:::
:.:.:
.:.
:..
.;;:I
...\
39#
40#
..::
,::..:.
23#
24#
(TrunkGroups)
(TN&
l#
Groups)
j;::::
......:
$$f
@# -47#48#-
Groups)
f'Aa
e
P
I:
i
0
r
i
t
Y
“;::
:
.:;.:
II...
6C
FZV?Key-LCR
DBS Account Name
Account Address
1#--2#
Cutover Date
Phone (Main List)
Sheet --
of
Account
3#
4#
5#
6#
7#
8#
(Order within Each Trunk Group)
1#---2#-3#
4#
5#
6#
7#
(OKbf
1#-.-2#
3#
4#
5#
6#
withm Each Trunk Group)
7#
(oldet
8#
8#
withm Each Trunk Group)
I
L
C
R
T
r
U
n
1#p2#
3#
4#
5#
6#
7#
8#
@rder wilhm Each Trunk Group)
k
G
r
0
1#-2#
3#
4#
5#
6#
7# -- ’
(older
1#-2#.-3#
4#
5#
6#
8#
within Each Trunk Group)
7#
U
P
s
8#
(Order within Each Trunk Group)
1#-2#
3#
458
5#
6#
7#
8#
(Order within Each Trunk Group)
1#-e-2#
3#
4#
5#
6#
7#
(kf9f
8#
within Each Trunk Group)
61
RZ%Key-LB?
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
f
lLCR Delete/Add Tables1
FF8-7#-( 1 to 8)#-(Delete up to 16 digits)#
FF8-8#-( 1 to 8)#-(Add up to 16 digits)
Address
-7#-2%
-7#-3w
-7#-4#
-7#-SW
-7#-6R
-7#-7#
-7#-8#
-8#-1X
-8#-2#
-8#-3#
-8#-4#
-8#-5%
-8#-6W
-8#-7#
1
Feature
Trunk 01 - Delete
Trunk 02 - Delete
Trunk 03 - Delete
Trunk 04 - Delete
Trunk 05 - Delete
Trunk 06 - Delete
Trunk 07 - Delete
Trunk 08 - Delete
Trunk 01 - Add
Trunk 02 - Add
Trunk 03 - Add
Trunk 04 - Add
Trunk 05 - Add
Trunk 06 - kdd
Trunk 07 - Add
Trunk 08 - Add
I
Proaram Otiion’
LCR Delete Table
Dialing Digits
’ Delete
Dialing Digits
Delete
Dialing Digits
Delete
Dialing Digits
Delete
Dialing Digits
Delete
Dialing Digits
Delete
Dialing Digits
Delete
Dialina Diaits
Delete
LCR Add Table
Dialing Digits
Add
Dialing Digits
Add
Dialing Digits
Add
Dialing Digits
Add
Dialing Digits
Add
Dialing Digits
Add
Dialing Digits
Add
Dialina D&its
I Add
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
UD
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
I Selected O&ion’ I
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 diaits
:
a
L
C
R
d
8
up to
up to
up to
up to
up to
up to
up to
UD to
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 digits
16 diaits
1
8
t
8
/
A
d
d
I
l NoentriesutcWoutt
,
62
-.
he FF9 Key copies programmed
data from extension to extension, trunk to trunk, or FF key to FF
key. The sub-modes
are l# to 3#.
:-
Tnm&s/submode
l#. FF9-l#-(Ol
to 64)#-(01 to 64)##
Trunk features can be copied to another txunkwith the single
exception of the Private Line feature, which cannot be copied.
1
a
mtensions/submode
m
to 144)#-(1 to 144)##
2#. FF9-2#-fl
C
With four exceptions, all other features can be copied to any
extension in the DBS system.
7Ie&~exe@ons
are= extension number, telephone type,
station lockout code, and the EM/24 port number (BLF).
EFKeys/submode
3#. FF9-3#-(1
to 144)#-(1 to 14-4)##
Save Your Original
I
Forms!!!
1
63
he FFlO Key is for programming System
Speed Dial (SSD) and Personal Speed Dial
(PSD) numbers. There are 90 SSD codes
and 10 PSD codes in the DBS system.
The Speed Dial List is for recording the SSD and PSD
numbers.
SSD numbers are programmed
programmer or the attendant.
by the installer/
PSD numbers canbe programmed by the station user as
well as the attendant and installer/progmmmer. Distribute a copy of each Speed Dial List to every station user
in the system. Photocopy the original forrn and use only
the copies.
See instmctionsfor
ll-.
thel?FWCey to assignspeed diat
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
64
FFlO
DES Account Name
Account Address
Key - Speed DiaZing
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Sheet-of
PI
S
P
e
e
d
D
i
a
1
65
he Extension Summary form is for
recording all the FF3, 4, 6, and 7
Key features associated with each
extension port.
This
who
tion
Key
form is for the installer/programmer
will eventually transcribe the informaonto the Summary Key Plan or the
Plan for sign-off by the Customer.
:
CL
E
X
t
8
n
s
i
0
n
S
U
m
m
a
r
Y
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
66
Extension
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Extension General
Summary
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
Information
Sheet-of
~(1. ran
(FF3,6)
(1 to 144)
]16022034CI)Std.
7
Ex-tension Programming
ForcZz
Forced Veriied Acct Code
Station Lockout Code
CO Off Hook Signal
Call Waiting
. .Busy Override
Busy Overridden
Prime Une Preference
Ringing Line Preference
Unsupervised Conference
SMDR Printout
Off Hook Sianal Volume
Off Hook signal Puttem
Page Group Pickup
(External Paaina)
1 (FF3)
Mu/k
= Defautt
DEnable
0 Ditcrble
1 1
I I
1 1 1 4
DEnable
q Disable
1 Accept
0 Reject
lEnable
mm&/e
mAcc&
q Reiect
mEnable
nDiscrMe
~Etlable
i$isabie
DEnable
0 Discrble
loYes
ONo
i
1.2.3.4
none
b conmfe
00.01,02.03
I
04.05.06.07
1
1
I
I
m
E
X
t
e
.n
8
i
0
Hunf Group (FF4)
n
Hunt Group Member
Hunt Group Number
Hunt Type
Transfer Extension
Pilot Extension/Name
I to6
T/D/L
Ext. Ring Assign. Ext. 10 to 69 (100 to 699)
lmmediie
Delayed
U
cdl caverage
m
(FF4)
S
m
a
r
Y
Tall Resfdcfbn
DAY
-mS VW
~3 Type
TFS Type
TRSType
Uass of Resfricfian QF7)
Type (0 to 7)
Trunks (1 to 64)
DAY
Type (0 to 7)
IRS TYW
TRSType
TRSType
TRSTYW
Trunks (1 to 64)
67
Extension
DBS Account Name
Account Address
____
__
Cutover Date
Account Phone (Main List)
._ ___
.__..__
______-_
Ex-lension hrmral
Summary
InformatIon
Ext. Port
(1 to 14.4)
(FF3.6)
Extension
NlOto6W/lOto69)
Extension Rogramting
1 (FF3)
h/k
= DefauR
iEEl
Forced LCR (
Forced Verified Acct Code
Station Lockout Code
CO OfY Hook Signal
Call Waiting
Busy Override
Busy Overridden
Prime tine Preference
Ringing Line Preference
Unsupervised Conference
s‘MDR Printout
Off Hook Sianal Volume
Off Hook Signal Pattern
Page Group Pickup
(External Paging)
DEnable
HfIis. abh9
I- 1 I I :! I; I 4 ]
[7Dis
mabk
aanable
S1Accec bt OReject
able
!eiect
IllEn Iable
~D&able
I[aErwf9e
0 Disable
mnable
0 Disable
xept.-I-
q N0
1
1.2.3.m
q one
jqcontinue
od I ti.02.03
04.05.05.07
~1
EXTRing Pattern
0
E
x
t
e
Ringing Assignment
CO Ring Assiin.
Day
Niaht
Hunt Group (FF4)
.n
QF4)
8
Trunks (1 to 64)
i
IO9, 14
1 to 14
4
0
n
S
ll
m
m
Tdl Reshktion
Class of Restriction
(FF7)
Coverage Member
Coverage Group number
Coverinc~ Extension 1
Covering Extension 2
a
r
I to 16
Y
I
1
i
6%
he Key Plan is a summary-of the
programming on each station for
the FF3,4,5,6,7,8,9,
and 10 keys.
Programmed data is taken from the floor plan
of an installation site which, along with the
Summary Key Plan, is the only other place
cable numbers are documented.
This form is used on the final walk-through
of an installation or upgrade to verify the
programming on each station.
[1:1
K
8
Y
P
1
a
n
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
DBS Account Name
Account Address
Cutover Date
Account
Sheet
of
70
Phone (Main List)
Circle or Fill in as Appropriate
co-Llne/FF
Asoment
1
2
3
4
5
6
key
7
6
9
Button
10
PlaI
Amignment
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
10
20
21
22
I23
b-4
my
Ntht
lms
COR
2348
---
ht
1
Delayed
Circle or Fill in as Appropriate
**e Nulhe/Deputmsnt
hdmmsnt1
co-Llne/FF
keyButton
Auignment
ll2l3t4i6
IS
17
IS
IO
I10
I
he Summary Key Plan is a summary
of the programming on the FF3,4, 5,
6, and 7 keys for each station.
The form is for larger installations where most,
but not all the details of an installation are
recorded.
The floor plan, Key Plan, and Summary Key
Plan are the only places where cable numbers
are documented.
Q
The Summary Key Plan is used by the installer/programmer
and the Customer to sign
off on the installation.
S
U
m
m
a
I:
Y
I
K
8
Y
Save Your Original
Forms!!!
71
72
S
K
m
m
a
r
Y
K
e
9
P
1
a
n
Cornme,
1
A
P
P
e
n
d
i
X
A
ppendix A is a master list of FF key
defaults. Following the master list
is a pocket-sized version of the FF
key default chart beginning on page 90.
Appendix
FFl-l#-
1 Default
A
1 Ca lendar
- 1 #-(MMDDYYj#
-2#-(HHMM)#
Timers
-l#-(0 or l)#
- _-.
1
-3#-(0 or l)#
-4#-(00 to 89)#
-5#-(0 or l)#
-6#-(0 or l)#
-7#-(0 or l)#
-8#-(0 or l)#
ii
0
1
-9#-(0 or l)#
-lO#-(0 or l)#
-1 l#-(0 or l)#
-12#-(0 or l)##
-14#-(0 or 11#
-15#-(0 or l)#
-16#-(0 or l)#
-17#-(0 or l)#
-18#
0
1
1
I
1
1
1
Attendant
transfer ext. number
Attendant
override switch
Alarm LED mode
BLF (extensionrdklayedring
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
to 69/ 101
1
1
1 -30%(0 or l)#
I
0
-2#-(0
-3#-(1
-4#-(1
-5#-(1
-6#-(0
-7#-(0
-8#-(0
or
or
to
to
to
or
or
or
I)#
l)#
4)#
3)#
4)#
I)#
l)#
l)#
I
A
t
I
I
I
SBMDR and Data
1 FFl-2#-2#-l#-(0
and Displays
Call duration display
SMDR timer 5. 16 or 30 seconds
Least-Cost Routing (LCR)
TRS for SSD
Display during SSD
iWTO-FLASH
REDIAL
One-touch dialing
On-hook transfer
Key bank hold
Non-appearance
CO-line hold
SLT FLASH control
Sets number of extension -digits
Attendant
intercom
Extension
intercom
Splash tone on a voice call
Splash tone on a busy override
to 2)#
-27#-(11
I
Date (01 to 12) (01 to 311 (00 to 99)
Time (0000 to 2359)
FFl-2#-1#-
-a#-(U
axtd Time
A
P
1‘
8
.n
d
i
x
1
(Al2:4m
1
4
1
1
0
SMDR
SMDR
SMDR
SMDR
SMDR
SMDR
SMDR
SMDR
parity check
parity type
baud rate
stop-bit
length
data len&h
printing mode 1
printing mode 2 (long/local)
~rlntim
mode 3 (title)
,
74
Appendix
-
I
FFl-2#-2W-
Default
-9#-(0 or l)#
-lO#-(0 or l)#
0
A
A
P
R
e
SB%DRand Data
1
FFl-2#-3W-
PBX Access and Pauses
I
I
-
-(l to a)#-(00 to 99) or (Ok to 9k)#
49 to 18)#-(1 to 3)# See FF!&l%
I
I
UNA and EPI
See FF4-1#.2#
-1%(0 or 1)8
-(2 to 9)#-(0 or l)#
0
I
Universal Night Answer (UNA) ring pattern
External Page Interface (EPI) groups (00 to 07)
0
I
FFl-2#-5#-(l to 8)#-(1 to 20)#-(0
cos
or l)#
I
O
I
FFl-2#-6#0
FFl-3#- l#-(0000
to 2359)#
-2#-(0 or 1 to 12)#
-3#-(0 or 1 to 12)#
-4#-(0 or 1 to 12)#
-5#-(0 or 1 to 12)#
- -6%(0 or 1 to 12)#
-7iWO or 1 to 12)#
-a#-COor 1 to 12)#
-9#-(0 or 1 to 12)#
-lO#-(0 or 1 to 12)#
Class of Service setting
Account
I
-(l to lOO)#-l#-(OOOl-9999)#
-(l to lOO)#-2#-(0 to 7)#
A
PBX access code (00 to 99) or (Ok to 9k)
Automatic
pause after dialing (0 to 9)
FFl-2#-4#-
I
n
d
i
x
Dump data mode (Xon/Xoff)
PAI baud rate switch
Codes
I
Verified
Verified
Forced Account
Forced Account
System Timers/Night
1
7
1
7
1‘
7
1
7
9
Codes
Code toll restriction
Switch/Conf.
Automatic
switch to night mode
Attendant
HOLD-recall
timer
Extension HOLD-recall
tfmer
Attendant
transfer-recall
timer
Extension transfer-recall
timer
Attendant
Hunt-Groun
recall timer
Extension Hunt-Group
recall timer
Attendant
park-hold
recall timer
Extension park-hold
recall timer
Attendant
reversion timer
Unsupervised
conference ta.Ik time
Automatic
pause timer
CO-line FLASH timer
SLT on-hook FLASH
Incoming ring timer
Ring signal delay timer
Dial pause timer
PBX FLASH timer
Call forward/no
answer timer
Outbound
ground detection tlrner
Incoming ground detection timer
Attendant
mtercom HOLD-recall
timer
Appendix
-23#-(0 or 1 to 12)#
-24#. 40 or 1 to 12)#
-25#-(0 or 1 to 12)#
-26#-(0 to 15)#
1 -27#-(0 to 15)#
-28#-(0 to 15)#
-29#-(HHMM)#
f
I
I
Remote Maintenance
I
-(4 digits)#
1 FFl-BW-
9999
timer
timer
I
timer
A
Set four digits
Code
Also used with DISA
I
I
DISA ID Code
-(4 digits)#
Set four digits
/ FFl-6#-
See Fl%!-ll#.
19#. 20#
DISA Code for Outgoing Calls
-l#-(0000
-2#-(0000
1111
to 9999)#
to 9999)#
9999
Code 1. set four dieits See FF2-11#.19#.20#
Code 2. set four digits See FF2-11#,19#,20#
System Programming
FFl-7#9999
-(4 digits) #
FFl-8#-l#
_, (
ID Code
Set four digits
DID
I
-(O or l)#
I
0
0
DID reset
DID/T1 reset
DID Confirm
FFl-8#-2W
40 or l)#
0
Confirmation
of DID reset
Sync sources/System
FFl-8W-4#
-l#-l#-(0
to 8)#
-l#-2#-(1
- l#-3#-(0
-l#-4#-(0
-2#- l#-(0
to
to
to
to
-2#-2#-(0
e
n
d
i
x
I
1 FFl-4#-
I
Extension intercom HOLD-recall
Attendant
intercom transfer-recall
Extension intercom transfer-recall
CO delayed ringing timer
EXT. delayed ringing timer
Hunt Group no answer
Auto Day Mode
7
1
7
2
2
2
e
I
A
0
3
3)#
3)#
3)#
25)#
0
0
2s
to 15)#
1
Timers
System size
Sync setting
Sync setting
Sync setting
for first sync source
for second sync source
for third sync source
Network sync source recovery
Disconnect timer
timer
76
Appendix
FFl-SW-4#
-2#-3#-(0
-2#-4#-(0
-2#-5#-(0
-2#-6#-(0
-2#-7#-(0
-2#-8#-(0
-2#-9#-(0
-2#-10%(0
Default
to 15)#
to 15)#
to 8)#
to 15)#
to 15)#
to 8)#
to 15)#
to 15)#
-3#-(1 to S)#-(1 to 8)#-(0 to 30)#
-4#-l#-l#-(0
to l)#
-4#- l #-2#-(0
-4#- l#-3#-(0
-4#-l#-4#-(0
-4% l#-5#-(0
to
to
to
to
24)#
l)#
l)#
l)#
-4#-l#-6#-(0
-4#-l#-7#-(0
-4%2#- l#-(0
-4#-2#-2#-(0
-4#-2#-3#-(0
-4#-2#-4#-(0
-4#-2#-5#-(0
-4#-2#-6#-(0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
l)#
l)#
15)#
15)#
15)#
15)#
15)#
151#
-4#-3#- l#-(0
-4#-3#-2#-(0
to 9000)#
to 9000)#
-4#-3#-3#-(0
-4#-3#-4#-(0
to l)#
to 9000)#
-4#-3#-5#-(0
-4#-3#-6%(0
to 9000)#
to 9000)#
-(4 or 5)#-4#- l#-(0 to l)#
-(4 or 5)#-4#-2#-(0
to l)#
-4#-4#-3#-(0
to l)#
-(4 or 5)#-4#-4#-(0
to l)#
-(4 or 5)#-4#-5#-(0
to l)#
-4#-4#-6#-(0
to l)#
-5#-l#-l#-(0
to l)#
-5#- l#-2#-(0 to 24)#
-5#- l#-3#-(0 to 1)#
3
9
2
15
7
3
3
3
-
A
Sync sources/System
Timers
Guard timer
Release acknowledge
timer
Outpulse delay timer
Wink signal start detection timer
Incoming Detection timer
Answer Supervision
timer
Glare‘timer
- immediate start
Glare timer - wink start
1
1
1
1
1
1
Digital pads (loss/gain
settings)
Trunk class (Master Cabinet)
Number of channels used (Master Cabinet)
Frame format (Master Cabinet)
Clear Channel format (Master Cabinet)
Failure Mode (Master Cab)
Remote loopback detect-ton (Master Cabinet)
Yellow alarm send (Master Cabinet)
Red alarm detection timer (Master Cabinet)
Red alarm recovery det timer (Master Cabinet)
Yellow alarm detection timer (Master Cabinet)
Yellow alarm recov det timer (Master Cabinet)
Other alarms detection timer (Master Cabinet:
Other alarms recov det timer (Master Cabinet)
1
Frame loss counter (Master Cabinet)
Slip counter (Master Cabinet)
Red alarm counter (Master Cabinet)
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
A
PP
e
n
d
i
X
A
Loss Signal counter (Master Cabinet)
Sync-loss counter (Master Cabinet)
Yellow alarm counter (Master Cabinet)
Yellow alarm relay control
Red alarm relay control
Loss relay (Master Cabinet)
Frame loss
AIS relay
Alarm relay reset (Master Cabinet)
Trunk class (Slave Cabinet)
Number of channels used (Slave Cabinet)
Frame format
(Slave Cabinet)
7
I-
Appendix
Default
A
Sync sources/System
Timers
-5#-2#-6#-(0
15)#
15)#
15)#
15)#
15)#
to 15)#
1
-5#-3#-2#-(0
-5#-3#-3#-(0
to 9000)#
to l)#
1
Clear channel format (Slave Cabinet)
Failure mode (Slave Cabinet)
Remote loopback detection (Slave Cabinet)
Yellow alarm notlficatlon
(Slave Cabinet)
Red alarm detection timer (Slave Cabinet)
Red alarm recovery det timer (Slave Cabinet)
Yellow alarm detectton timer (Slave Cabinet)
Yellow alarm recov det timer (Slave Cabinet)
Other alarms detection timer (Slave Cabinet)
Other alarms recov det timer (Slave Cabinet)
Frame loss counter (Slave Cabinet)
Slip counter (Slave Cabinet)
Red alarm notification
(Slave Cabinet)
0
0
boss signal counter (Slave Cabinet)
Sync-loss counter (Slave Cabinet)
Yellow alarm counter (Slave Cabinet)
Loss relay (Slave Cabinet)
Alarm relay reset (Slave Cabinet)
-5#-l#-6#-(0
to l)#
-5#-2#- 1 #-(0
-5#-2#-2#-(0
-5#-2#-3%(0
-5#-2%4#-(0
-5#-2#-5#-(0
to
to
to
to
to
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
-5#-3#-6#-(0
to 9000)#
-5#-4#-3#-(0
to l)#
-5#-4%6#-(0
to l)#
-6#-(1 to 64)#-l#-(0
to
-6#-(1 to 64)#-2#-(0
to
to
-SW1 to 64)#-3#-(0
-6#-(1 to 64)#-4#-(0
to
-6#-(1 to 64)#-5#-(0
to
-6+(1 to 64)#-6#-(0
-6#-(1 to 64)#-7#-(0
-6#-(1 to 64)#-8#-(0
3)#
2)#
2)#
l)#
3
0
0
0
0
1
2)#
to l)#
to l)#
to l)#
-6+(1 to 64)#-9#-(0
to I)#
-6#-(1 to 64)#-lO#-(0
to l)#
-6#-(1 to 64)#-1 I#-(0 to l)#
-7t-(0
to 9999)#-(10
to 69
or
100
to 699)R
to 9000)#
to 9999)#-(
DID/DNIS
f-
settings
Outgolm? tvoe
Incomine tvoe
Trunk mode
Robbing bit setting
Incoming dialing method
Dial tone transmission
Busy tone transmission
Dial tone generation
Rlngback transmission
DNIS number setting
Counter
Dialing
10 to 69
A
Red alarm counter
FFl-8#-8#
-7t-(0
X
Trunk type
Alarm
FFl-8#-51
-3#-3#-(0
1
0
0
0
0
-
A
/ ..
P
P
e
xl
d
i
or
100
to 6991t
DID dialing
Assignment
I’
assignment
78
Appendix
i
!
\
FF2-(01-64)#-
i
A
-l#-(0 or l)#
-2#-(0 or I)#
-3#-(0 or l)#
-(4 to 9)#-(0 or l)#
-lO#-(1 or 2)#
-ll#-(dor
l)#
-12#-(001 to 144)#
-13#-(0 or l)#
-14#-(0 or l)#
-15#-(1 to 3)#
-16#-(0 or l)#
-17#-(0 or 1 to 9)#
-18#-(0 or 1 to 15)#
- 19#-(HHMM)
-20#-(HHMM)
-21#-(0 to 2)#
-2 1 #-(0 to 3)#
-22#-(0 or l)#
-23#-(0 to 15)#
-24#-(0
-25#-(0
-26#-(4
or 1 to 15)#
to 15)#
to 6 or 13)#
Default
Programming
0
1
0
Denies trunk use
Pulse or DTMF dial type
Pooled-trunk-group
access 9
Pooled-trunk-group
access 81 to 86
1
Trunk type
0
Enables
0
’ ^
Trunk
1
0
1
0
0
7
0
0
0
3
4
5
a
DISA
Private-he
port number
Automatic pause
Dial-tone detection
IYMF signal sending time
Unsupervised
conference (trunk capability)
Incoming ring signal pattern
Trunk disconnect timer
DISA start time
DISA end time
Loop-start. ground-start
or DID trunk card
Trunk selectfon
DID - immediate or Wink start
Wink-start
timer
Digit dial time-out
DID interdigit dial time-out
Tl port class - trunk
A
P
P
e
n
d
i
X
A
Appendix
A
3
1
FF3-(001-144)#-l#-(10
to 69/100
to 699)#
-2%(0 or 1 to 19)#
-3#-(001 to 144)#
-4#-(0
-5th(0
0
0
or l)#
or I)#
to 9999)#
-S#-(0000
-7#-(0
or l)#
-8#-(0
or l)#
or l)#
or l)#
or l)#
or l)#
or l)#
or l)#
or 1 to 4)#
or l)#
or l)#
-9#-(0
-lO#-(0
-1 l#-(0
-12#-(0
-13#-(0
-14#-(0
-15#-(0
-16#-(0
-17#-(0
-(18 to 25)#-(0
-26#-(0 or 1 to
-27#-(0 or 1 to
-28#-(0 or 1 to
-29#-(0 or 1 to
-3O#-(0 or 1 to
-31%(0 or 1 to
-32#-(0
-33#-(0
-34#-(0
Default
Extension
Port Specifications
100 to 699 Extension number
PortslPorts2to144-
or l)#
24)#
24)#
24)#
24)#
24)#
24)#
or 1 to 24)#
or 1 to 24)#
or l)#
to 9999)#
-36#-(0 to 2)#
-37#-( 1 to 3 or 7 to 13)#
-38#-(0 or l)#
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to 9)#
-4O#-(0 or l)#
-4 1 #-(000 1 to 9999)#
-42#-(0 to 3)#
-43%(NN(N))
-44#-(0
or l)#
port number
X
Forced verified account code
Station lockout code
CO-line off-hook signal for off-hook
voice announce
Call waiting
Busy overridden
Prime-line
pick up
Automatic pickup for a ringing line
Unsupervised
conference (ext. capabilib
SMDR printout by incoming call
CO off-hook signal volume
CO off-hook signal pattern
0
Tl port class station
SLT hook flash
0
0
0
-
f
PSD name large-screen display (5 or 10)
Sets extensions to page groups (00 to Oi
Idle screen on the large-display
phone
[DT display on the large-screen
phone
[DT display on the large-screen
phone
CO-line display on display while dialing
CO-line-call on large-screen
after dialin
Page-call display on large-screen
phone
Call-wait display on large-screen
phone
Intercom-busy-tone
display on large-
0
0
A
Busy override
screen phone
Extension-directory
display on the
large-screen
phone (5 or 10 names)
DID outside extension number
Ringback tone with busy signal
-35#-(0000
-39#-(0
Telephone types
EM/24 console station
Forced LCR restriction
P
e
n
d
i
Extension ring pattern
D-SLT handset volume level
Auto set relocation codes
Permanent
call forward
Permanent call forward
ML/MC0
Separation
!
.-.
extension
80
Appendix
FF4-l#-(OOl to 144)#-(01
1Default
to 64)#-(0
A
1 Incoming
DayUme
ring
or l)#
Ports 1 at 2Port83to144-
1
0
Hunt-Group
FF4- 1 #-(151 to 158)#-(01
to 64)#-(0 or l)#
FF4-2#-(OOl to 144)#-(01
to 64)#-(0
I
0
I
Day Ring Tables
FUng signal for pilot number
Incoming
Nighttime
or l)#
Ports
Ports
CO-Line Call Table
ring
Hunt-Group
to 64)#-(0
or l)#
0
I
I
Hunt Groups
-1%(11 to 69/101
-2%(0 to 2)#
Pilot extension
to 699)#
0
2
i
FFQ-4#-l#-(1
to 8)#-(lo/69
number
Search method
Transfer extension number
Transfer timer
Hunt-group
extension numbers
First~coverine extension
Second covering extension
to 100/699)#
Other covering
to 100/699)#
FM-5#to 64)#-(0
or l)#
0
to 64)#-(0
or l)#
0
extensions
Day Delayed-Ring
Tables
Daytime
tables
delayed-ring
Hunt-Group
FF4-5#-151 to 158)#-(01
and CO lin
Call-Coverage Groups (16)
-(3 to lS)#-( 1 to 8)#-( lo/69
-(OOl to 145)#-(01
Night Tables
F&g signal for pilot number
FF4-3#-(1 to 8)#-
-3#-(10 to 69/100 to 699)#
-4#-(2 to 32)#
-15 to 12)#-(11 to 69/101 to 699)#
and CO line
1
0
l&k 23 to 144-
FF4-2#-(151 to 158)#-(01
Ring Assignment
tiay Delayed Ring
Ring signal for pilot number
and CO lir
Appendix
A
A
4
I?
e
1 Night Delayed-Ring Tables
FF4-6#-(OOl to 145W(01
to 64)#-(0
0
or l)#
I
Night delayed-ring
X
I
Hunt-Group
FF4-6#-(151 to 158)#-(01
tables
n
d
i
to 64)#-(0 or l)#
Signal for pilot number
0
I
Night-Delayed
A
and CO line
I
Extension Ring Tables
FF4-7#-(OOl to 144)#-(001
to 144)#-(0
or l)#
intercom
0
ring signal
Ert Delayed-Ring
FF4-8#-(OOl to 144)#-(001
to 144)#-(0
or l)#
I
0
Tables
I
Intercom
ring signal
Reminder:
DEFAULTS
Record changes to the ring default on the Extension
Summary form and the Hunt group Tables form found
elsewhere in this manual. An extension can only be a
member of either a Hunt Group x a Coverage Group.
82
Appendix
A
A
I
FF5-(001
to 144)#-
~~ -
Extensions
P
0
e
n
d
-(01 to 24)#-CONF-(PROGlO
to 69/100
to 699)#
i
EL keys
X
: _-(Ol to 24)#-COl’W(81
A
ML keys
to 86. 89)W
.
FF keys - (01 to 24)
Default
01 to 24
-(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(PROGPROG-6
-(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(6
di&tsJ#
Aw
key
Pre-programmed
codes
dieits)#
(See FF-Key
FF keys - (01 to 24)
I
01 to 24
I
Default
Code Chart)
I
8:
Appendi%
A
A
/
i
FFS-(145
to 148)#-
DSS/72/BLF
-(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(81
d
i
x
A
Default
1 FF keys - (01 to 24)
to 24
-(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(PROGlO
I
Consoles
MC0 keys
to 86. 89)#
-01
e
n
to SS/lOO
to 699)#
FF keys - (01 to 72)
Default
01 to 56-
100 to 155 - Extensions
57 to 64-
7500 to 7507 - Park hold
65 to 71-
#OO to #06 - Page zones
72-
#52 - Day/Night
-(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(PROGPROG6
-(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(6
DSS keys
/
dis!its)#
Pre-programmed
codes
ditits)#
(See FF-Key Code Chart]
1 FFkeys-(01
r--
01 to 72
to72)
1
I
I
Default
-
I
,'
84
Amendix
A
A
P
P
e
FFS-(149
to 152)#-
Attendant
Consoles
(4)
n
d
i
-(Ol to 08)#-CONF-(81
I
MC0 keys
to 86. 89)#
FF keys - (01 to 32)
I
01 to 32
I
-(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(PROGlO
to 69/100
Default
A
_.
DSS keys
to 699)#
FF keys - (01 to 32)
X
Default
01 to 12
13 to 14
7508 to 7509 - Park hold
15 to 16
17 to 20
7504 to 7507 - Park hold
21 to 24
7500 to 7503 -
25 to 28
#04 to #07 - Page zones
29 to 32
#OO to #03 -
-(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(PROGPROG6
-(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(6
”
”
ditits)W
Pre-programmed
codes
d&its)!!
(See FF-Key
r ~~
FF keys - (01 to 32)
I
Code Chart)
Default a
01 to 32
8-L
Appendix
A
A.
*
d
Absence Message
Account Code
*
Alarm
Answer Key
Attendant
* Background Music (BGM)
$# #Busy Override
* Call Forward/All Calls
m Call ForwardMoAnslBusy
* Call Forward/Busy
Call Forward to CO Line
Headset Mode
I
Intercom Dial Tone On/Off 1
Intercom Key
I
%
These features. tn addition
One-Touch key.
71
FF12 (#) 7
FF12 (#) 4
FFll (*) 1
0
FF12 (#) 53
4
720
721
722
Intercom Transfer
Least-Cost Roulitlg (LCR)
* Meet-Me Answer
*Wessage Waiting (Set)
Message Waking (Answer)
Message waiting (Cancel)
Mute Key
Night Key
*Page Groups
* Park-HOLD Key/Retrieve
PermnalSpeedDial (PSD)
FF12 (#) 51
FF12 (#) 50
FF12(#) 8
1 % Universal Night AISWK (UNA)
I*#voice call/Tone Call
to Crg Walthg
These features can be stored on a One-Touch
*#
For example,
Also:
to store:
Busy Ovwrfdo
Tnnlr Qwulng
1 Sotion Lockout
(example:741234),
II
et
T1
ahrm
2
AUTO REDIAL
AUTO FLASH
Volcc
Aaaormcc.
key only if the feature coda is preceded
A
*c#
FF12 (#) 52
FF12 (#) (00 to 07)
75176
AUTO (90 to 99)
I
and OSHook
X
1
76
I
I
1
can be stored
b either an oxtension
on a
numbw
or mde &I
nurnbw followed by code 4.
folbwed by mde 2.
- II the feature mda 74 is stored on a One-Touch
theIDcodewilldisphylrhenthestati~kndkckedout
by pressing ON/OFF and CONF.
key with the four-dfgft
ID code1
II
Pufc HOID
To
- enter an rxtonsbn
- store as 88 (0144)
CONF
69
77
L‘
e
n
d
i
- IO pa& a call. press the HOLD key plus the ChwTowh
key:
Feature
OR/OFF-PROC+FF
key.
key-lOl#-HOID
Setttng number
for master
Setttng number
for slave
I
86
Appendix
FF6-
Default
-l#-(001 to 144)#-CONF-(10
char.)+/
-2#-(00 to 89)#-CONF-(16
characters)#
-3#-(001 to 144)#-(90 to 99)#-CONF
-( 16 character+
-4#-(5
-5#-(01
-6#-( 1
-7#-( 1
to 9)#-CONF-(15
characters)#
to 64)#-CONF-(6
characters)#
to 8)#-CONF-ii0
cha.ractexs)#
to 5)#-CONF-( 15 characteIs)#
-
-
Default
FF7-l#-l#-(0
or l)#
0
-2#-(0
-3#-(1
-4#-(0
-5#-(0
-S#-(0
or
to
or
or
or
1
l)#
15)#
l)#
l)#
l)#
0
0.
0
-7#-(0 or l)#
-8#-(0 or I)#
-9#-(0 or l)#
0
0
0
-lO#-(0 or l)#
-1 l#-(0 or l)#
-(12 to 16)#-(0 or l)#
0
0
1
FF7-2#or 1)#
(DSS Console)
Extension name
System speed dial name (00 to 89)
Personal speed dial name (90 to 99)
Absence message numbers (5 to 9)
CO-trunk-line
name
Hunt-group
pilot name
OHCA Answerback
_l.
Toll Restriction
A
Setting
TRS for international
calls
Dialing restriction/incoming
calls
F&xQ.riction/maximum
digits dialed
211 restriction
3 11 restriction
411 restriction
5 11 restriction
6 11 restriction
7 11 restriction
8 11 restriction
9 11 restriction
7-digit dial restriction/types
(2 to 6)
Area code types (3 to 6)
Office-Code Table
FF7-3#-(3 to S)#-(000 to 999)WO
or l)#
OtTice-code
types (3 to 6)
Special Area Code Table
FF7-4#-
Special area codes (1 to 4)
to 999)#
Special Office-Code Table
FFT-5#-11 to 4)#-(000
Name/Message
Area-Code Table
-(3 to S)#-(000 to 999)#-(0
-(l to 4)#-(000
A
to 999)WO
or l)#
Of&e
codes (1 to 4)
87
Appendix
A
Cn
FF7-6#-
I Default
7-Digit Restriction
7-digit
FlW-7#-(001
to 144)#-
-(Ol to 64)#-(0
-65#-(0
7
to 144)#to 7)#
7
X
Daytime
TRS
Daytime
TRS (all extensions)
Nighttime
to 7)#
Nighttime
Nighttime
TRS
TRS (all extensions)
Type Blocks for each Area Code
-( 1 to 4)#-(0 or l)#
-(5 to 8)#-IO or l)#
‘Ibe (3 to 6) Area Codes
Type (3 to 61 Office Codes
‘l&e (3 to 6) Area/Office
Codes
Type (1 to 4) Special Area Codes
for Office Codes
49 to 12)#-(0 or l)#
-(13 to 16)#-(0 or l)#
FFS-l#-
Default
to 999)#-(0
or l)#
Office-Code Table
to 999)#-(0
-
or l)#
I
Time priority tables (1 to 15)
LCR offke codes (000-9991
Special Area-Code Table
FF&3W-(l to 4)#-(000
Area-Code Table
Time priority tables (1 to 15)
1 LCR area codes (000 to 999)
FFS-2#-11 to 15)#-(000
A
TRS
FF7-9#-
-(l to 15)#-(000
n
d
i
TRS codes (1 to 50)
Daytime TRS
-(Ol to 64)#-(0 to 7)#
-65#-(0 to 7)#
FF7-8#-(001
Y
e
Table
Speclal area codes tables (1 to 4)
Special area codes (000 to 999)
to 999)#
Special Office-Code Table
FFS-4W-(l to 4)#-(1 to 15)#-(000
to 999)#(0 or l)#
I
Special office codes (1 to 4)
Time-priority
tables (1 to 15)
Time-Prioritv
FFS-5#-(l to 15)#-(1 to 48)#-(1
-
to 8)#
Time-priority
Tables
tables -(1 to 15)
Time bands (1 to 481
LCR trunk groups (1 to 8)
i
38
Appendix
FFS-6#-
Trunk-Group
-(l to 8)#-(1 to 8)#-(01
to 64)#
LCR trunk
FF8-7#-
Tables
groups
Dial-Delete
-(l to 8)#-(16
digit&#
FFS-SW-(l to 8)#-(16
I- I
digits)#
Default
FF9-l#-(01
A
to 64)#-(01
Table &CR)
Dial-delete
tables (1 to 8)
Dial-Add
Table
Dial-add
mode
to 144)#-(001
to 144)##
Copy extension
-3#-(001
to 144)#-(001
to 144)##
Copy FF key mode
1 Default
-l#-(00
-l#-(001
to 89)#-(16
to 144)#-(90
to 99)#-(16
digits)#
mode
Speed Dialing
System
d@ts)#
&CR)
Copy Mode
-2#-(001
FFlO-
A
tables (1 to 8)
Copy trunk
to 64)##
(1 to 8)
Personal
speed dial -
speed dial -
39
A
T\
L;
e
n
d
Pocket-Sized
r---
List of Programming
--a----------------
s
I
I
I
I
I
I
Addresses
A
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
-1r4oa
1v
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
90
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
Addresses
A
P
P
e
n
d
i
x
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L ------------------------
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1
91
A
e
xl
d
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
-------------------l---%x
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
A
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I‘
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Addresses
I
I
I
I
FFI-SI-I#
4oOW
40 to 111
Rl-s#-l#
DID
-_.
0
0
-
DID reset
OIOrrl
Iuet
DrncQnnnn
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-----------------,-,,,,,-I
92
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
Addresses
r---@&&--------_--- ------7
A
I
I
I
~1”
._
.-
,-
.-
..-
I
-~
-4u- I@-2r-(0 to 24w
-4ElKw-m
to 114
-4r-1r-4r4oto
IW -
I
I
I
I
I
I
-aa-ar-4crO
-4ff-21-W-(0
I
-’
to mu
to l&
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
X
I
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A
P
P
e
n
d
i
-----
__-_-____vw------e-
_
__ 0
1
0
._
Number dchmnch
l3unu~(Mwrcab0
Un mdtra hmmt
used Waster
Master
Cabhell
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CabInetI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1
93
I?
8
n
d
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
-------------------l---x
i
Addresses
1
i
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
--------------------,,-,-I
94
A
P
P
e
n
a
Pocket-Sized
r ___
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
list of Programming
if%
Addresses
A
--------------------~
mm401-64w
i
x
lD&ult
!I
I TnmkR0afomda
t
I
~.
-I4woar
Ilf
-15e-11 ta31e
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L ___-_---_-------_-------
-‘-
I
I
_ ._-._I
I
0
1
Dlablme d‘bii4FslmalsmdiMtmx
I
‘.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
95
&J
e
n
d
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
Addresses
i
X
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FPs+o1-lU)#-
Default
100 to 809
-IWlOlo69/lOOt0699J#
--_.----21.IO or 1 u) 19l# -3wcoI
to 1441#
41io or 111
-5r-(0 oc lI#
-6ctoooO lo 9999v
-74-(0 or 114
_
0
0
---_
-I-
.1
Extewlon
ExluWan
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Speclflcatims
number
Tekphme typea
EM/24 oonrole station port llumbcr .Forced LCR -wn
Fcmxdvulflcd-ntcodc
s.mlon lakout c0.i;
..
CO-Une of?-hook ~,@,a, la o,T-,,.,.,k
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
-35r-(oooo to 9999M
-36r-to to 21r
-----.--_
-37r-(1co3ar7t01311
-36rio or I)#
-39140 to 911
-41r4oax
ta9999w
.- -.._--.
-4/I-(0 to 314
-43wNNlNll
---._._.
-44wo or IW
--
0000
0
.-n_
DID outside camsion
nu&r
. . ..~
Iul&ck
i&e v&h busy SIgnal
l-1 MR Ckt) slauon
-
-_--
__-.
UlJMcQ
.scpanuon
f
I
I
I
I
--------------------------I
96
A
P
P
e
n
d
List of Programming
Pocket-Sized
r---
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
x
Addresses
A
-m------------------7
I
I
I
FPCIO+I01 ,o 144lwJ1
i
Defiult
to 64lNO or I)#
FWtS1&2Pmts2t.a
blcolnhg
Dayune
144
lung
Adglmlout
I
rine
1
0
I
I
I
I
-fool to 1441401 lo 641r40 or 111
ratalC2rortssto144.
FF4-21-
N&c
I
I
I
I
I
Nlfi
1
0
Hunt-Group
N&bt
Table6
I
I
I
I
FM-Sb-
L _____-__------_---_-----
Da+ lkla~ed-Rlr~
Tabkr
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
97
.
P
.
P
P
e
n
d
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
Addresses
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Reminder:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F&cord
changes to the rtng default on the Mention
Summary
form and the Hunt group Tables form found
elsewhere tn this manual.
An atenslon
can only be a
member of either a Hunt Croup pi a Coverage Group.
I
1
I
L
i
__-----------m--s-------
-I
98
A
P
P
e
n
d
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
Addresses
i
X
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FFs-(Ool
cpl
to 144w
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RtCdOO8
to Z~#-CONF-@BQQ-IO
to @,CXNB
to 69$9
EL key13
I
FF keys
- (01 to 24)
1
Default
I
01 to 24
401 to 24)WZONF-(PROOPROGB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
wr
JW
I
I
I
I
key
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L,--~-~~---~----~~----
_
FF keys - (01 to 24)
01
to
Pm-programmed
codes
fsn? R-Rev &de CJmIiJ
Default
1
24
---
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A
99
P
e
n
d
Pocket-Sized
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
mlH145
List of Programming
to 14I?w
D6s/72/BLFconso1er
q&l to !24wcoNF-~ to 66.88)r
FFkeys-(01
I
to241
MC0 keys
Default
f
I
I
FFkeys-(01
to72)
Default
01 to 56-
100 to 155 - Extensions
57to6465to71-
7500 to 7507 - Park hold
MO to x06 - Page zones
152 - Day/Night
72---------I--------------------------
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
01 to24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Addresses
Pre-programmed
codes
IsarF-~codrckart
401 to 72WCON?~#
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FFkcys-(Olto72)
01 to 72
Default
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L -------------------,,--,~
100
A
P
P
e
n
d
Pocket-Sized
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
List of Programming
ms414s
MC0
-to-CONF-@~$fll@
FF kevs
I
CoPaoka
Attaadoat
to 152w
- (01
to 321
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
m
to 69/166
-tQlldWto-CONF-O’ROO-10
FF
keys
- (01
DSS keys
ma
ta 32)
I
Dcfnllil
I
I
I
I2
13 to 14
I
I
I
keys
rkfarlll
I
(41
01 to 32
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
750H
lo 7.StXJ
Park
hold
17to20
7504
,,I 7507
Park
hokl
21 lo 24
75Ooto7m3-
25 to 28
x04
29 to 32
roolo
15 to 16
I
I
I
-
IO 107 - Pagr
a03 -
mncs
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
Re~programmed
codes
I
I
i
I
I
I
011n
I
I
I
I
I
Addresses
(See R-Key
FF
keys
- (01
01 IO 32
lo 321
Iktilrllt
Code
I
Chart
I
I
I
I
I
I
101
e
n
d
Pocket-Sized
r--s
List of Programming
i%
I
I
I
I
I
I
---em
-----
----
-_____
Addresses
A
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C UFRy
721
t UFm
722
c#FawMtocoLhl
723
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FFl2(r, fmbon
7976
A”lO(Wb”)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
t
I
__-----------------e--w-
-I
102
A
P
P
e
n
d
Pocket-Size
IList of Programming
r--$&=-- ------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-Iu-IIXII
lo 1441~-CONF-U0ch~l~
-&00
to 691r-coti-il6_--chuacun1r__-_
_.__-3r-fco1 to 144l~.160 (0 OOPCONF
_
. 416
..-- chalaclcn)d
---:4r.15 to 918-420NFi15 channcn1r
_-_---.
-5~.@l 10 64WCONF-I6
&~~trrslR
.6U-(I to BJWJONF-(1Ochfuaclersl~
-7U-(I LO 5WCONF-(15
-.
\
I
I
-._
[
chxaclurl~
I
I
I
I
I
__
-_. -.
d&l .__~
name ICI3 to 661
_...
-
. -_.-___-HKA
AIlwcrbut
Restdctlon
I
I
Sattia~
--- 0
0
I
I
_2 11 mtrkllna
-31 I rcstmkn
.--.--41 I mwll-tk.n
51 I rnll4r4loll
._ -_.-.-_-.
_Gil-Ion
---
_ --
_-_.---
0
.-0
-
1
I
I
I
(
1
(
.roll
0
0
0
I
I
I
0
1
0
711- -... _ _
---__
. . - ..-.
- 611 rcItrruw
__.
--I)1
---- 1 Rs(~lon
7digil dial raWkthn/lyp%
P UI 6l
~
Pm-2#-
DSS Ccndc)
1
DeQult
-.
.-
i
I
X
A
_ -I
I
A_.
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
_--
m
rP7-l#-
E4tas101
-;;yslm qmd
-.
_.--
I
,
i
t
r~uno/Mcuagc
r?5-
I
I
I
Addresses
keecedo
Tabk
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
103
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
Addresses
r--- x --------------- ---I
A
1
II
I
I
I
I
I FF7-71-mo1to
14416
Devtlme
nts
I
I
-1
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
L
-----c------------------
-I
104
A
P
l?
e
n
d
Pocket-Sized
List of Programming
Addresses
I
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
Did-Delete
P-m-74-
I
Table
&CR)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1,~(001 10 IUV-(90
L ___-------------__------
lo 99Wl16
dl@lsIL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
105
A
p f
P
e
n
d
i
X
B
CC RuZes and Regulations
f
106
':
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations for e
connection of Terminal equipment to the telephone network, and for your conven- n
ience. the following information is presented.
d
Notifying
the Telephone
i
x
Company
When connecting or disconnectin Terminal equipment to the telephone network,
notify the telephone company of tfl e following: connection line(s), FCC registration
number, and ringer equivalence number of the registered Terminal equipment.
FCC Registration
Model
Numbers
VB-420 10 (DBS308)
VB-42020
(DBS616)
Numbers
Key System
ACKUSA-61853~KF-E
ACKUSA-6185~KF-E
B
Hybrid
System
ACKUSA-61855~MF-E
ACKUSA-61856-MF-E
When enabling Pooled Trunk Access, inform the telephone company or a Panasonic
service center of the MF-E FCC Registration number. According to FCC rules, Pooled
Trunk Access is regarded as one of the distinguishing features of a PBX as opposed
to a key telephone system.
The REN determines the number of devices you may connect to your telephone line
and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most,
but not all areas, the total RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed
five (5.0). Contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for .
your calling area.
Service order code
Network address signaling code
Facility interface code
Required network interface code
DIRECT
C~NNECTIONTOA
PARTYLINE
9.OF
E
02LS2 (2 wire/loop
RT25c
ORCOIN-OPERATEDTELSPHOXE
start)
LINEIS
PROMBITED
If you are on a party line, please check with your local telephone company for
further information.
107
Should Terminal equipment
cause harm to the telephone
network. the telephone company shall.
where practical. notify the customer that service may be temporarily
disconUnued.
However, where
prior noUce is not practical, the telephone company may temporarily
discontinue
service forthwith,
if such action is reasonable in the circumstances.
In case of un-notified
temporary discontinuance
of
service. the telephone company shall:
e
n
d
i
X
0
Promptly
notify
the customer
of such temporary
discontinuance
of service.
B
(B)
Afford the customer the opportunity
to the temporary
disconttnuance.
(Cl
Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint
to the Commission
pursuant
to the procedures
set out in Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations.
(A)
Availability
Technical
including
to permit
company
customer’s
03
of telephone
to correct
the situation
which
gave rise
information:
information
on interface parameters
and specifications
not set by FCC Rules,
the number of ringers which may be connected to a particular
telephone line
Terminal
equipment
to operate in a manner
compatible
with telephone
commumcaUons
facilities, shah be provided by the telephqne company upon
request.
Changes in telephone
and procedures:
company
communications
facilities.
equipment,
f
operations
The telephone company may make changes in its communicaUons
facilities. equipment. operauons
or procedures.
where such action is reasonably
required in the ’
operaUon of its business and is not inconsistent
with the rules and regulations in FCC
Part 68. lfsuch changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer’sTerminal
equipment
IncompaUble
with telephone company communications
facilities or require
modification
or alteration of such Terminal equipment
or otherwise materially affect its
use or performance.
the customer shall be given adequate notfce. in writing, to allow
the customer an opportunity
to maintain
uninterrupted
service.
;
108
This system
is hearing-aid
compatible.
e
n
d
i
x
%iEN
bX3
EWHMINQEMERQENCTNUMBERSOR B&JUNG TEAT CALLS lro
EMEROENCY
NUMBERS:
B
(A)
Remain
on the line and briefly
explain
U.3
Program or test emergency numbers
early morning or late evening.
to the dispatcher
only in off-peak
the reason for the call.
hours:
these are usually
THE GRANTEE OR ITS Acmm SHALLPROWDETHE USEROFTHE REGISTERED
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
/I
\
(A1
installation.
03
Registered
(Cl
When a malfunction
from the telephone
nect all equipment.
(D)
If connections
operation
Terminal
and repair procedures.
equipment
in the
EQUIPMENT
WITH
where applicable.
may not be used with party lines or coin lines.
is indicated the customer shall disconnect the registered equipment
line to determine the problem.
Until the problem is corrected, discon-
other than
W25C
are needed.
contact
the local telephone
company.
109
A
P
P
8
n
d
PLEASE OEBERVE THE FOLLOW~O GUIDELINESTO ASSURE THE SAFE USE OF Yom
TELEPHONE
(A)
This product
is an electrical
device and can be hazardous
if immersed
in water.
i
X
03
To avoid the risk of electrical shock. do not use this unit while in the bathtub.
shower.
or when wet. lf you accidently drop the unit into water. unplug it first. then retrieve it
by pulling the cord.
(Cl
The telephone
temperatures.
should not be exposed to heat sources, direct sunlight. extreme
moisture,
strong vibrations or greasy or dusty environments.
(D)
Never attempt
telephone.
to insert
(El
Never clean the telephone
(F)
Never install
(G)
Never install telephone
that purpose.
(HI
Never touch un-insulated
telephone wires or terminals
been disconnected
at the network interface.
telephone
wires.
pins or similar
with benzol. paint
wiring
jacks
during
objects in the vents or openings
thinner
a lightning
in a wet area unless
or other solvent
B
of the
materials.
storm.
they are specifically
unless
designed
the telephone
for
line has
Warning -This unit generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. And if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions
manual. may cause radio interference.
The Unit has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules,
which are designed to provide reasonable protection
against such interference
when operated in a
commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference
the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures are necessary
interference.
in which case
to correct the
If necessary,
the user should
additional
suggestions.
consult
technician
The user may find the following
booklet prepared
This booklet
is available
the dealer
or an experienced
radio/television
by the Federal Communications
locally from FCC regional
Commission
for
helpful:
offices.
110
.,
...
.. -
ndex
111
Index
A
211 restriction
51.87,
103
311 restriction
51, 87. 103
411 restriction
51.87. 103
511 restriction
51.87.
103
611 restriction
51.87.
103
7-digit dial restriction/COR
types (2 to 6)
50, 51. 54. 87. 88. 103, 104
711 restriction
51.87.
103
811 restriction
51.87,
103
911 restriction
51.87.
103
ABCD inband si.@alhq
27.78.94
Absence messages (5 to 9) 48. 49.86.87.
102. 103
Account
code
35.67.70.86,
102
Add table &CR)
57.62.89
AFP 42.45
Alarm indication
sigual (AIS) detection
25.
77.93
Alarm LED mode
4.74.90
Alarm notification
red 24. 26. 77. 78. 93. 94
yellow
24.25. 77. 78.93. 94
Alarm relay recovery
mode.
24.25. 77, 78.
93. 94
Alert tone
4.74.90
Analog port transfer
ring interval
4.74.90
Answer key 86. 102
Auy key/pre-programmed
codes
45. 46.
83-85. 99- 10 1
Appendix
A 73- 105
Appendix
B 106-l 10
Area Codes
LCR 57.58.88.
104
TRS 50, 52. 56. 87. 88. 103. 104
Attendant
3. 4. 8-13. 18. 19, 42. 45. 74. 86,
90. 102
consoles/flexible
feature key assignment
42, 45, 85. 101
feature package (AFP) 42, 45, 85, 101
HOLD-recall
ttmer
8, 76.92
Hunt Group recall timer
10. 75. 9.1
intercom
HOLD-recall
timer
9, 75, 91
transfer recall timer
9. 75. 9 1
voice/tone call 3. 74. 90
overflow
4, 74. 90
override switch
4. 74. 90
park-HOLD recall timer
11, 75, 91
reversion timer
12. 75. 91
transfer extension
4. 74. 90
transfer recall timer
9. 75. 9 1
Auto day mode
20.76. 92
AUTO-FLASH-RED&IL
3.74,90
Auto set relocation
codes
37. 67, 68. 70,
80. 96
Automatic
Dialers
109
Automatic
HOLD (key-bank
HOLD)
3,74,90
Automatic
pause
31.79.95
Automatic
pause after dialiug (1 to 9.0)
6. 7. 75.91
Automatic
pause timer
13.75.91
Automatic
switch to uight mode
8.75.91
I
Y
r:
e
X
c
B
Background
music (BGM)
86, 102
BGM (Background
music)
86, 102
BLF (busy-lamp
field)
4. 74. 90
BLF (extension)
delayed ring
4.74.90
BLF port number (EM/24
console stationport number)
35, 77.93
Busy-lamp
field (BLF)
4. 74, 90
Busy overridden
35.67.68.77.93
Busy override
35. 67.68.70.71.86,
102
Busy tone (voice mail)
4, 74, 90
Busy tone transmission
27. 78. 94
n
C
Cable
70, 72
i
112
‘,
Call forward
72.86.
102
/busy
86, 102
/CO line 86. 102
/no answer
86. 102
/no answer/busy
86, 102
/no answer timer
16.75,91
CalI waiting
36, 67.70.86.
102
display/large-display
telephone
37. 77. 93
Call Coverage Group
38.4 1.5 1.68. 70. 72,
81.97
covering extension 1 41. 51, 68.81. 97
covering extension 2 41. 51, 68. 81. 97
extensions
41. 97
Call Coverage Group extension
tables
(1 to 16) 38. 41. 81
Call duration
display
3. 74.90
Chart/FF
key codes
86. 102
Circuit number
(telephone
number)
29. 30.
Class of Restriction
(COR)
50-56.87.
88.
100, 101
Class of sedce
setting
51.87. 1038.67.68.
70. 72. 75. 91
CO delayed ringing timer
19.76.92
CO line
display after dialing/large-display
37, 77.
91
display during dialing/large-display
37. 77
91
FLASH timer
14, 75. 90
off hook signal
35. 77.91
off hook signal pattern
36. 67. 68. 77. 91
off hook signal volume
36. 67.68. 77. 91
co trunk
name
49.87.
103
preference (access code 881 86. 102
Compatibility
of the Telephone
Network
and Terminal
Equipment
108
CONF key
42
Connection
to a Coin-Operated
Telephone
Line
107
Connection
to a Party Line
107
Copy Mode
extensions
34, 63, 89, 102
LED FF keys 63. 89, 102
trunks
63. 89, 102
COR
(Class of Restriction)
104
WRSI types 50-56.
I
50-56.
87. 88. 103,
87, 88, 103, 104
n
d
e
X
D
Damage to a telephone
line
108
Date
3. 74.90
Day 3.74.90
TRS - all extensions
88. 104
Day 3.74.90
delayed-ring
tables 81. 97
riw
81.97
TRS 88.104
Debounce
timer
22.77.93
Default charts
74-89
pocket-sized version
90- 105
Delayed-ring
capability
4.72
Delete table &CR)
57. 62.89, 105
Detection
timers
17. 75. 91
Dial time-out
for digits, DID 33, 76.92
Dial pause timer
15.75.91
Dial tone detection
3 1.76.92
Dial tone generation
27.78.94
Dial tone transmission
27. 78. 94
Dialing restriction
during an incoming
call
(TRS) 51. 87. 103
DID
confirmation
of reset 21.76. 92
dial setting
27. 78. 94
digit dial time-out
33. 76, 92
Immediate or Wink start 32. 76. 92
interdigit dial time-out
33. 76. 92
outside extension
37. 76. 92
reset 21. 76. 92
trunk card 32, 76. 92
trunk lines 28
DID dialing assignment
27.78.94
DID/DNIS
emulation
5.74.90
DID/T1
reset
21, 76. 92
Digital pads 23. 77.,93
Digit restrictions
(TRS) 52, 88. 104
113
2 1. 32,
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
76.92
Direct Station Select (DSS) 42. 46. 48, 49.
84, 100
DISA
enable
32, 76. 92
end timer
32. 76. 92
ID code 32.76. 92
outgoing codes 1 and 2 32, 76. 92
start timer
32, 76. 92
Disconnect
timer
22. 76. 92
Display (SSD) 3. 74. 90
DND (Do Not Disturb)
86, 102
DMS dialing assignment
27. 78.94
Do Not Disturb
(DND)
86. 102
67.68. 70
D-SLT handset volume level
DSS
(Direct Station Select) 42. 46, 48. 49.84.
85. 100, 101
extensions
46.84,
100
DSS/72
BLF consoles flexible feature key
assignment
46.49.84.85.
100. 101
FF keys 42.46.84
31.76.92
DTMF signal sending time
-p-data
mode (Xon/Xoff)
5.74.90
flexible feature key assignment
42-44.
83-86
HOLD-recall
timer 9, 75. 91
Hunt Group recall timer
11, 75, 91
intercom
HOLD-recall
timer
18, 75. 91
transfer-recall
timer
19. 75. 91
voice/tone
caIl 3. 74. 90
keys 42-44, 83-85
name assignment
49.87. 103
number
35.80.96
page groups (00 to 07) 36.80.96
page ring 86. 102
park-HOLD
recall timer
12. 75. 91
ports 34, 35-37.80.96
programming
34-37. 80. 96
ring tables 81, 97
ring pattern
67. 68, 70
KTEL 37.80.96
SLT/OPX
37.80.96
transfer-recall
timer
Extension
Module (EM) 35.42.47.77.93
Extension
summary
34.38.50.66-70
Extensions
- (two or three digits)
86, 102
External
Page Interface
(Em) page groups
7.8. 75, 91
E
F
EL (extension
line)
83.99
EL/ML keys
43.44.83.99
EM (Extension
Module)
35.42.47.
77.93
35.77.
EM/24 console station port number
93
Enables DXSA 31. 76. 92
7. 8, 75.91
EPI (external page interface)
Exclusive
HOLD
3.74.90
Extension
4. 67. 68, 8 1. 97
delayed-ring
tables
delayed ringing timer
20, 76, 92
digits
3. 74. 90
directory display/large-display
telephone
37, 80, 96
FCC Rules and Regulations
106- 110
FFl key - System programming
2-27. 74-78.
90-94
1’F2 key - Trunk programming
28-33.79.95
FF3 key - &tension
programming
34-37.
80.96
FF4 key - Ring assignment
and Hunt
Groups
38-41.81.82.
97, 98
FFS key - Flexible feature key assignment
42-47, 83-86. 99- 102
FF6 key - Name assignment
48.49.87.103
FF7 key - Toll restrictions
50-56.87,
88,
104
FFS key - Least Cost Routing
57-62.88.89.
104. 105
I
n
d
e
X
114
FF9 key - Copy mode
63.89. 105
FFlO key - System speed dialing
64.65.89.
105
FF key code chart
85.86, 101.102
First attendant
46. 84, 100
FLASH
3, 74. 90
FLASH timer (CO line)
14. 75, 91
FLASH timer (PDX)
16. 75.91
Flexible feature key assignment
42-44,
83-86
Forced verified
account code 35.67. 68. 70.
80.96
Forced LCR restriction
35.67. 68. 70, 80. 96
Fourth attendant
4, 74.90
Frame loss
25. 76.92
Frame loss counter
26, 77.93
Framing format
25. 76, 92
I
n
url
e
extensions
81. 97
night
CO line / pilot extension ring tables
81.97
delayed-ring
40. 8 1, 97
no answer
20, 76, 92
pilot extension
40. 67. 68. 81. 97
pilot name 40. 67.68.81.97
recall timers
attendant
10, 75. 93
extension
11. 75. 93
search methods
4.67.68.81.97
tables (1 to 8) 38. 40. 8 1. 97
transfer extension
40.67. 68. 8 1, 97
transfer timer 40. 8 1. 97
Hunt Groups
70. 72, 81.82.97.98
X
I
G
Glare timer
immediate
wink start
Group pickup
Guard timer
start
22. 77. 93
22. 77. 93
86. 102
22. 77. 93
H
Headset mode
86. 102
Hearing-aid
compatibihty
HOLD
3. 74.90
automatic
exclusive
system
HOLD-recall
timers
attendant
8. 75, 91
extensions
9. 75.91
Hour
3
Hunt Groups
109
day
CO line / pilot extension ring tables
81.97
delayed-ring
40. 8 1, 97
Idle display / large-display
telephone
37.
80.96
IDT(intercom
dial tone)
37.86. 102
LDT (laqIedispl&
37
Incoming
calls restriction
(TRS) 5 1,87. 103
Incoming
detection
timer
22. 77. 93
Incoming
Diahng Method
27.78.94
Incoming
ground detection
timer
17.75. 91
Incoming
ring
delay timer
15. 76. 92
signal pattern
3 1, 76. 92
timer
14. 76. 92
Incoming
ring
39.81.97
day rinR
delayed
day
night
night ring
Incoming
signaDng class 27. 78,94
Index
111
Instructions
1. 2. 28. 34, 38. 42. 48. 50. 57.’
63. 64. 66. 69. 73, 106. 111
4
Intercom
busy tone display
37. 80. 96
/ large-display
telephone
115
call status display (IDT) / large-display
telephone
37. 80, 96
dial tone (IDT) 37. 80. 96
key 86, 102
off hook display / large-display
telephone
37, 80, 96
ring signal
81, 97
transfer
86. 102
Intercom
Long-distance
5. 74. 90
Loop keys hmlti-liue)
hop
start,
ground
43.83.99
start,
n
d
.
or DID truuk
cards
e
32. 76, 92
Loop start
trunk
card
X
32, 76.92
M
timers
attendant
17, 18. 76. 92
HOLD recall
17. 76. 92
transfer recall
18. 76. 92
extensions
18, 19. 76.92
HOLD recall
18.76.92
transfer recall
19, 76.92
Intercom
MC0
continuous
45.46.84.85.
Meet-me
answer
86. 102
Message
waiting
86. 102
3.74.90
Mmltes
3, 74. 90
(SLT FLASH control)
call (TRS)
51.87.
100, 101
answer
cancel
set
tone
International
103
ML/EL
keys
ML/MC0
Month
K
83.99
separation
3.74.90
Multi-line
J.
calls
37.80.96
key assigument
43.44.70.
72,
83.99
Key Plan
34. 38. 48. 66. 69. 70. 71
Key bank
(automatic)
HOLD
Multiple
DID
5. 74.90
Mute key
86. 102
f-
3.74.90
N
L
Name
Large-display
87.96,
telephones
4.36,
37, 74. 80.
103
and message
storing
48.49.87.
Name
assignment
48.49.87.
Network sync source recovery
103
timer
103
22.
n
76, 92
LCR
add table 57. 62. 89. 105
area codes/office
codes 57. 58.88,
104
delete table 57. 62, 89. 105
forced
35. 67. 68, 70. 80. 96
office codes/special
area codes 57. 59, 88.
104
time bands
88. 104
time priority tables
57. 58. 60, 88. 104
trunk groups
57.60.61,88,
104
trunk ports
88. 104
LCR (Least
Cost Routing)
Least Cost Routing
Line coding format
Lockout
code
102
28.57-62.86.
28. 57-62, 86. 102
wiw
automatic
switch
8
/day
82.84.98.
100
delayed-ring
tables
82. 98
key 86,102
ring 39.75.91
TRS 55.86
all extensions
55.88
Non-appearance
Number
CO line HOLD
system)
3.74.90
of channels
used
(exclusive/
.
24. 25. 77.93
f
(LCR)
24. 25, 77. 78. 93. 94
35. 67.68.
70.74.90
116
Photocopying
Wet extension
0
I
1
(Hunt
Group)
40. 81.82.97,
98
Off hook
Office
signal
(CO line)
36.80.96
LCR
TRS
57.58
50. 52. 56
trunk
Ports
(9, 81 to 86)
70
24, 25. 77. 78, 93. 94
OrQinal
forms
1.2.28.
57. 63. 64.66.69.
Outbound
ground
Outgoing
Outpulse
34, 38. 42, 48. 50.
timer
17. 75.9 1
signaBn% class
27.78.94
delay timer
22. 77, 93
Out of sync
Overrides
name assignment
names
(90 to 99)
- large display
PSD (personal
86.89.
SSD)
X
PSD
25.26.77,78.93,94
TRS (allows
settings
28, 31. 86. 102
2-105
73, 106. 111
detection
access (MCO) group
Pre-programmed
codes
45.46.
83-85, 99- 10 1
Reface
1
Prime line preference
35.67. 68. 70.86. 102
Private line port number
31
Product SafetJr
110
Programming
addresses - FFl to FFlO Keys
OHCA answerback
49. 87. 103
Onhook transfer
3, 74.90
One-touch
dialing
3.74.90
Operating
mode during alarm condition
3.74.90
speed
99
dial)
49.87.
103
36.43.49.64.65.
102. 105
Pulse or DTMF
P
c
Pooled
codes
dial
31. 76. 92
R
1
Page groups
(00 to 07)
extensions
relay
36.67.68.
72.86
7. 8. 75. 91
Page zones
70.84.85.
100, 101
Page call display/large-display
Pa@qj
duration
Parity check (SMDR)
Park-H&I
key
retrieve
84,85,
Park-HOLD
recall
attendant
telephone
5.74.90
100, 101
11, 75. 91
extensions
12, 75.91
after
dialing
1 to 9,OI
7, 75. 91
(automatic)
access codes
FLASH timer
Permanent
13. 75. 91
5. 6. 75. 91
16.75.91
call forward
37.67.68.
70.80.96
extension
37, 67.68.
70, 80. 96
Personal speed dial (PSD) 36.43.49.64.65.
86,89.
102. 105
Radio interference
110
RAl-A baud rate switch
5.74.90
RAI-B baud rate switch
4. 74.90
Recall timers
2. 8-12, 38. 75, 91
Red alarm counter
22.77.93
Red alarm detection
timer
24.26, 77, 78.
93.94
Red alarm recovery
detection
timer
24.26.
77, 78, 93. 94
timers
Pause (automatic
Pause-timer
PBX
37
5.74.90
6.
Red alarm relay control
25.77.93
Redial
3. ?4
Registering
equipment
107
Relay (page groups)
7.8. 75. 91
Release acknowledge
timer
22.77.93
Remote loopback
detection
24.25. 77.78.
93.94
Remote Maintenance
Code
19. 75.91
Responsibility
of Manufacturer
of
Registered
Equipment
109
Restriction
on maximum
digits dialed
5 1.
87, 103
Reversion
timer
(attendant)
12. 75
n
d
e
Ring assignment
and Hunt Groups
38.39.
81. 82. 97, 98
Ring assignments
38.40.67.68,
70, 81.82,
97.98
Rw?
signal
delay timer
14, 75, 91
incoming
31. 76. 92
pilot number and CO line 39.8 1.97
Ring timer (incoming)
14.81.97
Ringback
tone with busy signal
37.67.68.
80.96
Ringback
transmission
27, 78.94
Ringer Equivalence
Number (REN)
107
Ringing Une preference
36. 67. 68, 70. 80.
96
S
Save/repeat
86. 102
dial
store
Second attendant
4. 46. 74.90
Signal loss counter
25.26. 77, 78.93. 94
Single line telephone
(SLT) 3. 14, 74. 75.
90.91
Slip counter
24. 26, 77. 78. 93.94
SLT
FLASH control
3, 74.90
hook flash
37.67.68.70.80.96
onhook FLASH timer
14. 75.91
SLT (single line telephone)
3. 14. 74. 75.
90.91
SLT DISA ringing
pattern
5.74.90
SMDR
baud rate 5. 74. 90
data length
5, 74. 90
print mode 1 5.74.90
print mode 2 (long distance/local
calls) 5.
74. 90
print mode 3 (titles and TN data) 5. 74. 90
printout/incoming
calls 36. 67. 68, 70
stop-bit length
3. 5. 74. 90
timer 16/30
3. 74.90
lTY parity check
4, 74. 90
TTY parity type 4.74.90
Software versions
1
1.0. 2.0 - B card
3.0. 3.1 - A card
Special area codes
LCR 57. 59,88,89.
104. 105
TRS 50. 53, 56.87. 88. 103. 104
Special office codes
LCR 57,59,88,89,
104, 105
TRS 50. 53. 56.87. 88. 103. 104
Speed dial list
48.64.65.89.
105
Splash tone
busy override
4. 74. 90
voice call 4. 74, 90
SSD
display mode 3.74.90
name assignment (00 to 89) / large-display
telephones
4, 49. 87. 103
toll restriction
override
3, 74.90
SSD (system speed dial)
2.3.4.48.49.
64,
65. 74. 86. 89. 90. 102. 105
Stacked calls (attendant
overflow)
4.74.90
Station lockout
code
35.67.68.70.86.
102
Stored codes 21
Snbmodes
2.34
Summary key plan
71.72
Synchronization
setting
first sync source
22.76.92
second sync source
22.76.92
third sync source
22. 76, 92
Sync loss counter
25, 26. 77. 78. 93.. 94
System HOLD
3.74.90
System programming
2-27. 76.92
ID code 21. 75.91
System size 2 1. 76.92
System speed dial (SSD) 2.3.4.48.49,
64.
65, 74. 86, 89. 90, 102. 105
I
n
d
e
X
T
Tl alarm keys
43.44.86.
Tl port class
station
37. 80. 96
trunk
33.79.95
/
102
118
(’
Talk back key
86, 102
Telephone
types
34.35.80.96
Telephone
line system (trunk type)
3 1. 76.
92
Third attendant
4. 74. 90
Time
2. 3. 74. 90
Time bands (LCR)
59, 88, 104
Time priority
tables (LCR) 57. 58. 60. 88.
104
Timers
attendant
HOLD-recall
8, 75. 91
Hunt Group recall
10, 75, 91
intercom
HOLD-recall
17, 75. 91
transfer-recall
18. 75. 91
park-HOLD
recall
11.75.9
1
reversion
12. 75, 9 1
transfer-recall
9. 75. 9 1
automatic
pause timer
13.75.91
call forward/no
answer
16.75.91
CO he FLASH
13. 75.91
dial pause
15.75, 91
DISA end 32.76. 92
DISA start 32, 76, 92
extensions
HOLD-recall
8, 75. 92
Hunt Group recall
10. 75. 92
intercom
HOLD-recall
18. 75. 91
transfer-recall
18. 75, 9 1
incoming ground detection
17. 75. 91
incoming ring delay
15. 75. 9 1
outbound
ground detection
17. 75.9 1
PBX FIASH
16.75.91
SLT onhook FLASH
14.75.91
trunk disconnect
32, 76. 92
unsupervised
conference talk-time
13. 75,
91
Wink start (DID) 32, 76, 92
Titles
5, 74. 90
Toll Restriction
System (TRS)
3, 50-56. 67,
68. 87. 88. 103. 104
Tone busy (voice mail)
4, 74. 90
Tone call
3.86. 102
Tone pattern
(incoming
ring signal)
3 1. 76.
92
Transfer extension
(attendant)
4. 74: 90
Transfer-recall
timers
attendant
9. 75. 91
extension
10.75.91
TRS
area codes/of&e
codes 50, 52. 87.88,
103. 104
block mode/area
codes (1 to 4)
:,I,cCOR types (3 to 61 56. 88, 104
block mode/of&e
codes (5 to 8)
COR types (3 to 6) 56.88. 104
block mode/special
area office codes
(13 to 16) 56, 88, 104
COR types (3 to 6) 56, 88, 104
block mode/special
office codes (9 to 12)
COR types (3 to 6) 56.88,
104
COR 70.87.88,
103. 104
day assignment
50. 55. 67. 68. 88, 104
international
calIs 5 1.87, 103
night assignment
50. 55.67.68.88,
104
override
3.87.88.
103. 104
special area code table 50, 53.87. 103
TRS (toll restriction
system)
3. 50-56. 67.
68, 87, 88. 103. 104
Trunk class 24.25.77.93
Tmnk mode
27.78.94
L
d
e
X
-POqueueing
86. 102
Trunk selection
32.79. 95
Tnmk-to-trunk
conferencing
2. 13. 31, 75, 76.91.92
Trunk type
26.78,94
(unsupervised)
disconnect timer 32. 76. 92
features list 28.31-33,
76. 92
LCR
group order 61, 89. 105
group settings
28.88,89.
104. 105
group tables 60. 61. 88.89.
104, 105
lines 28.76.92
names
29.30. 49. 87. 103
port lists 28-30.76.92
port settings
31. 32. 76. 92
119
piogramrning
28-33
setting
3
types (CO line/PBX line)
use 31. 76. 92
lTY
data
.
3 1, 76.92
I
n
d
e
i
5.74.90
U
7. 75.91
UNA (Universal
Night Answer)
Unattended
(unsupervised)
conference
2.
13. 31. 35. 67. 68, 75, 76, 91, 92
Universal
Night
Answer
(UNA) riug pattern
7. 75, 91
Unsupervised
conference
extension
capability
35. 75. 91
talk-time
2, 13. 75.91
trunk capability
2, 3 1. 76. 92
V
Verified
Verified
Account
Account
Codes
8.75.91
Code Toll Restriction
8,
75.91
Voice call
Voice mail
3. 74. 86.90.
(busy tone)
102
4. 74. 90
W
Whk
Wink
signal start detection
timer
start timer @ID) 32.79.95
22.77.93
n
Yellow alarm couuter
25.26. 77. 78.93.94
Yellow alarm detection
timer
24.26.77.
78.
93.94
Yellow alarm notification
24.26.77.78.93,
94
Yellow alarm recovery
detection
timer
24,
!’
26. 77. 78. 93. .94
Yellow
Year
alarm
relay
control
25. 77.93
3.74.90
120
1i-V
jiri
!__-_
/;.--;I-_--.
jr---~
,
---
Operation
Section
700
FCC Warning
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio comrnunications. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user
at his own expense will be required to take necessarymeasures to correct the interference.
Battery Recycling Statement
I
The following statement applies if you purchased backup batteries with your system.
The product you have purchased contains rechargeable batteries. The- batteries are recyclable. At the end of their useful life, under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of these batteries into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste
officials for details on recycling options or proper disposal.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by the Panasonic Communications & Systems Company (PCSC).
PCSC reserves the right, without notice, to make changes to equipment design as advances in
engineering and manufacturing methods warrant.
The software and hardware described in this document may be used or copied only in accordance
with the terms of the license pertaining to said software or hardware.
Reproduction, publication, or duplication of this manual, or any part thereof, in any manner,
mechanically, electronically, or photographically, is prohibited without permission of the
Panasonic Communications & Systems Company (PCSC).
@Copyright 1993 by Panasonic Communications & Systems Company
All rights reserved.
About This Manual
Software
Versions
Covered
by This Manual
This manual covers all versions of CPC-A and CPC-B software through CPC-B
Version 4.0.
Differences in feature availability or operation are noted within each feature
description.
If you are using this manual for a single DBS system, make note of its software
version in the following table. This note may be referenced by technicians or owners
of the system.
SofrWare version information for systems shipped with this document
CPC Model:
Software Version:
Organization
This manual contains detailed descriptions of DBS features. The feature descriptions
are organized according to the following categories:
Feature Categories
Description
System Features
System Features are either available on a system-wide basis
or aid in the overall administration of the DBS.
Attendant Features
Attendant Features assist the attendant in serving as a central
answering point. In addition, attendant features also provide
special capabilities for monitoring and programming
extensions.
Key Telephone Features
Key Telephone Features are available to DBS key phones.
DBS key phones are proprietary digital sets that provide
feature access through a combination of feature keys and
access codes.
Digital Single-Line Telephone
(DSLT) Features
DSLT Features are available to Digital Single-Line
Telephones. DSLTs provide digital audio quality and limited
feature key access in a single-lute set.
Single Line Telephone
Features
SLT Features are available to industry-standard 2500 sets.
Since SLTs are not equipped with feature keys, most features
are accessed by using the dialpad and/or’ the switchhook.
Purpose
The purpose of this manual is to provide an overview of feature operation and
requirements. Where applicable, the following types of information are provided for
each feature.
Types of information
Purpose
Description
The Description section provides an overview of how the
feature works and, in some cases, what it is typically used for.
Operation
The Operation section includes step-by-step instructions on
how to use the feature.
Hardware Requirements
This section lists any special hardware that is required to use
the feature.
Related Programming
The Related Programming section lists the programming
subsystems associated with the feature.
Considerations
This section provides details on feature interactions and
limitations.
ii
Table of Contents
System
Features
Account Codes.. .......................................................................................................................... 2
Non-Verified Account Codes ................................................................................................. 2
Verified Account Codes.......................................................................................................... 4
6
Auto Day Mode ..........................................................................................................................
:-.
Auto Set Relocation .................................................................................................................... 7
Background Music.. .................................................................................................................... 9
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail.. .................................................................................... 10
Centrex/PBX Compatibility ...................................................................................................... 12
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) .................................................................................................... 13
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ...................................................................................... 14
Distinctive Ringing ................................................................................................................... c-16 .
Door Phone ............................................................................................................................... 17
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion .............................................................................................. 18
Independent Timers .................................................................................................................. 19
Least Cost Routing (LCR) ........................................................................................................ 20
Music-on-Hold .......................................................................................................................... 21
Night Service ............................................................................................................................ 22
Off-Premises Extension ............................................................................................................ 24
Paging ....................................................................................................................................... 25
Power Failure Transfer ............................................................................................................. 27
Station Class of Service ............................................................................................................ 28
Station Hunting ......................................................................................................................... 29
Terminal and Circular Hunting ............................................................................................. 29
Station Hunting (CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher) ................................................................... 3 1
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR). ............................................................................ 34
Tl Interface.. ............................................................................................................................. 36
Toll Restriction ......................................................................................................................... 38
Trunk Name Assignment.. ........................................................................................................ 41
Trunk Queuing .......................................................................................................................... 42
Universal Night Answer ........................................................................................................... 43
Voice Mail Ringing .................................................................................................................. 45
Waking TRS Class of Service ...................................................................... Z.......................... 45
Attendant
Features
Attendant Assignment of Speed Dialing ..................................................................................
Attendant Busy Override ..........................................................................................................
Attendant Call Park ...................................................................................................................
Attendant Control of Absence Messages, Call Foiwarding, and DND ....................................
Attendant-Controlled Text Assignment.. ..................................................................................
Attendant Groups.. ....................................................................................................................
Dial Tone Disable .....................................................................................................................
DS972.. ....................................................................................................................................
Headset Operation .....................................................................................................................
Station Lockout Code Assignment.. .........................................................................................
System Time and Date Control .................................................................................................
Traffic Measurement .................................................................................................................
Walking COS Confutation .....................................................................................................
Key Telephone
50
51
52
54
55
58
59
60
62
63
64
66
68
Features
Absence Message...................................................................................................................... 70
Busy Override ........................................................................................................................... 73
Call Coverage Groups ............................................................................................................... 74
Call Forwarding ........................................................................................................................ 76
Call Hold ................................................................................................................................... 80
Exclusive Hold.. .................................................................................................................... 80
System Hold .......................................................................................................................... 81
. CallPark ................................................................................................................................... 83
Call Pickup ................................................................................................................................ 85
Direct Call Pickup.. ................................................................................................................ 85
Group Call Pickup ................................................................................................................ 86
Call Transfer ............................................................................................................................. 88
Blind Transfer ....................................................................................................................... 88
Screened Transfer ................................................................................................................. 90
Call Waiting .............................................................................................................................. 92
Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply .............................................................................................. 95
Camp-on .................................................................................................................................... 96
CO Line Key Trunk Access ...................................................................................................... 98
Conference Calls ....................................................................................................................... 99
Dial “0” for Attendant.. ........................................................................................................... 101
Direct Trunk Access ............................................................................................................... 102
iv
,
Do-Not-Disturb (DND) ............................................................................................................103
EM/24 Console ....................................................................................................................... 105
Flexible Function (FF) Keys.. ................................................................................................. 105
Handsfree Answerback ........................................................................................................... 111
Intercom Calling ..................................................................................................................... 112
Last Number Redial ................................................................................................................ 115
Line Appearances ................................................................................................................... 116
Extension Line (EL) Appearances...................................................................................... 116
Direct Line (DL) Appearances............................................................................................ 118
Multi-CO (MCO) Appearances .......................................................................................... 119
Multi-Line (ML) Appearances............................................................................................ 120
ML/MC0 Separation .............................................................................................................. 122
Meet-Me Answer .................................................................................................................... 123
Message Waiting/Callback Request ....................................................................................... 124
Off-Hook Voice Announce (OHVA). ..................................................................................... 127
One-Touch Keys ..................................................................................................................... 129
Onhook Dialing ....................................................................................................................... 133
Pooled Trunk Access .............................................................................................................. 134
Prime Line Preference ............................................................................................................ 136
Private Line ............................................................................................................................. 137
Reminder Call ......................................................................................................................... 139
Saved Number Redial ............................................................................................................. 140
Speed Dialing .......................................................................................................................... 142
Personal Speed Dialing.. ..................................................................................................... 142
System Speed Dial .............................................................................................................. 146
Station Lockout ....................................................................................................................... 148
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.. .............................................................;...I..................................... 149
DSLT Features
Absence Message ....................................................................................................................
Busy Override .........................................................................................................................
Call Forwarding ......................................................................................................................
Call Hold.. ...............................................................................................................................
Call Park .................................................................................................................................
Call Pickup ..............................................................................................................................
Direct Call Pickup ...............................................................................................................
Group Call Pickup ..............................................................................................................
V
152
154
155
158
159
160
160
.161
Call Transfer ........................................................................................................................... 162
Blind Transfer ..................................................................................................................... 162
Screened Transfer ............................................................................................................... 163
Call Waiting ............................................................................................................................ 165
Camp-on .................................................................................................................................. 167
Conference Calls ..................................................................................................................... 168
Dial “0” for Attendant.. ........................................................................................................... 169
Direct Trunk Access ............................................................................................................... 170
Do-Not-Disturb (DND) ........................................................................................................... 171
Intercom Calling .......................................................................................................................172
Last Number Redial ................................................................................................................ 173
Meet-Me Answer .................................................................................................................... 174
Message Waiting/Callback Request ....................................................................................... 175
Off-Hook Voice Announce (OHVA) ...................................................................................... 176
Onhook Dialing ....................................................................................................................... 178
Pooled Trunk Access .............................................................................................................. 179
Reminder Call ......................................................................................................................... 180
Saved Number Redial ............................................................................................................. 181
Speed Dialing.. ........................................................................................................................ 182
Personal Speed Dialing ....................................................................................................... 182
System Speed Dial .............................................................................................................. 184
SLT Features
Absence Message.. .................................................................................................................. 186
Busy Override ......................................................................................................................... 1.88
CaIl Forwarding ...................................................................................................................... 189
Call Hold.. ............................................................................................................................... 192
Call Park ................................................................................................................................. 193
Call Pickup.. ............................................................................................................................ 194
Direct Call Pickup.. ............................................................................................................. 194
Group Call Pickup .............................................................................................................. 195
Call Transfer ........................................................................................................................... 196
Blind Transfer ..................................................................................................................... 196
Screened Transfer ............................................................................................................... 198
Call waiting ............................................................................................................................ 200
Camp-on .................................................................................................................................. 202
Conference CalIs.. .................................................................................................................... 203
Dial “0” for Attendant.. ........................................................................................................... 205
Direct Trunk Access ............................................................................................................... 206
vi
Do-Not-Disturb (DND). .......................................................................................................... ,206
Intercom Calling ..................................................................................................................... 208
Last Number Redial ................................................................................................................ 209
Meet-Me Answer .................................................................................................................... 210
Message Waiting/Callback Request ....................................................................................... 211
Off-Hook Voice Announce (OHVA). ..................................................................................... 212
Pooled Trunk Access .............................................................................................................. 214
Speed Dialing .......................................................................................................................... 215
Personal Speed Dialing.. ..................................................................................................... 2 15
System Speed Dial .............................................................................................................. 215
vii
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Chapter 1. System Features
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of DBS System Features. System Features
are either available on a system-wide basis or aid in the overall administration of the
DBS.
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Account
System Features
CPC-B. Version 4
Codes
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and
times, numbers called, and outside line numbers used. This information is then printed
for each account in the SMDR record.
Non-Verified
Account
Codes
(CPC-A and CPC-B Versions Prior to 3.1)
Description
In CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1, account codes are not verified. Nonverified account codes can beforced or voluntary, depending on extension
programming.
With voluntary account codes, the user is not forced to enter an account code before
making a call. With forced account codes, the user must enter an account code before
accessing an outside line.
Non-verified account codes can be assigned to incoming and outgoing calls. To assign
an account code to an outgoing call, the user enters the account code before making
the call or during the call. To assign an account code to an incoming call, the user
enters the account code during the call.
To enter an Account Code before dialing:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the AUTO key, then press “#.”
l
“Enter Account #,’ will appear on the display.
l
If you are using a Single Line Telephone (SLT), dial “#7.”
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press 2.”
0 “Entered Account w” will appear on the display.
2
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
5. Press a vacant CO key or dial a trunk access code.
6. Dial the telephone number.
To enter an Account Code during an outside call:
1. Press the AUTO key.
2. Press ‘Y#.”
“Enter Account #I” will appear on the display.
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
l
The Account Cede entered will appear on the display.
4. Press “#.”
Hardware Requirements
l
An SMDR printer or external call accounting system is required to collect
account code records.
Related Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced Account Codes
l
SLTs cannot assign account codes during a call.
Considerations
3
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
I
Verified
Account
Codes
(CPC-B, Version 3.1 or higher)
Description
Extensions with the Verified Account Codes feature enabled are restricted from
making outside calls without fist entering a valid Account Code. After a valid
Account Code is entered, the Toll Restriction Service (TRS) type assigned to the code
is substituted for the extension TRS type, thus temporarily allowing calls based on the
new TRS type.
Extensions with the Verified Account Codes feature disabled can place outside calls
based on the TRS type assigned to the extension. If a user wishes to place a call that
would normally be restricted at the extension, a valid Verified Account Code can be
entered to upgrade the TRS type assigned to the extension.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “# 11.”
3. Enter the four-digit Account Code.
4. Press “#.”
You will hear intercom dial tone.
5. Press an available CO key or dial a trunk access code.
You will hear outside dial tone.
6. Dial the telephone number.
The Verified Account Code TRS type will remain in effect until the call is
completed.
4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Verified Forced Account Codes
l
FFl (System): Toll Restriction for Verified Forced Account Codes
l
FF3 (Extension): Verified Forced Account Codes
l
FF7 (TRS): Toll Restriction Settings
Hardware Requirements
An SMDR printer or external call accounting system is required to collect
account code records.
l
Considerations
l
Verified account codes are for outgoing calls only.
l
The maximum number of verified account codes is 100.
l
Each verifkd account code must consist of 4 digits.
l
“0000” cannot be used for a verified account code.
l
Verified account codes do not override station lockout.
* Verifkd account codes do not override Least Cost Routing (LCR) settings.
l
With CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher, non-verified account codes can be used.
However, they can only be used on a voluntary basis. Forced non-verified
account codes are not available with CPC-B 3.1 or higher.
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-8, Version 4
i
Auto Day Mode
(CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
Description
Auto Day Mode allows the DBS to go into day mode automatically.
The DBS can also be programmed to go into night mode automatically (see “Night
Service,” page l-22).
If only one of the auto modes is turned on, the NIGHT key is used to turn off the auto
mode. For instance, if night mode has been activated automatically, the attendant must
press the NIGHT key to go into day mode.
If only one of the auto modes is turned on, the NIGHT key can also be used to go into
an auto mode before the scheduled time.
If both auto day and auto night modes are turned on, the attendant NIGHT key cannot
be used.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Auto Day Mode Start Timer
l
FF1 (System): Auto Night Mode Start ?imer
Considerations
l
l
l
If both auto modes are set, the starting times must differ by at least one
hour.
When one auto mode is turned on, the mode cannot be reset by the NIGHT
key until 3 minutes after the auto mode is activated. (When both auto
modes are set, the MGHT key cannot be used.)
If a NIGHT key is not assigned, the accesscode #52 can be used instead.
6
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-8, Version 4
Auto Set Relocation
(CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
Des&p tion
With Auto Set Relocation, the program settings of one extension can be relocated to
another extension.
Auto Set Relocation is commonly used when extension users want to “trade” work
areas. For example, if Extensions “A” and “B” are going to switch office locations,
auto set relocation enables them to also switch telephone settings without reprogramming.
Operation
Before a phone can be relocated, it must be assigned an auto set relocation code. See
“Programming Requirements” for the associated program address.
The following example illustrates how the program settings for extensions 200 and
300 could be switched.
To Transfer Extension Settings from 200 to 300:
1. At extension 200, pick up the handset.
2. Press “#lO.”
3. Dial extension number 300.
4. Enter the four-digit auto set relocation code assigned to extension 300.
5. Replace the handset.
l
l
All programmed station features, TRS, and LCR settings from 200 will be
transferred to 300.
Extension 300 will be placed out of service.
7
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
To Reactivate Extension 300:
1. Unplug the extension cable from 300.
2. Reconnect the cable.
Extension 300 will now assume all station features, TRS, and LCR settings
that were initially assigned to 200.
Related Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): Auto Set Relocation Code
l
The following types of data can be transferred using this feature:
Considerations
- TRS type settings
- Ring settings (trunk line, remote ringing, day/night, DID)
- FF key data
- Extension numbers and names
- Absence messages
- Call forward settings
- Message waiting
- All settings and data defined by programming.
l
Settings may not be transferred between extensions of different types. In
other words, an SLT and a KTEL cannot exchange program settings-
* Attendant 1 is excluded from this feature.
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Background
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Music
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
If your system is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the
speakers of idle telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background
Music, the music will stop and the phone will ring. Background Music will also be
interrupted when the phone goes offhook.
The system can also provide music-on-hold using the background music source or a
separate music source. If music-on-hold is provided, callers automatically hear music
when they are placed on hold. (See page 1-21 for more information on Music-onHold.)
Operation
To turn Background Music on:
1. Press the ON/OFFkey.
l
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The
2. Dial
ON/OFFLED
will light.
“#53.”
“BGM ON” will appear on the display.
3. Press the ON/OFFkey.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
To
turn Background Music off:
1. Press the ON/OFFkey.
l
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “#53.”
“BGM OFF+’ will appear on the display.
9
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
l
The date and time will appear on the display.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System) Station Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension) Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
Hardware Requirements
l
l
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the
DBS.
If a single music source is used for both music-on-hold and background
music, the music source connects to the CN5 on the DBS. If a separate
music source is used for background music, it connects directly to the SCC
card. Seeinstallation (Section300) for instructions.
l
The input impedance for the music source is 1Okohms.
l
The maximum input level is 10 dB.
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
(CPC-A Version 3.1; All CPC-B Versions)
Des&p tion
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail allows users to call forward to a third-party
voice mail system. The ID Code sends the digits that are required by the Voice Mail to
identify the DBS extension and allow it to retrieve messages.
With CPC-A or CPC-B Version 1.0, you can only set the ID Code from the phone that
will be forwarded. Beginning with WC-B Version 2.0, ID Codes can be set from any
key phone.
10
System Features
CPC-6, VeFsion 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
To set a Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail:
1. Press the PROG key.
2. Press the AUTO key.
3. Press “*.”
4. If you are using CPC-B Version 2.0 or later, enter the extension number that
will be forwarded. If you are using CPC-A or CPC-B Version 1.O,go to Step
5.
5. Enter up to 16 digits (0 - 9) for the mail box ID code. (Press the REDIAL
key to insert a pause.)
6. Press the HOLD key.
i
To clear the ID Code:
1. Press the PROG key.
2. Press the AUTO key.
3. Press “*.”
4. Enter the extension number.
5. Press the HOLD key.
11
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
CentrexlPBX
Compatibility
.
(CPC-A Version 3.2 or higher; CPC-B Version 2.1 or higher)
Description
Centrex Compatibility allows the DBS to be connected to centrex or PBX lines.
The DBS supports up to 8 access codes for dialing centrex or a PBX. These access
codes allow the DBS SMDR output to exclude the number dialed to reach a centrex or
PBX line.
The DBS also supports transmission of a “flash” signal over the centrex or PBX link.
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): PBX Access Code
l
FF2 (Trunks): Central Offrce Line Type
l
FF8 (Least Cost Routing): Add Table
Considerations
l
The LCR Add Table can be used to prefix digits for outgoing calls through
Centrex.
12
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
(CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher)
Description
The Direct inward Dialing (DID) feature allows a station to have a dedicated direct
number. The dedicated number allows the calls to be made directly to the station,
without the caller going through the attendant.
Prior to CPC-B Version 3:1, only one DID number could be assigned to a station.
Beginning with CPC-B Version 3; 1, one DID number can be assigned to several
stations, and one station can have more than one DID number.
Lf a DlD number is assigned to more than one station, incoming calls to the DlD
number ring at all the assigned stations simultaneously.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Multiple DID (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension DID Number (CPC-B Version 2.0 to 2.16)
Hardware Requirements
The DID trunk card is required. Each DID truck card provides 8 ports.
l
The DID trunk card requires an external 48V power supply. See
Installation (Section300) for instructions.
l
Considerations
The DBS supports 4-digit, dial-pulse DID.
l
l
l
DID numbers must be between 0000 and 9999.
Beginning with CPC-B Version 3.1, a maximum of 500 DID/extension
settings is allowed.
13
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
.
(All Versions)
Direct Inward SystemAccess(DISA) allows off-site usersdial-in accessto the DBS.
UsersaccessDISA by dialinga 7digit numberassignedto a DISA trunk.
For securityreasons,oneincomingDISA codeandtwo outgoingDISA codescanbe
assigned.If assigned,theincomingcodemust beenteredassoonasthe DISA trunk
answers.If an outgoingcode(s)is assigned,the outgoingcode(s)must be entered
beforethe userdials an outgoingcall.
Operation
1. Dial the DISA trunk number.
2. Onceyou heardial tone from the DBS, enterthe 4-digit DISA code.
If the incomingDISA code is not programmed,you canproceedto the next
step.
3. If you’re dialing anextensionwithin the DBS, dial the extensionnumber.If
you’re dialing an outsidenumber,go to the next step.
4. Dial #7 plus the 4-digit Outgoing DISA Code(s).
Up to two outgoingDISA codescan beassignedfor securitypurposes.
However,the outgoingcodesare optional,soyou may not be requiredto dial
a codeafter the #7.
5. Dial the trunk groupnumberyou want to use(81-86 or 9).
6. Dial the desiredtelephonenumber.
14
(
System Features
CPC-9, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): DISA ID Setting
l
FFl (System): DISA Outgoing Code 1
l
FFl (System): DISA Outgoing Code 2
l
FF2 (Trunk): DISA Port Enable
l
FF2 (Trunk): DISA Start Time
l
FF2 (Trunk): DISA End Time
To program an incoming code from an Attendant Phone:
In addition to the DISA ID Setting in FFl, the following procedure can be used to
program an incoming code.
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the CONF key.
3. Dial ‘W.”
4. Enter the DISA code.
5. Pressthe HOLD key.
6. Pressthe ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
15
Sediori 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Hardware Requirements
l
An MFR card is required for DISA. The MFR card is required to detect
DTMF tones entered via the DISA connection.
Considerations
l
l
DISA can be used access extensions as well as outside numbers.
Once an incoming DISA code is entered, you cannot blank it out without
entering the programming mode.
* Busy override cannot be used for a DISA line.
l
Distinctive
With CPC-A and CPC-B Versions 2.0 to 2.1, DISA calls cannot accesshunt
groups.
Ringing
(CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
Des&p tion
Distinctive trunk call ringing patterns can be set up for each extension using the
Distinctive Ringing feature. This allows users to determine which extension is ringing
when several telephones are in the same area. If no distinctive ringing pattern is set,
the extension will ring based on the incoming ring pattern assigned to the trunk.
Related Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Ring Pattern
Hardware Requirements
l
SCC-B Version 1.2 or higher is required for this feature.
l
One of ten ringing patterns can be selected.
l
The ringing patterns are different for key phones and SLT/OPX phones.
,
Considerations
16
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Door Phone
(All Versions)
Description
The DBS can control a door phone through an extension, making it possible for you to
identify callers without leaving your seat.
The Door Opener can be controlled from any extension. The Door Gpener only
operates during Intercom Galls with the Door Phone extension.
Operation
1. Answer the-door phone.
2. Press “3” while connected to the Door Phone extension.
The door will open automatically.
Related Programmihg
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Ringing Assignments
Hardware Requirements
0 The Door Phone requires a door box adaptor (VB-43701) door box (VA43705), door opener, and door sensor.The door opener and door sensor can
be purchased from an electronics dealer.
l
Up to two door phones can be connected to a Door Box Adaptor.
l
Each door phone uses one trunk port.
l
The Door Phone extension cannot take part in conference calls.
l
l
The Door Opener can be set to open for 15 seconds, 30 seconds, or one
minute.
While the Door Gpener is functioning, a call from another Door Phone
cannot be answered.
17
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
- .
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
This featureallows an extensionuserto switch from DP to DTMF signalingwhen
usinga DP trunk.
For instance,if a userdialsinto a voice mail systemusinga DP trunk, the usercan
switch to DTMF signalingto communicatewith the voice mail system.
DTMF tonescan be senteither during the call or while thecall is beingdialed.
Operation
To switch from dial pulseto DTMF dialing, press“*” or “#.”
Related Programming
l
FF2 (Trunk): Dial SendType
Considerations
l
l
l
DTMF dialingremainsin effect for the durationof the call. Pulsedialingis
restoredwhenthe handsetis replaced.
Once DTMF dialing is invoked, the usercannotswitch backto pulse
dialing without disconnectingthe call.
Changingfrom dial pulseto DTMF is possibleevenif the “*” or Y” key is
programmedfor speeddialing.
18
’
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Independent
Timers
(CPC-B, Version 3.1 or higher)
Des&p tion
Beginning with CPC-B Version 3.1, the DBS provides separate timers for Call
Forwarding-No Answer, CO Delayed Ring, Extension Delayed Ring, and Hunt
Group--No Answer.
The Call Forwarding-No Answer timer determines how long a call will ring an
extension before forwarding.
The CO Delayed Ring and Extension Delayed Ring timers determine how long a call
will ring an extension before ringing other extensions assigned the delayed ringing.
The Hunt Group-No Answer timer determines how long a call will ring an idle
member of a hunt group before hunting to the next idle group member.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Call Forward No Answer Timer
l
FFl (System): CO Line Delayed Ring Timer
l
FFl (System): Extension Delayed Ring Tier
l
FFl (System): Hunt Group No Answer Timer
19
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
(All Versions)
Description
Least cost routing (LCR) automatically selects the least expensive route available
when making toll calls.
LCR is accessedby dialing “9” before placing a call.
Related Programming
Primary Program Areas:
l
FFl (System): LCR Access
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
l
FF8 (LCR): Xme Priority Tables
l
FF8 (LCR): Trunk Group Tables
l
FF8 (LCR): Area Code Tables
l
FF8 (LCR): Office Code Tables
Other Program Areas:
l
FF8 (LCR): Dial Add Table Storage
l
FF8 (LCR): Dial Delete Table Storage
l
FF8 (LCR): Special Area Code Table Storage
l
FF8 (LCR): Special Office Code Table Storage
Considerations
l
l
l
If LCR is enabled, ML and MC0 keys can be assigned for trunk group 89.
However, the FF keys will not light.
If the LCR feature is deactivated, Pooled Trunk Access is selected
automatically.
Your system can be programmed to use the LCR feature for all outgoing
calls.
20
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Music-on-Hold
(All Versions)
Description
The DBS can provide music-on-hold to parties on hold on a CO line. The music-onhold feature can also be used to play announcements or advertisements if desired.
The system can provide music-on-hold using the background music source or a
separate music source. See “Background Music” on page l-9 for more information.
_. .
Hardware Requirements
e The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the
DBS.
l
If a single music source is used for both music-on-hold and background
music, the music source connects to the CN5 on the DBS. If a separate
music source is used for background music, it is connected directly to the
SCC card. See Installation (Section300) for instructions.
* The input impedance for the music source is 1Okohms.
0 The maximum input level is 10 dB.
21
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Night Service
(All Versions)
Description
The Attendant can switch the system between Day and Night Modes for answering
outside calls. It is also possible to program the system to switch between night and day
modes automatically. (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher is required for automatic day
mode settings.)
While in Night Mode (generally used at night or any time when your office is closed),
incoming calls can ring at selected extensions (a night watchman’s extension, for
example), an extension connected to an answering machine, or to a Universal Night
Answer point. Universal Night Answer (UNA) is used to allow calls to be picked up
from any extension,
See page l-43 for information on setting a UNA point.
See “Auto Day Mode” (page l-6) for information on a CPC-B Version 4 enhancement
that allows automatic switching between day and night modes.
Operation
To switch to Night Mode:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
* You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “#52.”
3. Pressthe ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
l
“NIGHT MODE” will appear on the display.
22
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To switch
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
to Day Mode:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
l
2. Dial “#52.”
3. Pressthe ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
l
“DAY MODE” will appear on the display.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service
l
FFl (System): Ring Patterns for UNA Terminals
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service
l
F’F4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Central Office Day Ring Assignment
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Central Office Night Ring Assignment
Hardware Requirements
Calls during Night Mode are often directed to external paging speakers or
an external ringing device, such as a night bell. External paging and ringing
devices are not provided with the DBS; they must be purchased separately.
l
Considerations
By assigning “%I” to an FF key on an attendant phone, one-touch
switching between Day and Night Modes is possible. The F’F key lights red
when the system is in night mode.
l
l
l
If there are two Attendant Phones and both DSS consoles have a NIGHT
key (programmed on a FF key), both NIGHT indicators will light red when
Night Mode is activated.
If the system is programmed to switch between night and day modes
automatically, you cannot switch between modes by using “#52.”
23
.
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Off-Premises
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Extension
(All Versions)
Description
SLTs that are located in remote locations can be connected to the DBS through the
Off-Premises Extension (OPX) Adaptor.
Off-premise phones can be connected through a direct line to the DBS or through the
central office, depending on how far they are from the main cabinet. For
specifications. seeInstallation (Section300).
Operation
Feature operation for OPX stations is the same as for local SLTs connected to the DBS.
Related Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): Telephone Type
Hardware Requirements
l
l
One OPX Adaptor (VB-43702) is required for each OPX station.
When OPX stations are connected through the central office, an external
ringer supply may be required. If required, the ringing supply is connected
to the OPX Adaptor.
Considerations
l
Up to 6 OPX stations can be connected to a system.
l
The DBS side of the OPX Adaptor is connected to a digital extension port.
24
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Paging
(All Versions)
Description
Internal paging is accomplished through the speakers of your system’s key phones.
The Paging feature allows you to contact someone temporarily away from an
extension, give instructions to an entire group, or communicate with several people at
once. If an external paging system is connected to your system, pages can also be sent
through its speakers.
Beginning with CPC-B Version 3.1, The Paging feature can also be programmed to
time out after sixty seconds. When a page call times out, a busy tone is sent to the
extension that initiated the page.
Operation
To use the Paging feature:
1. Pick up the handset.
2. Press “#,” then enter the number of the desired Paging Group (00 - 07).
l
The EXT LED will light.
3. Make your announcement.
4. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Paging timer (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FFl (System): External Page Interface Control for Paging Groups
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Page Groups
Hardware Requirements
l
External relays and an amplifier are required for external paging.
25
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Considerations
l
If an external paging system has been connected to Paging Groups 00 - 07,
paging can be done through the external speakers. Voice Paging can also be
heard over the extensions in groups 00 - 07.
l
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
l
A maximum of eight Paging Groups can be assigned to a system.
l
l
l
l
l
Additional pages cannot be sent when someone is paging group 00. In fact,
if you page group 00 while other extensions are paging groups 0 1 - 07, the
latter operations will be terminated, and “Page Overridden” will appear on
your display.
Paging cannot be heard at busy extensions or at extensions for which the
Do Not Disturb, Call Forwarding, or Absence Message feature is activated,
Paging can be answered from an idle extension by dialing the Meet-Me
Answer code (“77”).
The Meet-Me Answer feature cannot be used at an extension that is offhook at the time of the Paging Call, even if the extension’s status is later
changed to onhook.
The Meet-Me Answer feature cannot be used with Paging Group 00.
26
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Power Failure Transfer
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
This feature provides telephone service to a limited number of SLTs during a power
failure. The SLTs are connected to the CO via a Power Failure Unit (PFU).
In the event of a power failure, the power failure stations have dial tone directly from
the CO; system features and-restrictions do not apply.
Hard ware Requirements
l
Power Failure Unit (VA-43703)
l
An SLT that will be connected to the PFU.
l
Up to four SLTs can be connected to one Power Failure Unit.
Considerations
l
l
If a call is in progress through the PFU when the power is restored, the call
will be disconnected.
For added protection against power outages, backup batteries can be
installed in the DBS. Backup batteries provide full telephone service and
system features to all DBS extensions for a limited amount of time.
The backup batteries typically last up to 3C minutes.
27
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-8, Version 4
Station Class of Service
(CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
Description
Eight station classes of service are available. Twenty system features can be allowed
or denied for each class of service. Class of service “0” allows all features and is the
default for all extensions. Attempts to accessdenied features will result in busy tone.
The following features are available for each class of service:
Table 1.
Station Classes of Service
I Feature
IAccessCode
Dial Tone On/off
Head/Hand Set Exchange
I
#50
#51
I
Absence Message Set/Reset
Call Forwarding Set/Reset
Do-Not-Disturb Set/Reset
1 Station Lockout
1 Park Access
Park Pickup
1 Meet-Me Answer
UNA Pickup
Direct Pickup
1 Group Pickup
17 1
72
73
II 75
1 76
I
1 78
Tone/Voice Mode
1 Message Waiting Set
1 Busy Override
1 Call Waiting
off Hook Voice Announce
I 1 (after dialing number)
I CO Call Queuing
SLT Transfer
12
I5
I
18
28
1
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Programming
l
FFI (System): Extension COS Set
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service
Station Hunting
(All Versions)
Station hunting allqws calls
1.._ to be automatically transferred among a preselected group
of phones.
When a call terminates to a busy station in a hunt group, the call automatically
transfers to another station within the group. If the second station is busy, the call
automatically transfers to another member of the group.
Several methods of station hunting are available. The CPC version determines which
methods are available.
Terminal
and Circular
Hunting
(CPC-A; CPC-B Versions Prior to 2.0)
Description
CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0 provide terminal and circular hunt groups.
Terminal Hunt Groups
With terminal hunt groups, a call must ring at the first extension in the group in order
for hunting to be invoke&
If the first extension of the hunt group is busy, the call automatically transfers to the
n&t extension in the group. If that extension is busy, the call continues to hunt through
the group. The order in which the call hunts is determined by how the group is
programmed. Up to eight extensions can be placed in the group, and calls will always
hunt from member 1 to member 2 to member 3 and so on.
If desired, another hunt group can be designated to receive calls should all the
members of the original group be busy.
29
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-9, Version 4
A pilot number may be designated as the first extension in a terminal hunt group. A
pilot number is a fictitious station number that, when dialed, starts the hunting process
through the group. In CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0, a pilot number can be
provided by adding a resistor to an analog port. See “Hardware Requirements*’ for
details.
Circular Hunt Groups
With circular hunting, hunting is initiated by calling any extension in the group. If the
called extension is busy, the call will hunt through the next members of the group until
the end of the hunt group is reached. If the call reaches the end of the group without
reaching an idle extension, it will transfer back to the fist member of the group until
one full circle is completed.
If desired, another hunt group can be designated to receive calls should all the
members of the original group be busy.
Related Programming
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Hunt Group Member Table
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Group): Call Next Hunt Group
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Terminal/Circular Hunt Groups
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Ringing Assignments
Hardware Requirements
l
A pilot number can be provided by installing a 2 watt 450 Ohm resistor on
the analog port that will be dialed to initiate station hunting. The resistor is
placed across the tip and ring of the designated analog port.
The resistor will “busy” the port. When the busy pilot number is called, the
call will hunt through the other stations in the group.
Considerations
l
l
l
Eight Station Hunt Groups can be programmed; a single Hunt Group can
contain up to eight extensions, including the pilot extension.
If all extensions in a group are busy and an alternate group has not been
designated, CO calls will queue, and intercom calls will receive busy tone.
If the first extension within a hunt group activates an absencemessage, call
forwarding, or DND, the hunt feature will not work.
30
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
l
l
l
l
l
Station
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
If an extension other than the first extension activates an absencemessage,
call forwarding, or DND, the hunt feature will skip that extension, and
proceed to the next extension within the group.
The amount a time a call rings at a hunt group member before transferring
to another hunt group member is determined by the Call Forward--No
Answer Timer.
An SLT hunt group member that places a call on hold then replaces the
handset will not receive additional hunt group calls until the held call is
released.
An extension that is a member of a hunt group cannot be a member of
another hunt group or a member of call coverage group.
The offhook signaling option should be removed from members in a hunt
group.
Hunting
(WC-B
Version 2.0 or higher)
Beginning with CPC-B Version 2.0, three types of hunt groups are available: Terminal,
Distributed, and Longest Idle. In addition, CPC-B Version 2.0 and higher also provide
a software-defined pilot extension number. The software-defied pilot number
eliminates the need for the 2 W 450 Ohm resister required for a pilot nurnber in CPCA and CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0.
CPC-B Versions 2.0 or higher also allow calls from busy hunt groups to overflow to a
transfer extension. The transfer extension can be the pilot of another hunt group, the
pilot (0) of the attendant group, or a single extension number.
Terminal Hunt Groups
When the Terminal method is set, a call to the pilot number will search hunt group
members, repeatedly, until the Transfer Tier expires. If none of the members is free
when the timer expires, the call can be transferred to the transfer extension.
Distributed Hunt Groups
When the Distributed method is used, calls are distributed through the pilot number
based on which extension in the group received a call in the last search. The incoming
call begins its search at the next available extension in the group, then continues, in
sequence, repeatedly, until the Transfer Timer expires. If none of the members is free
when the timer expires, the call can be transferred to the transfer extension.
31
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
.
Longest Idle Hunt Groups
With Longest Idle hunting, a call to the pilot number rings the extension in the group
that has been available the longest.
As with the other two methods, the searchthen continues through the Hunt Group until
the Transfer Timer expires. If a member does not become available before the timer
expires, the call can be transferred to the transfer extension.
Related Programming
l
IF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Hunt Group Search Method
l
PP4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Pilot Extension Number
l
IF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Transfer Timer
l
PF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Hunt Group Extension Number
l
IF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Transfer Extension Number
FP4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers
l
l
l
l
l
FP4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Central Office Day Ringing Assignment
for Hunt Group Pilot Numbers
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Central Offtce Night Ringing Assignment
for Hunt Group Pilot Numbers
FP4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Ringing Assignments
FPl (System): Hunt Group No Answer Timer (CPC-B Version 3.1 or
higher)
Considerations
l
l
Eight Station Hunt Groups can be programmed; a single Hunt Group can
contain up to eight extensions, plus a pilot extension number.
The transfer destination of any Hunt Group can be set to: the pilot number
of the next group, the pilot number (0) of .the Attendant Group, the pilot
number of the same group, or a real extension. The transfer destination
cannot be voice mail.
32
.
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
l
l
System Features
WC-B, Version 4
A Transfer Timer adjusts the transfer time between hunt groups. The
transfer time can be set from 0 to 32 seconds. If set to 0 seconds, CO calls
will be queued at the hunt group until a member is available. Intercom calls
will also queue.
Central office trunks can be set to terminate to different hunt group pilot
numbers during day and night mode operation-
* Beginning with CPC-B 3.1, the Hunt Group No Answer Timer determines
how long a hunt group member rings before the call is transferred to the
next hunt group member. In previous releases,this time was determined by
the Call Forwarding--No Answer Timer.
l
Beginning with CPC-B Version 4.0, when a call comes to the pilot number
of a hunt group, the call will hunt to a member that has call forwarding set,
unless callforwarding is set to an outside number. In previous versions,
hunting would skip an extension with call forwarding set. The following
call types will hunt to a member that has call forwarding set:
- Intercom calls
- Transferred intercom calls
- Incoming CO calls (including DID calls)
- Transferred CO calls
- DISA calls
33
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)
.
(All Versions)
Description
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides detailed call records of outgoing
calls. SMDR records can be output to a printer or an external call accounting system.
Figure 1 shows the SMDR format for CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1. Figure
2 shows the SMDR format for CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher.
Figure 1. SMDR Format for CPC-A and CPC-B Versions Prior h 3.1
1
2
3
a
5
0
01234567890123456789012345678901234567S901234567~901234567~901234567~90
1
l&f
2
DD
EH:MM
3
H:Mn.X
4
C
5
NZJ
3=Call
duration
H=hour
(O-9)
MW=minutes
X=l/lOth
of
6
7
DDDDD-DDD-DDD-DDDD
-
NNN
7
8
V
S=Trunk
number
NN=numher
(01-64)
l=Date
MM=month
DD=day
2=Call
start
HH=hour
NN=minute
6
C=Dialed
digits
DD=digits
O-9
(See the Note
time
or symbols
following
l
'I=Xxtension
number
or DISA
10-73,
lOO-699=extensions
#01-#~~=DISA
numbers
a minute
P=Call
condition
I=incoming
I=DISA
incoming
O=DISA outgoing
D=CalI
longer
than
(O-9)
10 hours
or#
item
8.)
number
S=Account
A=digfts
code
O-9
Note:
The
greater-than
printout;
less-than
symbol
appears
as a
sign
(>) on the SMDR
the Ir symbol
appears
as a
sign
(<).
34
l
or
symbols
l
or
W
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Figure 2. SMDR Formal for CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
0
1
2
3
4
5
0123456789012345678901234567~901234567~901234567~901234567~901234567~901234567
3
1
2
T MM/DD HH:Mn:SS
l=Call
type
s=Inbound
s=outbound
1=1ncoming
o=outgoing
T=Transfer
N=DNIS
D=DID
P=Intercom
4
HB:KM.SS
5
6
NNN DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
7
7
AAAAAAAAM
8
VVVVV
9
NN
S=Extension
number
10-69,
lOO-699=extensions
CO number=DISA
DISA
DISA
(See
6
Note
6=Dialed
digits
DD=digite
O-9
(See Note 2.)
1.)
or
symbols
l
or#
7=Account
code
A=O-9999999999
calls
2=Date
MK=month
DD=day
&Verified
account
COS code
VOOOO-V9999=verlfied
WOOOO-W9999=walking
3=Call
start
time
HI&hours
NN=minut
es
SS=seconds
code
or
walking
account
codes
CO9 codes
9=Trunk
Number
NN=number
(01-64)
O=call
duration
HH=hours
HW=minutee
SS=seconds
Notes :
1. Transferred
If a station
also
created
2.
The
the
access
symbol
# symbol
codes,
l
calls
call
for
include
direct
is transferred
the station
that
appears
as a greater-than
appears
as a less-than
do not appear
as dialed
and group
call
to an outside
is transferred.
pickups
number,
and conference
an SMDR record
sign
(>) on the SWDR printout;
sign
(<).
Centrex
and PBX codes,
digits.
35
calls.
is
as well
as U3R
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): SMDR Display Start Timer
l
FFl (System): SMDR Printing Mode 1
l
FFl (System): SMDR Printing Mode 2
l
FFl (System): SMDR Printing Mode 3
l
FF3 (Extension) SMDR Report
Hard ware Requirements
l
A printer or external call accounting system is required to receive SMDR
data.
Ti Interface
(CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
Description
The Tl Interface is a digital trunk card that provides twenty-four 64 kbps channels, for
a total transmission rate of 1.544 Mbps. Tl lines can be leased from local exchange
carriers and long-distance carriers.
The DBS Tl Interface supports the following options:
SF or ESF Framing Formats
Either super frame (SF) or extended super frame (ESF) formats can be used with the
DBS Tl.
The superframe consists of 12 frames, with each frame including 193 bits. Each frame
is separated by a framing bit.
An extended super frame consists of 24 frames, thereby doubling the length of the
super frame (SF) format ESF also supports monitoring and maintenance capabilities
that are not available with the SF format.
Flexible Trunk Signaling Modes
The Tl Interface provides the following trunk signaling modes. The signaling modes
can be assigned on a per-channel basis.
36
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
l
Loop start
l
Ground start
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
e E&M
l
FFl (System): Tl Settings
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Type
l
FF2 (Trunks): Tl Port Class
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Port Class
Hard ware Requirements
The following hardware is required to install a Tl in a single cabinet:
l
- 1 Tl Trunk Card (VB-43561
- 1 Tl MDF Card (VB-43562)
- 1 Sync Card (VB-43563)
In addition, the following hardware is required to install a Tl in a double
cabinet if the Tl card is located in the slave cabinet:
- 1 Tl Cable (VB-43564)
To install two Tls in a double cabinet, you must have 2 Tl Trunk Cards and
2 Tl MDF Cards.
The installer must provide a Channel Service Unit (CSU) that complies
with FCC Part 15 and Part 68. The CSU is installed between the DBS and
the public network. The CSU provides alarm, diagnostic, and monitoring
functions, as well as network protection.
l
Considerations
Fractional TI can be used when fewer than 24 Tl trunks are needed.
Fractional Tl allows you to use only a portion of the 24 channels provided
on the Tl card.
l
l
Though each Tl Interface provides 24 trunk channels, Tl trunks do not
increase the overall trunk capacity of the DBS. Each Tl channel subtracts
from the total number of analog trunks that can be installed. Furthermore,
37
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
the number of analog trunks that can be used are always decrementeh in
quantities of 8.
For instance, if you’re installing a Tl in a DBS 96 and you only want to use
12 Tl channels, the logical number of analog trunks that would be available
is20(32- 12=20).
However, becausethe number of analog trunks must be decremented in
quantities of 8, the actual number of analog trunks that can be used is 16:
(32 total trunks - 16 (two Strunk increments) = 16.)
l
The current version of the Tl supports voice communications only. Data
can be transmitted only if it reaches the Tl in analog form. Examples of
analog data that can be transmitted over the Tl include fax transmissions or
PC files that have been converted into analog form using a modem.
Toll Restriction
(All Versions)
Description
Access levels, including the prohibition of long distance calls or after-hours calls, can
be assigned to specific extensions or CO lines using the Toll Restriction feature. This
minimizes non-business related calls and reduces phone bills by only allowing long
distance calls over designated lines.
The following access levels are available:
38
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Table2.
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Toll Restriction Types
Toll Restriction
Type
0
Characteristics
Restriction of outbound dialing.
Restriction of inbound ringing on all trunks.
Inbound ringing trunks can be answered by or transferred to Type 0
extensions.
Intercom calls are allowed.
Full restriction of outbound dialing.
Inbound ringing on all trunks.
Intercom calls are allowed.
l-800 calls allowed
Inbound trunk calls can be answered and transferred from a Type 2
phone.
Full restriction of international calls.
Full restriction of operator calls.
Speed dial number selectable restriction.
N 11 code selectable restriction.
Restriction of up to 50 seven-digit numbers.
Inter-digit timing is set to 6 seconds.
l-800 calls allowed.
Full restriction of operator calls.
Selectable restriction of international calls.
Selectable restriction of N 11 codes (211-911).
Speed dial number selectable restriction.
Restriction of up to 50 seven-digit numbers.
Trunk calls can be answered and transferred.
Defaulted to full restriction of area-code dialing (but up to four codes
can be permitted).
Defaulted to full restriction of office-code dialing (but up to four codes
can be permitted).
Inter-digit timing is set to 6 seconds.
Identical to Type 3, except that office-code dialing is allowed by default.
Programmable TRS Type; defaulted to no restrictions.
Programmable TRS Type; defaulted to no restrictions.
l
l
l
l
1
l
l
l
2
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
3
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
4
5
6
7
l
l
l
l
No restriction of outbound dialing.
39
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
The following calling restrictions are also available:
l
.
Station Lockout Key Code Restriction
A key code must be entered before calling out when the Station Lockout
feature is activated.
l
Account Code Restriction
An Account Code must be entered before calling out.
0,Forced LCR Restriction
The LCR feature controls outside calls.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Override TolI Restrictions with SSD Numbers
l
FF3 (Extension) Station Lockout
l
FF7 (Toll Restriction): Toll Restriction Settings
Considerations
l
The dialing restrictions included in this feature help prevent unauthorized
outgoing calls. It is possible, however, to program your system to allow
System Speed Dialing to override Toll Restrictions.
40
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Trunk Name Assignment
(CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher)
Description
You can display a name, number, or messageup to six characters long on the LCD in
place of your CO trunk line number. The name will appear when a CO call is ringing
or connected.
For example, you can assign specific CO lines to different individuals or departments.
Then, when an extension rings, the individual’s name or the department’s name will
appear on the display, immediately identifying for whom the call is intended.
While you are speaking on the extension, “CO TALK XXXXXX” will appear on the
LCD. (XXXXXX represents the six characters of the Trunk Name.) While the extension
is ringing, “INCOMING XXXXXX” will appear.While the extension is ringing and
you are speaking on the extension at the same time, “INCOMING XXXXXX” will
appear on the second line of the display.
Related Programming
l
FF6 (Name and Message): CO Line Name Assignment
l
Trunk names can be assigned with a DSS or an attendant phone.
Considerations
l
If a text name is assigned to a CO trunk, the trunk number does not appear
on the display.
,,.-’ _
41
.
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Trunk Queuing
(All Versions)
Des&p
tion
If all outside lines in a Trunk Group are busy, the system can call you when a line
becomes free. Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the
Trunk Callback alert tone rings.
Operation
To set Trunk Queuing:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the CO line key or dial a trunk accesscode.
You will hear a busy tone from the speaker.
3. Press“2.”
“In CO Queuing” will appear on the display.
4.
Pressthe ON/OFF key.
5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.
To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:
Pick up the handset.
l
You will immediately access the outside line.
l
You will hear dial tone.
l
“CO TALK #XX” will appear on the display.
42
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Programming
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service
Considerations
Response to the Trunk Callback alert tone must be within sixteen seconds
or Trunk Queuing will be canceled.
If a call arrives from an outside line while the Trunk Queuing feature is
activated, Trunk Queuing will be suspendedfor the duration of the
incoming call.
.
If you are engaged in another call on a different line for more than twenty
minutes after the desired outside line becomes available, that outside line’s
assignment to you will be canceled.
The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when
trying to make a call using the Pooled Trunk Access feature.
Trunk Queuing can be used by SLTs.
Universal Night Answer
(All Versions)
Description
Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls during night mode to an external
ringer, such as a night bell.
As an alternative to using a night bell, UNA can also be configured to ring external
paging speakers.
Universal Night Answer calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the
extension’s Class of Service allows UNA answer.
43
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Operation
To answer a UNA call:
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear the intercom dial tone.
2. Dial “78.”
“CO TALK #Ol” will appear on the display if the call is on line 1.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service
l
FFl (System): Ring Patterns for UNA Terminals
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Central Office Day Ring Assignment
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Central Office Night Ring Assignment
Hardware Requirements
l
l
An external ringing device is not provided with the DBS. It can be
purchased separately from an electronics dealer.
External paging speakers are not provided with the DBS; they must be
purchased separately.
Considerations
l
l
With CPC-A, extension port 73 is used to assign ringing to an external
pagefUNA interface.
With CPC-B, extension port 145 is used to assign ringing to an external
page/UNA interface.
44
System Features
CPC-B, version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Voice Mail Ringing
(CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
Des&p tion
The Voice Mail Ringing feature allows calls from a DBS Automated Attendant or
from an ACD port to ring an extension with the same ring tone as a CO trunk. The ring
pattern is selected in the Extension Distinctive Ringing program. If a distinctive
ringing pattern is not specified, the ringing pattern will be two secondson/two seconds
Off.
Related Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Distinctive Ringing
Walking TRS Class of Service
(CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
Description
Walking TRS Class of Service allows an extension user to “carry” his or her toll
restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS Class of Service feature can be used, a Walking Class of
Service code must be entered for each extension that wants to use dialing privileges at
another extension.
Operation
To enter a Walking Class of Service code:
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “#12.”
3. Enter the four-digit Walking Class of Service code (0001 - 9999).
45
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System Features
CPC-6, Version 4
4. Press “#.‘I
5. Replace the handset.
To use a Walking Class of Service code:
1. Pick up the handset of an extension other than your own.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “#13.”
3. Enter your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking Class of Service code.
5. Press ‘W.”
6. Enter a trunk access code (88xX, 9,81 - 86).
You will hear the outside dial tone from the handset.
7. Dial the telephone number.
The Walking Class of Service will remain in effect until you replace the
handset.
To clear a Walking Class of Service code:
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “# 12.”
3. Enter the original Walking Class of Service code.
4. Press “#.”
5. Replace the handset.
46
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To confirm
a Walking
Class of Service code (Attendant
Phone only):
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Press the CONF key.
3. Dial “#12.”
4. Enter the extension number.
The Walking Class of Service code for that extension will appear on the
display.
Considerations
l
Walking Class of Service can be used by KTELs, DSLTs, and SLTs.
l
A Walking Class of Service code can be used on more than one extension.
l
l
If a station is locked out, the Walking Class of Service feature will override
the lockout.
LCR and TRS dialing privileges follow the Walking Class of Service.
47
Attendant Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Char>ter 2. Attendant
Features
This chapter describes features that are available to an attendant phone.
In addition to functioning as a central answering point, an attendant phone also has
special capabilities for monitoring and programming other phones.
49
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant
Assignment
of Speed Dialing
(All Versions)
Description
The attendant can assign system speed dialing numbers. System speed dialing
numbers are shared by all DBS extensions.
Operation
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the PROG key.
“F” will appear on the display.
f
3. Press AUTO.
“FA” will appear on the display.
4. Enter the Speed Dial code (00-89).
“Enter SSD 01” will appear on the display if number is to be stored for
System Speed Dial code 01.
5. Dial the telephone number to be stored.
The number will appear on the display.
6. Press the HOLD key.
“SSD 01” and the stored telephone number will appear on the display if the
number was stored on Speed Dial code 0 1.
7. Repeat steps 2 -6 to store additional numbers.
50
Section 700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
Attendant
CPC-6,
Features
Version 4
Considerations
l
l
Storing
a new number
erases any previously
stored data.
To delete a System Speed Dial number, perform the programming steps,
but do not enter a number before pressing HOLD.
l
Attendant
Storing names for System Speed Dialing can also be done using a DSS
console connected to the attendant phone.
Busy Override
(CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher)
Description
The Attendant Busy Override feature allows the attendant to break in on an Intercom
Call or a CO Call already in progress. An alert tone is fist heard by the busy party
called, then the call becomes a three-party conference.
I’
’
Attendant Busy Override can break into an extension, even if the extension has “Busy
Override Reject” enabled. (The extension feature “Busy Override” cannot break into
an extension that has “Busy Override Reject” enabled.)
Operation
To override a busy extension:
Press “4.”
“CONF 135 157” will appear on the display if extensions 135 and 157 were engaged
in the call you interrupted.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Attendant Override
l
Replace the handset to exit the three-party conference call.
l
The alert tone can be turned on or off through system programming.
Considerations
51
Attendant Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
f
Attendant
Call Park
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
Using the Attendant Call Park feature, the Attendant may park an outside call until the
called party can be found. The attendant can then use the Paging feature to inform the
called party of the call’s Park Number. The parked call can then IX retrieved from any
extension by dialing the Park Number.
The attendant phone is equipped with ten outside line Park Numbers (00 - 09). By
programming a Call Park key into a FP key of a telephone or a DSS console, onetouch Call Park is possible.
Operation
To park an outside call:
1. Press the HOLD key.
l
The outside call will be placed on hold.
l
“CO HOLD #03" will appear on the display if the call arrived on line 3.
2. Dial “75.”
“PARK HOLD” will appear on the display.
3. Enter desired Park Number (00 - 09). ’
“PARK HOLD 01” will appear on the display if you selected Park Number
01.
52
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To release a parked call (after receiving
the Park Number from the Attendant):
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone.
2. Dial “76.”
3. Enter the Park Numberas_signed to the call.
“PARK PICK 0 1” will appear if 0 1 was the assigned Park Number, then “CO
TALK ##03”will appear if the call arrived on line 3.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer
Considerations
l
l
With CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1, if Call Park is assigned to an
FF key, the FF key does not indicate when a call is parked. Beginning with
CPC-B Version 3.1, the FF key does indicate when a call is parked.
If a parked call is not answered before the Attendant Park Hold Recall
Tier expires, ,the parked call will recall to the attendant.
53
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
\ 8
I
Attendant Control of Absence Messages,
Call Forwarding, and DND
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
An attendant phone can cancel the Absence Message, Call Forwarding, and Do-NotDisturb (DND) features activated on any extension.
Operation
To cancel an Absence Message, Call Forwarding, or DND:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the CONF key.
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Press “*.”
5. Pressthe ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
Considerations
l
On DSS consoles equipped with DSS keys, the indicator for an extension
that has Absence Message, Call Forwarding, or DND activated lights
green. This indicator goes off when the feature is canceled
(The indicator does not light for Permanent Call Forwarding.)
54
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
i
Attendant-Controlled
Text Assignment,
(All Versions)
Description
The attendant can assign text to extensions, system speeddial numbers, and Call
Waiting/OHVA text replies without the use of a DSSL’2 and without entering the
programming mode.
Text is assigned through the dialpad on the attendant phone.
Operation
To assign names to
extenSiOnS:
1. Pick up the receiver or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press PROG.
3. Dial #2.
4. Enter the extension’s port number.
5. Press AUTO to backspace and erase the existing name.
6. Use the dialpad sequencesshown in Table 3 on page 57 to enter letters and/or
numbers.
Press FLASH after each letter.
Press CONF to switch between numbers and letters.
7. To store your entry, press HOLD.
To assign names to System Speed Dial numbers:
1. Pick up the receiver or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press PROG.
3. Dial #l
55
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
4. Press AUTO.
5. Dial the desired of system speeddial number (00-89).
6. Press AUTO to backspace and erase the existing name.
7. Use the dialpad sequencesshown in Table 3 on page 57 to enter letters and/or
numbers.
Press FLASH after each letter.
Press CONF to switch between numbers and letters.
8. To store your entry, press HOLD.
To assign text to Call Waiting/OHVA Text Replies (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher):
1. Pick up the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Press PROG.
f
3. Dial #5
4. Dial 1 - 5, depending on which text message you want to change.
5. Press AUTO to backspace and erase the existing name.
6. Use the dialpad sequencesshown in Table 3 on page 57 to enter letters and/or
numbers.
Press FLASH after each letter.
Press CONF to switch between numbers and letters.
7. To store your entry, press HOLD.
56
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Table 3.
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Key sequences for text assignment.
1 Number
of Key Presses
57
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant
Groups
(CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher)
Description
The DBS can accommodate up to four attendant positions. The fist attendant is fixed
at port 1, extension 100. The other Attendants can be set to any port or extension.
When there is more than one attendant in a system, you can create an Attendant Group
with a pilot number of 0.
When all Multi-Line keys on the first attendant phone are busy, a call will be
forwarded to the second, third, and fourth attendant phones, in that order.
Related
Programming’
l
FFl (System): Second Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Third Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Fourth Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Attendant Transfer Extension Position
Considerations
’
l
l
l
If all four phones are busy, the call will be transferred to a preset destination
which must be a real extension number. The forwarding destination cannot
be the pilot number of a hunt group.
The third and fourth attendants cannot have a DSS/72.
Prior to CPC-B Version 2.0, the DBS supported a maximum of two
attendant positions.
58
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Dial Tone Disable
(All Versions)
Des&p
tion
The intercom dial tone can be turned off at an attendant phone. Dial tone is turned off
when a headset is used.
Operation
To disable the intercom dial tone:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press “#50.”
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
To reactivate dial tone:
Repeat the preceding steps.
59
Section 700, Feature Operatton
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
DSS/72
(All Versions)
Description
The DSS/72 is a 72-key console that can be attached to the attendant phone.
The 72 keys of the DSS can be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for
internal lines. In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also
provide busy lamp fields to assist the attendant in monitoring the status of extensions.
Simplified Call Transfer is possible by pressing a DSS key while connected to an
outside line. The outside line will be placed on hold and the extension dialed
automatically.
When the attendant is placed in the programming mode, the DSS functions as a
typewriter for inputting text names. Figure 3 shows which keys are pressed for text
input
Figure 3.
VB-43225
with a DSSl72
f
60
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-6, Version 4
When the Attendant Feature Package (VB-43330) is installed, the DSS/72 can be used
as an Attendant Console. The attendant console provides station monitoring and call
transfer by name for large systems, even if a large display phone is not used
As Figure 4 illustrates, the Attendant Console includes preassignedkeys for attendant
functions, such as Call Park, Zone Paging, and alarm monitoring.
For a detailed description of the Attendant Console, see the Attendant Console User’s
Guide (Section 760).
Figure
4.
VB-43225
with a DSSl72 configured
as an Attendant
Console
Related Programming
l
FFI (System): Attendant Feature Package Settings
l
FF3 (Extensions): Terminal Type
61
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Hardware Requirements
l
The “Attendant Feature Package” is required to configure the DSS/72 as an
Attendant Console. The “Attendant Feature Package” is contained on a
special EPROM chip that replaces an EPROM on the CPC-B card.
Considerations
l
l
l
l
Up to two DSS/72s can be assigned to a single attendant phone. However,
only one of the DSS/72s can be assigned as an Attendant Console.
The DSS key LED informs the attendant of the status of assigned
extensions. The LED lights red when the extension is busy and green when
Absence Message, Call Waiting, or DND is activated.
Pressing a DSS key while connected to an outside line places the line on
hold.
The “Attendant Feature Package” is available with CPC-B Versions 2.0 or
higher.
Headset Operation
(All Versions)
Description
A headset can be connected to attendant or non-attendant phones. (Dial tone is
normally turned off when using the headset)
Operation
To use a headset:
1. Connect a headset to the desired telephone.
2. Press the ON/OFF key.
3. Press “#5 1.”
The ON/OFF LED will remain lit.
62
Attendant Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To stop using a headset:
Repeat the preceding steps.
Hardware
Requirements
Headsets are not provided with the DBS; they must be purchased
separately.
l
Most commercially available headsets(with ECM mike transducers) can be
used.
l
Station Lockout Code Assignment
(All Versions)
Description
The Station Lockout feature allows users to dial a Station Lockout code to restrict their
phone from being used for outside calls.
Station Lockout codes can be assigned through the attendant phone.
Operation
To program a Station Lockout code:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the CONF key.
3. Dial “#8.”
4. Dial the extension number.
5. Enter the desired key code (four digits).
63
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
I
6. press the HOLD key.
“STORE 1357” wili appear on the display if key code 1357 was entered.
7. Press the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
Considerations
l
A locked extension can be used for Intercom Calls.
l
Station Lockout key codes can also be set through system programming.
System Time and Date Control
(All Versions)
Description
The date and time displayed on all system extensions is set from an attendant phone.
Operation
To set the date and time:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone.
l
The current date and time will be displayed on your LCD.
2. Press the PROG key.
“F’ will appear on the display.
3. Dial “###I.”
“Program Mode: MAIN MODE” will appear on the fust and second lines of
the display.
64
f
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
4. Press the FFI key.
“SELECT SUB MODE” will appear on the second line of the display.
5. Dial “l#.”
“ 1:DATE 2:TIME” will appear.
6. Dial “l#.”
“MONTH/DAY/YEAR”
will appear.
7. Enter six digits for the month, day, and year.
For example, to set the date to March 3, 1993, enter “030393.”
8. Press #.
“TIME SET MODE“wil1 appear on the display.
9. Enter four digits for hours and minutes (24-hr. time).
For example, for 11:OOa.m., enter “1100.”
lOPress #.
11Press the ON/OFF key.
The new date and time will appear on the display.
To
reset the minutes display to “00:”
If the clock is five minutes slow or fast, you can re-synchronize the minutes setting to
“00,” provided tire current minutes display is between “55” and “:05.”
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
You will hear intercom dial tone.
l
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the PROG key.
“F” will appear on the display.
65
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
3. Dial “#4.”
“Time Adjusted” will appear on the display.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
Considerations
The month is entered in numeric form, but it is displayed as the name of the
month.
l
The day of the week is calculated automatically.
l
.
Traffic Measurement
(Ail Versions)
Description
f
An attendant phone can track the number of outgoing and incoming calls for each
outside line number, as well as the number of times each System Speed Dial number is
used. This information can be used to evaluate trunk usage and control costs.
To determine the number of outgoing calls made on an outside line:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the CONF key.
“C” will appear on the display.
66
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-6, Version 4
3. Dial ‘WO,” then enter the number of the outside line you want to check.
If 1234 outgoing calls have been made on line 01, “Outgoing01 1234” will
appear on the display.
Pressing the # key steps through the trunk numbers and system speed dial
numbers.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
To check other usage rates:
Replace “#MI” in Step 3 with one of the following codes:
Table 4.
Traffu: measurement
options
Operation
code
Check the number of incoming calls to a specific trunk
#91NN
Check the number of times a System Speed Dial number #/92SS
was used:
Delete usage data:
I#93
Notes:
-play
“Incoming W’
“SYS-SPD SS”
“Clear All Inform”
NN = CO line number (01 - 64)
SS = System Speed Dial number (00 - 89)
Considerations
Usage data cannot be cleared item by item.
l
l
l
All data is retained until it is deleted or until 65,536 entries are made (at
which point the figures are reset to zero).
A backup battery protects memory contents in case of power failure.
67
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Attendant Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Walking COS Confirmation
(CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
Description
The attendant can check the Walking Class of Service ID code of any extension.
Operation
1. Press ON/OFF.
2. Press CONF.
3. Dial #12 plus the extension number.
The Walking Class of Service ID code will appear on the display.
68
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Chapter 3. Key Telephone Features
.
This chapter describes DBS key telephone features. DBS key telephones are
proprietary digital phones that provide feature accessthrough a combination of feature
keys and access codes.
Figure 5 illustrates the DBS key phone VB-43225. The VB-43225 provides a large
display that includes one-touch access to speed dial numbers, telephone features, and
help screens.
Figure 5.
VB-43225 key phone
69
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Absence Message
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
Extension users can leave text messages on their phone when they are away.
When the unattended extension is dialed, the text messagewill display on the caller’s
phone.
Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 can be changed
through system programming.
Table 5.
Absence Messages
2
3
I
4
7
8
I
9
Out of Office
Vacation
1 Another Office 1
User Defined
User Defined
I User Defined
I
Operation
To set an Absence Message
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “7 1.”
“Enter Msg Code” will appear on the display.
70
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
3. Enter a message code between 0 and 9 (See Table 5.).
“Enter Parameter” will appear on the display.
4. Enter the time you will return (optional). See Table 6 for examples.
5. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
The DND/CF LED will light.
l
“At Lunch” will appear on the display if you selected message code 1.
To cancel an Absence Message
1. Pressthe ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “7 1.”
“Enter Msg Code” will appear on the display.
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
l
The DND/CF LED will go off, and the message will disappear from the
display.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System) Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension) class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF6 (Names and Messages): Absence Message
71
Key Telephone Features
CPC-l3, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
I
Considerations
l
l
l
Table 6.
Calling parties without a display get a busy signal, rather than the Absence
Message.
If a message code number that has not been programmed when a message
is selected, “Absence,” followed by the code number, will appear on the
display.
Absence Message return times can be input as shown in the following
table:
Exnmple Return Times for Absence Messages
Input
No input
9
11
615
. 1035
Display
Return
Return 9:00
Return 1l:OO
Return 6: 15
Return lo:35
Four-digit numbers can also be input (0000 - 9999 = Hours & Minutes or
Month & Date).
l
l
l
Setting an Absence Message cancels DND and Call Forwarding features.
When an Absence Message is set on a DID station, incoming DID calls are
routed according to the ringing assignment programmed for the incoming
trunk.
Callback to an incoming CO call on a Private Line is available if the
Absence Message feature is activated.
72
f
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Busy Override
(All Versions)
Description
Extensions in the same Paging Group (l-7) can break into one another’s outside calls
or Intercom Calls to relay urgent information or to create three-party Conference
Calls.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. When you hear busy tone, dial “4.”
Related
l
An alert tone will sound to both phones (system programming required).
l
The EXT LED will light.
Programming
FFl (System): Alert Tone for Busy Override and Offhook Voice Announce
l
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Busy Override Send
l
FF3 (Extension): Busy Override Receive
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Paging Groups
73
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Considerations
l
l
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
In CPC-A and CPC-B Versions 2.0 or lower, an Attendant Phone can break
into any call, independent of system programming.
Beginning with CPC-B Version 2.0, attendants can be prevented from using
busy override.
l
l
The default for the override alert tone is “off.” If the override alert tone is
enabled, the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
In CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1, overridden extensions display
“CONF’ when an override is performed. Beginning with CPC-B Version
3.1, “O\ienidden” does not appear on the display of an extension that has
been broken into.
Call Coverage Groups
(All Versions)
Description
Call coverage is designed for office workers who almost always want their
unanswered calls to be routed to the same secretary or secretaries.
If an extension in a Call Coverage Group is unable to receive a call, the call will be
automatically routed to a designated phone within the group (the “covering” phone).
Up to two extensions can be designated as covering phones.
For example, if an outside call on line 1 is sent to extension 135, but extension 135 is
busy or does not answer, the call will ring at the covering phone and “TRK Ml> 135”
will appear on the covering phone’s display.
If two extensions are designated as covering phones and one of them is in DND, the
second will receive the call.
Call coverage assignments are controlled through system programming, rather than
from individual extensions.
For extension-controlled routing of unanswered calls, see “Call Forwarding” on page
76.
74
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): Offhook Signaling
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Call Coverage Group Member Table
Considerations
l
l
l
Up to sixteen Call Coverage Groups can be programmed into your system.
A Call Coverage Group can have up: to two
-9scovering phones and up to six
extensions.
A member of one Call Coverage Group cannot ‘belongto another Call
Coverage Group or to a Hunting Group.
A single-line telephone (SLT) can be a member of a coverage group, but it
cannot be a covering phone.
l
Calls to an extension in DND do not cover.
l
Calls to an extension with Call Forwarding activated do not cover.
l
l
If the Call Forwarding feature or the Absence Message feature is activated
for covering phone No. 1, covering phone No. 2 will “cover” the other
extensions in the group.
Voice intercom calls do not cover. Only tone intercom tails can activate call
coverage.
75
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
i
Call Forwarding
(All Versions)
Call Forwarding allows users to send their calls to another extension, an outside line,
or voice mail. All versions of the DBS provide call forwarding. However, some tail
forwarding enhancements are not available with earlier versions. The following table
shows the call forwarding features available with each release.
Table 7. DBS Call Forwarding features
I Feature
Call Forwarding--All Calls
Call Forwarding--No Answer
Call Forwarding--Busy
Call Forwarding--Busy/No Answer
Call Forwarding--External
Permanent Call Forwarding
I Availability
All versions
CPC-A Version 3.1 or higher
CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
All versions
All versions
All versions
CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
1
Descfip tions
Call Forwarding-All
Calls. When the Call Forwarding--All Calls feature is
activated, all incoming calls to an extension are forwarded immediately.
Call Forwarding-No
Answer. When Call Forwarding--No Answer is activated, an
unanswered call will ring until the Call Forward No Answer timer expires. When the
timer expires, the unanswered call will be forwarded.
Call Forwarding-Busy.
When Call Forwarding--Busy is activated, all incoming
calls to a busy extension will be forwarded.
Call Forwarding-Busy/No
Answer. When Call Forwarding--Busy/No Answer
feature is activated, all incoming calls to an extension that is busy or does not answer
will be forwarded.
Call Forwarding-External.
When Call Forwarding-External is activated, all
incoming intercom calls to an extension will be forwarded to an outside number. In
order to forward to an outside number, the number must first be entered as a system or
personal speed dial number.
Any system speed dial number (0049) can be used to store an outside number for call
forwarding. With CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0, only personal-speed dial
number 99 can be used. With CPC-B Versions higher than 2.0,‘any of personal speed
dial numbers (90-99) can be used.
76
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Permanent Call Forwarding. Permanent call forwarding is assigned through
system programming, rather than by the user. Permanent call forwarding is normally
used to forward calls to a voice mail system.
An extension user can invoke other forms of call forwarding (no answer, busy, all
calls) to temporarily override the permanent call forwarding destination.
Permanent call forwarding can be used with busy, no answer, or busy/no answer.
When Permanent Call Forwarding is assigned, the DSS and/or BLF keys are not lit
green, the DND/CF LED is off, and the second line of LCD displays do not display the
Call Forwarding assignment.
To activate Call Forwarding:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “72.”
“ENTER FWD CODE” will appear on the display.
3. Dial the appropriate call forwarding code.
1 Call Forward Type 1 Code 1
No answer
14
“ENTER FWD EXT#” will appear on the display.
77
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
4. If you’re forwarding to an internal number, enter the number of the extension
you want to receive your calls. If you’re forwarding to an outside number,
press AUTO plus the appropriate speed dial number.
Note: To forward to an outside number, the number must be programmed
into personal or system speed dialing. With CPC-A or CPC-B Versions prior
to 2.0, you can only forward to an outside number that is programmed into
personal speed dial number 99. Beginning with CPC-B, you can forward to
any speed dial number (system or personal).
5. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
l
The DND/CF LED will light.
“FWD-EX-T 135” will appear on the 2nd line of the display if extension
135 was selected. If a name was assigned to the extension, the name will
appear instead of the extension number.
To cancel Call Forwarding
1. Press ON/OFF.
2. Dial “72.”
3. Hang up.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Call Forward No Answer Tier
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
l
FF3 (Extension): Permanent Call Forward Type (CPC-B Version 3.1 or
higher)
FF3 (Extension): Permanent Call Forward Extension (CPC-B Version 3.1
or higher)
l
FFlO (System and Personal Speed Dial): System Speed Dial Numbers
l
FFlO (System and Personal Speed Dial): Personal Speed Dial Numbers
78
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 709, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Considerations
l
With CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0, calls cannot be forwarded to
an extension that already has call forwarding activated. In other words,
phone “A” could only forward to phone “B” if phone “B” was not
forwarded.
Beginning with CPC-B Version 2.0, calls can be forwarded to extensions
that have call forwarding activated. For example, phone “A” can be
forwarded to phone “B,” even if phone “B” is.forwarded to voice mail.
l
DND and Absence Messages cancel Call Forwarding.
0 Voice calls do not forward when Call Forwarding--No Answer is used.
l
l
If several calls arrive at once at an extension set for Call Forwarding-No
Answer, all of the calls will be queued. (The timing for each call begins
with the ringing tone.)
Extensions for which Call Forwarding-External has been set cannot:
- Be in the middle of an outside call when the feature is activated.
- Have a toll restriction setting that prohibits outside calls.
l
Calls can be forwarded to a third-party voice mail (a system other than the
DBS Voice Mail) by using the “Call Forward ID Code” described on page
10.
79
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-l3, Version 4
Call Hold
(All Versions)
The DBS provides both Exclusive and System Hold.
Exclusive
Hold
Descripfion
With Exclusive Hold, only the station that held the call can retrieve it.
Exclusive Hold can be used to hold CO calls and intercom calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Press the line key being used for the call.
The line LED will flash green and you will hear intercom dial tone.
“Hold TRK #o 1” will appear on the display if outside line 1 is placed on
hold.
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Press the line key on which the call was placed on hold.
The line LED will stop flashing and remain green.
“CO TALK TRK I#) 1” will appear on the display if a held call on outside
line 1 was released.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Attendant Hold Recall Timer
l
FFl (System): Extension Hold Recall Timer
l
FFl (System): Central Office Line Automatic Hold
e FFl (System): Non-appearance CO Lime Hold
80
c
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Considerations
l
l
l
l
l
System
When using an outside line for which there is no line key on your
extension, press the HOLD key to place the call on hold, then press a
vacant line key. Release the held call by pressing HOLD again. (System
programming determines whether the call will be placed on Exclusive
Trunk Hold or System Trunk Hold.)
A held call will recall if it is not retrieved before the Hold Recall Timer
expires. “Hold Recall #01” will appear on the display if a call on outside
line 1 has been held beyond the time limit.
If you press the HOLD key during a conference with two outside lines,
both outside lines will be placed on hold.
If your system is set for onhook transfer, you have placed an outside call on
hold, and then you make an Intercom Call, you must make sure the other
extension hangs up before you do. If you hang up before the other
extension, the held outside line will be transferred to that extension.
(Pressing FLASH will release the extension.)
The DBS can provide music-on-hold to callers placed on hold. See “MusicOn-Hold” (page 2 1) for more information.
Hold
Description
Using System Hold, you can place either an outside call or an intercom Call on hold.
A call placed on System Hold can be retrieved from any extension.
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Press the HOLD key.
l
The line LED which was being used for the call will flash green.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone.
l
“Hold TRK #Cl1” will appear on the display if the call was on outside line 1.
81
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, VeFsion 4
To release a call placed on System Hold from the extension that placed it there:
Press the line key that is flashing green.
l
The line LED will stop flashing and remain lit.
l
“CO TALK ##Ol” will appear on the display if the call was on outside line 1.
To release a call placed on System Trunk Hold from a different extension:
Press the line key that is flashing red.
l
l
The line LED will turn green and stop flashing.
“CO TALK TRK Ml”
line 1.
will appear on the display if the call was on outside
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Attendant Hold Recall Timer
l
FFl (System): Extension Hold Recall Xmer
l
FFl (System): Central Office Line Automatic Hold
l
FFl (System): Non-Appearing Central Office Line Hold
Considerations
l
l
l
l
When using an outside line for which there is no line key on your
extension, press the HOLD key to place the call on hold, then press a
vacant line key. Release the held call by pressing HOLD again. (System
programming determines whether the call will be placed on Exclusive
Trunk Hold or System Trunk Hold.)
If the Automatic Outside Line Hold feature is programmed for your system,
pressing any other line key will place your original call on System Hold.
A held call will recall if it is not retrieved before the Hold Recall Timer
expires. “Hold Recall Ml 1” will appear on the display if a call on outside
line 1 has been held beyond the time limit.
If you press the HOLD key during a conference with two outside lines,
both outside lines will be placed on hold.
82
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
l
l
l
l
If your system is set to onhook transfer, you have placed an outside call on
hold, and then you make an Intercom Call, you must make sure the other
extension pressesthe FLASHkey or hangs up before you do. If you hang
up before the other extension, the held outside line will be transferred to
that extension.
If there is no response to the Hold Recall, the tone will sound at the
Attendant Phone (extension 100 or 10). However, no tone will sound at an
Attendant Phone if Night Service is activated or if the call is on a Private
Line.
An error tone will sound if you attempt to place more than one intercom
call on hold at the same time.
The DBS can provide music-on-hold to callers placed on hold. See “MusicOn-Hold” (page 2 1) for more information.
Call Park
(All Versions)
Description
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if.you cannot locate the
intended recipient of the call. Simply park the call, then page the person you want to
transfer to. That person can answer the call from any extension by dialing the number
of the extension that parked the call.
Operation
To park a call:
1. Pressthe HOLD key.
2. Dial “75.”
“Park Hold” will appear on the display.
83
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To retrieve a parked call:
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “76.”
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
“CO TALK TRK #l” will appear on the display if the call was parked on line
1.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Park Recall Timer
Considerations
l
l
l
l
l
An alarm tone will sound if a parked call is not released before the Recall
Timer expires (determined by system programming). If this happens, the
user that parked the call can retrieve it by simply picking up the handset. If
no one retrieves the call after the Recall Timer expires, a second alarm will
sound at an attendant phone(s).
You cannot park more than one outside line at a time.
The Attendant Phone cannot use this feature. The Attendant must use the
Attendant Call Park feature.
The Call Park Recall Timer is similar to the Recall Tinner, except that when
the Call Park Recall Timer is set for “0” a call is recalled automatically in
three minutes.
You can store “75” on an FF key and use it as a Call Park key. After placing
an outside call on hold, press the Call Park key to park the call. The Call
Park LED will light while the call is parked and then go off when the call is
released.
84
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Call Pickup
(All Versions)
The DBS provides both directed and group call pickup.
Direct Call Pickup
- 3Description
A call to any extension can be answered at from other extension using the Direct Call
Pickup feature. The Direct Call Pickup feature can also be programmed into a OneTouch key.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “79.”
3. Enter the number of the ringing extension.
The extension number or the outside line number of the caller will appear
on the display.
l
l
The EXT LED will light ‘or the
-’ MC0 or ML key.
4. Speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset.
The EXT LED will go off.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
85
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Considerations
l
If more than one caller is attempting to reach the ringing extension, the
Direct Call Pickup feature will answer the call that arrived first.
Once the call has been picked up, other extensions that attempt to pick up
the call receive busy tone.
l
You can answer incoming calls, intercom calls (both tone and voice), call
waiting, paging, transferred calls, or recalls using the Direct Call Pickup
feature. You cannot answer alarm incoming calls or callbacks with this
feature.
Group Call Pickup
Des&p
tion
Using the Group Call Pickup feature, you can answer calls to other extensions within
your Paging Group without entering the number of the extension that is ringing. Group
Call Pickup can also be programmed into an FF key.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “70.”
l
l
The extension number or the outside line number of the caller will appear
on the display.
The EXT LED will light.
3. Speak when your call is answered.
4. Replace the handset.
The EXT LED will go off.
86
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Page Group
l
FF5 (FF Keys): FF Key Assignments for Extensions
Considerations
l
l
l
If more than one call is arriving at the Paging Group, the Group Call Pickup
feature will answer the call to the lowest port number first.
If the called extension belongs to more than one Paging Group, the Group
Call Pickup Feature will answer the call to the lowest numbered Paging
Group first.
You can answer incoming calls, Intercom Tone Calling, or Intercom Voice
Calling using the Group Call Pickup feature. You cannot answer Paging or
Callback with this feature.
87
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Call Transfer
(All Versions)
The DBS provides two call transfer methods: blind transfer and screened transfer.
Blind Transfer
Description
Blind transfer allows the transfer of a call directly to an extension, without waiting for
the called extension to answer.
Operation
1. Press the HOLD key to place the outside call on hold.
l
The line LED for the outside line on hold will flash green.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
l
“Hold ##O
1” will appear on the display if the call is on line 1.
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
“Call-EXT
135” will appear on the display if you dialed extension 135.
3. Replace the handset before the other party answers.
* You can also replace the handset after the third party answers.
l
l
l
The line LED for the original outside line will turn red when the call has
been transferred.
“Transf 135 #Ol” will appear on the display if a call on line 1 is transferred
to extension 135.
The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
a0
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Onhook Transfer
l
FFI (System): Extension Transfer Recall Timer
l
FE1 (System): Attendant Transfer Recall Timer
Considerations
* In order to transfer a call by pressing HOLD, dialing the extension, and
going onhook, the Onhook Transfer feature must be enabled in system
programming.
If Onhook Transfer is disabled, blind transfer is performed by pressing
HOLD, dialing the extension number, pressing PROG, then going onhook.
l
In Onhook Transfer is enabled, calls can also be transferred by pressing
PROG before going onhook.
l
The Attendant can transfer calls while the handset is still in place, even if
the system is not set for Onhook Transfer.
l
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb or
Absence Message activated.
l
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated.
The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it
is transferred to.
l
For example, if extension “A” is forwarded to extension “B,” calls that are
transferred to extension “A” will be forwarded to extension “B.”
l
When you transfer a call to an extension that is busy or does not answer and
does not have Call Forwarding activated, the transfer will recall to your
extension after the Transfer Recall Timer expires. The other extension’s
number and the number of the transferred CO line or extension will then
appear on your display.
(For example, if you transfer an outside call on line 1 to extension 135 and
that extension does not answer, the call will return to your extension and
“Recall 135 #Ol” will appear on the display.)
89
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Screened
Transfer
Description
Using the ScreenedTransfer feature, you can contact a third party and announce the
call before the transfer.
Operation
To use Screened Transfer when your system is set for Onhook Transfer:
1. Press the HOLD key to place the call on hold.
l
The line LED for the outside line on hold will flash green.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
l
“Hold TKK #IO1” will appear on the display if the call is on outside line 1.
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When your call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.
l
The EXT LED will stop flashing and remain lit.
l
“Talk-EXT 135” will appear on the display if extension 135 answered.
4. Hang up the handset
l
The line LED for the original outside line will turn red.
* The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
To use Screened Transfer when Onhook Transfer is disabled:
1. Press the HOLD key to place the outside call on hold.
l
The line.LED for the outside line on hold will flash green.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
l
“Hold TRK #IO1” will appear on the display if the call is on line 1.
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
90
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
3. When your call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.
l
The EXT LED will stop flashing and remain lit.
l
“Talk-EXT
135” will appear on the display if extension 135 answered.
4. Press the PROG key or dial “8.”
The line LED for the original outside line will turn red.
l
“TRF 135 TRK ##01”will appear on the display if a ca.Hon line 1 is
transferred to extension 135.
l
The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
l
5. Hang up to complete the transfer.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Onhook Transfer
l
FFl (System): Extension Transfer Recall Timer
l
FFl (System): Attendant Transfer Recall Timer
Considerations
l
l
l
The Attendant can transfer calls while the handset is still in place, even if
the system is not set for Onhook Transfer.
.. .
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb or
Absence Message activated.
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated.
The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it
is transferred to.
For example, if phone “A” is covered to phone “B,” calls that are
transferred to phone “A” will be forwarded to phone “B.”
91
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
I
l
When you transfer a call to an extension that is busy or does not answer,and
does not have Call Forwarding activated, a call tone will sound at your
extension after Transfer Recall Timer expires. The other extension’s
number and the number of the transferred CO line or extension will then
appear on your display and the call will be returned to your extension.
(For example, if you transfer an outside call on line 1 to extension 135 and
that extension is busy or does not answer, the call will return to your
extension and “Recall 135 #Ol” will appear on the display.)
Call Waiting
(All Versions)
Description
You can send a Call Waiting signal, followed by a brief LED message, to a busy
extension. The party receiving the message need only replace the handset and then
pick it up again to be automatically connected to the message sender’s extension.
The following messages can be sent using the Call Waiting feature:
Table 8.
Call Waiting Text Messages
Message
5
6
7
8
9
Code
Message
“Visitor Here”
“Need Help”
“Important”
“Urgent”
“Emergency”
Message codes 0 - 4 cannot be used.
With CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher, users can also respond to call waiting by sending a
text message, See “Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply” on page 95.
92
f
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
To set Call Waiting:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
You will hear a busy tone from the speaker.
3. Press “3.”
l
The EXT LED will flash.
l
“Call Wait 157” will appear on the display if you called extension 157.
4. If you want to send a text message, dial the desired messagecode (5 - 9).
The corresponding message will display on the called party’s phone. (If the
called party does not have a display, he or she will continue to hear a call
waiting indication.)
5. Remain on the line until the called party picks up.
To answer Call Waiting:
1. The EXT LED will flash, indicating Call Waiting has been sent.
2. “Call Wait 135” will appear,on the display if extension 135 sent the Call
Waiting.
3. Replace the handset.
The current call will be disconnected.
l
“Call Wait- 100” will appear on the display.
l
4. Pick up the handset.
You will automatically be connected to the extension sending the Call
Waiting.
l
l
“Talk-EXT
100” will appear on the display.
93
’
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
i
Note: To answer a call waiting tone, you may flash the switchhook, ratlrer
than hang up. If you flash the switchhook, you are connected to the waiting
party immediately.
To answer Call Waiting using the Talk Back key:
A “Talk Back” key can be assigned to an FF key. The Talk Back key allows you to
answer a waiting call without disconnecting the original call.
1. The LED of the Talk Back key will flash red, indicating Call Waiting has
been sent.
2. Press the Talk Back key to answer CalI Waiting.
l
The LED of the TaIk Back key will flash green.
l
The current call will be held automatically.
3. Press the Talk Back key again to return to the original call.
The LED of the TaIk Back key will go off.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting Notification Tone
l
FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting (Receive)
l
FF5 (FF Key Settings): FF Key Assignments for Extensions
Considerations
When using an SLT, message code 8 cannot be used. (The digit “8” is used
to transfer calls on SLTs.)
l
Call Waiting can be used without entering a message code.
l
l
l
Call Waiting is cancelled when the sender replaces the handset
If the extension called has DND activated, has a call on hold, is ringing
(from another call), or is engaged in a conference call,’ Call Waiting cannot
be sent.
94
i
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
l
l
l
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
A call on an outside line can be placed on hold before Call Waiting is
answered to avoid terminating the original call. An Intercom Catl, however,
must be terminated before Call Waiting can be answered.
If onhook Call Transfer has been programmed and an outside line is placed
on hold to answer Call Waiting, make sure you replace the handset after the
other extension hangs up. If the caller hangs up first, the held call will be
transferred to the called extension.
Call Waiting cannot be sent to an ML key.
Call WaitinglOHVA
Text Reply
(CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
Description
When a busy party receives an indication of incoming intercom call, the busy party
can respond by sending a text message back to the caller.
The text message can be sent after any of these intercom call indications:
l
Call waiting tone
l
Call waiting tone followed by a text message
0 An offhook voice announce.
Operation
When you are talking on a call and receive an indication of a incoming intercom call,
press CONF then dial 1-5.
The following table shows the default text associated with messages 1 to 5.
MessageNumber
MessageDefinition
1
2
Take A Message
Please Hold
3
4
5
Will Call Back
Transfer
Unavailable
Messages l-5 can be changed through system programming.
95
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6,1993
Programming
l
FF6 (Names and Messages): Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply
l
Text messages l-5 can be changed from an attendant phone or a DSS/72.
Considerations
Camp-on
(All Versions)
Description
If you reach a busy extension, the Camp-on feature will alert you with a ring when the
extension becomes free. You will then be able to pick up your handset to automatically
dial the extension.
Operation
To activate the Camp-on feature:
1. Pick up the handset.
2. Dial the desired extension number.
You will hear a busy tone if the extension is busy.
3. Press “3.”
l
You will hear ringback tone.
l
If the Camp-on feature cannot be set, you will continue to hear a busy tone.
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
5. Wait for the station callback ring.
i
96
Sectiori 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To answer the callback
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
ring:
1. Pick up the handset when you hear the callback ring.
l
“Camp-on Call” will appear on the display.
l
The EXT LED will flash.
l
The system will automatically dial the called extension.
2. Speak when your call is answered.
Related Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting Notification Tone/OHVA
Considerations
l
l
l
l
l
The callback ring must be answered within sixteen seconds or it will be
canceled.
A Camp-on request will only be accepted affer Call Waiting status.
The callback ring cannot be accepted by a station that has Call Forwarding
activated.
An extension can only have one call camped-on at a time. For example, if
Extension 152 camps-on to Extension 153, another extension cannot campon to 153, as long as 152 is camped-on.
An extension that has initiated ‘a camp-on cannot receive a camp-on. For
instance, if Extension 200 has camped-on to Extension 300, another
extension cannot camp-on to 200.
97
Key Telephone Features
CPC-8, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
CO Line Key Trunk Access
(All Versions)
Description
You can access an outside line by pressing a CO line key.
Operation
1. Press an unlit line key.
l
You will hear the outside dial tone.
l
The line LED will light green.
l
“CO TALK Wl” will appear on the display if you are using CO Line 1.
2. Dial the telephone number.
The dialed number will appear on the display.
3. Pick up the handset and speak when the call is answered.
4. Replace the handset.
0 The line LED will change from green to red and then go off.
l
The time and date will reappear on the display.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): SMDR Display Start Timer for Central Office Calls
l
FF5 (FF Keys): FF Key Assignments for Extensions
98
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Considerations
l
l
The duration of a call is shown on the display while the call is in progress.
In CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1, the SMDR Display Start Timer
can be set to start after 16 seconds or 30 seconds after the last digit of the
telephone number is dialed.
In CPC-B Version 3.0 1 or higher, the timer can be set to start at 5, 16, or 30
seconds.
Conference
Calls
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
Conference Calls allow an extension user to add a party to an existing conversation.
Extension users can create the following types of Conference Calls:
One outside Line and two extensions
l
* Two outside lines and one extension
l
One outside line and three extensions
l
Two outside lines and two extensions
l
Three extensions
l
Four extensions.
Operation
To establish a Conference Call:
1. Press HOLD or the line key of your current call to place it on hold.
The extension number, outside line number, or name of the party on hold will
appear on the display.
2. Press an unlit line key or dial the number of the extension you wish to add to
the call.
l
The line LED will light green.
99
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
l
l
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
You will hear the outside dial tone from the handset.
“CO TALK #+O1” will appear on the display if you chose CO line 1.
3. If you pressed an unlit line key in step 2, dial the number of the party you
wish to add to the call.
The number will appear on the display.
4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
If you are now conducting a three-way Conference call involving outside
line 2, CO 1, and CO 2, “CONF ##O1#02” will appear on the display.
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 to add a fourth party to a three-party Conference Call.
To add an extension to an outside call:
1. Press the CONF key during the outside call.
2. The party at the extension who wishes to join the call must pick up the
handset.
3. The party joining the call must press the line key of the callin progress. (The
line key LED will be lit red.)
Steps 2 and 3 must be completed within five seconds of each other.
4. Pick up the handset.
The three parties will now be able to speak to one another.
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 to add another extension to a three-party Conference Call.
Considerations
l
The SCC-A card provides 3 four-party conference circuits. The SCC-B
provides 8 four-party conference circuits
l
Press FLASH or hang up to exit a Conference Call.
l
The Call Hold feature cannot be used during a four-party Conference Call.
100
f-
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Dial “0” for Attendant
(All Versions)
Description
The Attendant can be called from any extension by simply pressing “0.”
If multiple attendants are assigned, a dial “0” call will go to Attendant “1” first. If
attendant “1” is busy, the call will then go to Attendant “2.” The call will continue to
transfer to the next attendant in the attendant group if necessary.
With CPC-A and CPC-B Version 1.0, a maximum of two attendants can be assigned.
Beginning with CPC-B Version 2.0, up to four attendants can be assigned.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset or press ON/OFF.
You will hear intercom dial tone.
2. Press “0.”
l
l
Related
“Talk-EXT 100” will appear on the display if your extension is set for
Voice Calling.
“Call-EXT
Calling.
100” will appear on the display if your extension
. \ is set for Tone
Programming
l
FFl (System): Second Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Third Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Fourth Attendant Position
l
l
FFl (System): Attendant Transfer Extension Position
FF6 (Names and Messages): Extension Name
Considerations
l
If the Attendant‘s name has been stored, the name will appear on the
display instead of the extension number.
101
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
,
I
Direct Trunk Access
(All Versions)
Description
Extensions can access a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use
Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
1. Press the ON/OFF key:
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “88,” then enter the desired line number (01 - 64).
l
You will hear the outside dial tone from the speaker.
l
“CO TALK #O5” will appear on the display if you chose line 5.
3. Dial the telephone number.
The number will appear on the display.
4. Pick up the handset and speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset.
Considerations
l
You cannot use the Direct Trunk Access feature if you are holding a call
that does not appear on a CO line key.
102
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Do-Not-Disturb
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
(DND)
(All Versions)
Description
An extension can be made unavailable by activating Do-Not-Disturb @ND). When
DND is activated at an extension, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
Operation
To activate DND:
1. Press the ON/OFF key:
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
4 The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “73.”
l
The DND/CF LED will light.
l
“DND Set” will appear on the display.
3. Press the ON/ OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will light.
To cancel DND:
1. Press the ON/OFF key:
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “73.”
l
The DND/CF LED will light.
l
“DND Canceled” will appear on the display.
103
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
3. Press the ON/ OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
Callback Queuing will ring an extension in DND.
l
A Private Line will ring an extension in DND.
Considerations
Setting DND automatically cancels the Call Forwarding and Absence
Message features.
l
l
l
l
With CPC-A and CPC-B Version 1, DND is not available for Attendant
Phones. Beginning with CPC-B Version 2.0, Attendant Phones can activate
DND.
The Attendant can activate or cancel this feature on an extension using FF
key LEDs on a DSS console.
The DND feature cannot be activated from an extension selected to receive
call forwarding.
104
f
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
EM/24 Console
(All Versions)
Description
Connecting an EM/24 console to your extension increases the number of FF keys by
twenty-four. By assigning extensions to its FF keys, you can use an EM/24 console as
a BLF (Busy Lamp Field).
‘. .. A-
Related
Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): Terminal Type
l
FF3 (Extension): EM/24 Port Assignment
l
An EM/24 console can be connected to any key phone.
Considerations
Flexible Function (FF) Keys
(All Versions)
Description
You can assign frequently used functions to programmable keys on key phones, DSS
consoles, and EM/24 consoles. All keys not already assigned as line or Speed Dialing
keys are available for programming.
Up to twelve dial keys or six digits can be stored in an FF key. (The LED of the FF key
will not light when digits are stored in the key.)
You can also store the PROG, CONF, AUTO, REDIAL
inserting a pause), and FLASH features.
(for redialing only, not for
Also, you can assign Call Forwarding-External and either a Personal Speed Dial code
or a System Speed Dial code to an FF key. Or you can assign a pilot extension number
as a Call Forwarding destination by storing both Call Forwarding and the pilot
extension number (0, 10 - 69, or 100 - 699) in an FF key.
105
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6,1993
.
Operation
To assign pre-programmed
codes to an FF key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key:
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker,
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Pressthe PROG key.
“F’ will appear on the display.
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
“Enter Code” will appear on the display.
4. Enter the code to be programmed (see Table 9).
The code programmed will appear on the display.
5. Pressthe HOLD key.
“Code Stored” will appear on the display.
6. Repeat steps 2 - 5 to program additional keys.
7. Pressthe ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
To assign digits to an FF key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
“Enter Code” will appear on the display.
4. Press the PROG key.
106
i ‘,,
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6,1993
5. Enter up to six digits.
6. Press the HOLD key.
To assign Call Forwarding-External
to an FF key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FP key to be programmed.
“Enter Code” will appear on the display.
4. Enter “12.”
5. Press “3.”
6. Press the AUTO key.
7. Enter the Speed Dial code (System Speed dial 00 - 89 or Personal Speed dial
90 - 99).
Note: The speed dial code must include the CONF key (to indicate a trunk
call), the appropriate trunk access code, and the outside number.
8. Press the HOLD key.
Intercom Calls will now be forwarded. CO incoming calls and transferred
CO calls will not be forwarded to an outside line.
To assign a Hunt Group pilot number or an extension number to an FF key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FP key to be programmed.
“Enter Code” will appear on the display.
4. Enter “72.”
107
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
5. Enter the Call Forwarding code (0, 1,2, or 4).
6. Enter the Hunt Group pilot number or an extension number.
7. Press the HOLD key.
To erase a code stored in an FF key:
Note: FF keys assigned as CO lines cannot be cleared using the following
procedure. CO line keys can only be cleared through system programming.
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
“Enter Code” will appear on the display.
4. Press the HOLD key.
“Code Cleared” will appear.
To check a programmed FF key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key:
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the CONF key.
“C” will appear in the display.
3. Press the FF key to be checked.
The programmed data will appear on the display.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
l
The date and time will appear on the display.
108
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Programming
l
FF5 (FF Keys): FF Key Assignments for Extensions
l
FF9 (Copy Program): FF Key Copy
l
The following functions can be assigned to FF keys:
Considerations
Table 9.
Feature access codes for FF key assignments
Feature
Call Attendant
Intercom Call
Outside Line
Pooled Trunk
Access
i
Paging
Call Park
DND Activate/
1 Cancel
Code to be entered
0
Extension number (10 - 69) or (100 - 699)
88, outside line number (01 - 32)
1 Outside line group number (9,81 - 86)
Note: “9” can used as an outside line group number if it is not used for
LCR.
#, Paging Group number (00 - 07)
75
1 73
1 Absence Message 1 71
1 Activate/Cancel
1
1 Call Forwarding
I 72
Alarm Activate/
##4
Cancel
Station Lockout
74, lockout code (max. 4 digits)
Dial Tone On/Off
#50
Direct Call Pickup 79
Group Call Pickup
Account Code 1
Account Code 2
Speed Dialing
Night Service On/
off
1 Intercom
70
#79, account code (max. 6 digits)
AUTO, #, account code (max. 6 digits)
AUTO, speed dial number (00 - 99)
#52 (Attendant only)
109
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Code to be entered
Feature
AUTO,
Message Clear
1 AUTO,
Message Call
Headset On/Off
#51
1 #53
1 BGM On/Off
Answer Key
*l
*2
Release Key
Talk Back Key
*3
Paging Meet-Me
77
Answer
Universal Answer 78
Pickup
Save Dial Call
AUTO,
Register Save Dial AUTO,
MUTE Key
*#
FLASH key
FLASH
l
l
l
l
l
FLASH
REDIAL
1
1
*
AUTO
If a new code is programmed into a key, the previously programmed code is
erased.
To erase a code programmed into a key, press the HOLD key when the
display reads “Enter Code.” “ Code Cleared” will then appear on the
display.
The system can be programmed so that Pooled Trunk Access calls
automatically use LCR when 9 is selected.
Night Service, DND, and BGM can be activated through FF keys without
lifting the handset.
When making a call using the Speed Dialing feature, the FLASH key
stored in Speed Dialing becomes the PBX flash feature.
110
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Handsfree
Answerback
(Ail Versions)
Description
You can answer a call without lifting the handset using the Handsfree Answerback
feature. However, your extension must be programmed for Voice Calling to use this
feature. If your extension is not set for Voice Calling, the caller must press “1” during
a call to switch from Tone Calling to Voice Calling.
Operation
1. Confirm that the MUTE LED is off.
If it is lit, press the MUTE key to turn it off.
2. Speak into the microphone.
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Intercom Calling
l
Users should stay within three feet of the telephone when they speak.
Considerations
e When using a large display phone, the MUTE feature can be selected from
the Menu screen on the display. With other DBS key phones, the MUTE
function is assigned to a fixed key.
111
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
ltitbrcom
Calling
(All Versions)
Descriptions
The DBS provides two methods of intercom calling: voice calling and tone calling,
Voice Calling. With voice calling, intercom calls are connected immediately, without
a ringing tone.
Tone Calling. With tone calls, a ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
System programming determines whether the DBS uses voice or tone calling as a
default. If voice calling is the default, dialing a “1” after the extension number will
change the call to a tone call. If tone calling is the default, dialing a “1” will result in a
voice call.
Operation
To make a Voice Call:
f
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
Note: If you are calling from an extension programmed for Prime Line
Preference, press the FF key programmed for intercom operation.
2. Dial the extension number (10 - 69) or (100 - 699).
3. If the system default is tone calling, dial a “1.”
l
l
“Talk-EXT 125” will appear on the display if you called extension 125. If
the extension name has been stored, that name will appear on the display
after “Talk” instead of “-EXT 125.”
The EXT LED will light.
4. Speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset.
The EXT LED will go off.
112
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
To transfer a call using Voice Calling:
1. Press the HOLD key.
l
l
The EXT LED will flash.
“Hold-EXT
hold.
135” will appear on the display if you placed extension 135 on
2. Dial the number of the extension to which the call will be transferred.
3. If the system default is tone calling, dial a “ 1.”
“Talk-EXT 157” will appear on the display if you are transferring the call to
extension 157.
4. Replace the handset.
To make an Tone Call:
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
Note: If you are calling from an extension programmed for prime line
preference, press the F’F key programmed for intercom operation.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If the system default is voice calling, dial a “1.”
l
l
“Call-EXT 125” will appear on the display if you called extension 125. If
the extension name has been stored, that name will appear on the display
rather than the extension number.
The called extension will ring and the EXT LED will flash.
4. Speak when your call is answered.
“Talk-EXT 125” will appear on the display if you called extension 125. If the
extension name has been stored, the name will appear on the display after
“Talk” instead of “-EXT 125.”
113
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
5. Replace the handset.
The EXT LED will go off.
To transfer a call using Tone Calling:
1. Press the HOLD key.
The EXT LED will flash.
l
“Hold-EXT
hold.
l
135” will appear on the display if you placed extension 135 on
2. Dial the number of the extension to which the call will be transferred.
3. If the system default is voice calling, dial a “1.”
“Call-EXT 157” will appear on the display if you are transferring the call to
extension 157.
4. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Intercom Calling
l
FFl (System): Alert Tone for Voice Calls
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
Considerations
l
l
l
l
When an extension’s calling mode is set to voice calls, a “splash” tone can
be sent to alert the extension to the voice call. System programming
determines if the splash tone is provided.
If an extension is offhook, it will receive tone calls.
Calls to OPX and analog SLT extensions are always tone calls, regardless
of system programming.
The voice calling feature is not available for DISA incoming calls.
* Voice calls do not forward if Cover No Answer is turned on.
114
.
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Last Number Redial
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
The last outside number dialed may be redialed automatically by pressing the
REDIAL key.
Operation
1. Press an unlit line key.
l
You will hear the outside dial tone from the speaker.
l
The line LED will light green.
l
“CO TALK Ml”
will appear on the display if you are using CO line 1.
2. Press the REDIAL key.
The last number dialed will appear on the display.
3. Pick up the handset and speak when your call is answered.
4. Replace the handset.
The line key LED will change from green to red, then go off.
Considerations
l
l
If the Auto Flash Redial feature is set, you can flash the outside line once
by pressing the REDIAL key at the busy tone. The last number dialed can
then be redialed.
The Last Number Redial feature can redial a number up to sixteen digits
long.
4 A maximum of five Speed Dialing codes can be redialed.
115
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Line Appearances
The DBS provides up to four types of line appearances,depending on the CPC version
used.
The following table summarizes how each type of line appearanceis used:
Table 10. MC0
and ML key definitions
I Key
I Def rnition
I
Extension Line (EL)
Appearances
EL keys provide one-touch dialing, direct station selection, and busy
lamp fields for extensions.
Direct Line (DL)
Appearances
DL keys are used to originate and receive calls over specific trunk
numbers.
MC0 keys are used to originate and receive CO calls.
Multi-CO (MCO)
Appearances
Mu1ti-Line (ML)
Appearances
Extension
ML keys are used to originate and receive CO line calls and intercom
calls.
Line (EL) Appearances
(CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher)
Description
When an EL key is programmed, it automatically provides direct station selection and
busy lamp field for the assigned extension number. If desired, the EL key can also
provide ring monitor.
For example, you can set extension A as an EL key to extension B. When extension A
rings, the LED of the EL key on extension B flashes. Lf extension B answers the call
by pressing the EL key, the LED on extension A will go off and the call will only
remain on the EL key of extension B.
Ringing can be set on either one or both extensions. Lf the extensions are not set for
ringing, the LED of the EL key will flash red. Lf the extensions are set for ringing, the
LED will flash green.
When extension A is in use, the LED of the EL key on extension B will light red. If
one extension has the Absence Message, Call Forwarding, or Do-Not-Disturb feature ’
activated, the EL key will light green.
116
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
To assign an EL key:
1. Press the PROG key.
2. Press the FF key you want to assign the EL appearance to.
3. Dial the extension number.
To make an intercom call using the EL key:
Press the idle EL key.
To pick up a call on an EL key:
Press the flashing EL key.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring
l
FF4 (Ringing and Hunt Groups): Extension Ring Assignment
l
FF5 (FF Keys): FF Key Assignments for Extensions
Considerations
l
l
Ringing assignments for EL keys are assigned through system
programming.
If several calls arrive at an Extension Line key, the calls are queued and will
ring on a fist-in, first-out basis.
117
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Direct Line (DL) Appearances
(CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher)
Description
Direct Line keys can be assigned to any one of sixty-four CO lines for making and
receiving outside line calls. Direct Line keys have priority over Multi-Line keys for
outgoing and incoming outside line calls.
The LED for a Direct Line key will flash green on an incoming call if the CO line is
set to ring. It will flash red if the CO line is not set to ring. If another extension
answers the call, the LED on the telephone will light red.
Operation
Operation
To originate a trunk call .. .
Action
Press an idle DL key.
To place a call on Exclusive Trunk Hold (page 96) . ..
The key blinks (green) as the call is made.
Press the DL key.
To place a call on System Trunk Hold (page 8 1) ...
To transfer a call ...
Press the HOLD key.
Press HOLD, dial the destination extension, then press PROG.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Least Cost Routing
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Group Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
l
FF5 (Keys): FF Key Assignment
* FF8 (LCR) LCR Setting
118
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Multi-CO
(MCO) Appearances
(All Versions)
Description
You can make and receive CO line calls using a Multi-CO (MCO) key. Each extension
can have up to three MC0 keys. The Attendant can have up to 12 MC0 keys.
An MC0 key can be assigned to any of the pooled trunk groups. See “Pooled Trunk
Access” on page 134 for more information.
See “ML/MC0 Separation” (page 120) for information on assigning both ML and
MC0 keys to the same system (CPC-B Version 4 or higher).
Operation
Action
originate a trunk call ...
Piess an idle MC0 key.
The key blinks (green) as the call is made.
place a call on Exclusive Trunk Hold (page 96) .. . Press the MC0 key.
Press the HOLD key.
place a call on System Trunk Hold (page 81) ...
transfer a call ...
Press HOLD, dial the destination extension, then press PROG.
Operation
To
i
?
To
To
To
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Least Cost Routing
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Group Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
l
FF5 (Keys): FF Key Assignment
l
FF8 (LCR) LCR Setting
119
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
I
Considerations
. When all trunks in a group are busy, the corresponding MC0 key lights red.
l
Multi-Line
If LCR is enabled, MC0 keys can be assigned for trunk group 89.
However, the FF keys will not light.
l
Press the MC0 key that flashes red to answer an outside call.
l
There are seven groups of outside lines: 9 and 81 - 86.
(ML) Appearances
(CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher)
Description
You can make and receive both CO line calls and Intercom Calls using a Multi-Line
(ML) key. Each extension can have up to three Multi-Line keys. The Attendant can
have up to 12 Multi-Line keys.
See “ML/MC0 Separation” (page 122) for information on assigning both ML and
MC0 keys to the same system (CPC-B Version 4 or higher).
Operation
Operation
To originate an intercom or trunk call ...
ACtiO?l
1 To place a call on Exclusive Hold (page 96) ...
1 To place a call on System Hold (page 81) ...
To transfer a call .. .
120
Press an idle MC0 key.
The key blinks (Been) as the call is made.
1 Press the MC0 key.
I
1 Press the HOLD key.
Press HOLD, dial the destination extension, then press PROG.
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related Programming
: ,_
l
FFI (System): Least Cost Routing
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Group Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
l
FF5 (Keys): FF Key Assignment
l
FF8 (LCR) LCR Setting
Considerations
A Multi-Line key will ring for incoming CO calls, Intercom Calls, recall
calls, and call-forward calls.
l
When a CO call or an intercom Call arrives, a search will begin for a MultiLine key not in use. The lower numbered FF keys will be searchedfirst.
When a free Multi-Line key is found, the LED will flash green and the
extension will ring.
l
If another phone answers an incoming trunk call, the ML LED on your
extension will go off and the ringing will stop, indicating that the MultiLine key on your telephone is no longer in use.
l
When dialing an extension number, the system automatically selects the
free Multi-Line key with the lowest number.
l
l
l
If the CO line or held extension does not respond before the Recall Timer
expires, the extension will ring and the Multi-Line key will flash green.
If LCR is enabled, ML keys can be assigned for trunk group 89. However,
the FF keys will not light.
121
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
.
ML/MC0 Separation
(CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
Description
Beginning with CPC-B Version 4, each extension can have either MC0 or ML keys.
In previous software versions, MC0 or ML keys were only available on a system-wide
basis, and the type of key that was available differed according to the software release.
Table 10 contains definitions of MC0 and ML keys. Table 11 shows MCO/ML
availability with previous releases.
Table II.
MCOIML
availability
CPC Version
1 TwofKey 1
1 CPC-A
1 MC0 only
1 CPC-B 1.0
1 MC0 only 1
CPC-B 2.0 - 3.1
ML only
CPC-B 4.0 and above MC0 or ML
Related Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): ML/MC0
Separation
l
FF5 (Keys): FF Key Assignment
Considerations
l
l
The initial setting for all extensions (except the first attendant phone) is
MCO.
The initial setting for the first attendant phone (port 1) is ML.
122
(
:
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Meet-Me Answer
(All Versions)
Description
You can answer a Paging call from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset from any extension at which you hear the Paging call.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Press “77.”
Paging will cease and you will be connected to the party trying to reach
you.
l
The EXT LED will light.
l
3. Speak to the party that paged you.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
The Meet-Me Answer feature cannot be used with Paging Group 00.
Considerations
l
l
l
You can only use the Meet-Me Answer feature at an extension that does not
have an incoming call.
If an external paging system or a Universal Answer system has been
installed, use Group Call Pickup to respond to the Paging call.
If you are at a speakerphone, you can press the ON/OFF key instead of
picking up the handset to answer the Paging Call. You can then speak to the
party trying to reach you using the phone’s built-in speaker and
microphone.
123
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
I
Message Waiting/Callback
Request
.
(All Versions)
Oescrip tion
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message
requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a Callback Request:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
“Call-EXT 135,” “Busy-EXT 135” or “Talk-EXT
display if you attempt to call extension 135.
135” will appear on the
3. Dial “2” at the busy tone or while the telephone is still ringing.
“Accept Message” will appear on the display.
4. Pressthe ON/OFF key.
The Message Waiting lamp will flash at the called extension.
To answer a Callback Request:
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Pressthe AUTO key.
3. Pressthe REDIAL key.
l
l
Your telephone will automatically dial the extension that left the Callback
Request.
If extension 135 left the Callback Request and your extension is set for
Tone Calling, “Call-EXT 135” will appear on the display.
124
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
If extension 13.5left the Callback Request and your extension is set.for
Voice Calling, “Talk-EXT 135” will appear on the display.
l
4. Speak when your call is answered.
The EXT LED will light.
The Message Waiting lamp will go off.
To view the most recent Callback Request
Callback Requests are normally viewed in the order received. To view the most recent
callbacks first:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the CONF key twice.
The most recent Callback Request will appear on the display.
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to view other Callback Requests.
To cancel a Callback Request:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the AUTO key.
125
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
3. Press the FLASH key.
“Call Back Cancel” will appear on the display.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
Related Pfogfamming
l
FFl (System) Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.01 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension) Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.01 or higher)
Considerations
l
l
l
l
l
When your extension has received several Callback Requests, the number
of requests will appear on the left side of the display.
Up to four Callback Requests can be sent to any one extension. The order
of the messagescan then be changed by the party receiving the requests.
If you call the same extension a second time and the party answers, any
Callback Requests you sent earlier will be cancelled.
If a Callback Request is sent to an extension for which Call Forwarding is
set, the Callback Request will be automatically forwarded to the designated
extension.
You can send a Callback Request to an extension that has Do Not Disturb
or Absence Message activated.
126
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Off-Hook
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Voice Announce
(OHVA)
(All Versions)
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, then make an
announcement that only the called party can hear using the Off-Hook Voice Announce
(OHVA) feature. You can also transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the
announcement using this feature.
Operation
To make an OHVA:
1. Pick up the handset.
2. Dial the desired extension number.
If the extension is busy you will hear the busy tone.
3. Press “5.”
“CONF13 1 135” will appear on the display if you called extension 135
from extension 131 while extension 135 was speaking with another
extension.
l
“CONF 0 1 135” will appear on the display if you called extension 135
while extension 135 was speaking with an outside line.
l
The EXT LED will flash.
l
l
“Voice Announce” will appear on the called extension’s display.
l
The Talk Back key will flash red.
4. Make your announcement.
127
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To answer an OHVA:
1. Press the Talk Back key (must be programmed in an FF key).
The Talk Back key’s LED will flash green.
l
2. Speak with the caller.
3. To return to the previous call, press the Talk Back key again.
To transfer a call using OHVA
1. Press the HOLD key to place the call to be transferred on hold.
2. Dial the number of the extension to which the call will be transferred.
You will hear a busy tone if the extension is already engaged in a call.
3. Press “5” and announce the call to be transferred.
If the transferred call is not accepted by the called extension, press the
FLASH key to cancel the transfer.
If the transferred call is accepted and Onhook Transfer is enabled for your
extension, hang up. If OnHook Transfer is not enabled, press PROG then
hang up.
Note: Attendant console phones transfer by pressing the RELEASE key.
To answer a call after It has been announced using OHVA:
1. Replace the handset.
Your extension will ring.
2. Pick up the handset.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (UC-B 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
!
l
FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting Notification Tone/Offhook Voice Announce
128
::
.-
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Considerations
The held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the OHVA
hangs up.
l
If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set
time limit, then return to the extension sending the OHVA. (The recall time
can be set in the Transfer-Recall Timer.)
l
When receiving an OHVA, an extension’s Talk Back key’s LED will flash
red. When the Talk Back key is pressed to answer an OHVA, the LED will
flash green.
l
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA. (“Denied”
will appear on the display of the extension trying to send the Call Waiting
message.)
l
One-Touch Keys
(All Versions)
i’
’
Des&p tion
One-Touch Keys can be used to store telephone numbers, speeddial numbers, or
feature access codes.
To dial the stored number, the user goes offhook and pressesthe desired key.
Operation
To program a One-Touch key for Pooled Access:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the One-Touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the CONF key.
129
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
5. Enter the number of the outside line group to be stored. (See Table 12.).
6. Enter the telephone number to stored.
7. Press the HOLD key.
To assign System Speed Dial numbers to One-Touch keys:
1. press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the.PROG key.
3. Press the One-Touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the AUTO key.
5. Enter the System Speed Dial Number to be programmed.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7.
Press the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
To assign two System Speed Dial numbers to a single One-Touch key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. press the One-Touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the AUTO key.
130
Section 700, feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
5. Enter the Speed Dial number for the access code.
6. Press the REDIAL
key.
This inserts a pause between the access code and the telephone number.
7.
Press the AUTO key.
8. Enter the Speed Dial number for the telephone number.
9. Press the HOLD key.
Both the accesscode and the telephone number are programmed on the OneTouch key.
lOPress the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
To assign access codes to a One-Touch key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
.
2. Press the PROC key.
3. Press the One-Touch key to be programmed.
4. Enter the access number.
5. Press the REDIAL
key.
This inserts a pause between the access code and the telephone number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7.
Press the ON/OFF key.
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
131
Key Telephone Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To check a programmed One-Touch key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the CONF key.
“c” will appear in the display.
3. Press the One Touch key to be checked.
The programmed data will appear on the display.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
l
The date and time will appear on the display.
Considerations
l
l
l
If the pause following an access code is too short, press the REDIAL key
more than once.
A One-Touch key can be programmed to automatically accessa CO line
before dialing a personal speed dial number.
Selection of an outside line group is made when programming a One-Touch
key. A free line is then selected from that group when dialing out. (Group 9
can be programmed to select LCR automatically.) The following table
shows the available outside line groups and their corresponding code
numbers:
132
f
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
access codes for trunk group numbers
Table 12. One-touch
Trunk Group Number
Code Number to be entered
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
81
82
83
84
85
86
9
l
One-Touch keys cannot be checked while Station Lockout is being set.
Onhook Dialing
(All Versions)
Description
Onhook Dialing is a standard feature for DBS key phones. To dial onhook, the user
simply presses the ON/OFF key.
Users can dial onhook using the dialpad, one-touch keys, or FF keys.
133
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Pooled Trunk Access
(All Versions)
Description
The DBS system supports up to 64 outside lines. These lines can then be divided into
seven Pooled Trunk groups. If you store an FP key as an MC0 or ML key, an open line
from the Pooled Trunk group assigned to that key can be selected automatically.
Even if all the outside lines assigned to an extension are busy, a free line can be
selected by choosing an outside line group number. Group numbers 9 and 8 1 - 86 are
available.
Operation
To select a Pooled Trunk group using a pre-programmed FF key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the ML or MC0 key.
l
The LED of the Pooled Trunk key will light green.
l
You will hear the outside dial tone from the speaker.
l
“CO TALK #ol” will appear on the display if line 1 is accessed.
3. Dial the telephone number.
The number will appear on the display.
4. Pick up the handset and speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset.
The LED of the ML or MC0 key will go off.
134
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To select a Pooled Trunk group that is not assigned
to an FF key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
l
2. Enter the desired group number (81 - 86,9).
l
You will hear the outside dial tone from the speaker.
l
“CO TALK #OS’ will appear on the display if line 5 is-accessed.
3. Dial the telephone number.
The number will appear on the display.
4. Pick up the handset and speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Least Cost Routing
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Group Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
l
FF5 (Keys): FF Key Assignment
l
FF8 (LCR) LCR Setting
Considerations
l
l
The LED of the ML or MC0 key will light red and you will hear a busy
tone when all lines in the same group are busy. (Those lines cannot be
accessed.)
If a ML or MC0 key is assigned line group number 9 and LCR has been
activated, LCR will be selected automatically.
135
.Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Press the ML or MC0 key that flashes red to answer incoming calls..
l
If one group is set aside for data lines, this feature can be used when a line
is needed for operations such as data transmission via modem.
l
Prime Line Preference
(All Versions)
Description
Prime Line Preference allows a user to place an outside call by simply picking up the
handset. This feature can be programmed to always access a specific trunk or an entire
trunk group. (Be sure to program one of the other FF keys as an intercom key.)
Operation
1. Pick up the handset.
. You will hear the outside dial tone.
l
The LED of line key 1 will light green if line 1 is accessed.
l
“CO TALK #Ol” will appear on the display if line 1 is accessed.
2. Dial the telephone number.
The number will appear on the display.
3. Speak when your call is answered.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Least Cost Routing
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Group Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
l
FF5 (Keys): FF Key Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Prime Line Pickup
136
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Considerations
l
To make an Intercom Call, first press the FF key programmed as an
intercom key, then dial the extension number.
This feature will only work if FF key 1 is assigned to an outside line or a
Pooled Trunk Access feature.
l
This feature cannot be used with a SLT.
l
Private Line
(All Versions)
Description
An outside line can be reserved for exclusive access,eliminating the need for that user
to wait for a free outside line during busy periods.
Operation
1. Press the CO line key designated as a Private Line.
+ You will hear the outside dial tone.
l
The line LED will light green.
l
“CO TALK #O1” will appear on the display if the Private Line is line 1.
2. Dial the telephone number.
The number will appear on the display.
3. Pick up the handset and speak when your call is answered.
4. Replace the handset.
The line LED will go off.
137
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature 0peration
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related Programming
l
FF2 (Trunks): Private Central Office Line
l
FFl (System): Least Cost Routing
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Group Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
Considerations
l
l
l
Calls to a Private Line will cause an extension to ring even if the DND or
the Absence Message feature is activated for that extension.
Calls to a Private Line will not be forwarded, even if Call Forwarding is
activated.
No matter how long a call on a Private Line is on hold and even if the
overtime warning tone is ignored, no warning tone will sound at the
Attendant Phone.
* When a private line is assigned, the Toll Restriction assignment for the
private line changes to “0” for all other extensions. Ringing assignments for
all other extensions are also removed for the private line.
138
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Reminder
Call
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
Your telephone can remind you of important meetings, deadlines, etc., with the
Reminder Call feature.
Operation
To set the Reminder Call feature:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press “#M.”
“Enter Time HHMM”
appears on the display.
3. Enter the time you wish the Reminder Call to sound. Enter the desired time in
1Zhour format, followed by a “1” for a.m. or a “2” for p.m.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
“Alarm 03:25 PM” will appear on the display if you programmed the
Reminder Call to sound at 3:25 p.m.
To cancel the Reminder Call feature:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial ‘W.”
“Enter Time HHMM”
appears on the display.
139
Key Telephone Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
l
“Alarm 03:25 PM” will disappear from the bottom line of the display.
l
A sixteen-second alarm tone will be sounded at the specified time.
l
One Reminder Call may be set for each telephone.
l
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
Considerations
l
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder
call will be sent as soon as the extension becomes available.
Saved Number Redial
(All Versions)
Description
You can save a previously dialed number for later redialing. Unlike the Last Number
Redial feature, the Saved Number Redial feature allows you to store a number that will
not be lost as soon as you dial a different number.
Saved Number Redial applies only to outside numbers, not extension numbers.
Operation
To save a number:
1. Press the AUTO key twice before replacing the handset.
2. Press “*.”
“Dial Stored” will appear on the display and the number will be saved.
3. Replace the handset.
140
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone
CPC-6,
Operation
Features
Version 4
To redial a saved number:
1. Press an unlit line key.
l
You will hear the outside dial tone from the speaker.
l
The line LED will tight green.
l
“CO TALK #@I” will appear on the display if you are using CO line 1.
2. Press the AUTO key.
3. Press “*.”
The dialed number will appear on the display.
4. Pick up the handset and speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset.
The line LED will change from green to red, then go off.
Considerations
Any previously saved number will be erased when a new number is saved.
l
l
l
The Saved Number Redial feature can redial a number up to sixteen digits
long.
A maximum of five Speed Dialing codes can be redialed.
141
Section
700, Feature
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
Key Telephone
CPC-B,
Features
Version
4
Speed Dialing
.
d
7 -.
(All Versions)
Personal
Speed Dialing
Description
Frequently called numbers can be stored using the Personal Speed Dial feature, saving
time and avoiding wrong numbers. Personal Speed Dial numbers are prog-rammed at
each extension- Up to ten Personal Speed Dial Numbers can be stored.
It is also possible to enter names of up to sixteen characters in each of the Speed Dial
numbers. Then, when using the Personal Speed Dial feature from a display phone, a
programmed en* can be confirmed by name rather than by number.
Extension users can program their own personal speed dial numbers using One-Touch
keys, or they can be programmed from a programming phone.
Operation
To assign Personal Speed Dialing to a One-Touch Key:
1. Press ON/OFF.
2. Press PROG.
3. Press a One-Touch key.
4. Include a trunk access code if you like. If you include an accesscode, you do
not have to press a line key before using the One-Touch key.
To include an access code, press CONF then 9 or 1 -6. (1 - 6 stands for
trunk groups 81- 86.)
5. Dial the number.
6. Press HOLD.
7. Press ON/OFF.
142
c
Section 700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone
CPC-B,
Operation
To use a programmed
Features
Version 4
Personal Speed Dial key:
1. If the Speed Dial key includes a trunk accesscode, simply press the key.
If the Speed Dial key does not include an accesscode, you press an unlit line
key before pressing the Speed Dial key.
l
You will hear outside dial tone from the speaker.
l
The line LED will light green.
“CO TALK #Ol” will appear on the display if you are using CO line 1.
l
2. Pick up the handset and speak when your call is answered.
3. Replace the handset.
The line LED will change from green to red, then go off.
To check a programmed Personal Speed Dial key:
c.
1. Press the ON/OFF key:
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
l
2. Press the CONF key.
“C” will appear in the display.
3. Press the Personal Speed Dial key to be checked.
The programmed data will appear on the display.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
143
Section
700,
Feature
Key Telephone
CPC-B,
Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To assign
a name to a Personal
Speed Dial number:
Features
Version
4
.
I _ Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press “# 1.”
“Speed Diai Name” will appear on the display.
4. Press the AUTO key.
5. Enter the Personal Speed Dial code.
6. Press AUTO to backspace and erase the existing name.
7. Use the dialpad sequencesshown Table 3 on page 57 to enter letters and/or
numbers.
Press FLASH after each letter.
Press CONF to switch between numbers and letters.
8. To store your entry, press HOLD.
To delete a Pzrsonal Speed Dial number:
1. Press ON/OFF.
2. Press PROG.
3. Press the One-Touch key.
4. Press HOLD.
5. Press ON/OFF again.
144
c(
Section 700, Feature
Issue
1. July
Related
Operation
Key Telephone
CPC-8,
6, 1993
Features
Version
4
Programming
- FF7 (Toll Restrictions): Toll Restrictions
- FFlO (System and Personal Speed Diai): Personal Speed Dial Numbers
Considerations
Personal Speed Dial numbers can contain up to sixteen characters,
including the “*,” “#,” FLASH (indicate “-“), PAUSE (REDIAL), CONF,
and AUTO keys.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
A dash (“-“) can be displayed in the Personal Speed Dialing number. To
display a dash, press the FLASH key where you want the dash to appear.
If you make a mistake while programming, an alarm tone will sound and
“ERROR” will appear on the display. If this happens, start again from step
1.
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
Names for Personal Speed Dialing can also programmed using a DSS
console connected to the Attendant Phone.
If the called party’s telephone number and name are stored in the OneTouch feature memory, the display will show that number and name when
making the call.
Speed Dialing cannot be checked while Station Lockout is activated.
145
Section 700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System
Key Telephone
CPC-B,
Operation
Speed
Features
Version
4
Dial
Description
Frequently called numbers can be stored using the System Speed Dial feature, saving
time and avoiding wrong numbers. System Speed Dial numbers are programmed from
the Attendant Phone and can be used by any extension, as opposed to Personal Speed
Dial numbers, which are exclusive to each individual extension. Up to 90 System
Speed Dial Numbers can be stored.
Operation
To use a programmed System Speed Dial key:
1. Press an unlit line key.
l
You will hear the outside dial tone from the speaker.
l
The line LED will Light green.
l
“CO TALK #Ol” will appear on the display if you are using CO line 1.
2. Press the AUTO key.
“A” will appear on the display.
3. Enter the System Speed Dial code (00 - 89).
The number dialed and the corresponding name will appear on the display.
4. Pick up the handset and speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset.
The line LED will change from green to red, then go off.
146
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
:/
Key Telephone
CPC-6.
Operation
To check a programmed
System
Features
Version 4
Speed Dial key:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
l
2. Press the CONF key.
“C” will appear in the display.
3. Press AUTO.
4. Dial the System Speed Dial key to be checked.
The programmed data will appear on the display.
5. Press the ON/OFF key.
<:,.::
...
._“! ’
Related
l
The ON/OFF LED will go off.
l
The date and time will appear on the display.
Programming
FFl (System): Override TRS for System Speed Dialing
l
0 FFlO (Speed Dialing): System Speed Dialing
Considerations
If numbers do not appear on the display when the System Speed Dial code
(00 - 89) is entered, your extension has been programmed to not show
these entries.
l
The system can be programmed to allow System Speed Did Numbers to
override toll restrictions.
l
l
You can make outside calls using this feature, even if a Toll Restriction (2 6) is set
- Speed Dialing cannot be checked while Station Lockout is activated.
147
Section
700,
Issue 1. July
Feature
6, 1993
Station
Key Telephone
CPC-6,
Operation
Features
Version
4
Lockout
(All Versions)
Description
The Station Lockout feature allows users to dial a Station Lockout code to restrict their
phone from being used for outside calls.
To activate
Station
Lockout:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear the intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “74.”
“Enter Code #T will appear on the display.
3. Dial the Station Lockout code.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
“Set Sta. Lock” will appear on the display.
To deactivate
Station
Lockout:
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
The ON/OFF LED will light.
2. Dial “74.”
“Enter Code ##”will appear on the display.
3, Dial the Station Lockout code.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
“Set Sta. Lock” will disappear from the display.
148
Section 700, Feature
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Key Telephone
CPC-6,
Operation
Features
Version
4
Consideraiions
- A locked extension can be used for Intercom Calls
l
l
l
Station Lockout key codes can only be set from an attendant phone or a
programming phone.
You cannot confirm Speed Dialing or set Speed Dialing while Station
Lockout is activated.
If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, you will hear a busy
tone.
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
(All Versions)
Des&p
tion
Trunk-to-trunk transfer allows an extension to transfer one outside party to another
outside party.
Before completing the transfer, the extension can hold a three-way conference with the
two outside parties.
Operation
1. Press the HOLD key during an outside call.
l
Your current call will be put on hold.
l
“Hold #Ol” will appear on the display if line 1 is put on hold.
2. Press an unlit CO key,
l
You will hear the outside dial tone.
l
“Talk ##X2”will appear en the display if you chose line 2.
3. Dial the telephone number of the party which you would like to connect with
your original call.
4. Speak when your call is answered.
149
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
Key Telephone
CPC-8,
Features
Version
4
Inform the person at the other end that you are going to connect the two lines.
5. Press the CONF key.
l
l
A three-party Conference Call will be initiated.
“Conf #HI1#KU” will appear on the display if you are connected to lines 1
and 2.
6. Press one of the CO keys.
Related
l
The two outside lines will be connected.
l
“Hold #I01#KG” will appear on the display if lines 1 and 2 are connected.
Programming
l
FFl (System): Unsupervised Conference Timer
l
FF2 (Trunks): Unsupervised Central Office Line Conference
l
FF3 (Extensions): Unsupervised Conference
Considerations
l
l
l
After the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is completed, you can no longer add
another party to initiate a three-party Conference Call.
When the call is finished, the conference information will disappear from
the display and your extension will rev
to norrnai operation.
When the Unsupervised Conference Timer expires, the call will be
automatically disconnected.
150
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
‘$ Chapter
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
4. DSLT Features
This chapter describes features that are available
Telephone (DSLT).
with the Digital Single Line
Figure 6 illustrates the DSLT. For more information on DSLT operation, seethe
Digital SLT User’s Guide (Section 790).
Note: The DSLT can only be used with CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher.
Figure 6. Digital
Single Line Telephone (DSLT)
151
Section 700, Feature
issue
1. July
Operation
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version
4
6, 1993
Absence
Message
Description
DSLT users can leave text messages on their phone when they are away.
When the unattended extension is dialed by a key phone, the text message wi!i display
on the caller’s phone.
Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 can be changed
r
through system programming.
Table 13. Absence Messages
1 Message No. 1 Message Text
ln Meeting
0
1
At Lunch
I
Out of Office
2
3
Ir
4
5
6
7
8
I
9
1
Vacation
1 Another Office 1
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
1 User Defined 1
Operation
To Set an Absence Message
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Dial “7 1.”
3. Enter a message code between 0 and 9 (See Table 13.).
4. Enter the time you will return (optional). See Table 14 for examples.
5. Replace the handset or press ON/OFF.
152
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To Cancel
i
an Absence
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Message
x
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Dial “7 I.”
3. Replace the handset or press ON/OFF-
Related
Programming
l
FFI (System) Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension) Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF6 (Names and Messages): Absence Message
Considerations
l
i. :.
1 \
l
l
Table 14. Example
Calling parties without a display get a busy signal, rather than the Absence
Message.
If a message code number that has not been programmed when a message
is selected, “Absence,” followed by the code number, will appear on the
caller’s display.
Absence Message return times can be input as shown in Table 14:
Return Times for Absence Messages
r
Input
DkPrcrY
No input
9
11
615
1035
Return
Return 9:00
Return 1l:OO
Return 6: 15
Return lo:35
Four-digit numbers can also be input (0000 - 9999 = Hours & Minutes or
Month & Date).
l
l
Setting an Absence Message cancels DND and Call Forwarding features.
When an Absence Message is set on a DID station, incoming DID calls are
routed according to the ringing assignment pro&gammed for the incoming
tl-Ullk.
153
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Busy
Operation
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Override
Description
Extensions in the same Paging Group (l-7) can break into one another’s outside calls
or Intercom Calls to relay urgent information or to create three-party Conference
Calls.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. When you hear busy tone, dial “4.”
l
Related
An alert tone will sound to both phones (system programming required).
Programming
FFl (System): Alert Tone for Busy Override and Offhook Voice Announce
l
l
FFI (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Busy Override Send
l
FF3 (Extension): Busy Override Receive
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Paging Groups
l
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
- Considerations
l
The default for the override alert tone is “off.” If the override alert tone is
enabled, the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
154
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B. Version 4
Operation
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding allows users to send their calls to another extension,
or voice mail. The following call forwarding options are available.
an outside
line,
Call Forwarding-All
Calls. When the Call Forwarding--All Calls feature is
activated, all incoming calls to an extension are forwarded immediately.
Call Forwarding-No
Answer. When Call Forwarding--No Answer is activated, an
unanswered call will ring until the Call Forward No Answer timer expires. When the
timer expires, the unanswered call will be forwarded.
Call Forwarding-8usy. When Call Forwarding--Busy is activated, all incoming
calls to a busy extension will be forwarded.
Call Forwarding-Busy/No
Answer. When Call Forwarding--Busy/No Answer
feature is activated, all incoming calls to an extension that is busy or does not answer
will be forwarded.
Call Forwarding-External. When Call For-w&ding-External is activated, all
incoming intercomcalls to an extension will be forwarded to an outside number, In
order to forward to an outside number, the number must first be entered as a system or
personal speed dial number.
Any speed dial number (00-99) can be used to store an outside number for call
forwarding. (00-89 are system speed dial numbers; 90 - 99 are personal speed dial
numbers.)
Permanent Call Forwarding. Permanent call forwarding is assigned through
system promming,
rather than by the user. Permanent call forwarding is normally
used to forward calls to a voice mail system.
An extension user can invoke other forms of call forwarding (no answer, busy, all
calls) to temporarily override the permanent call forwarding destination.
Permanent call forwarding can be used with busy, no answer, or busy/no answer.
155
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version
4
c‘t
Operation
To activate
Call Forwarding:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
2. Dial “72.”
3. Dial the appropriate call forwarding code.
1 Call Forward Type 1 Code 1
1 Outside
No answer
I3
4
I
I
4. If you’re forwarding to an internal number, enter the number of the extension
you want to receive your calls. If you’re forwarding to an outside number,
press AUTO plus the appropriate speed dial number.
Note: To forward to an outside number, the number must already be
programmed into personal or system speed dialing. (See page 182 for
instructions.)
5. Replace the hvdset or press ON/OFF.
To cancel Call Forwarding
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Dial “72.”
3. Replace the handset or press ON/OFF.
156
c- ,,
c- .’
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
c !
Related
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Operation
Programming
- FFl (System): Call Forward No Answer Tier
- FFI (System): Extension
Class of Service
(CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Permanent Call Forward Type (CPC-B Version 3.1 or
higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Permanent Call Forward Extension (CPC-B Version 3.1
or higher)
l
0 FFlO (System and Personal Speed Dial): System Speed Dial Numbers
FFlO (System and Personal Speed Dial): Personal Speed Dial Numbers
l
Considerations
Calls can be forwarded to extensions that have call forwarding activated.
For example, phone “A” can be forwarded to phone “B,” even if phone “B”
is forwarded to voice mail.
l
e-.
.,.,..
“:::.
,,:.:.
:.‘,
7
s
DND and Absence Messages cancel Call Forwarding.
l
l
l
Voice calls do not forward when Call Forwarding--No Answer is used.
. .._
Extensions for which Call Forwarding-External has been set cannot:
- Be in the middle of an outside call when the feature is activated.
- Have a toll restriction setting that prohibits outside calls.
l
’
Calls can be forwarded to a third-party voice mail (a system other than the
DBS Voice Mail) by using the “Call Forward ID Code” described on page
10.
157
Section 700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
DSLT Features
CPC-B. Version
4
i
Call Hold
f
Description
The DSLT is provided with a HOLD key. The HOLD key is used to both place calls
on hold and retrieve calls from hold.
key provides either exclusive or system hold, depending on system
programming. With Exclusive Hold, only the station that held the call can retrieve it.
with System Hold, another station can retrieve the call.
The HOLD
Operation
To place a call on Hold:
Press the HOLD
key.
To release the call:
Press the HOLD
Related
key again.
cf
Programming
l
FFI (System): Non-appearance CO Line Hold
l
PFl (System): Extension Hold Recall ?imer
l
PFl (System): Central Office Line Automatic Hold
Considerations
A held call will recall if it is not retrieved before the Hold Recall Timer
expires.
l
If there is no response to the Hold Recall tone, the tone will sound at the
Attendant Phone. However, no tone will sound at an Attendant Phone if
Night Mode is activated.
l
l
If your system is set to onhook transfer, you have placed an outside call on
hold, and then you make an Intercom Call, you must make sure the other
extension presses the FLASH key or hangs up before you do. If you hang
up before the other extension, the held outside line will be transfer-red to
that extension.
158
Section
700,
Issue 1. July
Feature
6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version
4
Operation
will sound if you attempt to place more than one call on hold
at the same time.
* An error tone
music-on-hold
to callers placed on hold. See “MusicOn-Hold” (page 2 1) for more information.
- The DBS can provide
Call Park
Description
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the
intended recipient of the call. Simply park the ca:l, then page the person to whom you
would like to transfer the call. That person can answer the call from any extension by
dialing the number of the extension that parked the call.
Operation
To park a call:
1. Press the HOLD key.
:::
_‘,
!
1
2. Dial “75.”
To retrieve a parked call:
1. Lift the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “76.”
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
159
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
DSLT Features
CPC-B,
Version
4
Operation
Programming
l
FFl (System): Park Recall Timer
Considerations
l
An alarm tone will sound if a parked call is not released before the Park
Recall Timer expires (determined by system programming). If this
happens, the user that parked the call can retrieve it by simply picking up
the handset. If no one retrieves the call after the Park Recall Timer expires,
a second alarm will sound at an attendant phone(s).
- You cannot park more than one outside line at a time.
l
The Call Park Recall Xmer is similar to the Recall Timer, except that when
the Call Park Recall lamer is set for “0” a call is recalled automatically in
three minutes.
Call Pickup
c
DSLTs can use both directed and group call pickup.
(
/
Direct Call Pickup
Description
A ca,ll to any extension can be answered from any other extension using the Direct
Call Pickup feature.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
.e
2. Dial “79.”
3. Enter the number of the ringing extension-
160
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
.
i
.;
‘i
Related
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Operation
Programming
- FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
* FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
Considerations
* If more than one caller is attempting to reach the ringing extension, the
Direct Call Pickup feature will answer the call that arrived first.
Once the call has been picked up, other extensions that attempt to pick up
the call receive busy tone.
You can answer incoming calls, intercom calls (both tone and voice), call
waiting, paging, transferred calls, or recalls using the Direct .Call Pickup
feature. You cannot answer callbacks with this feature.
l
Group Call Pickup
7.
.:.
:,
-:: _ \
.(
Description
Using the Group Call Pickup feature, you can answer calls to other extensions within
your Paging Group (01-07) without entering the number of the extension that is
ringing.
Operation
1. Lit the handset.
2. Dial “70.”
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
* FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Page Group
161
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
DSLT Features
CFC-B, Version
4
Considerations
- If more than one call is arriving at the Paging Group, the Group Call Pickup
feature will answer a caIl to the lowest port number fist.
If the called extension belongs to more than one Paging Group, the Group
CaIl Pickup Feature will answer a call to the lowest numbered Paging
Group first.
l
You can answer incoming calls, Intercom Tone Calling, or Intercom Voice
Calling using the Group Call Pickup feature. You cannot answer Paging or
Callback with this feature.
l
Call Transfer
The DBS provides two call transfer methods: blind transfer and screened transfer.
Blind Transfer
Description
8
Blind transfer allows the transfer of a call directly to an extension, without waiting for
the called extension to answer.
‘..
_,. Operation
1. Press the HOLD key to place the call on hold.
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Replace the handset before the other party answers.
You can also replace the handset after the third party answers.
l
- The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): Onhook Transfer
- FFI (System): Extension Transfer Recall Timer
162
Section 700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
I
Operation
DSLT Features
CPC-B,
Version 4
Considerations
* In order to transfer a call by pressing HOLD, dialing the extension, and
going onhook, the Onhook Transfer feature must be enabled in system
programming.
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb or
Absence Message activated.
l
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated.
The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it
is transferred to.
l
For example, if extension “A” is forwarded to extension “B,” calls that are
transferred to extension “A” will be forwarded to extension “B.”
When you transfer a call to an extension that does not answer and does not
have Call Forwarding activated, the transfer will recall to your extension
after the Ti-ansfer Recall Timer expires.
l
(For example, if you transfer an outside call on line 1 to extension 135 and
that extension does not answer, the call will return to your extension.)
-.p::..
;
/
Screened
Transfer
Description
Using the Screened Transfer feature, you can contact a third party and announce the
call before the transfer.
To use Screened Transfer when your system is set for Onhook Transfer:
1. Press the HOLD key to place the call on hold.
_
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset. .--
l
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When your call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.
4. Replace the handset.
l
The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
163
Section 700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To use Screened
Operation
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version
4
Transfer when Onhook Transfer
is disabled:
1. Press the HOLD key to place the outside call on hold.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
l
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When your call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.
l
The
EXT LED will stop flashing and remain lit.
4. Dial “8.”
The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
l
5. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
FFl (System): Onhook Transfer
l
FFl (System): Extension Transfer Recall Timer
l
Considerations
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb or
Absence Message activated.
l
* You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated.
The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it
is transferred to.
For example, if phone “A” is covered to phone “B,” calls that are
transferred to phone “A” will be forwarded to phone “B.”
l
When you transfer a call to an extension thai does not answer and does not
have Call Forwarding activated, the transfer will recall to your extension
after the Transfer Recall ‘limer expires.
(For example, if you transfer an outside call on line 1 to extension 135 and
that extension is busy or does not answer, the call will return to your
extension-)
164
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
I
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Operation
Call Waiting
Descfip
tion
You can send a Call Waiting signal, followed by a brief LCD message, to a busy
extension. The party receiving the message need only replace the handset and then
pick it up again to be automatically
connected to the message sender’s extension.
. ,. .The following messages can be sent using the Call Waiting ‘feature:
Table 15. Call Waiting Text Messages
Message
Code
5
6
7
9
Message
“Visitor Here”
“Need Help”
“Important”
“Emergency”
i
Message codes 0 - 4 cannot be used.
Operation
To Set.ball Waiting:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
You will hear busy tone.
3. Press “3.”
4. If you wish to send a text message,dial the desired message code (5-7 or 9).
The message will display on the called party’s phone if the called party has a
key phone. (If the called party does not have a display, he or she will continue
to hear a call waiting indication.)
5. Remain on the line until the called party picks up-
165
Section
700,
issue 1. July
To answer
Feature
6, 1993
Call Waiting
(after
1. Replace
l
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Operation
disconnecting
the
current
call):
the handset.
The current
call will
be disconnected.
2. Pick up the handset.
l
You will automatically
be connected
to the extension
sending the Call
Waiting.
To answer
Call Waiting
(without
disconnecting
the current call):
1. Press HOLD.
l
The current call will be disconnected.
l
The new call will be connected automatically.
2. Press HOLD again to retrieve the fast call.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System) Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-3 Version 3.1 or higher)
FF3 (Extension); Call
. -.-Waiting Notification Tone
l
l
FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting (Receive)
Considerations
l
l
l
Call Waiting can be used without entering a message code.
If the extension called has DND activated, has a call on hold, is ringing
(from another call), or is engaged in a conference call, Call Waiting cannot
be sent.
If the extension called has call forwarding activated, call waiting
sent unless the called extension has an available ML key.
166
cannot be
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version
4
Operation
Camp-on
Description
If you reach a busy extension, the Camp-on feature will alert you with a ring when the
extension becomes free. You will then be able to pick up your handset to automatically
dial the extension.
Operation
To activate the Campon feature:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the desired extension number.
You will h&r a busy tone if the extension is busy.
3. Press “3.”
l
You will hear ringback tone.
l
If the Camp-on feature cannot be set, you will continue-to hear a busy tone.
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
5, Wait for the station callback ring.
’ To answer the callback ring:
1. Pick up the handset when you hear the callback ring.
l
The system will automatically dial the called extension.
2. Speak when your call is answered.
Related
Programming
* FF3 (Extension): Call Waning (Receive)
167
Section
700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6. 1993
DSLT Features
C;PZ-B, Version 4
Operation
Considerations
l
The callback ring must be answered
within
sixteen
seconds or it will be
canceled.
A Camp-on
l
request wiil only be accepted after Call Waiting status.
Camp-on cannot be activated by an extension that has call forwarding
turned on.
l
An extension can only have one call camped-on at a time. For example, if
Extension 152 camps-on to Extension 153, another extension cannot campon to 153, as long as 152 is camped-on.
l
An extension that has initiated a camp-on cannot receive a camp-on. For
instance, if Extension 200 has camped-on to Extension 300, another
extension cannot camp-on to 200.
l
Conference
Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow an extension user to add a party to an existing conversation.
DSLT users can create the following types of Conference Calls:
l
One outside line and two extensions (three-party Conference Call)
Two outside lines and one extension (three-party Conference Call)
l
l
Three extensions (Intercom Conference Call)
Operation
To add an extension:
1. Press the HOLD key to place the current call on hold.
2. Dial the number of the extension you wish to add to the call.
3. Press CONF when your call is answered.
168
Section
700,
issue 1. July
t
Feature
6, 1993
To add an outside
Operation
DSLT Features
CPC-6,
Version
4
number:
1. Press the HOLD
key to place the current call on hold.
2. Dial a trunk group number
(81 - 86 or 9).
3. Dial the outside number.
4. Press CONF when your call is answered.
Considerations
l
Press the FLASH key to exit a Conference Call.
l
The Hold feature cannot be used during a three-party conference.
Dial “0”:~for Attendant
-.
..:
.:.:.
.::‘I
Description
The Attendant can be called from any extension by simply pressing “0.”
If multiple attendants are assigned, a dial “0” call will go to Attendant “1” first. If
attendant “1” is busy, the call will then go to Attendant “2.” The call will continue to
transfer to the-next attendant in the attendant group if necessary.
A maximum of four attendants can be assigned.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
2. Press “0.”
169
Section 700, Feature
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version
4
Operation
Related Programming
- FFI (System): Second Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Third Attendant Position
l
FFI (System): Fourth Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Attendant Transfer Extension Position
Direct Trunk Access
Description
Extensions can access a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use
Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “88” followed by the desiredtrunk number(01 - 64).
3. Dial the outsidenumber.
4. Replacethe handset.
170
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1, July 6, 1993
Do-Not-Disturb
(DND)
Description
An extension can be made unavailable by activating Do-Not-Disturb (DND). When
DND is activated at an extension, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
Operation
To activate DND:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Dial “73.”
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/ OFF key.
To cancel DND:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Dial “73.”
3. Replace the handset or press ON/ OFF’.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
Callback Queuing will ring an extension in DND.
Considerations
l
l
Setting DND automatically cancels the Call Forwarding and Absence
Message features.
The DND feature cannot be activated at an extension selected to receive
Call Forwarding.
171
DSLT Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Intercom
Calling
Descriptions
The DBS provides two methods of intercom calling: voice calling and tone calling.
Voice Calling. With voice calling, intercom calls are connected immediately, without
a ringing tone.
Tone Calling. With tone calls, a ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
System programming determines whether the DBS uses voice or tone calling as a
default. If voice calling is the default, dialing a “1” after the extension number will
change the call to a tone call. If tone calling is the default, dialing a “1” will result in a
voice call.
Operation
To make a Voice Call:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If the system default is tone calling, dial a “1.”
To make an Tone Call:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If the system default is voice calling, dial a “1.”
l
The called extension will ring.
172
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Intercom Calling
l
FFl (System): Alert Tone for Voice Calls
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
Considerations
When an extension’s calling mode is set to voice calls, a “splash” tone can
be sent to alert the extension to the voice call. System programming
determines if the splash tone is provided.
l
l
If an extension is onhook, it will receive tone calls.
l
The voice calling feature is not available for DISA incoming calls.
l
Voice calls do not forward if Cover No Answer is turned on.
Last Number Redial
~. .I
Description
The last outside number dialed may be redialed automatically by pressing the
REDIAL key.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial a trunk access code (8 1 - 86 or 9).
3. Press the REDIAL
key.
Considerations
l
If the Auto Flash Redial feature is set, you can flash the outside line once
by pressing the REDIAL key at the busy tone. The last number dialed can
then be redialed.
173
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
The Last Number Redial feature can redial a number up to sixteen digits
long.
A maximum of five Speed Dialing codes can be redialed.
Meet-Me Answer
Description
You can answer a Paging call from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset from any extension at which you hear the Paging call.
2. Press “77.”
Paging will cease and you will be connected to the party trying to reach
you.
l
3. Speak to the party that paged you.
Related
Programming
l
FFI (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
The Meet-Me Answer feature cannot be used with Paging Group 00.
Considerations
l
You can only use the Meet-Me Answer feature at an extension that does not
have an incoming call.
Q If an external paging system or a Universal Answer system has been
installed, use Group Call Pickup to respond to the Paging call.
174
f
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Message Waiting/Callback
Request
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message
requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a Callback Request:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. Dial “2” at the busy tone or while the telephone is still ringing.
4. Replace the handset.
To answer a Callback Request:
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Press the AUTO key.
3. Press the REDIAL key.
l
Your telephone will automatically dial the extension that left the Callback
Request.
To cancel a Callback Request:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Press the AUTO key.
3. Press the FLASH key.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
175
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
.
Programming
l
FFl (System) Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.01 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension) Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.01 or higher)
Considerations
l
l
l
Up to four Callback Requests can be sent to any one extension.
If you call the same extension a second time and the party answers, any
Callback Requests you sent earlier will be cancelled.
If a Callback Request is sent to an extension for which Call Forwarding is
set, the Callback Request will be automatically forwarded to the designated
extension.
0 You can send a Callback Request to an extension that has Do Not Disturb
or Absence Message activated.
Off-Hook Voice Announce
Des&p
(OHVA)
tion
You can interrupt a busy extension
when making an Intercom Call, then make an
.^
announcement that only the called party can hear using the Off-Hook Voice Announce
(OHVA) feature. You can also transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the
announcement using this feature.
Operation
To make an OHVA:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the desired extension number.
If the extension is busy you will hear the busy tone.
3. Press “5.”
176
i
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
To transfer a call using OHVA
1. Press the HOLD key to place the call to be transferred on hold.
2. Dial the number of the extension to which the call will be transferred.
You will hear a busy tone if the extension is already engaged in a call.
3. Press “5” and announce the call to be transferred.
If the transferred call is not accepted by the called extension, press the
FLASH key to cancel the transfer.
4. Press “8.”
5. Replace the handset.
To answer the call from a DSLT:
1. Press CONE
2. Speak with the announcing party.
3. Press CONF again to disconnect the announcing party and return to the
original call.
Rekted Programming
l
FFl (System): Onhook Transfer
l
FFl (System): Alert Tone for Busy Override and Offhook Voice Announce
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting Notification Tone/Offhook Voice Announce
177
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-6, Version 4
.
Considerations
l
l
If Onhook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the
extension sending the OHVA hangs up.
If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set
time limit, then return to the extension sending the OHVA. (The recall time
can be set in the Transfer-Recall Timer.)
l
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
l
You cannot toggle back and forth between two calls during an OHVA.
Onhook Dialing
Description
Onhook Dialing is a standard feature for the DSLT. To dial onhook, the user simply
presses the ON/OFF key.
The DSLT does not include a microphone, so the user must lift the handset to talk.
178
f
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Pooled Trunk Access
Description
The DBS system is designed to accept eight to 64 outside lines. These lines can be
divided into seven Pooled Trunk groups.
A free line can be selected by choosing an outside line group number. Group numbers
9 and 8 1 - 86 are available.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
l
2. Dial the desired trunk group number (81 - 86 or 9).
3. Dial the outside number.
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): Least Cost Routing
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Group Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
l
FF8 (LCR) LCR Setting
Considerations
l
There are seven groups of outside lines: 9 and 81 - 86. Some additional
outside lines may not be assigned to a group.
4 Dialing “9” activates LCR if the LCR option is turned on in system
programming.
179
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Reminder Cdl
Description
Your telephone can remind you of important meetings, deadlines, etc., with the
Reminder Cal 1feature.
Operation
To Set the Reminder Call feature:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone.
2. Press ‘Wt.”
3. Enter the time you wish the Reminder Call to sound. Enter the desired time in
12-hour format, followed by a “1” for a.m. or a “2” for p.m.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To Cancel the Reminder Call feature:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
2. Dial ‘W.”
3. Replace the handset or press ON/OFE
Considerations
l
A sixteen-second alarm tone will be sounded at the specified time.
l
One Reminder Call may be set for each telephone.
0 To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
l
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder
call will be sent as soon as the extension becomes a&able.
180
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Saved Number Redial
Description
You can save a previously dialed number for later redialing. Unlike the Last Number
Redial feature, the Saved Number Redial feature allows you to store a number that will
not be lost as soon as you dial a different number.
Saved Number Rdial appliesonly to outside numbers, not extension numbers.
Operation
To save a number:
1. Press the AUTO key twice before replacing the handset.
2. Press “*.”
3. Replace the handset.
To redial a saved number:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial a trunk .accesscode (8 1 - 86 or 9).
3. Press the AUTO key.
4. Press “*.”
Considerations
l
l
l
Any previously saved number will be erased when a new number is saved.
The Saved Number Redial feature can redial a number up to sixteen digits
long.
A maximum of five Speed Dialing codes can be redialed
181
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
DSLT Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Speed Dialing
Personal
Speed Dialing
Description
Frequently called numbers can be stored using the Personal Speed Dial feature, saving
time and avoiding wrong numbers. Personal Speed Dial numbers are programmed at
each individual extension, as opposed to System Speed Dial numbers, which can be
used by any extension. Up to ten Personal Speed Dial Numbers can be stored.
Extension users can program their own personal speed dial numbers, or they can be
programmed from a programming phone.
Operation
To assign Personal Speed Dial Numbers:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Press*.
3. Dial “80.”
4. Dial a personal speed dial number (90-99).
5. Dial the number you want to store.
You may include a trunk access code if you like. If you include an access
code, you do not need to dial a trunk group before using the speed dial
number.
To include a trunk access code, press CONF then dial 9 or 1 - 6. (1 - 6
stands for trunk groups 8 1 - 86.)
To include a pause, press FWDIAL.
To include a flash, press FLASH.
182
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
6. Press HOLD.
7. Replace the handset or press ON/OFF.
To delete a Personal Speed Dial number:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF.
2. Press *.
3. Dial “80.”
4. Dial the personal speed dial number (90-99).
5. Press HOLD.
6. Replace the handset or press ON/OFF.
i
Related Programming
l
FF7 (Toll Restrictions): Toll Restrictions
l
FFlO (System and Personal Speed Dial): Personal Speed Dial Numbers
l
The attendant phone can also enter personal speed dial numbers for DSLTs.
l
Personal Speed Dial numbers can contain up to sixteen digits.
l
Storing a new number erasesany previously stored data.
l
Speed Dialing cannot be checked while Station Lockout is being set.
Considerations
183
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
System
DSLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Speed Dial
Description
Frequently called numbers can be stored using the System Speed Dial feature, saving
time and avoiding wrong numbers. System Speed Dial numbers are programmed at the
Attendant Phone and can be used by any extension, as opposed to Persona)Speed Dial
numbers, which are exclusive to each individual extension. Up to ninety System Speed
Dial Numbers can be stored.
Operation
To dial a system speed dial number:
1. Pick up the handset.
2. Dial a trunk access code (8 1 to 86 or 9), if the system speed dial number does
not include a trunk accesscode.
3. Press AUTO.
4. Dial the two-digit system speed dial code (00-89).
Related
Programming
l
FPl (System): Override TRS for System Speed Dialing
l
FFlO (Speed Dialing): System Speed Dialing
184
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Chapter 5. SLT Features
This chapter describes features that are available to single-line telephones (SLTs).
Single-line telephones are industry-standard 2500 sets. SLTs are not equipped with
feature keys or line keys, so basic telephone operations are performed by pressing
dialpad keys and/or using the switchhook.
185
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
I
Absence Message
(All Versions)
Description
SLT users can leave text messages on their phone when they are away.
When the unattended extension is dialed by a key phone, the text message will display
on the caller’s phone.
Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 can be changed
through system programming.
Table16. Absence Messages
Message No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
I
7
Message Text
ln Meeting
At Lunch
Out of Office
Vacation
Another Off ice
User Defined
1 User Defined
I User Defined
1
I
Operation
To Set an Absence Message
1. Lit the handset.
2. Dial “7 1.”
3. Enter a message code between 0 and 9 (See Table 16.).
4. Enter the time you will return (optional). See Table 17 for examples.
5. Replace the handset.
186
.
.
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To Cancel an Absence
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Message
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “7 1.”
3. Replacethe handset.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System):ExtensionClassof Service(CPC-B Version3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension):Classof Service(CPC-B Version3.1 or higher)
l
FF6 (Namesand Messages):AbsenceMessage
Considerations
Calling partieswithout a displayget a busy signal,ratherthanthe Absence
Message.
l
If a messagecodenumberthat hasnot beenprogrammedwhena message
is selected,“Absence,” followed by the codenumber,will appearon the
caller’sdisplay.
l
AbsenceMessagereturn times canbe input asshownin Table17:
.
l
Table 17. Example
Return Times for Absence Messages
1 No input
11
1 615
1035
1 Rem-n
1
II Return 9:OO I
1 Return 11:OO
1 Retum6:15
I
Return lo:35
Four-digit numberscan alsobe input (OOOfl- 9999= Hours & Minutes or
Month & Date).
l
l
Settingan AbsenceMessagecancelsDND andCall Forwardingfeatures.
When an AbsenceMessageis seton a DID station,incomingDID calls are
routedaccordingto the ringing assignmentprogrammedfor the incoming
tWlk.
187
SLT Features
CPC-f3, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Busy Override
(All Versions)
Description
Extensions in the same Paging Group (l-7) can break into one another’s outside calls
or Intercom Calls to relay urgent information or to create three-party Conference
CalIS.
Operation
Press “4” when you hear the busy tone.
l
An alert tone will sound at both phones (system programming required).
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Alert Tone for Busy Override and Offhook Voice Announce
l
FFI (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Busy Override Send
l
FF3 (Extension): Busy Override Receive
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Paging Groups
l
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
Considerations
l
The default for the override alert tone is “off.” If the override alert tone is
enabled, the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
188
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Call Forwarding
(All Versions)
Call Forwarding allows users to send their calls to another extension, an outside line,
or voice mail. All versions of the DBS provide call forwarding. However, some call
forwarding enhancements are not available with earlier versions. The following table
shows the call forwarding features available with each release.
Table. 18. DBS Call Forwarding
features
Feature
Availability
Call Forwarding--All Calls
Call Forwarding--No Answer
All versions
CPC-A Version 3.1 or higher
CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
All versions
All versions
All versions
CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Call Forwarding--Busy
Call Forwarding--Busy/No Answer
Call Forwarding--External
Permanent Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All
Calls. When the Call Forwarding--All Calls feature is
activated, all incoming calls to an extension are forwarded immediately.
_-
Call Forwarding-No Answer. When Call Forwarding--No Answer is activated, an
unanswered call will ring until the Call Forward No Answer timer expires. When the
timer expires, the unanswered call will be forwarded.
Call Forwarding-Busy.
When Call Forwarding--Busy is activated, all incoming
calls to a busy extension will be forwarded to a designated extension.
Call Forwarding-Busy/No
Answer. When Call Forwarding--Busy/No Answer
feature is activated, all incoming calls to an extension that is off-hook or does not
answer will be forwarded to a designated extension. Similarly, if the extension is busy,
the calls will be forwarded to the designated extension.
Call Forwarding-External.
When Call Forwarding-External is activated, all
incoming intercom calls to an extension will be forwarded to an outside number. In
order to forward to an outside number, the number must first be entered as a system or
personal speed dial number.
Any speeddial~number (00-99) can be used to store an outside number for call
forwarding. (00-89 are system speed dial numbers; 90 - 99 are personal speed dial
numbers.)
189
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Permanent Call Forwarding. Permanent call forwarding is assigned through
system programming, rather than by the user. Permanent call forwarding is normally
used to forward calls to a voice mail system.
An extension user can invoke other forms of call forwarding (no answer, busy, all
calls) to temporarily override the permanent call forwarding destination.
Permanent call forwarding can be used with busy, no answer, or busy/no answer.
Operation
To activate
Call Forwarding:
1. Lift the handset.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
2. Dial “72.”
3. Dial the appropriate call forwarding code.
(Busy/no answer
11
1
4. If you’re forwarding to an internal number, enter the number of the extension
you want to receive your calls. If you’re forwarding to an outside number,
dial “0” plus the appropriate speed dial number.
Note: To forward to an outside number, you must have already programmed
the number into personal or system speed dialing. With CPC-A or CPC-B
Versions prior to 2.0, you can only forward to an outside number that is
programmed into personal speed dial number 99. Beginning with CPC-B,
you can forward to any speed dial number (system or personal).
5. Replace the handset.
190
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-6, Version 4
To cancel Call Forwarding
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “72.”
. . .-
3. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Call Forward No Answer Tier
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
FF3 (Extension): Permanent call Forward Type (CPC-B Version 3.1 or
higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Permanent Call Forward Extension (CPC-B Version 3.1
or higher)
l
FFlO (System and Personal Speed Dial): System Speed Dial Numbers
l
FFlO (System and Personal Speed Dial): Personal Sped Dial Numbers
l
Considerations
With CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0, calls cannot be forwarded to
an extension that already has call forwarding activated. In other words,
phone “A” could only forward to phone “B” if phone “B” was not
forwarded.
l
Beginning with CPC-B Version 2.0, calls can be forwarded to extensions
that have call forwarding activated. For example, phone “A” can be
forwarded to phone “B,” even if phone “B” is forwarded to voice mail.
Calls can be forwarded to extensions that have call forwarding activated.
For example, phone “A” can be forwarded to phone “B,” even if phone “B”
is forwarded to voice mail.
l
l
DND and Absence Messages cancel Call Forwarding.
l
Voice calls do not forward when Call Forwarding--No Answer is used.
l
Extensions for which Call Forwarding-External has been set cannot:
191
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
- Be in the middle of an outside call when the feature is activated. .
- Have a toll restriction setting that prohibits outside calls.
l
Calls can be forwarded to a third-party voice mail (a system other than the
DBS Voice Mail) by using the “Call Forward ID Code” described on page
10.
Call Hold
(All Versions)
Description
Call Hold provides either exclusive or system hold, depending on system
programming. With Exclusive Hold, only the station that held the call can retrieve it.
With System Hold, another station can retrieve the call.
Operation
To piace a call on Hold:
f -
Flash the switchhook.
To release the call:
Flash the switchhook again.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Non-appearance CO Line Hold
l
FFl (System): Extension Hold Recall Trmer
l
FFl (System): SLT Onhook Flash Timer
Considerations
0 A held call will recall if it is not retrieved before the Hold Recall Timer
expires.
l
If there is no response to the Hold Recall, the call will transfer to the
Attendant Phone. However, no tone will sound at an Attendant Phone if
Night Mode is activated.
192
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
l
l
l
SLT Features
CPC-8, Version 4
If you flash the switchhook during a conference call, the flash will be
ignored.
If your system is set to onhook transfer and you have placed an outside call
on hold, and then you make an intercom call, you must make sure the other
extension hangs up before you do. If you hang up before the other
extension, the held outsideline will be transferredto that extension.
The DBS can provide music-on-hold to callers placed on hold. See “MusicOn-Hold” (page 2 1) for more information.
Call Park
(All Versions)
Description
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the
intended recipient of the call. Simply park the call, then page the person to whom you
would like to transfer the call. That person can answer the call from any extension by
dialing the number of the extension that parked the call.
Operation
To park a call:
1. Flash the switchhook.
2. Dial “75.”
,
To retrieve a parked call:
1. Lift the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial “76.”
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
193
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Programming
l
FFl (System): Park Recall Timer
Considerations
l
l
l
The parked call will recall if it is not retrieved before the Recall Xmer
expires. If this happens, the user that parked the call can retrieve it by
simply picking up the handset. If no one retrieves the call after the Park
Recall Timer expires, the call will revert to the attendant.
You cannot park more than one outside line at a time.
The Park Recall Timer is similar to the Recall Timer, except that when the
Park Recall Timer is set for “0” a call is recalled automatically in three
minutes.
Call Pickup
(All Versions)
SLTs can use both directed and group call pickup.
Direct Call Pickup
Description
A call to any extension can be answered from any other extension using the Direct
Call Pickup feature.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “79.”
3. Enter the number of the ringing extension.
194
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
f
.
SLT Features
CPC-8, Version 4
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
Considerations
If more than one caller is attempting to reach the ringing extension, the
Direct Call Pickup feature will answer the call that arrived first.
l
Once the call has been picked up, other extensions that attempt to pick up
the call receive busy tone.
l
You can answer incoming calls, intercom calls (both tone and voice), call
waiting, paging, transferred calls, or recalls using the Direct Call Pickup
feature. You cannot answer callbacks with this feature.
Group Call Pickup
c ’
Description
Using the Group Call Pickup feature, you can answer calls to other extensions within
your Paging Group (01-07) without entering the number of the extension that is
ringing.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “70.”
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Extension Page Group
195
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1_ July 6, 1993
Considerations
If more than one call is arriving at the Paging Group, the Group Call Pickup
feature will answer the call to the lowest port number first.
l
If the called extension belongs to more than one Paging Group, the Group
Call Pickup Feature will answer the call to the lowest numbered Paging
Group first.
l
You can answer incoming calls, Intercom Tone Calling, or Intercom Voice
Calling using the Group Call Pickup feature. You cannot answer Paging or
Callback with this feature.
l
Call Transfer
(All Versions)
The DBS provides two call transfer methods: blind transfer and screened transfer.
With CPC-A and CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0, SLTs can only transfer trunk calls.
Beginning with CPC-B Version 2.0, SLTs can transfer trunk and intercom calls.
Blind Transfer
Description
Blind transfer allows the transfer of a call directly to an extension, without waiting for
the called extension to answer.
Operation
1. Flash the switchhook to place the call on hold.
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Replace the handset before the other party answers.
l
You can also replace the handset after the third party answers.
l
The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
196
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-6. Version 4
Related Programming
l
FFI (System): Onhook Transfer
l
FF 1 (System): Extension Transfer Recall Timer
Considerations
l
In order to transfer a call by flashing the switchhook, dialing the extension,
and going onhook, the Onhook Transfer feature must be enabled in system
programming.
0 You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb or
Absence Message activated.
l
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated.
The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it
is transferred to.
For example, if extension “A” is covered to extension “B,” calls that are
transferred to extension “A” will be forwarded to extension “B.”
l
When you transfer a call to an extension that is busy or does not answer and
does not have Call Forwarding activated, the transfer will recall to your
extension after the Transfer Recall’Timer expires.
(For example, if you transfer an outside call on line 1 to extension 135 and
that extension does not answer, the call will return to;’your
extension.)
:
197
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Screened
Transfer
Description
Using the Screened Transfer feature, you can contact a third party via an extension
before transferring a call to that party.
Operation
To use Screened Transfer when your system is set for Onhook Transfer:
1. Flash the switchhook to place the call on hold.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
l
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When your call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.
4. Replace the handset.
l
The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
To use Screened Transfer when Onhook Transfer is disabled:
1. Flash the switchhook to place the outside call on hold.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When your call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.
l
The EXT LED will stop flashing and remain lit.
4. Dial “8.”
l
The third party need only pick up the handset to speak to the outside line.
5. Replace the handset.
198
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Onhook Transfer
l
FFl (System): Extension Transfer Recall Timer
Considerations
l
l
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb or
Absence Message activated.
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated.
The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it
is transferred to.
For example, if phone “A” is covered to phone “B ,” calls that are
transferred to phone “A” will be forwarded to phone “B.”
l
When you transfer a call to an extension that is busy or does not answer and
does not have Call Forwarding activated, a call tone will sound at your
extension after Transfer Recall Timer expires.
(For example, if you transfer an outside call on line 1 to extension 135 and
that extension is busy or does not answer, the call will return to your
extension.)
199
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
!’
Call Waiting
(All Versions)
Description
You can send a Call Waiting signal, followed by a brief LCD message, to a busy
extension. The party receiving the message need only replace the handset and then
pick it up again to be automatically connected to the message sender’s extension.
The following messages can be sent using the Call Waiting feature:
Table 19. Call Waiting Text Messages
7
9
“Important”
“Emergency”
Message codes 0 - 4 cannot be used.
Operation
To Set Call Waiting:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
You will hear busy tone.
3. Press “3.”
4. If you wish to send a text message, dial the desired message code (5-7 or 9).
The message will display on the called party’s phone if the called party has a
key phone. (If the called party does not have a display, he or she will continue
to hear a call waiting indication.)
5. Remain on the line until the called party picks up.
200
,
..
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To answer Call Waiting
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
(after disconnecting
the current call):
1. Replace the handset.
The current call will be disconnected.
l
2. Pick up the handset.
You will automatically be connected to the extension sending the Call
Waiting.
l
To answer Call Waiting
(without
disconnecting
the current call):
1. Flash the switchhook.
l
The current call will be disconnected.
l
The new call will be connected automatically.
1. Flash the switchhook again to retrieve the original call.
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System) Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 oi higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting Notification Tone
l
FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting (Receive)
l
Call Waiting can be used without entering a message code.
Considerations
If the extension called has DND activated, has a call on hold, is ringing
(from another call), or is engaged in a conference call, Call Waiting cannot
be sent.
l
l
Call Waiting cannot be sent to an ML key.
201
SLT Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Camp-on
(CPC-A 3.1 or higher; All Versions of CPC-B)
Des&p
tion
If you reach a busy extension, the Camp-on feature will alert you with a ring when the
extension becomes free. You will then be able to pick up your handset to automatically
dial the extension.
Operation
To activate the Camp-on feature:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the desired extension number.
You will hear a busy tone if the extension is busy.
3. Press “3.”
l
You will hear ringback tone.
l
If the Camp-on feature cannot be set, you will continue to hear a busy tone.
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
5. Wait for the station callback ring.
To answer the callback ring:
1. Pick up the handset when you hear the callback ring.
l
The system will automatically dial the called extension.
2. Speak when your call is answered.
Related
Programming
0 FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting (Receive)
202
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-6, Version 4
Consider-a tions
l
The callback ring must be answered within sixteen seconds or it will be
canceled.
A Camp-on request will only be accepted after Call Waiting status.
l
* Camp-on cannot be activated by an extension that has call forwarding
turned on.
l
l
An extension can only have one call camped-on at a time. For example, if
Extension 152 camps-on to Extension 153, another extension cannot campon to 153, as long as 152 is camped-on.
An extension that has initiated a camp-on cannot receive a camp-on. For
instance, if Extension 200 has camped-on to Extension 300, another
extension cannot camp-on to 200.
Conference
Calls
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
Conference Calls allow an extension user to add a party to an existing conversation.
SLT users can create the following types of Conference Calls:
l
One outside line and two extensions
l
Two outside lines and one extension (CPC-B Version 3.1 or later)
l
Three extensions
Operation
To add an extension:
1. Flash the switchhook to place the current call on hold.
2. Dial the number of the extension you wish to add to the call.
3. Dial “7” when your call is answered.
203
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To add an outside
number (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher):
1. Flash the switchhook to place the current call on hold.
2. Dial a trunk group number (81 - 86 or 9).
3. Dial the outside number.
4. Flash the switchhook when your call is answered.
Related Programming
l
FF3 (Extension): SLT Hookflash
l
Call Waiting cannot be received during conference calls.
l
A switchhook flash is ignored during a conference call.
l
Calls forwarded externally cannot create a conference.
l
The Hold feature cannot be used during a three-party conference.
Considerations
204
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
Dial “0” for Attendant
(CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher)
Description
The Attendant can be called from any extension by simply pressing “0.”
If multiple attendants are assigned, a dial “0” call will go to Attendant “1” first. If
attendant “1” is busy, the call will then go to Attendant “2.” The call will continue to
transfer to the next attendant in the attendant group if necessary.
A maximum of four attendants can be assigned.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
2. Press “0.”
Related
Programming
l
FFI (System): Second Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Third Attendant Position
l
FFI (System): Fourth Attendant Position
l
FFl (System): Attendant Transfer Extension Position
205
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Direct Trunk Access
(All Versions)
Description
Extensions can access a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use
Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “88” followed by the desired trunk number (01 - 64).
3. Dial the outside number.
4. Replace the handset.
Do-Not-Disturb
(DND)
(All Versions)
Description
An extension can be made unavailable by activating Do-Not-Disturb (DND). When
DND is activated at an extension, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
Operation
To activate DND:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “73.”
3. Replace the handset.
206
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
To cancel DND:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “73.”
3. Replace the handset.
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
Callback Queuing will ring an extension in DND.
Considerations
l
i
’
l
Setting DND automatically cancels the Call Forwarding and Absence
Message features.
The DND feature cannot be activated at an extension selected to receive
Call Forwarding.
207
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Intercom
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Calling
(All Versions)
Descriptions
The DBS provides two methods of intercom calling: voice calling and tone calling.
Voice Calling. With voice calling, intercom calls are connected immediately, without
a ringing tone.
Tone Calling. With tone calls, a ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
System programming determines whether the DBS uses voice or tone calling as a
default. If voice calling is the default, dialing a “1” after the extension number will
change the call to a tone call. If tone calling is the default, dialing a “1” will result in a
voice call.
Operation
To make a Voice Call:
f
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If the system default is tone calling, dial a “ 1.”
To make an Tone Call :
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If the system default is voice calling, dial a “1.”
l
The called extension will ring.
208
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Intercom Calling
l
FFl (System): Alert Tone for Voice Calls
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Vt@on 4.0 or higher)
Considerations
4 When an extension’s calling mode is set to voice calls, a “splash” tone can
be sent to alert the extension to the voice call. System programming
determines if the splash tone is provided.
If an extension is onhook, it will receive tone calls.
l
l
The voice calling feature is not available for DISA incoming calls.
l
Voice calls do not forward if Cover No Answer is turned on.
Last Number Redial
(All Versions)
...
Description
The last outside number dialed may be redialed automatically.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial a trunk access code (8 1 - 86 or 9).
3. Flash the switchhook.
4. Dial “89.”
209
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Considerations
.
The Last Number Redial feature can redial a number up to sixteen digits
long.
.
A maximum of five Speed Dialing codes can be redialed.
Meet-Me Answer
(All Versions)
Description
You can answer a Paging call from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
1. Pick up the handset from any extension at which you hear the Paging call.
2. Press “77.”
l
Paging will cease and you will be connected to the party trying to reach
you.
3. Speak to the party that paged you.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher)
l
The Meet-Me Answer feature cannot be used with Paging Group 00.
Considerations
l
You can only use the Meet-Me Answer feature at an extension that does not
have an incoming call.
* If an external paging system or a Universal Answer system has been
installed, use Group Call Pickup to respond to the Paging call.
210
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Message Waiting/Callback
Request
.
(All Versions)
Description
Lf you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message
requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a Callback Request:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
3. Dial “2” at the busy tone or while the telephone is still ringing.
4. Replace the handset.
To answer a Callback Request (CPC-B only):
1. Pick up the handset.
You will hear intercom dial tone from the handset.
2. Dial ‘Y#.“.
l
Your telephone will automatically dial the extension that left the Callback
Request.
To cancel a Callback Request (CPC-B only):
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial ‘W.“.
3. Replace the handset.
211
Section 700, Feature Operation
issue 1. July 6, 1993
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
.
Related Programming
l
FFI (System) Extension Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
FF3 (Extension) Class of Service (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
l
With CPC-A, SLTs cannot receive callback requests.
l
Up to four Callback Requests can be sent to any one extension.
Considerations
If you call the same extension a second time and the party answers, any
Callback Requests you sent earlier will be cancelled.
l
If a Callback Request is sent to an extension for which Call Forwarding is
set, the Callback Request will be automatically forwarded to the designated
extension.
l
You can send a Callback Request to an extension that has Do Not Disturb
or Absence Message activated.
l
f
Off-Hook Voice Announce
(OHVA)
(CPC-B Version 3.1; All Versions of CPC-B)
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, then make an
announcement that only the called party can hear using the Off-Hook Voice Announce
(OHVA) feature.
Operation
To make an OHVA:
1. Lit the handset.
2. Dial the desired extension number.
If the extension is busy you will hear the busy tone.
3. Press “5.”
212
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Related
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Programming
l
FFl (System): Onhook Transfer
l
FFI (System): Alert Tone for Busy Override and Offhook Voice Announce
* FFI (System): Extension Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
* FF3 (Extension): Class of Service (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
* FF3 (Extension): Call Waiting Notiftcation Tone/Offhook Voice Announce
Considerations
l
l
If Onhook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the
extension sending the OHVA hangs up.
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
4 You cannot toggle back and forth between two calls during an OHVA.
* Offhook Voice Announcements should not be made to SLTs. The SLT user
will hear the announcement through the handset, but so will the other party.
213
SLT Features
CPC-8, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6,1993
Pooled Trunk Access
(All Versions)
Des&p tion
The DBS system is designed to accept eight to 64 outside lines. These lines can be
divided into seven Pooled Trunk groups.
A free line can be selected by choosing an outside line group number. Group numbers
9 and 81 - 86 are available.
Operation
1. Lift the handset.
l
You will hear intercom dial tone from the speaker.
2. Dial the desired trunk group number (81 to 86 or 9).
i
3. Dial the outside number.
Related Programming
l
FFl (System): Least Cost Routing
l
FF2 (Trunks): Trunk Group Assignment
l
FF3 (Extension): Forced LCR
l
FF8 (LCR) LCR Setting
Considerations
l
l
There are seven groups of outside lines: 9 and 8 1 - 86. Some additional
outside lines may not be assigned to a group.
Dialing “9” activates LCR if the LCR option is turned on in system
programming.
214
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Sectim 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Speed Dialing
(All Versions)
Personal
Speed Dialing
Des&p tion
Frequently called numbers can be stored using the Personal SpeedDial feature, saving
time and avoiding wrong numbers. Personal speeddial numbers are assigned from the
attendant or programming phone to each SLT.
Operation
To dial a Personal Speed Dial number:
1. Pick up the handset.
2. Dial a trunk accesscode (8 1 to 86 or 9), if the system speeddial number does
not include a trunk access code.
3. Dial “80.“.
4. Dial the two-digit personal speed dial code (90-99).
System
Speed Dial
Description
Frequently called numbers can be stored using the System Speed Dial feature, saving
time and avoiding wrong numbers. System Speed Dial numbers areprogrammed at the
Attendant Phone and can be used by any extension, as opposed to Personal Speed Dial
numbers, which are exclusive to each individual extension. Up to ninety System Speed
Dial Numbers can be stored.
215
SLT Features
CPC-B, Version 4
Section 700, Feature Operation
Issue 1. July 6, 1993
Operation
To dial a system
speed dial number:
1. Pick up the handset.
2. Dial a trunk accesscode (81 to 86 or 9), if the system speed dial number does
not include a trunk access code.
3. Dial “80.‘.
4. Dial the two-digit system speeddial code (00-89).
Related Programming
l
FFI (System): Override TRS for System Speed Dialing
l
FFlO (Speed Dialing): System Speed Dialing
216
Section
700B
CPC-B
ADDENDUM
to the
._
DBS OPERAmG
INSTRUCTIONS
Issue
August
1
199 1
Panasonic@ ,
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 790 Page Mode : UseOutlines Has XFA : No Mod Date : 2002:01:25 23:32:56-06:00 Producer : Photoshop PDF Plug-in 1.0 Creation Date : 1999:04:26 11:47:12Z Author : EZ Manuals Modify Date : 2002:01:25 23:32:56-06:00 Create Date : 1999:04:26 11:47:12Z Metadata Date : 2002:01:25 23:32:56-06:00 Creator : EZ Manuals Page Layout : SinglePageEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools